Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
2 CLASH OF ARMS!
DEDICATION
To the thousands of airmen from all sides who so desperately
and gallantly fought each other in the tumultuous skies of World
War Two. May they be remembered for the courage it took to
fly mission after mission, often in the face of terrible danger,
to fight for the causes they believed in. Their exploits inspired
generations of following aviators, myself included.
(Internal Artwork)
To my family and the many great friends this hobby has
brought me, and to all air combat enthusiasts and gamers who
have patiently awaited this package. This one's for you!
3rd Ed. RULES PLAYTESTERS
Tony Valle, Dan Foxman, Tom Russ, Jeff Weitkamp, Bill Lin-
dow, Greg Boeser, Randy Nonay, Nigel Hickman, John Coley,
David Bywater, Mike Slater, Ian Wedge, Pete Connor, Bill Burtt,
Jimmie Purcell, Bart Derks, Alan Krause, Rob Richmond, Matt
Johnson, Greg Wurster, Ian Wedge, Drew Mercer, Patrice Forno
and many other on-line gamers who have added their inputs.
Thanks to all, sorry if I missed naming some of you directly.
QUESTIONS
Questions and suggested errata should be directed to:
Clash of Arms Games ™
1804 Hoffmansville Rd., PO Box 212
Sassmansville, PA, 19472-0212
SPECIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Series Cover Paintings by noted aviation artists Roy Grinnell,
Robert Bailey and Darryl Legg. Interior Art and ADC 3-views by
Tony Stanfl & J.D. Webster. All art reprinted or used with permis-
sion of the artists. All photos used are from public domain.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
Designer's Preface
The Series: The Fighting Wings series is my third major
game system design to be published. Making an accurate but
fun WW-II air combat game proved to be a difficult task as stated
in the design notes for Over the Reich (OTR), the first game in
the series. Achtung-Spitfire! (ASP) was the second game in the
series and incorporated a number of refinements that were sug-
gested by players of OTR. Whistling Death (WD), the air-naval
combat and Pacific expansion to the game system, introduced
flight Rules improvements to enhance the "feel" of flying in play
and to plug Rules problems, errata, and loopholes found in the
original system. This third edition set of Rules incorporates er-
rata found since WD was published, introduces cleaner methods
to model defensive gunfire, ground attacks and AAA fire, and
makes additional refinements to the flying Rules.
Third Edition Changes: Here is a partial list of the main
revisions included in the third edition.
• All WD errata incorporated into Rules and play aids.
• New defensive fire gun tables and play aids.
• Clock system adopted for A/C arc definitions.
• New rocket attack procedures.
• New, revised AAA Rules and options.
• Combat odds tables revised, improved.
• New combat considerations added
(excess firepower, lift-vector mis-match Rules)
Original Design Goals Re-Stated:
1. To provide a game system that replicates the flight char-
acteristics of World War II aircraft better than previous game
designs while still remaining playable.
2. To provide a game system that allows actual World War
Two aircraft tactics to be simulated accurately.
3. To expand the scope of air combat games by allowing
players to fly full blown "missions" so as to have a bigger
picture and rationale to their play.
Multiple Scales: The last goal required the use of the three
interacting scales of play. The operational scale provides the
backdrop to a mission and allows players to cruise around looking
for their victims, or, with bad luck, to become victims. The tactical
scale defines the role of attacker and defender in a fight since
these roles strongly depended on chance and the geometry of
an initial encounter between opposing sides. The combat scale
is used to play out the actual air battle.
With all scales in effect, players get a feel for more than
just the results of a single set piece battle. Flying can have a
purpose. A player can enter a combat, get a kill, get shot up
and suddenly realize that he is 200 miles inside enemy territory
with a rough running engine and no ammo.
Reality Versus Playability: To a small extent I have accepted
some scale deviations in the FW game design with regards to
certain aircraft performance capabilities and the probabilities of
certain events. I did this to both enhance the excitement level
of the game and to simplify some play mechanics. In as much
as these do not invalidate my basic design goal of allowing real
tactics to be replicated, I feel these variations are acceptable.
Have fun with the game. May your kills exceed your parachute
jumps.
J.D. Webster
 Fighting Wings
“Fighting Wings”
TACTICAL AIR WARFARE
IN WORLD WAR TWO, 1936-1946
Game Rules - Third Edition
© 2018 by J.D. Webster
3rd EDITION CREDITS
Research and Design: J.D. Webster
Rules Development: Too many to list. Thank you all.
Playtesting: See page 2 acknowledgments.
Aircraft 3-Views: Tony Stanfl, J.D. Webster
Production: The Clash-of-Arms staff.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART ONE – INTRODUCTION
1. Fighting Wings Games Page 4
PART TWO – AIRCRAFT FLIGHT
2. Reading Aircraft Data Cards Page 5
3. Basics of Play Page 5
4. Changing Aircraft Speed Page 8
5. Changing Aircraft Facing Page 12
6. Changing Aircraft Altitude Page 15
7. Aerobatics Page 18
PART THREE – AIR-TO-AIR COMBAT
8. Combat Scale Play Page 19
9. Air-to-Air Gun Combat Page 22
10. Air-to-Air Weapons Page 24
11. Aircraft Damage Page 28
12. Aircraft Loads Page 30
13. Crew Quality Page 30
PART FOUR – FLYING MISSIONS
14. Tactical Scale Play Page 32
15. Operational Scale Play Page 37
16. Miscellaneous Advanced Rules Page 46
17. Aircraft Related Special Rules Page 48
PART FIVE – BLOWING THINGS UP
18. Air-to-Ground Combat Page 50
19. Strafing and Rocket Attacks Page 51
20. Bombing Attacks Page 52
21. Low Level Bombing Page 54
22. Torpedo Bombing Page 55
23. Ramming Attacks Page 56
24. Anti-Aircraft Artillery (AAA) Page 57
25. Naval AAA Page 59
PART SIX – NAVAL OPERATIONS
26. Ship Handling Page 60
27. Aiming at Ships Page 61
28. Damaging Ships Page 62
29. Naval Aircraft Operations Page 64
30. Naval Op. & Tac-Scale Rules Page 65
31. Making New Ship Data Cards Page 66
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
3
PART SEVEN – NIGHT OPERATIONS
32. Night Fighting Page 68
• Rules Index Page 74
• Master Formation Mission Log Sheet Page 76
• Master Simplified Flight Log Sheet Page 77
• Master Ship Moves & Damage Log Sheet Page 78
• Master Standard A/C Log Sheet Page 79
• Unit ID Chart & Terrain Map Key, SOP Page 80
______________________________________________
Common abbreviations used in this Rules booklet
AAA = Anti-Aircraft Artillery (Flak)
A/C = Aircraft
Accel = Acceleration Point
ADC = Aircraft Data Card
AtA = Air-to-Air
AtG = Air-to-Ground
B-Zone = AAA Barrage Zone
CAP = Combat Air Patrol
CRR = Head On Collision Risk Range
Decel = Deceleration Point
Def. = Defensive
DC = Deck Capacity
EDC, FDC = Elevator, Flight Deck Capacity
HDC, RDC = Hangar, Restricted Deck Capacity
D5 = Die Roll with results of 1 to 5
D10 = Die Roll with results of 1 to 10
Emerg. = Emergency Power
FATT = Flight Attitude Transition Table
FPM = Feet per Minute
FP = Flight Point
FVT = Fractional Values Table
GLOC = G induced loss of consciousness
HFP, VFP = Horizontal FP, Vertical FP
LH = Likelihood
LOA = Line of Approach for AtG aiming
Max = Maximum
MC = Mandatory Altitude Change
Mil = Military Power
M.G., MG = Machine Gun
Min = Minimum
MPH, M.P.H. = Miles per Hour
NA = Not Applicable
Neg. = Negative
NG, Neg. G = Negative G
No. = Number
OC = Optional Altitude Change
OMT = Operational Mission Track
Op-Turn = Operational Scale Game Turn
Tac-Turn = Tactical Scale Game Turn
ROC = Rate of Climb
SDC = Ship Data Card
SOP = Sequence of Play
TMG = Tactical Maneuvering Grid
TOF, TOI = Time-of-Fall, Time-of-Intercept, resp.
TOG, LDG = Take-Off Group, Landing Group, resp.
VP, V.P. = Victory Point
Wpn. = Weapon
Wx = Weather
>, < = greater than, less than, respectively.
≥, ≤ = greater, less than or equal to, respectively.
 4 CLASH OF ARMS!
PART 1 - INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1 — FIGHTING WINGS GAMES
1.1 — GAME CONCEPT
The "Fighting Wings" (FW) game allows players to control
one or more aircraft in tactical scenarios that recreate the types
of combats faced by airmen of the Second World War. The FW
game system is designed to do the following:
• Portray all aspects of air combat as it evolved from 1936
to 1946, a period in which aircraft technology leapt from
200 mph biplanes to 600 mph jets.
• Model aircraft capabilities as accurately as possible
so that actual tactics of the era can be employed.
• Model an entire mission, from take-off to landing, by
using three different, but interacting, scales of play.
1.2 — LEARNING THE GAME SYSTEM
Learn the Basics First: Read the basic Rules of each chap-
ter first. Skip any advanced Rules and continue reading until
instructed to play a solitaire Training Scenario. When finished,
return to where you left off and continue until you complete all
training scenarios. Advanced Rules (indicated by underlined
bold Italics) are optional, increase the level of detail, and may
be added as agreed upon by the players.
Be Patient, Have Fun! Do not expect to learn everything in
a single sitting. Take your time. This is a game, so enjoy yourself
as you strive to master the techniques and tactics of World War
II aerial combat. Good luck and good hunting!
Optionally - Try the FW Quick Start (QS) Rules (available
on line - Google them) which are just a few pages long with only
two pages of play aids. The QS Rules address only fighter-to-
fighter combat, are simpler and mirror most concepts of play
used in the full game system though there are some differences.
1.3 — GAME SCALES
To portray all aspects of a typical air mission, Fighting Wings
uses three different scales of play.
Combat Scale: This depicts the actual three-dimensional
maneuvering of aircraft in combat for resolving attacks upon
enemy planes and ground or naval units. One combat game
turn equals four seconds of real time.
Tactical Scale: This maps out the starting geometry of en-
counters between opposing aircraft and the results of actions
taken by each side up to the beginning of a combat. One tactical
turn equals one minute of real time.
Operational Scale: This portrays routine aspects of piloting
aircraft before and after combat and determines if, and when,
enemy forces are sighted and intercepted. One operational turn
equals 10 minutes of real time.
1.4 — THE GAME TURN
Each game scenario is played in game turns. Each turn is
divided into phases in which players alternate actions such as
moving pieces or resolving combat. Each phase in a turn must
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
be executed in the order given by the "Sequence of Play". The
actions allowed in each phase depends on the scale in use.
1.5 — GAME COMPONENTS
Game Counters: The die-cut cardboard counters are the
pieces used to represent aircraft, and ground and naval units.
Each counter represents a single aircraft, gun emplacement,
vehicle, platoon of troops, or naval vessel.
Combat Map: The map with the hexagonal grid on it is the
combat scale playing surface. The hexagons are the spaces in
which players place and move their counters. One hexagon (hex)
represents 100 yards of distance.
Tactical Maneuvering Grid (TMG): The TMG is used by
attacking A/C to maneuver against enemy A/C until combat
commences or they break off. See Chapter 14.
Operational Mission Track (OMT): The OMT is a time,
distance and altitude track on which the progress of a mission
scenario is followed. OMT use is explained in Chapter 15.
Play Aid Booklet: In each FW game there are numerous
charts and tables found in a play aid booklet. These distill large
amounts of information into easily read tables used to resolve
combat and other events with the aid of die rolls.
Aircraft & Ship Data Cards: Aircraft data cards present the
information needed to fly and perform combat. Ship data cards, if
included, present information needed to move ships, and utilize
their anti-air combat capabilities.
Rules and Scenario Books: The Rule book defines how
aircraft and other units move and conduct combat. It is not
necessary to memorize Rules as various play aids summarize
the key points of important Rules. The scenario book provides
the historical context, background, counter set up and victory
conditions needed to play each scenario.
Log Sheets: Logs are used to track each aircraft's flight
status during combat scale play. Additional logss are used to
track mission status, ship damage, and defensive / AAA gunfire.
Players may make copies of any logs as needed.
1.6 — RESOLVING EVENTS OF CHANCE
The Die: Included in the game is one 10 sided die used as
a random number generator in conjunction with different game
charts to resolve events of chance. The die is marked with ten
digits: 0 to 9. There are three types of die rolls used in play:
1. D10 rolls – one 10 sided die (D10) is used to generate
numbers between 1 and 10. A result of "0" is read as ten.
2. D5 rolls – One D10 is rolled and the result halved and
rounded up (e.g. half of 3 = 2) to generate numbers between
1 and 5. A half D10 roll is termed a "D5" in the Rules text.
3. Percentile rolls – a D10 is rolled twice to generate a
number from 00 to 99. The first roll gives the "tens" digit and
the second roll gives the "ones" digit. For percentile die rolls,
the "0" digit is read as a "0" for both parts of the roll.
"00" or "100": A percentile roll of "00" may represent either
a true zero or 100, so a D10 must be rolled again with an odd
result indicating that the "00" is a true zero, and an even roll
indicating that "00" is a "100" result.
 Fighting Wings
Likelihood of Events: Some game tables use a Likelihood
(LH) rating for events of chance. To resolve a LH based event
proceed as follows:
1. Make a percentile roll and refer to the Base LH Table
(Combat Tables, page 1) to find the base LH number
given by the percentile result.
2. Apply appropriate LH modifiers from the table being
used to determine a final LH number.
3. Each table used specifies whether the final LH number
must be greater than, equal to, or less than the LH rat-
ing in question for the defined event to occur.
Randomness Checks: To determine which of several pos-
sible units or items is affected by events, use this procedure:
• Assign each an equal number of digits from a D10 or a
percentile roll. Make the roll. The item whose range of
digits includes the number rolled is the one affected. If an
unassigned digit results, roll again until one does.
PART TWO – AIRCRAFT FLIGHT
CHAPTER 2 — READING A/C DATA CARDS
To fly an aircraft (A/C) in the game, players must be able to
read its aircraft data card (ADC) and apply the information in it to
the game's flight Rules. Take any ADC in the game and refer to
it while reading the rest of this chapter. Later Rules amplify how
to use the various sections of the ADC. See Rules Supplement
One for additional ADC use examples.
2.1 — A/C DATA CARD FORMAT
Each ADC is divided into six sections:
(A) General Data (upper left): This contains a synopsis of
the A/C type, purpose, speed, ceiling and other game data, such
as defense strength, damage ratings and protection modifiers. A
list of available air-to-ground weapons stations and their weight,
load and stores limits may also be given.
(B) Three-View (upper right): This part shows a 3-view of
the A/C, lists its country of manufacture, approximate combat
service entry date, agility class and victory point values.
(C) Aircraft Performance Chart (center middle): An A/C's
minimum and maximum level speed, maximum safe dive speed,
and minimum maneuver speeds are listed in terms of flight points
for each altitude band. Also listed is an average rate of climb
(ROC) in feet per minute (FPM) for use at the Tactical scale.
(D) Power versus Speed Chart (middle right): This area
lists the maximum acceleration points an A/C’s engine(s) can
produce in each listed speed range and altitude band. The
number of flight points that must be expended before an angle
of bank change or side slip maneuver can be completed is also
listed by speed ranges immediately under the power chart.
(E) Notes and Variants (lower right): Additional details ap-
plicable to an A/C or its variants are listed here. For defensive
weapon groups, fields of fire are also listed (Chapter 10).
(F) Fire Power Chart (lower left): The upper area lists the
A/C’s armament in groups of similar weapons. Each weapon
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
5
group is given a code to identify its type and general location on
the A/C as follows:
Fixed Gun Codes:
N = Fixed forward-firing gun in fuselage or nose.
W-L = Fixed forward-firing gun in left wing.
W-R = Fixed forward-firing gun in right wing.
OU = Fixed gun firing obliquely forward & up.
OD = Fixed gun firing obliquely forward & down.
Defensive Gun Codes:
FG = Front manual gun (forward fuselage).
DG = Dorsal manual gun (upper fuselage).
VG = Ventral manual gun (lower fuselage).
TG = Tail mounted manual gun.
RG = Right waist manual gun.
LG = Left waist manual gun.
WG = Wing station manual gun (WT = turret on wing).
FT = Front turret gun (in nose).
TT = Top turret gun (upper fuselage).
BT = Belly turret gun (lower fuselage).
RT = Rear turret gun (in tail).
TS = Tail stinger (not aimed rear pointing fixed gun).
Additional weapon information is as follows:
Synchronized Guns: Gun codes in bold face indicate guns
synchronized to fire through an engine's propeller. If the
engine is disabled, the guns are disabled.
Rechargeable Guns: Underlined weapon groups indicate
guns that can be unjammed in flight (Rule 10.1).
Ammo & Critical Hit Ratings: The ammo number indicates
the total shots allowed to that weapons group in a game.
Critical hit ratings indicate how many hits in a single attack
are needed to inflict critical damage (Rule 11.2).
Gun Attack Factors: This chart lists each weapon group's
firepower in terms of attack factors at various ranges. These
factors are used to determine combat odds ratios for inflicting
damage (Rule 9.4).
Weapon Stations Diagram: Under the firepower chart is a
front view of the A/C showing the location of any weapon pylons
or bomb bays that may be available (Chapter 12).
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 3 –– BASICS OF PLAY
3.1 –– COUNTER POSITIONS
Aircraft (A/C), ground and naval units must be legally and
clearly positioned on the combat hex map at all times.
Ground & Naval Unit Position: Ground units are always
placed in the center of a hex. For ships, see Chapter 26.
A/C Position & Orientation: A/C position is defined by
altitude and map location. A/C orientation is defined by Facing,
bank angle (Chapter 5) and nose attitude (Chapter 6).
A/C Facing: The nose of the A/C drawing on a game counter
must clearly point to a map hexside or hex juncture at all times
to indicate its direction of flight or "facing". Due to the hex grid,
there are twelve possible facings, each 30° apart. Facing is re-
 6 CLASH OF ARMS!

corded on an A/C's log sheet at the end of each turn using the
compass codes depicted in Diagram 3.1. The combat hex map
has a "North Arrow" printed on it for reference.
A/C Altitude: Altitude is recorded on an A/C's log sheet
each game turn in the following format: "thousands integer, dot,
hundreds integer". Example: "10.7" = 10,700 feet.
A/C Map Location: A/C must always be located in a hex or
on one of the six hexsides forming a hex. When on a hexside, it
must be faced parallel to the hexside (Diagram 3.1). A hexside
of a hex is a separate location from the hex center.
3.1.1 –– ALTITUDE STRUCTURE
Levels & Increments: The following terms are used:
"Level" = 1,000 feet of altitude.
"Increment" = 100 feet (1/10 an altitude level).
Altitude Bands: The game sky is divided into coded "bands"
of altitude. There are eight bands defined as follows:
Band Name Code Levels
Ultra High UH 43.0 and higher
Extremely High EH 37.0 to 42.9
Very High VH 31.0 to 36.9
High HI 25.0 to 30.9
Medium High MH 19.0 to 24.9
Medium Low ML 13.0 to 18.9
Low LO 7.0 to 12.9
Very Low VL 0.0 to 6.9
A/C Performance Varies by Altitude: Each ADC's perfor-
mance chart has a distinct line of speed and maneuver limits
for each altitude band. For ease of play, the limits shown for the
band the A/C starts a game turn in, are used for the entire turn,
even if the A/C climbs or dives to a different band in its move.
3.1.2 — RANGE BETWEEN COUNTERS
Various game functions require the range between two hexes
or game counters to be determined.
Horizontal Range: This is the number of hexes counted from
a start hex (exclusive) to a destination hex (inclusive) between
units residing in a hex. If one unit is on a hexside and one in a
hex, count range from the hex, of which the hexside is a part,
that is closest to the other hex in the check. If checking range
between units which are both on hexsides, count the least num-
ber of hexes from one (exclusive) to the other (inclusive). A/C on
different hexsides of the same hex are, therefore, always range
one to each other.
Vertical Range: Each 300 foot difference in altitude between
two units equals one hex of range. At vertical ranges of more
than one, any remaining 200 foot difference = one additional
hex, but a 100 foot difference rounds down to none. An altitude
difference of less than 300 feet = vertical range of "0".
Total Range: This is the sum of the larger range (horizontal
or vertical) and half the smaller range (rounded down). For ex-
ample, a target 5 hexes away horizontally and 7 hexes vertically
would be at a total range of nine (7+2.5 = 9.5 => 9).

N Diagram 3.1: A/C Position, Stacks and Horizontal Range Examples

NNW NNE
• A/C#1 is facing E and at range 2 from A/C#2 which is facing NNW.
NW NE • The two A/C at location #6 face NNE and are range 3 from the two A/C at location #8.
• If the two A/C at location #6 were at the same exact altitude they would be stacked.
FACING • The range from A/C#5 to A/C#4 is range 0 for all purposes, but they are not stacked.
W E • If the pair of opposing A/C at position #8 were stacked they would risk collision.
COMPASS
• A/C#2 & A/C#7 are both at range 2 from A/C#4 which is facing N & AC#5 facing W.
SW • A/C#4 and the pair at location #8 are legally positioned on hexsides and range 6 apart.
SE
• A/C#3 is illegally positioned on a hexside. To be legal, it would have to face NE or SW.
• A/C#9 is facing SE and at range 7 from A/C#4 and at range 2 from A/C pair #8.
SSW S SSE

1 2 6 9

4 5 8

3 7

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 Fighting Wings
3.2 — COUNTER STACKING LIMITS
Ground & Naval Unit Stacking: If not otherwise defined in
a scenario, up to four ground units may be set up in a hex. After
setup, stacking limits may be exceeded due to movement. Naval
stacking limits are defined in Chapter 26. Terrain, structure and
other game markers do not count toward stacking limits.
A/C Stacking: Any number of A/C may be in the same map
location if at different altitudes. A/C in the same hex, or on the
same hexside, at the same exact altitude are "stacked." A/C
agility class (Rule 8.1) and formation type (Rule 8.5) determine
safe stacking limits. These may be exceeded but at the risk of
air-to-air collisions. Stacking limits apply at the end of a turn,
after all movement and combat is complete, and are as follows:
• In fixed formation, up to three F or L class, or two M or
H class A/C from the same side may stack safely.
• In flexible formation, up to two F or L class A/C from
the same side may stack safely. M & H may not stack.
• If not in formation, two F or L class A/C from the same
side may stack, if facing not more than 60° different.
• SH class A/C are super-heavies, like the B-29, and may
never stack safely with any A/C.
• A/C from opposing sides may never stack safely.
3.3 –– AIRCRAFT COLLISIONS
Collisions must be checked for in the following situations:
1. A/C end up stacked in excess of a safe stacking limit.
2. A/C enters a head-on attack "danger zone" (Rule 10.3)
or makes a range "zero" attack (Rule 10.2).
3. An A/C ends game turn at range 0 to another A/C that:
• is destroyed in combat phase due to max hits exceeded.
• is destroyed in combat phase due to loss of wing or tail.
• is under random movement Rules or turn stalled.
• is co-altitude or above and stalled or spinning.
Collision Checks: If overstacked, collision checks in an
amount equal to the excess A/C in the stack are required. The
player owning the A/C that entered the stack last, or which en-
ters a "danger zone", or is out-of-control or was just destroyed
in combat (NA if destroyed by explosion) performs the check. If
more than one A/C in a location must do a collision check, do
them in a random order, applying damage results as each check
is resolved and before the next check is made.
Collision Tailing Exception: Tailing (Rule 8.1.1) eliminates
all risk of collision with the tailed A/C. Such tailing must be de-
clared before combat is resolved. If the tailed A/C is shot down
the tailee must use his regular initiative roll for next game turn
(the tailing cannot be switched to another A/C).
Collision Check Procedure: Roll percentile dice and modify
roll per the game tables. A result ≥ 85 indicates the A/C collides
with the other. If more than one victim possible, randomly deter-
mine which is collided with.
Collision Damage: Use the final deflection angle (9.3)
between shooter and target, or determine a deflection angle
between an A/C colliding with another as if the A/C was firing at
the other and roll for damage as directed below:
• If angle = 150° or 180° each A/C suffers four D10 in hits.
• If angle = 60° to 120° each A/C suffers three D10 in hits.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
7
• If angle = 0° or 30° each A/C suffers two D10 in hits plus
one hit per 0.5 of speed difference between the A/C.
• One critical hit occurs per 3 hits taken (Chapter 11).
Example: An M class bomber and two enemy fighters end a
turn stacked. One collision check is required. The fighter which
entered the stack last does the check. The final percentile result
is "88" indicating a collision. There are two possible victims, the
other fighter or the bomber. The fighter is given digits 1 to 5 on
a D10, the bomber is given digits 6 to 10. The die is rolled and
a 2 results. The two fighters collide.
3.4 –– PITCH ATTITUDES
There are seven A/C pitch attitudes defined in play. These
are: level flight; shallow climb and dive; steep climb and dive;
and vertical climb and dive. Only one pitch attitude may be used
each turn by an A/C and there are restrictions on how quickly
A/C can transition between different attitudes (Chapter 6). Only
level flight is addressed in the rest of this chapter.
3.5 –– AIRCRAFT MOVEMENT
A/C Speed: Speed is expressed in flight points (FPs). One
FP equals 50 mph of speed. A half FP equals 25 mph of speed
(e.g., "6.5" FPs = 325 mph). Half FPs (0.5 FPs) are the smallest
increment of speed measured in play.
How Speed is Used: A minimum speed, as defined in its
ADC, must be met for an A/C to remain flying. Horizontal turns
or vertical nose pitch transitions require minimum speeds for
each given rate of turn or pitch being used. If not in diving flight,
a maximum attainable speed exists, based on the A/C's selected
power and load status.
A/C Movement: A/C move across the hex map and change
altitude by expending FPs. Every full FP available to an A/C must
be expended during its move each game turn. As only full FPs
can be expended in a game turn, unused half FPs are carried
forward to the next turn as explained below.
Half FPs: An unexpended half FP is noted on the A/C log's
"0.5 FP" carry line of the next game turn. If an A/C's start speed
includes a half FP, and a carried half FP is available, the two
must be added to provide another full FP for use that game turn.
If no half value is in the start speed, a carried half FP must be
carried again, until used or lost as a result of some other action.
Speed & Half FPs: The presence of a carried half FP, or
the gaining of an extra full FP due to adding a carried half FP to
an A/C's speed DOES NOT CHANGE A/C SPEED in any way.
Speed is used to define maneuver limits, while full FPs define
the distance an A/C can move, and various FP proportions that
must be used in a game turn when climbing and diving.
Types of FPs: FPs are expended either as Horizontal Flight
Points (HFPs), used to move an A/C across the map, or as Verti-
cal Flight Points (VFPs), used to change altitude (Chapter 6).
Both types of FPs may be used to accomplish maneuvers.
3.5.1 –– FRACTIONAL VALUES TABLE (FVT)
Different flight actions may require the use of defined pro-
portions of an A/C's full FPs, or other values in a certain way.
The FVT lists the official game value for 1/4, 1/3, 1/2, or 2/3s of
numbers from 0.5 to 15.0 (Flight Tables, page 3). When a frac-
tion is called for, use the FVT to find the official game value for
 8 CLASH OF ARMS!
that fraction. Full FPs = All playable FPs an A/C has (i.e. an A/C
with a speed of 6.5 and a 0.5 FP carry has 7 full FPs to play).
3.6 –– LEVEL FLIGHT
A/C starting in, and remaining in, level flight during a game
turn must expend all FPs as HFPs. Each HFP expended moves
the A/C forward into the hex or onto the hexside it is facing.
Example of Level Flight Diagram
At speed 3.0, an A/C expending three HFPs will move
three hexes or hexsides across the map as shown below.
Start Start
Position Position
1
2 1
3 2
3 HFPs
End End
Position Position
Level Flight Optional Altitude Changes: Any A/C ending a
game turn in level flight may adjust its final altitude up or down
by an amount equal to 1/4 of its total FPs or less (rounded up),
in terms of 100 foot increments, as defined by the FVT.
Example: For an A/C at speed 6.0, 1/4 is 1.5, rounded to 2.0,
meaning its altitude could be adjusted by 0, 100 or 200 feet.
Inverted Flight Problems: When A/C move they may change
their angle of bank (Chapter 5) to end in an inverted flight attitude.
Sustained inverted flight may cause the following problems:
Inverted Flight Decel or Negative-G Effects: A/C starting
and remaining in inverted level flight for an entire game turn
must either do positive-G turns and suffer one of the "Inverted
Level Turn" effects of Rule 5.5, or pay a 3 decel point penalty
and suffer Negative-G effects of Rule 6.5.
Engine Damage: A/C which incur Negative-G effects for
more than three game turns in a row also suffer an engine
step power loss critical hit per engine due to oil system star-
vation. This occurs at the end of each consecutive turn of
being inverted after three such turns in a row.
Transitions and Level Flight: If an A/C does a transition
(changes pitch), out of, or into level flight, the expenditure of
some of its FPs as VFPs (vertical flight points) may be required
by the transition rate used (see Chapter 6).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CHAPTER­­4 –– CHANGING A/C SPEED
Speed changes are calculated through the use of accel
(acceleration) and decel (deceleration) points.
4.1 –– ACCEL POINTS
A/C may gain accel from engine power and by diving.
Designer's Note: Engine power falls off as altitude increases
at a rate dependant on the type, or absence, of supercharging
equipment. Propeller thrust falls off as speed increases due to
a loss of propeller efficiency. These considerations are reflected
in the A/C's Power versus Speed Chart. Emergency power in-
dicates the use of over-boosting, or injection of water-methanol
or nitrous-oxide into the engine to temporarily increase power.
Engine Power Accel: Available power accel is found in
each ADC's Power versus Speed Chart. Cross index the column
containing the A/C’s start speed with its starting altitude band.
A single number, or the number to the left of a slash is the max
accel available in military power. The number to the right of any
slash is the emergency power accel. In multi-engine A/C, the
accel listed is per engine. A dash indicates the engines provide
no accel at that combination of speed and altitude.
Power Settings ("flight log code"): At the start of an A/C's
move, select either Idle, Cruise, Military or, if available, Emergency
power. Choosing power settings of less than military limits the
accel that can be taken in a game turn to a fraction of the listed
amount as shown below (use the FVT for the actual value). The
effects of each power setting are as follows:
Idle "I": Provides zero accel and immediately reduces an
A/C’s start speed by 0.5 before it moves. The new speed is
the one used for all maneuvering requirements.
Cruise "C": From 0 to 1/3 of the military accel listed may
be taken. Endurance power is a lesser cruise setting used
to conserve fuel (Rule 15.4.1) and always provides 0 accel.
Military Power "M": An amount greater than 1/3 up to all
available accel listed for military power must be taken.
Emergency "E": All accel listed for emergency power must
be taken (For MW-50 or GM-1 equipped A/C, see Rule 16.7).
Engine Power Example: See Rules Supplement One.
Dive Accel: A/C gain dive accel in two ways:
Dive Attitude Accel: If an A/C's start attitude is a dive of any
type, add the Dive Accel bonus listed in the general informa-
tion section of its ADC once.
Dive Accel: Take the no. of 100 foot increments the A/C
dove in the game turn and multiply that by the no. given
for the A/C's start speed in the Climb Decel & Dive Accel
Table shown below and in the Flight Tables, page 3.
4.2 –– DECEL POINTS
A/C incur decel points by climbing, turning, performing ma-
neuvers, or from the drag due to excessive speed.
Climb Decel: A/C incur climb decel in two ways:
Climb Attitude Decel: If A/C's start attitude is a climb of
any type, incur the listed ADC Climb att. decel no. once.
 Fighting Wings
Climb Decel: Take the no. of 100 foot increments the A/C
gained in the game turn and multiply that by the no. given
for the A/C's current start speed in the Dive Accel & Climb
Decel Table shown below and in Flight Tables, page 3.
Designer's Note: Changes
DIVE ACCEL (4.1) in A/C speed resulting from
& CLIMB DECEL (4.2) changes in height depend on
the amount of time gravity acts
Current Acc. / Dec. freely on the A/C. In simple
Speed per incr. game terms, if an A/C were
allowed to fall or fly straight
≥ 9.0 0.5
≥ 5.0 1.0 down the entire turn (all FPs
≥ 3.5 1.5 were VFPs each dropping 3
increments), gravity would pro-
= 3.0 2.0
vide around 18 to 20 points of
= 2.5 2.5 acceleration. Since the amount
= 2.0 3.0 of time a single FP represents
= 1.5 4.0 during movement varies de-
≤ 1.0 6.0 pending on speed (e.g., one FP
at speed 3.0 is twice the time as
• Add listed amount per incr.
one at speed 6.0), the chart at
gained / lost during move.
left apportions accel or decel
• + ADC climb decel if start
for each increment dropped in
attitude is climb, + ADC dive
an amount appropriate to the
accel if start attitude is dive. interval of time an FP equals.
Turn Rate Decel: On the Performance Chart of each ADC
there are four columns labeled TT, HT, BT, and ET. These are
column labels are turn rate codes (see Chapter 5), and the num-
bers listed under them are the minimum A/C speeds required to
use those rates in the corresponding altitude bands.
The number in "( )" next to the turn rate column labels is the
decel incurred for initiating the use of that turn rate (e.g., starting
a horizontal turn). The EZ turn rate does not have its own listed
column, because it is allowed anytime the A/C is at or above
its minimum speed (not stalled). EZ rate use always incurs half
the listed TT rate decel (as defined by the FVT). Turn rate decel
is incurred for each 30° of actual facing change, even if an A/C
can change facing by 60° or 90° with a single FP.
Turn Rate Decel Example: See Rules Supplement One.
Transition Decel: When A/C change from one pitch attitude
to another (see Chapter 6), they incur decel as if changing fac-
ing at the turn rate used for the transition, for each step of pitch
attitude change accomplished.
Designer's Note: As A/C speed increases so does drag and
this is factored into the ADC's Power vs. Speed Chart. However,
this is only valid up to an A/C's max attainable speed (Rule 4.3.1).
Above that, additional drag must be factored in.
Excess Speed Decel: An A/C's throttle setting determines
its max attainable LEVEL speed. If an A/C's start speed is > its
max attainable level speed, subtract the max attainable level
speed from the start speed and multiply the diff. by two. This is
the amount of excess speed (overspeed) decel the A/C incurs.
Example: An A/C in military power, in the MH band has a
max attainable level speed of 6.0. If its start speed is 8.5 it would
incur 5.0 points of excess speed decel ((8.5 – 6.0 = 2.5) x 2).
Note: Max attainable speed also varies with changes in load
or damage status (see Chapter 12, and Flight Tables, Page 1).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
9
Dive Brake Decel: A/C with dive brakes may use them to
incur from 5 to 10 decel per game turn. Dive brake use is declared
at the start of an A/C's move (instant deployment) and the decel
amount selected is incurred each turn until the dive brakes are
closed (instant retraction), or set to a new decel setting. Some
A/C have flaps that split and function as either dive brakes or
flaps (e.g. SBD Dauntless). When deployed as flaps follow the
flap rules and the Dive Brake function is disabled. A jammed flap
combat result while used as dive brakes = jammed dive brakes.
Other Decel Types: Slips or skids cause decel as explained
in Chapter 5. Snap rolls incur 3 decel per step of roll (Chapter
7). Open bomb bays cause 1 decel per game turn (Chapter 12).
Deployed flaps and landing gear cause decel per Chapter 16.
4.3 –– ACCEL & DECEL EFFECTS ON SPEED
Speed Change Procedure: At the end of an A/C's move,
total all accumulated accel and decel separately (retain fractions).
Subtract decel from accel. If the remainder is positive, the A/C
will speed up, if negative, it will slow down as follows:
For each net 5 points, positive or negative, increase or de-
crease, respectively, A/C speed by 0.5 for the next turn. If 4.5 or
less points remain after taking all possible 0.5 speed changes,
log them next turn's "accel" or "decel" carry (if allowed).
Hint: A quick way to figure speed changes is to take the net
accel or decel & shift the decimal one to the left, then change
speed as much as possible in 0.5 steps. Carry remainder nor-
mally. A/C with a net of 17.5 decel incurs a "1.75" loss of speed
which becomes a 1.5 speed loss with 2.5 decel carried.
4.3.1 –– LIMITS ON SPEED & POWER
Non-Fuel Injected Engines: A/C are deemed to have posi-
tive pressure fuel injected engines unless "No F.I." appears in
the engine description of their ADC. "No F.I." A/C will be forced
to use idle power in the following situations:
1. Inverted Flight Forced Idle: "No F.I." A/C that spend an
entire game turn in an inverted attitude, and which do not
also use either a pull transition or do positive-G turning,
must use idle power on the following game turn.
2. Negative-G (NG) Forced Idle: "No F.I." A/C that do NG
transitions (rule 6.5), start NG turns (rule 5.9), or carry NG
turning forward must use idle on the following game turn.
Jet Engine Limits: WW-II jet powered A/C can only change
power to the next adjacent setting per turn (e.g., they cannot go
directly from idle to emergency). Cruise and Endurance are the
same setting for this rule. Jet A/C do not immediately reduce
speed by 0.5 when selecting idle power (no propeller drag).
Limits on Available Power: A/C with heavy loads or severe
damage, or whose engines have suffered step losses in power
are limited to taking a certain fraction of their available power
(Chapters 11 & 12). In all cases, adjustments to accel are done
via the Fractional Values Table (FVT).
Max Listed Speed: The max speed shown for each altitude
band in the Aircraft Performance Chart is the max speed A/C
can attain via engine power while in level or climbing flight. This
limit can be exceeded if starting or ending in diving flight.
Max Attainable Speed: The max attainable level speed will
be less than max listed level speed in the following conditions:
 10
A/C Condition Attainable Speed
• Loaded Max listed –0.5
• Over loaded Max listed –1.0
• Severely damaged Max listed –1.0
• Engine power losses (see 11.3) Max listed –0.5 ea.
• F, MF class at cruise power Max –1.0 if HI+ band
• F, MF class at cruise power Max –1.5 if MH- band
• other classes at cruise power = lesser of Max –1.0 or
laden state max attainable –0.5 in any altitude band.
• Endurance power = 1/2 of laden state max Attainable.
• Idle power (–0.5 speed) 1/2 of Max Listed.
Min. Adjusted Speeds: An A/C's listed minimum level and
turning speeds must be increased as indicated if it is:
• Loaded Min. listed +0.5
• Severely Damaged Min. listed +0.5
• Over-loaded Min. listed +1.0
Note: All items that reduce max attainable level speed or
increase minimum speed are cumulative in a load, damage,
power effect order (i.e., a loaded, severely damaged A/C's max
attain. speed = max listed –1.5.). This chart is reproduced in the
play aids. Though A/C can exceed max attainable level speeds
if diving, an A/C's max attainable LEVEL speed is always used
to calculate excess speed decel.
4.4 –– MAX & MIN SPEED EFFECTS
Max Attainable Speed Effects: If an A/C's START speed is
greater than its max attainable level speed, its available engine
accel = 0. In this case, throttle settings only determine what max
attainable speed excess speed decel is calculated from.
If an A/C's END speed is equal to or more than max attain-
able, it may not accelerate further, or carry any left over accel
forward, unless its start or ending flight attitude is a dive (this is
known as the "dive acceleration exception").
Minimum Speed Effects: If an A/C's start speed is less than
its min adjusted speed, it stalls. If an A/C initiates a turn or pitch
transition with insufficient speed, or starts a game turn with a
speed less than that required for a carried turn rate, it suffers a
turn stall (4.6). A/C making a gun attack with an end speed less
than minimum adjusted speed have a +15 LH shot modifier.
4.5 –– STALLS & SPINS
A/C with a start speed less than min adjusted are stalled and
must check to see if they enter a spin. After choosing power, roll
percentile dice and modify result per the Aircraft Stalls & Spin
Table (Flight Tables - page 2). A result ≥ 60 indicates the A/C
spins, otherwise it just stalls. Use the appropriate procedure
below until the A/C recovers from the stall or spin.
Stall / Spin Restrictions: A/C in stalled or spinning flight
may not make any attacks, fire defensive guns, or tail others.
4.5.1 –– STALLED FLIGHT PROCEDURE
• MC altitude change is per pre-nose adjustment attitude un-
less start speed is < 1.0, then MC = –0.3. Climb OC is not
allowed. Level or diving OC must be maximum possible
downward amount allowed (Chapter 6).
• Adjust the A/C's nose attitude toward VD or IVD by 3 steps
(no decel cost). Use pull direction if inverted, or push direc-
tion if upright. Stop upon reaching a vertical dive attitude.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
• HFP/ VFP split is per the Standard Altitude Change Table
using the final attitude reached after nose adjustment.
• Climb VFPs cannot occur. Dive VFPs must be the max
allowed by the Standard Altitude Change Table.
• Bank angle may change. Roll D10: If 6 or less, wings roll
to LV if upright, or IV if inverted. If roll 7 or more, wings
change bank one step left if odd, one step right if even.
• Forfeit all turning, rolling, maneuver or half FP carries.
Keep any carried accel or decel.
Add dive & engine accel, and climb decel normally.
Stall Recovery: When A/C's start speed is at or above its
adjusted minimum, it exits the stall and may fly normally. Until
then, it remains stalled and must check for spins each turn.
4.5.2 – SPIN PROCEDURE
• Flight attitude is "spin". Speed = 0.0 until A/C recovers.
The A/C has no FPs. MC and OC are not applicable. Lose
Altitude in increments = game turns in spin (1 for first turn of
spin) x A/C's listed min. speed (rounded up) + D5.
• Randomly change facing: Roll D10, odd = spin left, even =
spin right. Roll D10 again, result = no. of 30° facings in
direction of spin. On subsequent turns of continued spin-
ning, roll only for facing changes using previous direction.
Angle of bank becomes upright bank in direction of spin.
Upon spin recovery, bank becomes upright level.
• Accel and decel from all sources is ignored (becomes 0).
Forfeit all accel, decel, half FPs, turn, roll, or maneuver
FPs carried into spin. Power may be changed and may
affect spin recovery roll (see below).
Spin Recovery: At the start of a spinning A/C's move select
power, then roll percentile dice using all stall modifiers except
those for just having faced or for carrying turns. A result ≤ 50 =
recovery, else spin continues. Upon recovery, speed = adjusted
minimum +0.5 (or adj. min. if idle used). Select either a vertical or
steep dive as the A/C's flight attitude (this is its no cost transition
out of spin). MC is based on selected attitude. Fly normally from
there using standard diving flight FP proportions (Rule 6.2).
Deliberate Spins: Regular, veteran or any gifted pilots
(Chapter 13) may roll to force a spin, instead of to avoid one.
Declare intent, change negative pilot modifiers to positive ones
and add +20 to the roll. Spin recovery is via normal Rules.
Combat Effects: Spinning A/C defend with a "x3" deflection
modifier. Critical hit area modifiers and collision angle modifiers
are NA. They cannot be tailed or tracked. Combined speed mods.
uses 90 degree angle. LVMM and 0 defl. shot mods. are NA.
4.6 –– TURNING STALLS
Turn stalls occur in the following situations:
• When A/C inadvertently try to turn (Ch. 5) or transition
(Ch. 6) with insufficient speed for the rate selected.
• When A/C carry a turn forward (Ch. 5) and then have
a start speed insufficient for the carried turn rate.
"Oops" Protocols: Once a player finishes a move and the
next player starts to move, or if the game turn enters the combat
phase, an A/C move may not be corrected to avoid a turn stall.
When an illegal move is discovered the offending A/C must use
the penalty procedure given below.
 Fighting Wings
Penalty Procedures: There are four different cases:
(1) If caught in Movement Phase of current turn, back A/C up
to where first illegal FP was actually expended. The FP is spent
but the action is disallowed. Retain the first rate or maneuver
decel incurred and any GLOC or overstress checks caused by
illegal FP. With remaining FPs, perform Turn Stall Procedure.
(2) If caught in next turn's Movement Phase, return A/C to its
start position (no FPs used) and perform the Turn Stall Procedure
from there using previous turn's power setting.
(3) If caught in Combat Phase of the same or a following turn,
all damage caused by A/C since illegal move is annulled. Ammo
or weapon expenditures still apply. Perform Turn Stall Procedure
at start of next turn using current turn's power setting.
(4) If caught more than two turns after the act, the offending
A/C must do two complete Turn Stall Procedures in a row, the
second starting with the first FP after the first is completed and,
any damage inflicted since illegal move is annulled as above.
4.6.1 – TURN STALL PROCEDURE
Designer's Notes: This procedure replicates the actions of
an out-of-control A/C following a turn stall event.
a. Determine duration of Turn Stall (TS) in FPs by rolling D5
and adding pilot quality number below. Turn Stall duration may
never exceed twice A/C's current speed in FPs:
Veteran = 1+D5 Regular = 2+D5 Green = 3+D5
Recruit = 6+D5 Gifted = –1 to above mods.
Note: Turn Stalls may require more than one game turn to
execute depending on where in an A/C's move they occurred.
b. Determine bank angle change (no decel cost). Roll D10, odd
= Left roll, even = right roll. Roll D5, result = FPs of stall-rolling
in direction determined, immediately credited to A/C (use snap
roll rate even if snap roll not normally allowed). Stall-roll FPs
may not exceed TS duration FPs in quantity. Do carry stall-roll
FPs for uncompleted rolls. The A/C is deemed to be doing this
uncontrolled stall-rolling during the Turn Stall FPs. If the A/C is
in vertical flight, stall rolls also act as vertical rolls each for 90
degree facing and bank angle changes required to be taken.
c. Execute Turn Stall as follows:
• If at beginning of game turn - No transitions allowed.
• No turns, maneuvers, or rolls allowed with Turn Stall FPs.
• VFPs allowed are per standard climbs & dives (Rule 6.2).
• If climbing, no new VFPs allowed if minimum VFPs for
standard attitude already met when Turn Stall occurred.
(This is zero for shallow climb, 1 for steep climb, etc.)
• If diving, do VFPs first until max VFP limit is met.
• MC is per start attitude. Climbing OC is not allowed.
• In level or dive attitudes, take max OC as altitude loss.
• Incur 5 decel, +1 decel per FP of stall-rolling done.
• At end of first game turn in which TS starts - lower nose one
pitch attitude toward earth (not past VD. If from a VC, use
push direction, if from an inverted VC use pull direction).
This is a no decel cost pitch adjustment.
Note: Once Turn Stall FPs are spent, normal flight allowed
with remaining FPs. OC limits apply if still in TS at end of move.
Deliberate Turn Stalls: A pilot of any quality (Chapter 13)
may deliberately invoke a turn stall. The intent must be declared
at the start of the A/C's move. The turn stall may be executed
at any point in the move by simply starting an illegal turn rate.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
11
If an A/C is fast enough to do ET turns, it won't be able to do
deliberate turn stalls.
Turn Stall (TS) Confusion: Recruit pilots (Chapter 13) upon
completing a TS procedure, must fly the next turn as if in random
flight (Rule 5.7) due to momentary confusion unless also stalled,
in which case the Stall / Spin Rules take precedence.
4.7 –– DANGEROUS DIVES & COMPRESSIBILITY
Designer's Notes: In early A/C designs dive speeds were
limited by structural weakness where excess speed could cause
the wings or tail to rip off, or by engine gear speed limits, which,
if exceeded by the propeller spinning up, resulted in a runaway
engine and explosion. In later, stronger, designs sonic shock
waves and compressibility were the major concerns. Shock
waves could batter an A/C leading to structural failure, or they
could blank out its control surfaces forcing it to continue diving.
Safe Diving Speeds: The max dive speed listed on each
ADC is that A/C's normal maximum SAFE dive speed. Max safe
dive speeds can be reduced by loads, damage or critical hits
and this becomes an A/C's adjusted safe dive speed.
Dangerous Dives: If, after power selection, an A/C has a
start speed greater than its adjusted safe dive speed, it must roll
percentile dice at the start of its move to see if it suffers structural
failure. Add any required dangerous dive modifiers (Flight Tables,
page 2). A final result ≥ 95 indicates the A/C is destroyed.
Compressibility: If, after power selection, an A/C has both
a start speed in the transonic speed range (see A/C Turn Chart)
and is above its max listed level speed, it must roll percentile dice
for "compressibility loss-of-control". Add any required modifiers
(Flight Tables, page 2). A result ≥ 60 indicates compressibility.
Compressibility Loss-of-Control: Shock waves have ren-
dered the A/C's controls useless. On the first turn of compressibility
the A/C remains in its current attitude. On each subsequent turn
of compressibility it must transition one step toward a vertical
dive at the EZ rate. On the second turn of vertical diving, it will
enter a pure vertical dive (all FPs = VFPs, optional HFP is NA).
There is no decel cost for these transitions. The A/C must
expend the max allowed number of FPs as VFPs for each flight
attitude and must lose the max allowed OC. While control is lost
it cannot roll, turn or do any maneuvers. A/C are allowed to se-
lect idle power, use speed brakes or dive brakes to offset accel
from the dive, and to use dive flaps to help in the avoidance of,
or recovery from, compressibility.
Loss-of-Control Duration: A/C remain in compressibility until
a recovery roll is made or their start speed is below transonic.
Check for recovery at start of each turn after the one the A/C
lost control in. Make a percentile roll adding applicable modifiers
(Flight Tables, Page 2). A result ≤ 50 indicates recovery. On the
turn of recovery, do not check for loss-of-control, however, on
subsequent turns the A/C can reenter compressibility.
Note: Compressibility and dangerous dives can occur at the
same time requiring separate die rolls.
Dive Flaps: Some A/C have special dive flaps to lessen the
effects of compressibility and may instantly deploy them to get a
modifier to the compressibility and recovery rolls. These cannot
be damaged by speed, and provide no other benefits. If used,
one decel is added for that game turn. Retraction is instant (no
decel) when declared at the start of any following turn.
 12
CHAPTER 5 –– CHANGING A/C FACING
A/C change direction on the game map by turning. To start a
turn, A/C must first roll their wings to establish a turning angle-of-
bank. Once the bank has been established they must then apply
a specific "Turn Rate" (G force) for a predetermined distance
(Rule 5.2) as specified by the A/C Turn Rate Chart, after which
they may adjust their facing on the map.
Time = Distance: Rolling and turning are both actions that
require time and distance to accomplish. This is measured in
play by the expenditure of FPs in flight (Note - these FPs still
drive the A/C forward if HFPs or change its altitude if VFPs).
5.1 –– ANGLES-OF-BANK
There are six defined angles-of-bank. A/C change bank by
rolling their wings from one angle-of-bank step to an adjacent
angle-of-bank step. The defined bank angles are:
1) Upright Level (LV) Turns NA.
2) Upright Right Bank (RB) Right turns allowed.
3) Inverted Right Bank (IR) Right turns allowed.
4) Inverted Level (IV) Turns NA.
5) Inverted Left Bank (IL) Left turns allowed.
6) Upright Left Bank (LB) Left turns allowed.
Roll Procedure: Declare
direction of roll, as left or
LV right. Expend sufficient FPs
in flight to match the "Bank-
LB RB
ing FP" requirement listed
under the appropriate speed
column of the ADC's Power
IL IR versus Speed chart. The new
IV bank angle is considered
established once the time
requirement is met.
Example: The diagram above depicts the six bank angles as
they appear from the rear of an A/C. An A/C beginning a right roll
from an RB angle-of-bank would roll toward the IR angle-of-bank
step next, and one rolling left, would go toward LV.
Rolling While Turning: If rolling between LB and IL, or RB
and IR, FPs expended for rolling may also be used for turning
in the direction of the bank. In all other cases roll FPs may NOT
be counted toward turning.
Roll Carry: Rolling can be accomplished over several game
turns if required. If so, note any roll FP expenditure being carried
in the Turn Carry line of the A/C log sheet. Roll FP carry must
marry up with continued rolling or the roll is considered aban-
doned. Once started, a roll must be completed or abandoned.
Abandoning Rolls: A/C may abandon a roll at any point
before it is completed. Partial rolling that was carried forward or
in effect when a roll is abandoned must be undone before an
opposite direction roll can commence. Partial rolling is considered
undone when FPs = to the partial roll amount have been spent
doing some action other than rolling, or spent in rolling back
to the start bank position. If partial rolling was toward LV or IV
banks, this must be undone before turning can be resumed.
Load & Damage Effects: Critical damage and load status
can impact roll FP requirements (Chapters 11 & 12).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
5.2 –– HORIZONTAL TURNS & FACING CHANGES
Turning Procedure: Once in a turning angle-of-bank A/C
must expend sufficient FPs in flight to match the "Turning FP"
requirement shown on the A/C Turn Rate Chart (Flight Tables,
page 3) for the turn rate in use. This represents the time and
distance traveled while changing facing from one direction to the
next. If an A/C is on a hexside at the instant it changes facing,
shift it into the hex on the side of the hexside toward which it is
turning. There are five defined rates of turn. They are:
• Easy Turn (EZ) < 2 G.
• Tight Turn (TT) 2 to 3 G.
• Hard Turn (HT) 3 to 4 G.
• Break Turn (BT) 4 to 6 G.
• Emergency Turn (ET) > 6 to 9 G.
A/C may use the EZ rate any time they are not stalled or in
a spin. A/C may use the TT through ET turn rates if their start
speed is ≥ the listed minimum turn speed for that turn rate.
Using the A/C Turn Chart: Cross reference the A/C’s start
speed with the G rate in use. A "60" or "90" indicates a change of
facing, in the direction of the turn, of up to 60° or 90°, respectively,
is allowed for each FP expended. All other numbers indicate the
FP requirement for a single 30° facing change. "NA" means the
listed turn rate may not be used at that speed.
Two numbers separated by a dash indicate a Split FP turn
requirement. The larger portion of the split may be used one or
more times followed by one use of the smaller portion, after which
the cycle resets. For example, a "3-2" split FP requirement could
be played as a "3-3-3-2" cycle, or a continuous "3-2-3-2" cycle.
A split FP cycle may be carried forward to the next game turn.
Carrying Turns: Turns may be started in one game turn and
continued to the next. Note this in the "Turn Carry" line of the
A/C's log. Turn carry is added to continued turning in the new
game turn. The log code for turn carry is: FPs expended, turn
rate and direction. For example: "2HTL" = A/C spent 2 FPs in a
Hard Turn to the left. A carried turn not resulting in a facing on
the game turn its FP requirements are finally met is forfeit. If a
carried turn is abandoned or restarted, its prior turn carry is lost.
Stopping Turns: An A/C may abandon a turn before it is
completed by simply declaring it (the turn does not have to be
undone). A/C may only abandon one declared or carried turn
per game turn. Decel is still incurred for abandoned turns.
Changing Turn Rates before Facing: Once started, a turn
rate cannot be changed. A facing change can be delayed by
expending more FPs than the minimum required for the turn in
progress (turn decel is unchanged). A lesser turn rate must be
abandoned or completed before a higher turn rate can be used.
Changing Speed while Turning: If an A/C's speed changes
before a turn requirement is met and the new speed has a dif-
ferent FP requirement for that turn rate, the new requirement
applies. If, as a result of the change, the A/C has met the new
requirement already, it must still expend at least one FP in its
current move before doing the facing change.
ET Rate Restrictions: A/C using an ET turn (or transition)
rate may not fire guns or release any air-to-ground weapons or
stores in that game turn after the ET rate is commenced. They
must also check for overstress (5.6) and GLOC (5.7).
Turning Flight Examples: See Rules Supplement One.
 Fighting Wings
5.3 –– VERTICAL FLIGHT & VERTICAL ROLLS
Turning Restrictions: A/C opting for "Pure Vertical Flight"
(all FPs are VFPs - Chapter 6) may not do turning. They can
only use vertical rolls to change facing. An A/C in regular vertical
flight, or which transitions to vertical flight, may use both turning
and vertical rolling to affect facing changes. In this case, the two
methods of making facing changes cannot be combined (FPs
for one, cannot be used for the other). When A/C transition out
of a vertical attitude, only turning can be used.
Vertical Rolls (VR) and Facing: A/C in vertical flight (Chapter
6) may change facing when they roll to a new bank angle. In
vertical climbs the facing change is in the direction opposite the
roll (i.e., roll left = change facing clockwise). In vertical dives it
is in the same direction as the roll. The facing change allowed
with the completion of a vertical roll is as follows:
• If the VR banking requirement is met entirely with the
expenditure of HFPs, the facing change is only 30°.
• If the VR banking requirement was met with both HFPs
and VFPs, the facing change may be up to 60°.
• If the VR banking requirement was met entirely with
VFPs, the facing change may be up to 90°.
Hexside Option: A/C on a hexside that expend sufficient
FPs to VR twice in a row to make a 180° facing change, may, at
the player's option, remain on that hexside instead of shifting to
an adjacent hex after the first facing change.
Bank Angle Options: A/C may freely return to their starting
bank angle, or keep the new bank angle after each VR. This
must be decided immediately upon executing each VR.
VR Restrictions: A/C which transition to a vertical attitude at
Free or EZ rates, or by using two or more steps of transition may
not use FPs in the first half of their move (rounded up) for VRs.
Normal roll carry cannot be used for VRs but VR carry converts
to normal roll carry if vertical flight exited.
5.4 –– SIDE SLIPS AND SKIDS
Side Slips: Slips displace an A/C left or right on the map
without changing facing. Slips may be performed while in any
pitch attitude but only if the A/C's bank is upright (either LV, LB or
RB). To perform a slip, cross reference the "Side Slip FPs" line
of the Power Versus Speed Chart on the ADC with the appropri-
Diagram 5.4 – Slip/Skid Displacements: The depict-
ed A/C needs 3 FPs to set up the maneuver and a 4th
FP to execute it, displacing on the map as shown.
Slip or Skid
Slip or Skid
Start
4 3 2 1
Skid + Facing change Skid + Facing change
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
13
ate speed column to find the FP requirement. After expending at
least this many FPs (HFPs or VFPs okay) continuously in flight,
the A/C may be displaced one hex with the next available HFP
as depicted in diagram 5.4 below. If the bank is LV, the displace-
ment may be left or right, otherwise, the displacement must be
in the direction of bank and the A/C may lose one increment of
altitude upon executing the slip (gain normal dive accel for this).
Skids: Skids are executed like slips but, without the optional
altitude loss, and may only be done if in an LB or RB attitude.
A/C displacement is in the direction opposite the angle-of-bank.
The A/C may opt to change facing by 30° in the direction of the
bank upon displacing to the new hex, but only if the higher BT
decel was taken at the start of the skid.
Slip / Skid VFP-HFP Swap Provision: If a pitch or normal
flight attitude transition FP restriction (Rule 6.1.1) is such that
a VFP would be played at a point in a move when a slip / skid
displacement HFP is needed, that VFP may, instead, be played
where the HFP just prior to executing the slip / skid was to be
played and then, that HFP may be used to execute the maneu-
ver on time. In other words, A/C need not delay executing a
maneuver due to waiting for an available HFP.
Decel Cost & FP Carry: Slips or normal skids incur HT turn
decel. If a skid with a facing change is planned, BT turn decel is
incurred whether the facing change is used or not. If no HT or BT
decel is listed on the ADC, use highest turn decel available +1.
Decel is incurred upon starting the maneuver. The FP require-
ment may be met over more than one turn. Note any slip or skid
carry on the Turn Carry line of the log sheet. Once started the
maneuver must be finished or abandoned. If abandoned, other
actions may commence immediately without delay (the maneuver
does not have to be undone).
Slip and Skid Limits: FPs expended to do a slip or skid may
not be counted toward turning or rolling. Slips and skids are not
allowed if a Negative-G transition (Chap. 6) is performed.
Load and Damage Effects: Critical damage and load status
can impact slip & skid FP requirements (Chapters 11 & 12).
Slip & Skid Combat Effects: If in a slip or skid (FPs car-
ried), or if the last FP before firing was used to execute either,
or if firing after doing a skid at any point in the same game turn,
LH modifiers apply to the shot. The gunfire arc for an A/C in a
Slip or Skid
Skid + Facing change
Start
Start
 14
slip or skid is the non-turning one, unless the last FP expended
before firing was used to skid and change facing, then the turning
gunfire arc is used (Combat Tables, page 3).
5.5 –– SPECIAL TURN CONSIDERATIONS
Turns in Steep & Vertical Attitudes: A/C which start and
stay in steep and vertical attitudes the entire game turn (meaning
- no transitions from or to shallow or level attitudes) may reduce
their turn FP requirement on the A/C Turn Chart by using the FP
requirement that would apply if their start speed was 1.0 less than
it actually is. Exception: The FP requirement for a start speed
of 1.0 to 1.5 is never reduced by this Rule. Design Note – This
models geometry effects on turn circles for tilted flight paths.
Inverted Turns with Gravity: An inverted A/C doing a "pull"
transition (Chapter 6) of at least two steps from any inverted
flight attitude to another inverted attitude will turn quicker due to
help from gravity and may reduce its turn FP requirement as if
turning in steep & vertical attitudes (i.e., a transition from inverted
steep climb to inverted level qualifies for this bonus). Such A/C
must start and end all turning FPs with the wings in an inverted
bank. An A/C may roll toward an upright bank while using the
inverted turn bonus, but must complete the facing change before
expending the FP that completes the roll to an upright bank.
Inverted Level Turning: If an A/C starts and stays in level
flight (no transition used) and ALL positive G turn FPs resulting
in at least one completed or carried facing change STARTED in
an inverted bank, climbing optional alt. changes are not allowed
(Chapter 6), and its end attitude must either be adjusted to a
shallow dive (no cost) at the end of its move, or it must lose 100
feet per 30° of inverted facing started, not to exceed 1/3 of its
total FPs (rounded up) in increments (gain normal dive accel).
5.5.1 –– HIGH SPEEDS & TURN RATE DECEL
Designer’s Note: At high speeds the wing's angle-of-attack
required to produce a specific G-rate is much smaller than at
lower speeds. This means less induced drag is incurred when
turning at high speeds. This is a beneficial trait for high-speed
aircraft such as jets or late war fast fighters. Therefore:
• If start speed ≥ 5.0, reduce rate decel to = next lower rate.*
• If start speed ≥ 8.0, reduce rate decel to = two rates lower.*
• If start speed ≥ 10.0, reduce rate decel to = 3 rates lower.*
Another way to remember is to use the Power versus Speed
Chart on each A/C’s data card, which has four speed bands. For
EACH speed band higher than the "0.0 - 4.5" band an A/C is in,
use the decel for one rate lower than the actual rate being used
(* but never to less than EZ rate). See chart below.
Example: A jet at speed 10.0 is in the speed band three higher
than the "0.0-4.5" band. It could use BT rates while incurring only
EZ decel for each facing or transition change at the BT rate.
Actual Speed Band Reduced Rate Decel
Rate 0.0 - 4.5 5.0 - 7.5 8.0 - 9.5 10.0+
EZ = EZ EZ EZ EZ
TT = TT EZ EZ EZ
HT = HT TT EZ EZ
BT = BT HT TT >> EZ <<
ET = ET BT HT TT
Note – This Rule only mandates a reduction in rate decel.
The minimum speed required to perform a rate never changes.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
5.6 –– OVERSTRESSING AIRCRAFT
Severely damaged A/C using ET or negative-G-BT rates are
automatically destroyed. A/C doing turns or transitions in the
following situations must roll percentile dice after all A/C finish
moving and before combat is resolved to check for "over-stress":
• Any A/C using the ET or Negative-G BT turn rate.
• A/C with severe damage, tail structure or wing spar
hits using BT, ET, negative-G HT or BT turn rates.
If, after adding required modifiers (Flight Tables, page 2) the
final result is ≥ 95 the A/C suffers damage. Roll a D10; ≤ 7 wing
spar hit, ≥ 8 = tail structure hit. Apply a +2 modifier for each prior
tail structure hit, and a –2 for each prior wing spar hit.
5.7 –– TURNS AND LOSS-OF-CONSCIOUSNESS
Designer's Notes: "Black-out", or "G-induced loss-of con-
sciousness" (GLOC), occurs when blood cannot reach the brain
due to high G forces. "Red-out" occurs when too much reaches
the brain due to negative–Gs, inhibiting proper circulation.
Black Outs: All crew members of A/C that used ET rates,
and wounded or recruit quality crew members of A/C using BT
rates, must roll percentile dice to check for GLOC after all A/C
finish moving and before combat is resolved. If, after adding any
required modifiers (Flight Tables, page 2), the result is ≥ 95 that
crewman suffers GLOC.
Effects of GLOC: Pilots cannot control their A/C (which must
fly randomly), or perform any combat actions. Other crewmen
may not perform their functions. GLOC lasts for 1 + D5 game
turns. Thus, GLOC will last from 2 to 6 game turns.
Anti-G suits: Late in the war G-suits were introduced on
American aircraft that helped pilots avoid GLOC. See ADCs for
availability of G-suits which provide modifiers to GLOC rolls.
Red Outs: All crew members of A/C that turn or transition
at the negative-G BT rate must roll percentile dice as for GLOC
above to check for "red out". The effects for "red out" follow the
normal GLOC Rules with the following two exceptions:
1. Red out always lasts only two game turns.
2. G-suit equipment does not help against red outs.
5.7.1 –– RANDOM A/C FLIGHT
If an A/C is uncontrolled because its pilot is dead, missing,
GLOC'd, or disoriented, refer to the Random Flight Table (Flight
Tables, page 2) and roll a D10 as directed to determine if any
random flight attitude changes, rolling, or turning occurs. Use
the indicated results to perform the A/C's flight for the game turn.
The following also applies to A/C flying randomly:
• The A/C moves before all others in its class.
• If all pilots are disabled, power setting cannot be changed.
5.8 –– SLATTED WING EFFECTS
Slats are wing leading-edge devices that help A/C remain
controllable at high angles-of-attack. A/C with slatted wings (see
ADC notes) gain the following benefits:
Stall & Spin Die Rolls: Slatted-wing A/C give a –15 percentile
modifier to all stall-into-spin and spin recovery rolls.
 Fighting Wings
Minimum Level Speeds: Veteran pilots, and gifted pilots
of any quality (13.0), may fly slatted-wing A/C at speeds 0.5 <
adjusted min speed, but must add 1 to EZ rate decel for each
30° of facing or pull transition step and incur a +15 LH mod.
for any shots taken. An extra D5 of decel for "wallowing" at low
speeds also occurs unless pilot is vet. and gifted. If landing flaps
deployed, the landing flap benefits take precedence (16.3.1).
Minimum Turn Rate Speeds: Regular and veteran pilots
may do positive-G "slat-assisted" HT or higher rate turns or pull
transitions at speeds 0.5 < the required min. adjusted turn rate
speed, and Gifted pilots (Rule 13.3) may do "slat assisted" TT
or higher rate turns or pull transitions at speeds 0.5 < minimum
adjusted turn rate speed, by paying 1 extra decel per 30° of fac-
ing change or pull transition step and incurring the "slats used"
+15 LH modifier for any shots taken.
5.8.1 –– WING FLAP EFFECTS
A/C with wing flaps may deploy them to the maneuver or
landing flap setting to reduce min. required turn rate speeds by
0.5. If so, add 1 to the decel for each 30° of facing or transition
step taken. Also decel for deployed flaps will apply (see 16.3.1).
Combined Use of Flaps & Slats: A slatted-wing A/C with
flaps deployed cannot reduce the minimum level or turn rate
speeds more than 0.5. Instead, the combined effect of using both
slats and flaps is to cancel the "slats used" +15 LH shot modifier
when claiming reduced turn rate speeds.
5.9 –– NEGATIVE-G TURNING
Negative–G (NG) Turns: F, L, and M class fighters with
regular or veteran pilots may change facing in the direction op-
posite their bank angle by using NG turns. NG turns of up to BT
rate are allowed. The minimum speed required for an NG turn is
that for a one-step-higher turn rate (i.e., an NG TT turn requires
a min speed ≥ that listed for an HT turn). The decel for an NG
turn is that of the actual turn rate. NG turns do not benefit in any
way from flaps or slatted wings (Rule 5.8) or gifted pilots.
NG Turning Limits: FPs used for NG turns may not be used
for rolls, slips or skids. If a pull transition is done, NG Turning
is not allowed. NG turning is allowed with any push transition.
Any positive G turn carry and any maneuver carry is lost upon
commencing an NG turn or transition (using an NG rate).
NG Turn Forced Transition or Altitude Loss: Completing
NG turns from an UPRIGHT bank requires the A/C to either lose
100 feet per 30° of NG facing change completed (normal dive
accel), not to exceed 1/3 the A/C's total FPs in increments, or
to adjust the A/C's end flight attitude one step in a nose down
direction, free of cost, at the end of its move, before combat.
These requirements don't apply if the NG turn is completed from
an inverted bank angle.
NG Turns and Combat: Aiming for ground attacks (Rule
18.1), tracking shots, long bursts and defensive fire (Chapter
10) are not allowed if NG rates involved in any manner during
a game turn (this includes having NG turn carry). Air-to-ground
weapons may not be dropped, jettisoned or fired in a game turn
if NG rates used. Fixed guns always use the non-turning arc and
suffer a +30 LH modifier to attacks if NG rates used.
STOP! PLAY TRAINING SCENARIO 1
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
15
CHAPTER 6 –– CHANGING A/C ALTITUDE
A/C change altitude by transitioning into a climbing or div-
ing flight attitude. Depending on the attitude, certain amounts
of altitude change will be mandated or allowed and additional
changes in altitude may be possible via the use of VFPs.
Flight Attitudes: There are twelve flight attitudes defined.
A looping A/C would pass through each as depicted below:
7
6 8
1. Upright Level
5 2. Shallow Climb 9
3. Steep Climb
4. Vertical Climb
5. Inverted Steep Climb
6. Inverted Shallow Climb
4 7. Inverted Level
10
8. Inverted Shallow Dive
9. Inverted Steep Dive
10. Vertical Dive
3 11. Steep Dive 11
12. Shallow Dive
2 12
1
The twelve 30° flight attitudes (up or down) equate to the
twelve 30° facings (left or right) that A/C can have. An A/C's
flight attitude is recorded on its log sheet using the codes below.
"( )" denotes inverted attitudes:
Flight Attitude If upright If inverted
Level Flight = LVL (INV)
Shallow climb, dive = SHC, SHD (SHC), (SHD)
Steep climb, dive = STC, STD (STC), (STD)
Vertical climb, dive = VTC, VTD (VTC), (VTD)
6.1 –– A/C Transitions & MOVEMENT
At the start of its move an A/C can "transition" to a new attitude.
The number of steps of attitude change allowed in a transition
depends on the turn rate used. Limits may exist on how FPs can
be expended. These are found in the Flight Attitude Transition
Tables (FATTs, Flight Tables, page 2).
FATT Description and Use: There are two FATTs, one for
"Pull" transitions & one for "Push" transitions. A pull transition
raises the aircraft's nose and a push transition lowers the nose
relative to the pilot's view (not the earth's).
Both FATTs have a circular diagram depicting an A/C in each
of the 12 possible flight attitudes. Beside each A/C position is
a list of available transition turn rates that can be selected.
Depending on whether the transition is assisted or resisted by
gravity, and whether the transition is a pull or push, there may be
more or fewer options available than with other positions on the
 16
diagram. When an A/C ends in a vertical climb or dive, the A/C
will be either upright or inverted as defined by its ending bank
angle. There are different FATT code options out of vertical flight
for the upright and inverted banks (use the correct set).
Basic A/C Flight Procedure:
1. Select a throttle setting. If no flight attitude transition is
desired, proceed to step 6 below.
2. If a transition is desired, refer to appropriate FATT.
3. Find A/C's start attitude on the FATT. From the list of
entries next to that position, select a turn rate to transi-
tion with (A/C must have sufficient speed for the rate).
4. The number to the right of each transition rate is the
amount of 30° steps of attitude change the A/C must
take. Count around the FATT circle, in the direction the
A/C icons point, that many steps to find the ending
attitude and note this on the A/C log sheet.
5. Determine what restrictions, if any, exist on FP use for
the transition chosen, as indicated by the coded entries
to the right of the colon of the selected rate at the A/C's
start position. Rule 6.1.1 explains the codes.
6. Execute the A/C's move as follows:
• Apply any Mandatory Altitude Change (MC, 6.1.3).
• Move the A/C by expending all full FPs while comply-
ing with restrictions indicated by the FATT codes.
• Once the A/C is finished moving, take any Optional
Altitude Change (OC, 6.1.3) desired.
7. Calculate changes in A/C speed per Chapter 4. Make
appropriate entries on A/C log sheet.
Special Actions: Some transitions require A/C to execute
facing reversals, or incur NG effects (Rules 6.4 and 6.5). The
letters "RV" or "NG" in the FATT codes signify these cases.
Speed vs. Full FPs Note: An A/C's speed defines eligibility
for turn and transition rates, power availability, climb decel and
dive accel, and turn radius per the A/C turn chart. For all move-
ment involving altitude change proportions, all available full FPs
to play in a game turn are used to determine HFP / VFP splits,
and MC, VFP and OC amounts (i.e., an A/C at speed 4.5 with a
0.5 FP carry, at speed 5.0 with or without a half FP carry, or at
speed 5.5 with no carry would calculate flight proportions based
on having five full FPs to play (using the 5.0 line)).
6.1.1 –– FATT ENTRY CODES
There are three kinds of FATT codes:
1. Bold Faced Entry: These show the exact proportion of
FPs that must be expended as VFPs or HFPs (indicated
by a V or H). Remaining FPs must be of the other type.
2. Ranged Entry: If two proportions for VFPs or HFPs are
shown with the word "to" in between them, this shows
an allowed range, inclusive, of that type of FP the player
may use with rest being the other type of FPs.
3. Two–Part Entry: When two entries appear separated
by a comma, the first half indicates how many HFPs or
VFPs must be expended before any of the other kind of
FPs, or opposite direction VFPs, can be used. The sec-
ond half is read normally and may also be a bold faced
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
or ranged entry. Once the first requirement is met, all
remaining HFPs or VFPs may be mixed in any order.
HFP Swap Exception: If complying with a two-part entry
would otherwise prevent a displacement maneuver (e.g. slip or
skid) from being completed with the minimum FPs allowed, the
last available HFP may be swapped with a following VFP so as
to allow the maneuver to occur in the normal minimum time.
6.1.2 –– FRACTIONAL VALUES TABLE
Fractional Values Table & FP Proportions: The Fractional
Values Table (Rule 3.5.1) is used to determine the minimum
number of FPs that meet the proportions defined in the FATT
codes. Take the A/C's total FPs and look up each proportion. As
only full FPs can be expended, Fractional Values Table entries
with 0.5 values are rounded as follows:
•  If starting from level or shallow flight, round down the
VFP proportion and round up the HFP proportion.
•  If starting from steep or vertical flight, round up the VFP
proportion and round down the HFP proportion.
6.1.3 –– ALTITUDE CHANGE BASICS
Some altitude change may be mandated by an A/C's starting
attitude and total FPs available. Each VFP expended causes a
300 foot (three increment) change in altitude. At the end of a
move an optional altitude change is allowed based on an A/C's
ending attitude and total FPs available.
Mandatory Changes (MC): Whether using a transition or not,
A/C starting a game turn in a climb or dive will have an altitude
change imposed on them in an amount set by their total available
FPs, except when in pure vertical flight (see 6.2).
Designer's Note: This is a mechanic used to make Pythago-
rean theorem distances occur while still allowing players to define
three-dimensional moves using simple expenditures of FPs.
Refer to the Altitude Change Table. Cross index A/C's start
attitude with MC column. A dash, "1/3+" or "1/2+" will be found.
Dashes indicate no MC occurs. Fractions indicate MC amounts
in increments equal to that portion of an A/C's total FPs rounded
up. The MC may be applied all at once at the start of an A/C's
move, or continuously, at a rate of 1 or 2 increments per FP,
starting with the first FP expended.
VFP Changes: VFPs count as normal FPs for all purposes
except horizontal movement. Instead of displacing an A/C on the
map, VFPs cause three increments (300 feet) of altitude change
in the direction of the A/C's ending pitch attitude (up if climbing,
down if diving). VFPs in a direction opposite an MC may not be
expended until the MC is accounted for in movement.
If a transition is used, the FATT will define the allowed por-
tions of FPs that may be VFPs and, in some cases, which type
of VFP (climbing or diving). If no transition is done, the Standard
Altitude Change Table (Flight Tables, Page 3) defines the portion
of total FPs that may be VFPs.
Optional Changes (OC): Refer to the Standard Altitude
Change Table. Cross index the A/C's ending pitch attitude with
the OC column. The phrase "± up to 1/4+", "up to 1/3–", or "up
to 1/2–" will be found. Fractions indicate an OC in altitude in-
crements of from zero to the indicated portion of the A/C's total
FPs rounded up (+), or rounded down (–), may be taken at the
 Fighting Wings
end of the A/C's move. For level and pure vertical flight, the OC
may be plus or minus, otherwise, it must be in the direction of
the ending pitch attitude (up if climbing, down if diving).
6.1.4 –– FATT SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
Clarification Symbols: "V" codes with + or – symbols indicate
climbing VFPs and diving VFPs respectively.
Illegal Transitions: A/C that transition through more steps
than allowed or which initiate a transition with insufficient speed
for the rate used suffer a "Turn Stall" (Rule 4.6).
Transition VFP Exception: A/C that transition from any at-
titude to a less steep attitude need not expend more VFPs than
they did on the prior game turn. If the transition code mandates
more, a player may use from the number of VFPs expended the
prior game turn up to the amount shown in the transition code.
VFP Exception Limits: If a prior turn's transition included a
mandatory reverse, stemmed from a stall, spin recovery, or an
NG turn or inverted level turn nose adjustment, then the excep-
tion is not allowed, and transition codes must be used as given.
Transition Decel Notes: Turn rate decel is incurred for each
30° of attitude changed in a transition at the selected rate. Nor-
mal turning effects are incurred from transitions as if they were
horizontal turns. Pilot quality, slats and flaps affect transitions
as if they were horizontal turns. The term "Free" indicates there
is no decel incurred for that transition and for all other purposes
"Free" is treated the same as an EZ turn.
Transition Turn Decel Credit: If a "pull" transition is used,
half the decel paid for transitions MAY be counted toward decel
incurred for normal turning in that game turn. If a "push" transi-
tion is used, half the decel paid for the transition MAY be counted
toward decel incurred for NG turning in that game turn.
Turn Limits from Transitions: If using a "Pull" transition,
NG turning (Rule 5.9) is not allowed in the same game turn. If
using an "NG" transition, positive G turning is not allowed in the
same game turn.
MF, M & H Class (Rule 8.1) Restrictions: MF class fighters
may use inverted banks, but may not transition into or through
vertical attitudes unless flown by a "gifted" pilot (Chapter 13).
M and H class A/C may not voluntarily enter inverted attitudes
or transition into or through vertical climbs or dives (Exception:
MD A/C may use vertical dives).
6.2 –– STANDARD CLIMBING & DIVING FLIGHT
If A/C do not transition in a game turn, the amount of VFPs
allowed is found in the Altitude Change Table (Flight Tables,
page 3) and repeated below:
Shallow Climbs & Dives: None, or up to 1/4 of the A/C's
available full FPs may be used as VFPs.
Steep Climbs & Dives: At least one, and up to half (1/2) the
A/C's available full FPs may be spent as VFPs.
Vertical Climbs & Dives: More than 1/2 the A/C's available
full FPs must be, and up to all may be VFPs. If all FPs are
used as VFPs, this is "pure vertical flight". In pure vertical
flight no MC occurs.
Pure Vertical Free HFP: If the A/C's speed is 3.0 or more, it
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
17
is allowed to take a free HFP in the direction faced at the end
of its move. The free HFP is not from the A/C's speed, so it
cannot be used for any maneuvering purpose. Any optional
reverse taken must occur after the use of the free HFP. The
free HFP is not available to stalled or out-of-control aircraft.
6.3 –– ADDITIONAL CLIMB & DIVE RULES
A/C Ceilings: The three ceilings listed on an ADC represent
service ceilings for non-loaded, loaded, and over-loaded A/C
(Rule 12). A/C that begin a game turn above their allowed ceil-
ing have all available power halved and any decel incurred for
climbs, turns, or maneuvering is doubled.
Flight Attitude Clarification: For all game purposes A/C are
in the flight attitude they transition to, or remain in, at the start of
a turn. All Rules applicable to that attitude go into effect upon
declaring a transition and before the A/C moves.
Altitude Band Clarification: For ease-of-play, A/C are
considered to be in the band they start a game turn in, for all
maneuvering purposes and limits, even if altitude changes take
them to another band in mid-move. The new band only goes into
effect at the start of the next turn.
6.4 –– REVERSAL OF A/C FACINGS
A/C may be required to, or have the option to, reverse their
facings by up to 180° on the map during movement as indicated
below. Any facing reversal automatically inverts an A/C's bank
angle as well (e.g., LB becomes ILB).
Mandatory Reversals: If the code "RV" appears in the se-
lected transition code line, a facing reversal is required during
the A/C's move. The reversal timing restrictions are given by
the words "At Start", "By", "From" or "After", followed by a given
fraction of the A/C's total FPs.
Reversal Timing: "At start" means the reversal occurs
before the A/C expends its first FP. "By" means it may occur
after the expenditure of any FP up to the FP represented by the
listed fraction (inclusive). "From" means the reversal may occur
on or after the expenditure of the FP represented by the listed
fraction (inclusive)."After" means the reversal must occur after
the expenditure of any FP following the FP represented by the
listed fraction (exclusive). A plus or minus sign with a listed FP
fraction indicates the Fractional Values Table amount should be
rounded up or down respectively.
Example: A/C at speed 4.5 with a 0.5 half FP carry has five
FPs to expend. It changes attitude and the FATT code contains
a mandatory reverse note of "RV after 1/2+" . This means the
reverse must occur after the fourth of fifth FP is expended as
1/2 of 5 FPs is 2.5 which due to the + sign is rounded up to 3.
Optional Vertical Reversal: If an A/C remains in, or transi-
tions to, a vertical attitude, and no mandatory reversal is called
for, the A/C may opt to reverse its facing at the end of its move
so long as the VFPs expended during its move exceeded the
HFPs expended. In other words, vertical distance in FPs must
exceed the horizontal distance to do an optional reverse. Stalled
or out-of-control A/C may not do optional reversals.
6.4.1 –– REVERSAL LIMITS & EFFECTS
Reversal Limits: When a reversal of any type is executed,
the facing changes allowed or required are as follows:
 18
From a LV or IV bank, 180° is required. The A/C may rotate
either way shifting into the adjacent hex from a hexside or re-
maining on a hexside if it started on one.
From all other bank angles, from 120° to 150° is allowed
(4-5 facings). A/C rotation for the facing change is always in the
direction of bank if a pull transition used, or opposite the direction
of bank if a push transition used.
Reversal Effects on Roll Carry & Bank Angle: Roll carry
is maintained in its original direction (an A/C with 2 FPs of right
roll carry, will still have that same carry after the reversal). Bank
angle direction is maintained after a reversal, only the upright
and inverted relationship changes (Example: LB becomes IL,
and IL becomes LB after a reversal).
6.5 –– NEGATIVE-G TRANSITION EFFECTS
NG Transitions and Turns: If an NG transition is used, nor-
mal, positive-G turning is not allowed. All positive-G turn carry
is lost. NG turns and rolling are still allowed.
NG and Non-Fuel Injected Engines: See Rule 4.3.1.
NG Transitions and Speed: The min speed for an NG
transition rate is that for a one-step higher turn rate, or if none,
the highest listed rate +1.0. Decel for NG transitions is that of
the actual rate used. NG transitions do not benefit in any way
from flaps or slatted wings (Rule 5.8).
NG Transitions and Combat: Defensive guns may not be
used, fixed guns suffer a +30 LH modifier to attacks and stores
may not be dropped, jettisoned, or fired. Tracking shots and long
bursts are not allowed.
NG Transitions and Aiming: Aiming for air-to-ground at-
tacks (Rule 18.1) is not allowed if an NG transition used.
6.6 –– FREE TRANSITION INDUCED FACINGS
A/C that begin a game turn in a left or right bank angle, and
which remain banked to that same side for the entire game turn,
(rolling between inverted and upright status is okay, even if a
reversal was used, but rolling toward LV or IV is not allowed)
may take a free facing change if:
• They transitioned two or more steps, into, through, or
out of steep or vertical flight attitudes.
Free Facing Limits: The free facing change may only be
taken after the expenditure of any FP that exists entirely in the
second half of the A/C's move. Stated differently, it may not be
taken after an FP which is part of the first half of the move, or
which is a midpoint FP for an odd number (use the FVT value
rounded up to determine how many FPs constitute the first half
of a move. For example, if the total FPs available are 5.0, the
FVT gives 2.5 as the half value, which is rounded up to 3.0. Thus
the free facing change may not occur until after the expenditure
of the 4th or 5th FP.). Rolling toward LV or IV is not allowed.
Direction of Free Facing Change: For a "pull" transition,
the facing change must be in the direction of the angle-of-bank.
For a "push" transition, the facing change is opposite the angle-
of-bank. The facing change is free (due to flight path geometry)
and may be combined with facing changes from normal turning.
• Climb & Dive Examples: See Rules Supplement One.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
CHAPTER 7 –– AEROBATICS
Loops: Loops are 360° turns inscribed in the vertical and may
be simulated using the "pull" FATT and the regular climbing and
diving Rules. The size and diameter of a loop can be varied by
using different power settings and transition rates.
Split-S: This is a maneuver in which an A/C rolls to an INV
bank angle and pulls through the bottom half of a loop in an arc
resembling the bottom half of the letter "S" (hence its name).
Immelmann: This is performed exactly as the first half of a
loop with the A/C stopping at the INV position at the top to remain
in level flight and roll to an upright bank angle.
Hammerhead (HH): The A/C goes into a vertical climb and
rudder is used at the point of stall to flip it sideways to reverse
direction from a vertical climb to a vertical dive. This maneuver
is declared at the end of the A/C's move, and executed at the
start of the A/C's next move. For initiative, A/C attempting HHs
are "U" class. Executing an HH counts as the A/C's transition.
Hammerhead Procedure:
1. End the A/C's move in a vertical climb at the A/C's
adjusted minimum speed ± 0.5. Declare hammerhead.
2. At start of next move, select power, roll percentile dice
and add the Stall / Spin pilot & power setting modifiers.
3. A result ≤ 60 = success, change facing 180°, and flight
attitude to a vertical dive. Bank angle is set to player's
choice. Start speed = A/C's adjusted min speed.
Fly the A/C normally from there (MC = 0).
4. A result > 60 = failure, the A/C does not reverse facing
or pitch, speed becomes its adjusted min –0.5, and the
Stall / Spin procedure is used for the game turn.
Hammerhead Limits: A/C may not fire or drop weapons or
stores on the turn of declaration. All half FP, turn, roll or maneuver
carries for the following turn are forfeited. Accel or decel carry is
also forfeited. A/C may not perform HHs if their rudder is knocked
out, or if at an altitude that is the boundary or interior of a cloud
deck or layer (you can't do this maneuver on instruments).
Snap Rolls: A snap roll is done with large aileron and rud-
der deflections to roll an A/C as quickly as possible. Declaring a
snap roll allows an A/C to reduce its banking FP requirement by
1 but never to < 1. For each bank angle change accomplished
by snap rolls, 3 decel are incurred.
Snap Roll Restrictions:
•  Turning FPs may not be combined with snap rolling FPs.
• M & H class A/C may not snap roll. Exceptions: MF okay,
and M class may snap roll if a "gifted" pilot is flying.
• Snap rolls, once started, cannot be abandoned. A snap
roll is in effect until a new bank angle is reached.
• If "Rudder knocked out", snap rolling is not allowed.
Wing-over: This is a combination of turns with climbs and
dives to minimize horizontal turn radius.
• Wing-over Example: See Rules Supplement One.
STOP! PLAY TRAINING SCENARIO 2
 Fighting Wings
PART THREE – AIR-TO-AIR COMBAT
CHAPTER 8 –– COMBAT SCALE PLAY
Sequence of Play (SOP): Each game turn consists of an
Initiative, Movement and Combat phase.
8.1 –– INITIATIVE PHASE
Determine A/C order of movement by first comparing agility
class and then initiative numbers. A/C of a lesser agility class
move before A/C of a higher class each turn (tailing can modify
this). If both sides have A/C in the same agility class they move
in order of initiative number, starting with the lowest number first.
Initiative Rolls: For each A/C or side requiring an initiative
number, roll a D10. For individual F and L class A/C rolls, add ap-
plicable modifiers from the Initiative Modifiers Table (see Combat
Scale Sequence-of-Play). Record the final initiative number on
the A/C's log sheet. A/C (friendly or enemy) with the same final
initiative must roll unmodified D10s to break the tie. Tie-breaker
rolls are not done until it is that A/C initiative number's time to
move. Roll as often as required to break a tie.
Kill Bonus: If one or more enemy A/C in a turn are shot
down or crash due to damage last inflicted by air-to-air combat
(not AAA fire or collisions), add +2 to all friendly initiative rolls
for the next two turns due to enemy dismay. The effect is not
cumulative. Destroying more A/C on a following turn does not
increase the bonus size but does extend the time it lasts.
Agility Class: An A/C's agility class is noted in the lower
left corner of the 3-view section of its ADC. If the class indica-
tor includes a "D", "T" or "N" the A/C is also a specialized dive
bomber, torpedo bomber, or night equipped A/C, respectively.
Below are the five agility classes from least agile to most agile.
• U = Uncontrolled A/C (stalled, spinning A/C etc.).
• X = Any A/C in fixed formations (Rule 8.5.1).
• H = Heavy A/C (large multi-engine A/C types).
• M = Medium A/C (regular 2 to 3 engine A/C).
• L & F = Light A/C (single engine bombers, scouts (L)
and single or twin-engine fighters (F)).
Notes: Tailing enemy A/C may change the movement order.
M and H class have certain flight restrictions (see Rule 6.1.4).
U class: Uncontrolled A/C move before any others in their
class. If both sides have "U" of the same class, each side rolls
an unmodified D10 with the lowest roll moving all A/C first.
X class: A/C in a fixed formation move as a group before any
A/C not in fixed formations. If both sides have "X" class, each
rolls an unmodified D10 with the side having the lowest result
moving all of its fixed formations first.
H (& SH) class: SH (super heavy) A/C are a subset of H class
(B-29 is one example). H class A/C are moved, all at once, in
any order. If both sides have H class, each rolls an unmodified
D10 with the lowest roll moving his all of his H (or SH) A/C first.
M class: Medium A/C are moved, all at once, in any order
desired. If both sides have "M" class, each rolls an unmodified
D10 with the lowest roll moving all his M class A/C first. Excep-
tion: if both have "MF" class A/C, generate individual initiative
nos. for each. "MF" class are "M" class A/C used as fighters, and
unless tailing an enemy, must move with other "M" class A/C.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
19
F & L class: This is a combined class for fighters and light
bombers. "F" or "L" class, are always moved in order of load
status (Ch. 12) as given below, and then by initiative number
within the same load status group:
a. Overloaded "F" & overloaded "L" A/C move first.
b. Loaded "L" A/C move next.
c. Normal "L" & normal or loaded "F" A/C move last.
Mixed Formation Loads & Initiative: If A/C in an F or L
class formation have different load states, the entire formation
moves with the same load status as the most loaded A/C in it.
For an A/C in such a formation to move using its own lighter load
status, it must detach from the formation (it may rejoin later).
Unsighted A/C: Unsighted A/C (Rule 8.1.2), except those
in fixed formation, move last regardless of initiative numbers or
agility class. If both sides have unsighted A/C, each side rolls an
unmodified D10 with the lowest roll moving all such A/C first.
Initiative Example: Side A has three F class fighters with
initiative numbers 4, 8, and 9. Side B has two with initiative nos.
7 and 8. 4A moves first, followed by 7B. Then 8A and 8B roll
to break the tie. After they move, 9A moves. Note that 7B must
move without knowing whether a friend or foe will move next.
8.1.1 –– TAILING FRIENDLY OR ENEMY AIRCRAFT
Tailing can be declared at the end of the Movement Phase,
or, at the start of next turn's Initiative Phase, before rolling dice.
Tailing A/C do not roll for initiative. They take the initiative no.
of the tailed A/C and move after it, in formation rank order, as
if they were its wingman (Rule 8.5). There are two tests used
to establish tailing, the simple and the deflection test. If the
simple test does not suffice, the deflection test may be tried. If
applicable, "Same Hex / Hexside Tailing," and "Vertical Tailing
& Flight" requirements must also be met in order to tail.
Simple Tailing Test (all criteria must be met):
• Tailer in tailed A/C's rear deflection arc or on the clock lines
defining the rear arc (05 to 07), Combat Tables, page 3.
• Tailed A/C in tailer's front arc or on the clock lines defining
the front arc (11 to 01), Combat Tables, page 3.
• Tailer is within "8" hexes of total range to tailed A/C.
Deflection Test (all criteria must be met):
• Tailed A/C is in tailer's front arc or on the clock lines that
define the arc (11 to 01, Combat Tables, page 3).
• Tailer is within "8" hexes of total range to enemy.
• Tailer is above enemy if diving, or below, if climbing.
• Tailer can show a final deflection angle of ≤ 30° with tailed
A/C, using Fixed Gunfire Deflection Determination play
aid using relative flight attitudes, or tailer can show a final
deflection angle of ≤ 60° with tailed A/C if vertical range
between them is > horizontal range by at least 100 feet.
• If tailer in level flight, horizontal range between them must
be greater than vertical range by at least 100 feet.
Vertical Tailing Limits: If the vertical range is > horizontal
range by 100 feet (1 hex = 300 feet) or more, A/C in a VC may
not tail lower A/C & A/C in a VD may not tail higher ones.
Vertical Flight & Front Arcs: The front arc for A/C in VC
or VD attitudes includes their hex and any hexside of that hex,
or, if on a hexside, the same hexside and any position directly
adjacent to that hexside. All of these positions are deemed "same
hex / hexside positions" for purposes of tailing test checks.
 20
Same Hex / Hexside Tailing: At any vertical range, a tailed
A/C must be below a tailer in a VD and above one in a VC. If the
vertical range is > 1, the tailer must be in a VC or VD to tail.
At vertical ranges of one or less, tailer must have entered
the hex or hexside after the enemy in the current turn and must
have a speed ≤ to the tailed enemy.
Tailing Limits: A/C that end a game turn in fixed formation
may not tail. Pilot quality may limit tailing A/C (Rule 13.1). M and
H class A/C may not tail A/C of a more agile class (MF may). F
and L class may not tail friendly F and L A/C with a lighter load
status unless the tailed A/C adopts the tailing A/C's higher load
status for movement order (tailing enemy F and L class which
have a lighter load status is okay).
Tailing and Collisions: Tailing declared prior to combat
eliminates the chance of range "0" collisions with tailed A/C.
Tailing, Formations & Wingmen: Wingmen in formation
parameters whose leader is tailing an enemy may use the same
initiative number the leader assumed from the enemy A/C, but
move in "rank" order on their own leader (Rule 8.5.2).
8.1.2 –– SIGHTING & BLIND ARCS
Sighting & Initiative: Enemy A/C are sighted unless they
are in the blind arcs of all friendly A/C simultaneously. A/C blind
arcs are listed in section one of their ADC. There are four blind
arcs defined: six-line-low, rear, rear-low and none (A/C on clock
lines defining a rear arc are in that arc).
• 6-Line Low = A/C blind down their 06:00 clock line
against targets at a lower altitude.
• Rear = A/C blind into own rear arc (clock lines 05 to 07).
• Rear Low = A/C blind into rear arc (05 to 07) against
targets at lower altitudes (unless inverted, then they are
blind against targets at higher altitudes).
• None = No blind arcs due to having rear gunners. If
rearmost crewman is killed, blind arc reverts to "rear"
except into arcs covered by other defensive guns.
Sighting & Combat: A/C may not attack enemy A/C that
started a turn unsighted or hidden in clouds (Chapter 16).
"If a Line, Only One Blind": If an A/C is in the blind arc of
one or more A/C having 6-Line Low blind arcs, only one of them
can be blind to it (randomly choose which, with "none" as a pos-
sible random choice, at the start of the Combat Phase).
Cockpit View Effects: A/C with a "Rear" blind arc but with
"fair" or "good" cockpit views can see A/C on the clock lines (05
& 07) which define the borders of the arc. A/C with "poor" views
cannot see A/C on the border lines of their rear arc.
Vertical Flight & Rear-Low Blind Spots: A/C with "6-Line
Low", or "Rear-Low" blind arcs in VC and VD attitudes are only
blind to targets in their rear which are below or above them,
respectively, as defined below, based on being in upright or
inverted bank angles:
Attitude "– Low" Target is unsighted
Blind A/C is in: If following is True:
Vertical climb, upright Vertical > horizontal range.
Vertical climb, inverted Horizontal > vertical range.
Vertical dive, upright Horizontal > vertical range.
Vertical dive, inverted Vertical > horizontal range.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Vertical Flight & Blind Arcs: A/C with "Rear" blind arcs in
VC or VD attitudes are not blind to A/C above or below them,
respectively, if vertical range is > horizontal range by 100' or
more, regardless of the deflection arc those A/C are in.
8.2 –– MOVEMENT PHASE
Ground & Naval Units: Ground or naval units always move
before any A/C move. If both sides have such units in play, each
side rolls an unmodified D10 with the lowest roll moving all of
their units first. Ground unit movement, if allowed, is denoted in
each scenario. Naval movement is explained in Chapter 26.
A/C Flight: A/C move in the order determined by agility and
initiative. The procedure for flying A/C is listed in Chapter 6.
Movement Limits: A/C move only once per game turn. Every
available full FP must be expended during the move. After all
A/C have moved, the combat phase begins.
Who's in Front?: If two A/C end moves in the same map
position, the one that entered the position last is deemed to be
targeting the other for purposes of shooting and tailing.
Combat During Movement: Some A/C combat actions may
occur during movement. If declared before the A/C's last FP,
resolve action immediately, before the next A/C moves. If de-
clared on the last FP, actions are resolved in the Combat Phase
in normal order. Possible Movement Phase A/C actions:
a. Deliberate Air-to-Air ramming (23.1). Check for collision.
b. Entering head-on danger zone (10.3). Check for collision.
c. Kamikaze reaches surface target prior to last FP (23.1).
d. Defensive fire vs. head-on attack prior to last FP (10.3).
e. Head on attacks initiated prior to last FP (10.3).
f. Reactive AAA for attacks declared prior to last FP (24)
g. Strafing & weapon releases initiated prior to last FP (19).
8.3 –– COMBAT PHASE ACTION STEPS
In the Combat Phase ground defenses fire at A/C, then A/C
fire or launch weapons at their targets, then end-of-turn items
such as bail outs are checked for. Bombs can only attack after
completing their time-of-fall (TOF) requirement. When all steps
in this phase are complete, the game turn is over.
See: Collisions (Chapter 3), AtA combat (Chapters 9 to 11),
AtG combat (Chapters 18 to 22), Kamikazes (Chapter 23), AAA
(Chapters 24 and 25), and searchlight Rules (Chapter 32).
Combat Phase actions are resolved in this order of steps:
1. Attacks by bombs whose TOF expired the previous turn.
2. Searchlight actions, then all antiaircraft (AAA) fire.
3. Defensive fire from any X, H, M class.
4. Defensive fire from any L, F class.
5. Air-to-air fixed gun and rocket attacks.
6. Launch weapons, jettison stores
7. Resolve Air-to-ground attacks - in following order:
Strafes, Rockets, TOF expiring bombs, Torpedoes.
8. Check for explosion or blast zone damage.
9. Check for prior turn fire, oil or coolant leak progression.
10. Check for air-to-air collisions, then pilot disorientations.
11. Check for forced landing and ditching results.
12. Roll for aircrew bail out attempts, crew survival.
Note: All actions within each step are considered to occur
simultaneously and no combat results are applied until all attacks
 Fighting Wings
from that step are resolved. Damage results from each step are
applied before the next step of actions are resolved.
8.4 –– BREAKING OFF FROM AIR COMBAT
Aircraft exit combat scale play by destroying all opponents or
by breaking off. Scenarios may specify that combat ends after a
certain number of game turns.
Automatic Break Off: A break offs always succeed if all
enemy A/C are destroyed, break off first, or if either of the fol-
lowing two conditions apply:
1. All remaining enemy A/C are of a lesser agility class
and total range between the nearest enemy and the
A/C breaking off is ≥ 20 hexes. For this Rule, L class is
a lesser agility than F class.
2. Regardless of agility, if the total range between the
nearest enemy A/C and the A/C breaking off is ≥ 10
hexes, and the A/C breaking off has that A/C in its rear
arc (Rule 9.3), and has both a higher current speed,
and a higher max attainable level speed.
Earned Break Off: If an auto break off is not possible, a
break off attempt may be declared at the beginning of an A/C's
move and will be successful if:
1. Allowed by the enemy players (no pursuit is planned).
2. Declared after the 5th turn of play, and: A/C ends each of
its next 5 moves further away, in range, from the nearest
moved or yet to move enemy A/C as exists at the start of
each of the fleeing A/C's moves, and no air-to-air attacks
or nullifying pursuits are declared (see below).
A/C that succeed in breaking off are immediately removed
from the combat map and are out of combat scale play.
Break Off Limits: A/C breaking off may not make attacks of
any kind (defensive fire and jettisoning stores is allowed).
• A/C may start a break off and, on a later turn, announce at
start of its move that it is ending break off to return to combat.
On an even later turn, it may start a new break off attempt.
• All A/C of a fixed formation, and H or M class A/C starting
a game turn in a flexible formation must break off together
as a unit, otherwise breaking off is not allowed.
Break Off Nullification: An air-to-air attack on the A/C at-
tempting to break-off nullifies the attempt. A pursuing A/C with
the fleeing A/C in its front arc and within nullifying pursuit range
at the end of a turn also nullifies the break-off.
Nullifying Pursuit Range = The longest range of any air-to-
air gun group having ammo; +10 if the fleeing A/C is of a lesser
agility class, or +5 if of equal or higher class; plus or minus twice
the pursuer's current end speed advantage or disadvantage; plus
twice its max attainable speed advantage, if any (use 0 if none).
Note 1 – A loaded or overloaded L class is a lesser agility
class than F class. An unloaded L class is equal to F class.
Note 2 – For max attainable speed advantage checks use an
A/C's max attainable level speed if it is in level or climbing flight
and use max attainable safe dive speed if it is in diving flight.
Exception - if the pursuer is diving and below a fleeing A/C which
is not diving, the pursuer must use its max attainable level speed
for comparison with the fleeing A/C's speed.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
21
Note 3 – An A/C whose break-off was nullified at the end of
one turn, may start a new break-off on the very next turn.
8.5 –– AIRCRAFT FORMATIONS
Air Units: The following are typical formation sizes used in
play. Leaders have rank based on the size of the formation they
lead. A squadron leader out-ranks a flight leader and so on.
Group: Two to four squadrons operating together.
Squadron: Two to four flights operating together.
Flight: Three to four A/C operating together (a leader and
two wingmen, or four A/C in two elements of two). If the latter,
the 2nd element lead is also a wingman to the first leader.
Element: Two A/C, a leader and his wingman.
Flight Leaders and Rank: L, M & H class planes typically
operate in flights of three, F class in flights of three or four. The
scenarios may designate otherwise for certain periods of the
war. If not otherwise designated, the order in which planes are
listed in a scenario, determines their position. The first plane is
a flight leader, the next one, or two, its wingmen, etc. The rank
of squadron, flight and element leads and their wingmen is also
based on this order of appearance.
Squadron Leaders: If more than one flight is in play, the first
flight leader is the squadron leader. If he becomes a casualty,
the next flight lead in line assumes that position and so on. Only
full flight leads can lead a squadron (not element leaders).
Group Leaders: If more than one squadron is in play, the
leader of the first squadron is the group leader. If he becomes
a casualty, the leader of the next squadron assumes that role,
and so on, until no original squadron leaders are left. Other flight
leads may not lead groups. Only the starting squadron leaders
are deemed to have the experience to lead larger formations.
Casualties: When setting up, the senior leader must be the
foremost A/C. During battle, that role may pass to other leaders
due to losses. A/C forward of those leaders are out of formation
until they drop back into a legal position on the new leaders. If
no eligible leaders remain to replace a fallen squadron or group
leader, that role no longer exists for initiative benefit purposes.
A wingman whose original leader is lost may attach himself
to another available element or flight leader in his squadron or
flight by attaining formation parameters on him. A new attach-
ment is permanent until the new leader is also lost, and then the
wingman may seek another leader to attach himself to.
Formation Types: Two formation types are allowed, "Fixed"
and "Flexible." At the start of tactical or combat scale play, a
formation is designated as being either fixed or flexible. Fixed
formations allow massed bombing, and concentrated defensive
fire. Flexible formations allow for more maneuvering.
A/C not meeting the appropriate parameters for their forma-
tion type are "out-of-formation" until they end a turn back within
parameters. Out-of-formation A/C may ignore any restrictions
of their designated formation but do not receive the benefits of
being in that formation. The leader of a formation is never out of
parameters of his own formation type.
8.5.1 –– FIXED FORMATIONS
Fixed Parameters: Wingmen must be stacked with their
leader if in the same hex: or, if not, they must be on or behind
their lead's 3:00 or 9:00 line (Rule 9.3), within two horizontal
 22
hexes of range, 100 feet of altitude, and 30° of their leader's
facing (2-1-3 is a memory aid).
Squadron Fixed Formations: Lower seniority flight leads
must be stacked with or within 3 hexes of a more senior flight
lead, and clearly behind that leader's 3:00 or 9:00 line, within 300
feet of altitude (but not > 100 feet away, vertically, per hex away),
and within 30° of his facing (3-3-3 is a memory aid). A chain of
such links may lead to the squadron leader. For instance, the
third flight leader can be up to 6 hexes from and 600 feet higher
than the squadron leader, as long as he is within the 3-3-3 limits
to the second flight lead who is 3-3-3 from the Squadron leader.
Group Fixed Formations: Lower seniority squadron leaders
must meet the same 3-3-3 parameters given above, to any flight
leader in the group leader's squadron.
Fixed Formation Resilience: As long as a leader in a fixed
formation does not exceed formation flight limits, his own flight
and any flights linked to him remain in fixed formation. If a junior
leader falls out-of-formation with a senior leader, his fixed forma-
tion and any flights linked to it merely become a separate fixed
formation. However, if any leader exceeds the formation flight
limits below, his particular flight's formation degrades to flexible
and cannot return to fixed during the current combat.
Flight Limits: Fixed formation A/C may:
• Only use slips, and not skids or any other maneuvers.
• Only use EZ rate if H or M, TT or less if MF, F, or L class.
• Only use upright level or shallow flight attitudes.
• Not use "dash" speed at Tac or Op-Scales (Ch. 14 & 15).
If any limits are exceeded, involved A/C are out-of-formation
for the current combat phase and the entire next game turn. If
exceeded by a leader, his particular flight permanently degrades
to a flexible formation. If exceeded by a wingman, he can regain
the fixed formation by ending a following turn in proper 2-1-3
parameters without exceeding the above limits.
Combat Limits: Fixed guns may not be fired air-to-air in a
game turn in which the A/C started the turn in fixed formation.
8.5.2 –– FLEXIBLE FORMATIONS
Flexible Parameters: Wingmen must be on or behind their
leader's 3:00 or 9:00 line (Rule 9.3) within six hexes, 600 feet,
and 60 degrees of facing (6-6-6 is memory aid). Exception, if in
the same hex or hexside as the leader, then wingmen must be
within 300 feet and 30 degrees (0-3-3 is a memory aid).
Lesser Rank Leader Parameters: A lesser rank flight
leader may not be in the same hex or on the same hexside as
his squadron leader. He may be anywhere else on or behind the
squadron leader's 3:00 or 9:00 line, within 9 hexes, 900 feet,
and 90 degrees of his facing (9–9–9 is memory aid). Flexible
formations cannot daisy chain to a squadron leader as with fixed
formations. Each junior leader must meet the 9-9-9 parameters
to be eligible for initiative benefits from the squadron leader.
Initiative Benefits: Wingmen in flexible formation may use
the higher of their own or their flight or element leader's initia-
tive number. Once per game turn, per side, a radio-transmitter
equipped leader may confer his initiative number, if higher, to one
radio receiver equipped next lower ranked flight leader within his
unit (group, squadron, flight, etc.) and within the 9-9-9 formation
parameters. Wingmen of a leader receiving an initiative number
by radio may choose to assume it as well.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Rank Order Movement & Tailing Effects: When another
A/C's initiative number is taken for any reason, movement is by
formation rank. The leader whose number was adopted (1), fol-
lowed by his wingmen (2), then next ranking leader (3), and his
wingmen (4), etc. An A/C tailing another is in the same rank as
the tailed A/C's wingmen, and must break initiative ties with any
wingmen or other tailers in that same rank. Other A/C with the
same initiative number but which did not adopt it, move normally
based on regular tie breaker rolls.
No Radios & Initiative: Wingmen in flexible formation, without
radios, must meet the 3-3-3 parameters of a fixed formation flight
lead to use their leader's initiative number, or they may tail him
if in parameters. See scenario booklets for Special Formation
Rules Exceptions. A/C with no radios have a tougher time with
situational awareness. If using own initiative and > half (rounded
up) of enemy A/C (not counting bombers on AtG missions) are in
the no radio A/C's blind spot, a –2 init. modifier applies, unless
the pilot is a veteran, ace or hero, then it is only -1.
8.5.3 –– FORMATION DEFENSIVE FIRE BENEFITS
A/C in formation may combine fire against a target as follows:
• Up to three A/C in the same flexible formation may
combine defensive fire against a single enemy A/C.
• Up to six A/C in the same fixed formation may combine
defensive fire against a single enemy A/C.
• If not in formation, no more than two A/C of any type
may combine defensive fire against a single enemy A/C.
8.6 –– PILOT QUALITY & FORMATIONS
Pilot quality Rules are in Chapter 13. Only a regular or veteran
pilot may be a group or squadron leader. A green or better pilot
may be a flight or element leader. A "hero" leading a formation
gives his wingmen and all junior ranking leaders, if in formation
parameters, +1 to their initiative rolls.
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 9 –– AIR-TO-AIR GUN COMBAT
Designer's Note: Successful air-to-air gunnery requires:
Good Firepower – The odds of damaging or destroying a
target depend on the type and quantity of projectiles striking
it. A weapon group's attack strengths on an ADC reflect those
weapons' damage potential based on rate-of-fire, projectile size,
velocity, explosiveness, and expected hits per hex of range and
are used to generate combat odds in play.
Accurate Aiming – Aiming is simulated by requiring the
target to be within a specific field-of-fire relative to the shooter
(Rule 9.2) when the shot occurs. A shooter must compensate
for the relative motion of a target during the time-of-flight of his
weapon's projectile. This leading of the target is termed deflec-
tion shooting and was difficult to do with the unsophisticated
sights available in WW II. The difficulty of deflection shooting is
modeled by adjusting the combat odds as the deflection angle
increases or decreases, making it harder or easier to obtain hits.
Luck – Sometimes an A/C had to be chopped to pieces
by gunfire to render it unflyable, while at other times a single
projectile would strike a vital component that instantly disabled
it. This is represented by the use of die rolls, the Combat Odds
Table, and the Critical Hit Tables.
 Fighting Wings
9.1 –– A/C FIREPOWER (GUN ATTACK FACTORS)
Any to all weapon groups listed on the ADC within range ef-
fective range of the target may be fired. The maximum range of
a weapon group is the last listed range in the Firepower Chart's
Gun Attack Factor table not having a dash ("–"). The total fire-
power used to resolve the attack is the sum of the attack factors
(at the given range) of all weapon groups fired.
9.2 –– FIXED GUN FIELDS-OF-FIRE
To be attacked, a target must be located within the shooter's
field-of-fire. The field-of-fire for fixed forward firing guns is defined
both horizontally and vertically by the Rules below. The fields-
of-fire for defensive guns are explained in Rule 10.5.
Gunfire Arcs: The Fixed Forward Firing Gunfire Arcs Dia-
gram (Combat Tables, page 3) depict the horizontal field-of-fire
for fixed guns on A/C facing hexsides, hex junctures, and those
situated on hexsides, both for A/C turning and not turning (Turning
= last FP expended before firing was counted toward a turning
FP requirement or last FP caused the A/C to change facing).
Use the appropriate diagram for the situation. The diagrams
may be extrapolated out for ranges > 7 hexes if necessary. If
the target lies in the shaded area between the borders of a
gunfire arc, or on the borderlines of that arc, it is in the shooter's
horizontal field-of-fire.
Vertical Field-of-Fire Limits: A shooter's flight attitude will
define the altitude spread, above or below the shooter, that the
target must be within, to be in the shooter's vertical field-of-fire.
Refer to the Flight Attitude Fixed Gun Field-of-Fire Limits chart
at the bottom of the Fixed Gunfire Deflection Determination Play
Aid (Combat Tables, page 4). Use the chart as follows:
• If Target in Same Hex or Hexside as Shooter: Cross
index the "Same Hex Attack" line of the "Shot Limits"
column with shooter's attitude. The result is the no. of
increments above or below a climbing or diving shooter,
respectively, the target can be and still be shot.
• If Target in Different Hex: Cross index the "Further" &
"Nearer" limits with shooter's attitude. The results will
define a range of altitude increments the target must be
within, in terms of increments per horizontal hex of
range to the target, to get shot. If the shooter is climb-
ing, the further and nearer limits are the maximum and
minimum no. of increments above the shooter the target
can be at to get shot. If shooter is diving, the further and
nearer limits are the maximum and minimum no. of
increments below the shooter the target must be.
Example: A shooter is in a steep climb and the target is three
hexes away. The further limit is 18 increments (6x3) above the
shooter and the nearer limit is 6 above (2x3). If the target is
outside of these parameters, it cannot be shot.
Turning Gun Arcs & Vertical Flight: A/C in vertical flight
use the "A/C Turning" gunfire arc only if they ended their move
with a facing change (by any means). The turning arc used is
the one in the direction of the facing change, regardless of the
shooter's ending bank angle.
9.3 –– DEFLECTION ARCS AND SHOOTING
Clock Codes: Aviators use clock codes to define areas about
an A/C. The imaginary line extending in the direction an A/C is
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
23
faced is the 12:00 line. Other lines emanate every 30 degrees,
and using a right hand sweep, they are named in the same man-
ner as the hour marks on a clock. Thus the 06:00 line is directly
to the rear of the A/C. The oft-heard phrases, "check-six" and
"twelve-o'clock high" stem from these clock codes. In play, clock-
hour lines define important game arcs and lines as follows (see
Combat Tables, page 3 for a diagram):
• Twelve line Clock line 12 (directly ahead)
• Front Arc Clock lines 11 to 01 inclusive,
• Three-Nine line Clock lines 03 & 09 (each beam)
• Rear Arc Clock lines 05 to 07 inclusive
• Six line Clock line 06 (directly to the rear)
Deflection Shooting: The increasing difficulty of obtaining
hits on a moving target at higher deflection angles is modeled
by multiplying the target's defense strength by a deflection factor
derived from the Fixed Gunfire Deflection Determination Play Aid
(Combat Tables, page 4) or the Defensive Fire Strength Modifiers
Diagram (Combat Tables, page 5) as appropriate. The instruc-
tions for using each are printed on the play aids themselves.
9.4 –– RESOLVING AIR-TO-AIR ATTACKS
Air-to-air shots are resolved in the Combat Phase (exception,
see Rule 10.3). A/C with fixed guns may fire them once per turn
and only at a single target. A/C with defensive guns may use
these singly or in groups, to make defensive attacks per Rule
10.5. Resolve air-to-air gun attacks as follows:
1. Determine Firepower: For fixed gun shots, sum the
attack factors of all weapon groups fired at the target.
For defensive shots, sum the deflection modified attack
strengths from each aircraft's defensive guns.
2. Determine Target Defense Strength: For fixed gun
shots multiply target's defense strength by the deflec-
tion factor derived from the play aids to get a final
defense strength. For defensive gun shots, use only the
target's basic defense strength.
3. Determine Combat Odds & Roll for LH: Divide total
attack strength by the final defense strength to get a
combat odds ratio. Roll percentile dice for a base like-
lihood (LH) number and add applicable modifiers to find
a final LH number. Cross index the final LH number with
the correct column of the Combat Odds Table to find the
number of damaging hits obtained.
Odds Rounding: When determining odds, round fractions
down to the next lower ratio found on the table (e.g. an attack
strength of 37 to a defense strength of 10 = 3-to-1 odds (written
as "3-1"). An attack strength of 40 is needed for 4-1 odds.
Excess Firepower: Whenever A/C are attacked by guns
(Chapter 10) or surface targets are strafed (Chapter 19) and the
shot odds are 1-to-1 or better, any gun attack factors in excess of
those needed to attain the current combat odds provide excess
firepower shot modifiers as given below.
Excess Firepower Modifier: Compare the final defense
strength of the target to the excess gun factors. If the excess
factors are ≥ 1/3, 1/2, or 2/3rds of the defense strength, a –5,
–10, or –15 LH modifier is applied to the shot, respectively.
Combat Resolution / Deflection Example: See Rules
supplement One, for an example of combat resolution.

 24
CHAPTER 10 –– AIR-TO-AIR WEAPONS
10.1 –– SHOT TYPES, AMMO & GUN JAMS
Fixed Gun Shots: There are two types of fixed gun shots
- snap shots and tracking shots. A snap shot occurs whenever
tracking shot parameters cannot be met.
Tracking Shots: Tracking shots are only allowed against A/C
which moved before the shooter in a game turn. To qualify for
tracking, each of the shooter's FPs in the LAST 2/3's (rounded
up) or more of its move must end with the target in its horizontal
field-of-fire, and the final deflection angle must be 60° or less.
The horizontal field-of-fire is checked after each FP is expended
during the shooter's move. The vertical field-of-fire must only be
met for the actual shot. If a tracking shot is accomplished, the
combat odds are shifted one column right to the next higher odds
(e.g., odds of 4-1 increase to 5-1).
Ammo Use: A normal snap or tracking shot is a two second
burst which uses 1 point of ammo from each weapon group fired.
Players may also opt to use half or long bursts. This must be
announced before resolving an attack.
If some weapon groups have only a half point of ammo left,
but, ≥ half the actual guns firing still have one point of ammo,
a normal shot is allowed, but with a combat odds shift of one
column left (Exception: Crack shot pilots suffer no column shift).
If more than half the actual guns used have only a half point of
ammo left, the shot is treated as a half burst.
Half Bursts: A half burst saves ammo, but shifts the combat
odds two columns left (e.g. from 3-1 to 1-1; Exception - crack
shot pilots only suffer a one column left shift). Half bursts expend
a half (0.5) point of ammo.
Long Bursts: A long burst shifts the combat odds one col-
umn right. To use a long burst, all firing weapons must have ≥
2.0 points of ammo left. To qualify for the shift, the target must
have moved before the shooter and must be in the shooter's
horizontal field-of-fire (checked after each FP is expended) dur-
ing the expenditure of any of the shooter's FPs totaling 2/3's or
more of the available FPs. For ease and speed of play the vertical
field-of-fire must only be met by the time the shot is executed.
Gun Jams: If the percentile roll used to determine shot LH
is ≥ 85 for a long burst, or ≥ 98 for other burst lengths or defen-
sive fire, one of the involved weapon groups jams. Randomly
determine which. A jamming doesn't affect the attack, but the
weapon group is lost immediately after and can only be restored
when the A/C lands and rearms or, if the gun is rechargeable in
flight and it is successfully recharged.
Rechargeable Guns: All defensive guns are rechargeable.
Rechargeable fixed guns are indicated by an underlined Type
Weapon listing in an ADC's firepower chart. A pilot or gunner is
limited to recharging one fixed or defensive weapon group per
turn. A roll of ≤ 7 on a D10 at the end of any turn in which the
A/C used ≤ HT turn rates, avoided NG, snap-rolls and vertical or
inverted flight successfully recharges a group. Only one attempt
to recharge a weapon group is allowed. If the attempt fails, the
group is jammed until the A/C lands to be rearmed.
German 30mm MK-108 and Soviet ShKAS Gun Jams:
These guns were unreliable. If the percentile roll used to determine
LH is ≥ 85 when firing a burst of any length, one participating
gun group of these types will jam, in addition to any gun groups
randomly jammed per the normal jamming rule above (includ-
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
ing other MK-108s or 7.62mm ShKAS). First determine which
of the vulnerable guns is jammed, then determine which of the
remaining guns jams due to a normal jamming result.
10.2 –– SPECIAL GUN COMBAT RULES
Range "0" Attacks: A range "0" attack can occur in the fol-
lowing three situations:
• Shooter is stacked in same hex, or hexside, with target.
• Shooter is in same hex, or hexside as target and within
200 feet of the target's altitude.
• Target on a hexside and shooter in adjacent hex on either
side of the hexside within 200 feet of the target's altitude.
Range "0" Attack Restrictions: The shooter must have
entered the range "0" position after the target did during the game
turn. The shooter must meet the "same hex" vertical field-of-fire
limits for his flight attitude, and, if not in the exact same location
as the target, the horizontal field-of-fire must also be met.
Same Hex / Hexside Arc Checks: Deflection is based on
relative facings per the play aid notes. To determine which de-
fensive guns may engage an attacker, or to see if an attacker
can tail, use the deflection arc that would apply if the attacker
were moved back one hex or hexside based on its final facing.
Range "0" Collisions: A/C making a range "0" attack must
check for collision unless they tail their target, or it is destroyed by
an explosion. If a collision occurs, it will be between the attacker
and his target unless other A/C are stacked with the target, then
it is a random check as for being stacked with an enemy.
Wing Gun Harmony: If A/C are firing wing mounted guns,
wing harmony shot modifiers apply, as given below:
Designer's Note: A/C with fixed wing guns usually had them
boresighted so that their bullet dispersion patterns were har-
monized to converge at a range of 2 or 3 hexes. Between 200
and 300 yards, the boresight harmony helps concentrate hits.
Beyond 300 yards, the bullet patterns diverge resulting in fewer
hits. The wing gun harmony shot modifiers below reflect this.
• If ≥ half an A/C's guns used in an attack (actual guns,
not weapons groups) are wing-mounted, a LH modifier
of –15 at range 2, and –10 at range 3 applies. For each
hex of range beyond three, a +10 to the LH roll applies.
• If some but < half of the guns fired are wing-mounted, a
LH modifier of –5 applies at ranges 2 and 3 and only +5
for each hex of range beyond range 3.
Unbalanced Wing Guns: If the range 0 firepower of the
guns used from one wing is ≥ twice that of the other wing, the
unbalanced recoil will cause a +15 LH modifier to shots.
Exception: A/C with an imbalance in wing guns by design
(ADC comes that way), do not suffer the unbalanced guns modi-
fier until guns are subsequently lost from either wing to meet the
firepower criteria above.
Concentrated Guns Bonus: A/C firing four or more fixed
nose guns inflict one extra point of damage per four actual guns
fired for any damage results in excess of 1 point (a miss is still
a miss, and 1 remains 1 hit). To be counted, the gun must be
within effective range (have a firepower number).
Wing Guns as Nose Guns: A/C with wing guns synchronized
to fire through a fuselage propeller treat those guns as "nose"
 Fighting Wings
guns for purposes of gun harmony and concentrated fire Rules,
(e.g., the inner wing guns of the German Fw 190 fighters), but
still count as wing guns for purposes of taking damage. Also, A/C
with guns mounted in wings but on the A/C center-line (such as
the F-82 twin Mustang) qualify for these considerations.
Oblique Mounted Fixed Guns: Some night fighters had
fixed guns mounted to fire forward and obliquely upward (OU)
or, rarely, obliquely downward (OD). Such guns use the normal
horizontal field-of-fire. OU guns use vertical field-of-fire limits listed
for an A/C two flight attitudes steeper than actual. OD guns use
the vertical limits for an A/C one flight attitude shallower. For
example, a fighter with both OU and OD guns in a shallow climb
uses the vertical limits shown for vertical climb for the OU guns
and for level for the OD guns.
Oblique Gun Limits: Oblique guns may only fire if the
shooter used TT rates or less, is not in an inverted bank angle,
has same facing as target's, has end speed within 1.0 of target's
and shooter is in level or shallow flight attitudes.
Gyro Gun Sights: If A/C equipped with lead computing gyro
sights do a tracking shot, reduce the target's deflection factor by
1 (e.g. "x3" becomes "x2"), but not to less than "x1".
Near Zero Deflection Shots: Attacks in which the shooter's
12:00 line is superimposed over the target's 6:00 line, and final
deflection angle is 30° or less, get a –20 LH modifier.
Attacks in which the shooter's 12:00 line superimposes the
target's 12:00 line and the final deflection angle is 150° or 180°
reduce the deflection factor by 1, but not to less than "x1".
Lift-Vector Mis-Match (LVMM): The best aerial gunnery
occurs when the shooter is in the same geometric plane of
maneuver as the target, meaning their lift-vectors, as defined
by bank angle, are closely matched. If not, for each bank-angle
difference, and each A/C (shooter or target) using ≥ HT rates,
apply a +05 modifier to the shot's LH number. The max possible
bank-angle difference is three steps (i.e. directly opposite; IL is
3 steps from RB (IL>LB>LV>RB)), so the max possible modifier
is +30. There are three lift vector match situations.
• If final deflection ≤ 60°, a lift-vector match occurs if the
shooter and target have the exact same bank angle.
• If final deflection = 90°, a match occurs if shooter and tar-
get are banked in the same direction (left or right), or both
are LV or both IV (e.g., IL and LB are matching).
• If final deflection ≥ 120°, a match occurs if both are upright
or both are inverted, and banked in opposite directions; or
one is upright and one inverted, and both are banked in
same direction AND can turn toward each other; or both are
upright with LV banks; or both are inverted with IV banks.
Example: Deflection is 60°, target is in LB and shooter in RB.
Both the target and shooter used HT+ rates. Lift vectors are not
matched. Their bank angles are two steps apart (LB>LV>RB).
The shot mod = +05 x 2 steps x 2 A/C = +20.
Beam Attacks: Attacks from a target's 3:00 or 9:00 line in
which the final deflection angle is 90° are "beam" attacks. If
so, shift the odds one column left since the target transits the
shooter's cone of fire quickly. If hits result, the cockpit armor
critical hit modifier is reduced by 1, but not to less than "+0".
Combined Speeds: Shooting with rapid closure or cross-
ing speeds causes a +5 LH shot modifier for each 1.0 or less of
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
25
combined speed > 6.0 between target and shooter. Determine
combined speeds per the following procedures:
1. If in a head-on attack, or the final deflection angle is
150° or 180°, sum the shooter & target end of turn
speeds (or start speeds if firing during movement).
2. If the final deflection is 120°, use faster A/C's speed
plus half the slower A/C's speed.
3. If 90°, use only the faster of both A/C speeds.
4. If 60°, use faster A/C's speed minus half the
slower A/C's speed
5. If the final deflection is 30° or less, subtract the
shooter's speed from the target's speed.
10.2.1 –– M.G. SIGHTING BURSTS FOR CANNONS
Designer's Note: Fighters with limited cannon ammo, but
having fixed nose mounted machine-guns (M.G.s) often used
these to fire continuous short bursts at an enemy A/C, adding
in cannons when hits were observed or letting off the cannon
trigger if not. This avoided wasting precious cannon ammo.
Sighting Bursts Prerequisite: The firing A/C must have
nose mounted machine guns (M.G.s) with at least 2 shots left.
Procedure: Declare using sighting bursts when the attack is
made. Resolve the shot normally. Regardless of the burst length
declared, two points of M.G. ammo are used. Sighting bursts may
be used out to range seven, even if the M.G.s are not normally
effective at that range (they add no firepower). Sighting M.G.s
are subject to jams based on the cannon burst length declared.
Sighting Bursts Effects: If at least one hit is attained, can-
non ammo is expended normally. If no damage is done, then a
half or normal burst expends only 0.5 points of cannon ammo,
and a long burst expends only 1 point of cannon ammo. Big guns
(size ≥ 37mm) never benefit from this Rule.
10.3 –– HEAD-ON ATTACKS
Head-On Criteria: A head-on attack is defined as one in
which fixed guns are used and any of the following apply:
1. The final deflection angle between shooter and target
is 150° or 180° and the firer is in the target's front arc.
2. Shooter and target firing at each other with fixed guns.
3. It is a same hex / hexside attack and firer is in a VC or
VD and the target is in the opposite vertical attitude.
Head-Ons at Range "0": Range "0" head-on attacks are
not allowed as they would result in an immediate collision. Pilots
automatically abort and avoid such attacks.
Head-Ons During Movement: As long as FPs ≥ 1/2 the
shooter's speed have been spent since its last shot, a head-on
attack may be executed immediately after the expenditure of any
FP in the attacker's move except its last. Use the start speed of
the shooter for determining combined speed in this case. After
the head-on attack is resolved the attacker must finish its move.
Response to Head On Attacks: Target A/C may return fire
with defensive and fixed guns if their field-of-fire limits are met.
If the target is in a formation, other A/C may add in defensive
guns within the formation's limits. Defensive fire is resolved first.
Head-On Limits: Head-Ons may only be initiated against
an A/C which has already moved. A/C that attack or respond to
head-ons in the Movement Phase may not fire the same guns in
 26
the Combat Phase. When A/C with fixed guns fire at each other
in a head-on attack, the worst final deflection angle either has
to contend with is applied to both.
Designer's Note: Aiming for a head-on is the same as aiming
for a mid-air collision. Two 400 mph fighters are closing at 1175
feet per second. If they exchange fire at range three (900 feet)
they are only three-quarters of a second from impact! Therefore,
a certain determination is required to do a head-on attack.
Pilot Determination Rolls: When a head-on is declared,
determine the Collision Risk Range (CRR) as described below.
Roll percentile dice for each involved pilot to check his determi-
nation. If the roll is successful, the pilot may fire, if not, the pilot
aborts the shot to take evasive action. The required roll varies
with the distance inside the CRR the shooter is at the time of the
attack. See Head-on Attack Table (Flight Tables, page 1).
Collision Risk Range: CRR size = 1/3 (rounded up) of the
combined speed, in hexes of range. If a head-on attack is declared
from within the CRR, a "Danger–Zone" (DZ) equal to one hex
of range horizontally, and + or – 300 feet vertically around both
A/C becomes active. The DZ is in effect until they pass each
other's 3:00 or 9:00 lines in the current or next game turn. To
determine how far inside the CRR an A/C is for shot or collision
modifiers, use the following formula:
Distance Inside CRR = (CRR range+1) – firing range.
Example: If CRR is five, & shot range is two, the shooter is
4 hexes inside the CRR (Distance in = (5+1) – 2 = 6 – 2 = 4).
Range to Target = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dist. inside CRR = NA 5 4 3 2 1 out out
Danger Zones (DZ): If either A/C enters the DZ of the other
during post-attack movement, a collision check is made per Rule
3.3. Collision modifiers depend on the number of hexes into the
CRR the attacker was when the head-on shot was declared (the
closer they were, the less time to avoid a collision). See Head-
On Attack Table (Flight Tables, page 1).
If a collision does not occur, or if the DZ range is avoided
entirely, the DZ goes away.
10.4 –– OTHER AIR COMBAT CONSIDERATIONS
Bombers as Fighters: H, M, or MF class with fixed guns
use the same Rules as other A/C except the modifiers for TT,
HT, and BT rates are the larger ones listed in the Air-to-Air Gun
Combat Modifiers Table (Combat Tables, Page 1).
F & L Class with Turrets: Some light bombers and fighters
were actually designed with turrets as their means of offense
(e.g., the B.P. Defiant). In all cases, their turrets have the same
limits and restrictions as defensive turrets on bombers.
Big Guns (37mm to 55mm): A/C with 37mm or larger air-to-
air cannons must fire them separately from smaller guns. They
may fire in the same game turn as smaller guns but use their
firepower only in conjunction with similar large cannons and roll
separately from the smaller guns to determine damage.
Mixed Firing with Big Guns: When both regular guns and
big guns are fired in the same turn, resolve the smaller guns'
shots first. If they score hits, apply a –05 LH modifier to the big
guns' shot roll for each hit the smaller guns scored. Sighting with
MG's does not save big gun ammo if a miss occurs.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
10.5 –– DEFENSIVE GUNFIRE
A defensive gun may fire only once per turn using normal
burst lengths (half and long bursts NA). Defensive fire may occur
during the Movement Phase in response to a head-on attack or
in the Combat Phase.
Defensive Gun Fields-of-Fire: The horizontal field-of-fire for
each defensive gun is listed on its A/C's ADC in terms of clock-
code lines. A target inside the arc defined by, or on the clock lines
themselves, is in that gun's horizontal field-of-fire. Exception: if
the clock-code is in ( ), a target on that clock code line is not in
the defensive gun's field-of-fire.
A gun's vertical field-of-fire is indicated by a pair of numbers,
each followed by a + or – symbol. These are upper and lower
limits in terms of increments per hex away in range. A "+" symbol
indicates the limit is above the firer's altitude and a "–" symbol
indicates the limit is below. A "U" means the altitude difference
is unlimited. An "A/C" means the limit is the A/C's altitude (+ or
– specific additional increments at all ranges). At range = 0, the
distances extend from the A/C's altitude to the amount shown in
the vertical field-of-fire code summary (Combat Tables, page 5).
Other field-of-fire notes may appear in the various ADC notes.
Def. Fire Procedure: Determine which A/C and guns will
fire. Take the total firepower of all guns with the same critical
rating from each A/C individually and modify it by the deflection
fraction shown in the arc diagram of the Defensive Gunfire Play
Aid (Combat Tables, page 5). Add the modified firepowers of all
A/C firing, into a single value and resolve the attack normally.
Note: Each A/C's defensive firepower is modified by its own
deflection angle relative to the target. The defensive value of the
target is not changed by deflection. The deflection Rules and
play aid for fixed gun firing do not apply to defensive fire.
Prime Shooter: The A/C contributing the strongest defensive
firepower in a combined attack becomes the "prime shooter". If
more than one A/C have the same strongest firepower, the clos-
est to the target is the prime shooter. If equally close, the player
controlling the firing A/C chooses which is the prime shooter.
Formations & Combined Fire (Rule 8.5.3): Up to two A/C
not in the same formation may combine defensive fire against a
single target. Up to three A/C in a flexible formation (Rule 8.5.2)
may combine defensive fire against a single target. Up to six
A/C in a fixed formation (Rule 8.5.1) may combine defensive
fire against a single target. See range restriction below.
Combined Fire Range Restriction: Defensive guns may only
participate in combined fire attacks if their range to the enemy
is NOT greater than the shortest range from that enemy to any
member of the formation +1. This prevents unrealistic shooting
from across a formation at targets that are very close to other
members of the formation. Exception: The defensive guns of an
A/C under attack may always fire at the attacker regardless of the
range between the attacker and any other formation members.
Defensive Gunfire Rules Summary:
1. The firepower of all guns with the same critical rating
shooting the same target is totaled into a single attack.
2. A target may not be attacked more than once per turn
by defensive fire of the same critical hit rating unless
doing a head-on attack during movement or if targeted
by a tail stinger. If doing a movement phase head-on, the
 Fighting Wings
target may be fired on in response to the head-on and
again in the Combat Phase by different guns.
3. When defensive guns from different A/C combine fire,
only the A/C related and crew quality modifiers that
apply to the Prime Shooter are used.
4. Modifiers that apply to defensive guns are:
a. Relative speed and crew quality.
b. Turn / Transition rates, in or did slips or skids.
c. Target uses tracking shot against Prime Shooter.
d. A Prime shooter using 4-gun turrets inflicts bonus
damage as if having concentrated nose gun fire.
Turret Armed Fighter Exceptions: A/C whose only arma-
ment is a turret (e.g., Defiants) may combine their fire per normal
formation Rules, or fire individually at a target, if desired. They
are exempt from defensive fire Rules 1 and 2 above.
Defensive Fire Limited Blind Spots: Anytime a gun has a
field-of-fire listing for a specific clock line (usually the 6:00 line)
which is different from other areas it can fire into, this indicates
a blind spot due to airframe interference (e.g., tall rudder fins).
Since this blind spot represents only a few degrees of blocked
fire, and A/C headings can actually be up to 15 degrees different
than depicted by the hex grid, the following applies:
"If on a Line, Only One is Blind": If an A/C is on the same
clock-line limited blind spot of one or more enemy A/C, only the
nearest enemy to it will be blind. If several are equally near, then
the one the A/C is targeting is blind. If none are targeted, then
randomly determine which will be blind, with "none" as a possible
random result. The other AC may fire defensive guns as if the
blind spot did not exist using their regular field-of-fire limits.
Defensive Fire Restrictions: Turret or manual guns may
not fire if their A/C experienced NG, did snap rolls, was inverted
at any time, or ended in vertical attitudes. Manual guns may not
fire if their A/C used > TT turns, or > EZ turns for H+ class A/C.
Turret guns may not fire if their A/C used > HT turns.
Exception: All F, MF and dive bomber (D class) gunners
may fire even if their A/C use HT rates or vertical attitudes.
Relative Speed Modifier: If the relative speed between the
prime shooter and the target is < 2.0, a –10 LH modifier applies.
If the relative speed is ≥ 2.0, a + modifier = (Relative speed –2)
x 2, applies. Determine relative speeds as follows:
1. If final deflection 180° or 150°, add speeds of both A/C.
2. If 120° add 1/2 slower plus speed of faster A/C.
3. If 90°, use only speed of fastest A/C.
4. If 60° subtract 1/2 speed of slower A/C from the faster.
5. If 30° or less, subtract def. shooter from target's speed.
Tracking Shots: If "tracking shot" used and target is the
prime shooter, a –10 LH modifier applies to defensive fire.
Acquisition Time Restriction: Defensive gunners in A/C
that have already moved in a turn may not fire on enemy A/C
which subsequently move and use more HFPs than VFPs while
transiting from any of the gunner's A/C's 60° wide deflection arcs
to the opposite arc (e.g. from the front arc (clock lines 11 to 01)
to the rear arc (clock lines 05 to 07), or left front arc (clock lines
09 to 11) to right rear arc (clock lines 03 to 05) (the gunners
cannot exchange target information and guns cannot traverse
quick enough to effectively engage such a target). Treat the
border lines between arcs as being part of either arc for this
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
27
Rule. Conversely, an enemy A/C benefiting from this rule, may
not use its own defensive guns against the gunner's A/C.
Mistaken Identity Fatricide: Bombers in battle with A/C
similar in type to friendly escorts (e.g. both are single engine
fighters) may mistakenly fire defensive guns on friendly A/C
appearing to threaten them. A bomber is "threatened" if enemy
fighters are within range 10 and a friendly fighter at range six or
less has it in its front arc and the bomber is within the fighter's
vertical fixed field-of-fire parameters. If so, do a fratricide check.
Fratricide Check: At the start of the combat phase, before
resolving defensive fire, each friendly fighter threatening friendly
bombers rolls a D10. If the result minus 3 is > its range to the
nearest threatened bomber, the enemy player may pick one of
the threatened bombers and use any one of its defensive guns
that can fire on the fighter to make a fratricide attack. If there
is an enemy A/C actually firing at the bomber which is closer in
range than the friendly A/C, in the arc of the gun chosen for the
fratricide attack, roll a D10. An Odd result cancels the fratricide
attack allowing the gun to be used on the actual enemy. Guns not
fired in a fratricide attack may still be used for normal defensive
fire. Exceptions: A/C having VERY distinctive features ignore
this Rule. The following types qualify: P-38, F4U Corsair, P-82,
Ju 87 Stuka, Me 262, Me 163 and He 162.
Tail Stinger (TS) Guns: Tail stingers are fixed self protection
guns that may only be used against attackers declaring a shot at
the defender from its 6:00 line and only if the stinger's target is
in the fixed gun vertical field-of-fire opposite the bomber's pitch
attitude. Declare the attempt, expend one shot of ammo and
roll a D10. If the roll = 1, a shot is resolved against the attacker
using the TS gun's firepower modified by deflection. As the gun
is essentially unaimed add +10 to the LH result for each hex
of range beyond 1 to the target. No other modifiers apply. The
TS shot is in addition to normal defensive fire. In some aircraft,
stinger guns were actually located in places other than the tail,
but the same Rule is used in these cases.
10.6 –– RELOADING A/C GUNS
Guns with ammo listed in a "(D x N)" format (Drums (or
boxes) of N shots) can be reloaded. Once the first drum empties,
the gun must be reloaded before it can fire again. Reloading
takes a D5 of combat turns to accomplish. As long as the A/C
avoids all parameters that prohibit manual defensive fire, and
the loader is not firing other weapons, reloading is in progress.
After a consecutive number of game turns, equal to the D5 roll
is spent reloading, the gun may return to action on the turn after
reloading is completed. If interrupted, reloading must start over
with a new D5 roll. A loader may only reload one gun at a time.
10.7 –– AIR-TO-AIR ROCKETS
Air-to-air rockets are fired in a volley. As the rockets fly out
to their maximum range, they create a danger zone. All aircraft
in the Rocket Danger Zone are eligible to be damaged.
Air-to-Air Rocketry Table: This table lists each rocket's
country, minimum & maximum ranges, minimum no. of rockets
that must be fired in an attack (a "multiple"), LH modifier per hex
of range, damage caused from a hit and its critical hit rating.
Firing Parameters: The firer must end its move in level or
shallow flight, and in an upright bank, having done no maneuvers
except slips and used only TT or less rates. The selected target
 28
must be within the firer's non-turning horizontal fixed gun field-
of-fire and within the appropriate vertical field-of-fire. As distance
increases, widen the horizontal field-of-fire as follows:
• If horizontal range 0 to 6, use field-of-fire as illustrated.
• If 7 to 12, widen field-of-fire by half a hex on either side.
Attack Procedure: Designate one A/C to be the rocket tar-
get. Use all applicable Air-to-Air Rocketry Table (Combat Tables,
page 6) modifiers based on the range and deflection relationship
between the target and shooter. Announce the number of rocket
multiples being fired. Roll for LH. A final LH of ≤ –20 results in
one hit, and each –20 under that scores another hit. Each hit
consumes one rocket multiple. Total hits achieved cannot exceed
the number of rocket multiples fired in the attack.
Rocket Danger Zone (RDZ) Targets: All A/C, friendly or
enemy, in the volley's field-of-fire, within 30 degrees of the named
target's heading, within 2.0 of its speed, and having the same
distance to altitude ratio are eligible targets.
Memory Aid: RDZ = 3-2-AR (30°, 2 speed, altitude ratio)
Hit Distribution: The first hit achieved is applied against
the designated target and any others are randomly distributed
between the target and other eligible A/C in the Rocket Danger
Zone. An A/C may be hit more than once in a single attack.
Rocket Altitude Ratio: Determine distance to altitude ratio
between firer and target in 100 foot increments and reduce this
to a ratio similar to combat odds.
Example: Target is 5 hexes away (one hex=300 feet) and
400 feet higher. = 1500 feet / 400 feet = 15 to 4 = 3 to 1.
Attack Restrictions: Targets from range 0 to a rocket's
maximum range may be fired at. If rockets hit at < min. range
they are unarmed and only roll once at 1-1 odds for damage with
a critical rating of 3. A/C firing rockets may not fire fixed guns in
the same game turn (defensive guns may be fired normally).
Combined Attacks: Stacked A/C having identical rockets,
altitudes, facings and flight attitudes which fire on the same
target may combine their rocket multiples into a single attack. If
the stacked A/C are of the same formation, use the lead pilot's
modifiers. If not, use the worst pilot's modifiers.
Air Burst Attacks: German WGr.21 rockets were fused to
explode after traveling 800 to 1,200 yards if they didn't hit any-
thing first. All rockets launched in a single attack have the same
range, which is 7+D5 hexes (determined after the rockets are
launched). Remaining rockets that reach the last hex, after all
contact attacks are resolved, explode, forming an AAA B-zone
per Chapter 24. Each rocket counts as one heavy gun and has
a fire power value = 15. One critical hit is inflicted per 2 hits on
any targets by this heavy AAA attack.
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 11 –– AIRCRAFT DAMAGE
Designer's Note: The Combat Odds Table indicates how
many damaging hits are achieved by an attack. Hits reflect the
weakening of an A/C's structure due to holes, rips, and tears in
its skin and load-bearing parts. The number of hits an A/C can
absorb is a function of size, structure and strength. ADC dam-
age factors and defense strength consider this. Many A/C were
lost to a critical component being hit (like the pilot) rather than
accumulated damage. The critical hit Rules reflect this.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
11.1 –– CUMULATIVE DAMAGE EFFECTS
Damage Factors: Each A/C has two damage factors sepa-
rated by a slash. The lower number is the maximum no. of hits
it can absorb before reaching severe damage level. The higher
number is the maximum amount of hits it can absorb and still
fly. An A/C is destroyed when hits EXCEED the higher factor.
Severe Damage Level: An A/C is severely damaged when
hits exceed its first damage factor. Severely damaged A/C suffer
maneuver and power limits. See Flight Tables, page 1 for details.
11.2 –– CRITICAL HITS
Critical Hit Ratings: Each weapon group has a critical hit
rating. If all weapon groups used have the same rating, one
critical hit is inflicted on the target for each full multiple of hits
achieved in an attack equal to the critical hit rating.
Mixed Critical Hit Ratings: If weapon groups used in an
attack have different critical hit ratings, take the hits scored and
assign them to the weapon groups used in the shot, in quantities
equal to each group's critical hit rating starting with the lowest
rating, then the next lowest and so on until all hits are assigned.
After all groups have been credited at least once for a critical
hit, continue from the beginning again if hits remain. Each time
a group is assigned hits equal to its rating, a critical hit roll is
allowed against the target.
Example: Two Bf 109Ks, each with a 30mm nose gun (rat-
ing 1.5), and two 13mm nose guns (rating 3) attack a bomber.
One gets 4 hits and the other 11 hits. Damage is assigned to the
weapon groups as follows:
109K #1 (4) 109K #2 (11)
30mm gun* (1.5) 1.5 1.5 + 1.5
13mm gun (3) 2.5 3.0 + 2.0
13mm gun (3) ––– 3.0
A/C #1's 4 hits qualify it for 1 critical roll. A/C #2's 11 hits
qualify it for 4 critical hits. Note that the final hit assignments in
each case failed to qualify for critical hits and that one of 109K
#2's 30mm critical hits will be a double critical (see below).
Critical Hit Area: For each critical hit obtained the attacker
rolls a D10 and refers to the A/C Critical Hit Area Table. The
result defines the area of the target A/C affected by the critical
damage. The defender then checks for type of critical damage.
Note: For fixed guns, the front and rear attack modifiers to
the area roll apply if the final deflection is 150° to 180°, or 0° to
30°, respectively. For def. fire, they apply if the prime shooter's
fire enters from the target's front or rear arcs or their borders.
Critical Damage Type: For each critical hit, the defender
rolls a D10 using the appropriate area Critical Effects Table
adding any protection or other listed modifiers to determine the
effect of the critical hit. Most results are self explanatory. Some
are elaborated on below. Some critical hit effects are cumulative
(e.g. two aileron hits increase banking requirements by two) and
some are one-time events (e.g., landing gear jammed). Critical
damage rolled which does not apply to an A/C or which repeat
one-time events become "no effect" criticals instead. "No effect"
critical hits are still counted as critical hits for victory points.
Resolve All Critical Hits: Resolve all critical hits resulting
from the full number of hits taken, even if the A/C cannot absorb
that many, or even if an earlier critical destroys the A/C.
 Fighting Wings
30mm to 35mm Cannon Critical Hits: Every other critical
hit caused by 30mm to 35mm guns are double criticals. If the raw
percentile roll for the shot was even, this cycle begins with the
first hit caused by the cannon. If odd, it begins with the second
hit caused. A double critical means roll twice for effects in the
area hit and treat it as two critical hits for victory points.
Big Gun (37mm+) Damage and Critical Hits: 37mm to
45mm guns do double damage and double critical hits. 50mm and
larger guns do triple damage and triple critical hits. This means
that for each hit given by the Combat Odds Table, 2 or 3 points
of damage and 2 or 3 critical hits actually occur, respectively.
Only roll once to determine the area affected by each double or
triple critical hit, then roll that many times for effects.
11.3 –– SPECIAL DAMAGE CONSIDERATIONS
Engine Power Loss Order: When A/C suffer reductions to
engine power due to critical hits, it is done in steps equal to the
columns of the Fractional Values Tables. Thus, there are five
steps of power loss: 2/3, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4 and "disabled". Reduce
power in the following order: power step losses, severe damage,
and load status. If multiple engines are in use, sum all available
power after step losses, before reducing power for other factors.
Emergency Power & Engine Loss: Engines losing more
than one step of power lose all emergency and boost capability.
A "seized engine" critical hit result, or five cumulative power step
losses on an engine disable that engine.
Engine Shut Offs: An A/C can attempt one engine shut off
per combat turn. The shut off succeeds on a D10 roll ≤ 7. The
attempt may be repeated on following turns. The shut off is
deemed complete at the start of the game turn after the turn of
the successful roll. On the turn of a shut off attempt, A/C still gain
engine power and are still at risk from engine fires, if applicable.
Shut off engines may never be restarted.
Feathering Props: Unless "feathered", a knocked out or
shut off engine's propeller windmills (spins in the wind) causing
2 decel per turn per windmilling prop. Only multi-engine A/C
with constant speed (CS) propellers can "feather" them (turn
the prop blades knife-edge into wind to reduce drag). CS props
are standard unless an ADC is noted as having fixed, 2-pitch or
non-feathering props. Only one feather attempt is allowed per
engine, and an A/C can only feather one prop per game turn.
On a D10 roll ≤ 7 feathering succeeds, if not, windmilling is
permanent. Feathering is complete at the start of the turn after
that of the successful roll. Windmill decel still applies on the turn
of feathering. If seized, an engine's prop cannot be feathered.
Power Loss Max Attainable Speed Reductions: If all
engines are out of operation, or at idle, use the idle power max
attainable speed limit and effects. If at least one engine is at
above idle power, each step of power loss in a single engine A/C
and each two steps of loss (spread over any engines) on twin-
engine A/C, reduces max attainable speed by 0.5. For A/C with
more than two engines, each "2 to N" steps of power loss (N =
no. of engines) reduces max attainable speed by 0.5. A disabled
or shut off engine = five steps lost.
Example: A tri-motor A/C has one engine out and three steps
of power loss spread over the other two for a total of 8 steps of
power loss. Its max attainable speed is reduced by 1.5 (0.5 for
the first 3 steps, 0.5 for the next 3, and 0.5 for the last 2 steps
since each 2 to 3 steps count).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
29
Multi-Engine Throttle Choice & Speed Effects: If engines
are using different throttle settings, treat an engine at idle as a
4-step power loss, and one in cruise as a 2-step loss.
Power Loss Climb Reductions: A/C losing ≥ 1/3 or ≥ 1/2
(rounded down) of total available power steps (5 per engine)
have their climb rates and ceilings reduced, as if their load status
(Chap. 12) were one or two steps > actual. If this makes load
status > overloaded, overload climb rate & ceiling are halved.
Multi-Engine A/C Unbalanced Power Effects: Unless accel
taken from each wing's engines is equalized by adjusting throttles,
A/C with more wing-mounted engines running on one wing than
the other must use more rudder to compensate for unbalanced
thrust. For the rudder to be effective, minimum speeds increase
as given below. Failure to maintain minimum speed in this situ-
ation invokes a Turn Stall instead of a normal stall (Rule 4.6):
• If a wing has one more running engine than the other,
increase all min. speeds by 0.5.
• If a wing has two or more running engines than the other
wing, or the rudder is knocked out by critical hits increase
all min. speeds by 1.0 (cumulative if both apply).
Speed Loss Clarification: Reductions to an A/C's max
level speed and limits to accel carry (Rule 4.4) always refer to
the A/C's max "attainable" speed. A/C faster than max attainable
level speed suffer excess speed decel (Rule 4.2).
Throttle Hits: For multi-engine A/C, one engine is affected
as directed; and roll D10 again. If odd, another engine suffers
same effect and roll again. If even, no further engines affected.
Crew Losses: In multi-crew A/C randomly determine which,
surviving crew, are wounded or killed in action (WIA or KIA). WIA
non-pilot crew cannot function. WIA pilots add "wounded" modi-
fiers to their actions. WIA recruit pilots may not make attacks of
any kind. In A/C with no pilots left, a bombardier or navigator
may take-over and fly the A/C as if a WIA recruit if they make a
one-time percentile roll of ≤ 40. Two wounds kill a crewman and
disable pilots. A third wound kills a pilot.
Designer's Notes: Non-pilot crew are assumed to ignore minor
wounds, so a WIA result on them equals a disabling wound. The
first WIA result to a pilot is a distracting, but not disabling wound.
Disabled Pilots: A second WIA result disables a pilot. Roll
a D10. If roll ≥ 6 = pilot killed, else the result x 2 is the no. of
combat turns he can function before becoming disabled. Until
then, double all WIA modifiers for applicable events to this pilot.
Once disabled, a pilot can perform no actions except bail out.
Wound Mortality: For each disabled pilot / WIA crew, roll
a D10, and multiply by 3. The result is the number of Op-turns
they can survive without medical help. If not parachuted to the
ground, or landed by the end of the last Op-turn, they die.
Oxygen Loss: There is no effect for first 15 game turns.
Reduce this by 5 turns per altitude band above ML the A/C is at
when oxygen lost. Note - If A/C descends to a lower band, shift
to new band's limits. If A/C still in ML or higher band after time
limit expires, roll a D5 and D10 at end of each turn. Add 1 to D5
roll for each band above ML A/C's current band is. If modified D5
roll > D10 roll, difference is no. of active crew randomly tested
for unconsciousness. Roll a D10 for each. Odd = unconscious.
Once A/C starts a turn below the ML band, unconscious crew
recover after a no. of turns determined as for GLOC (Rule 5.7).
 30
Back Up O2: H or larger class A/C can sustain one "Oxygen
knocked out" critical with no effect due to back up systems. The
second such hit invokes the above effects.
Radio Loss: The A/C must be in fixed formation parameters
(but not necessarily in fixed formation) to use its leader's initiative.
If bounced by the enemy see Rule 14.6. Ground radar intercept
modifiers or GCI control for encounters is lost. Apply "No Radio"
formation join up modifiers (Chapter 15).
Navigation Instruments Lost: If not in formation with a
navigation equipped A/C, Roll D10 each Op-turn. A roll ≤ 3 =
Major nav. Error (stay in place one Op-turn). If ≤ 6 = Nav. error
(lose D5 end., spend 2 Op-MP in place). If 7 to 10 = no effect.
Flight Instruments Lost - See Rules 16.2 and 32.3.2.
Explosions: Exploding A/C may damage nearby A/C. A/C
at range "0" to an explosion suffer a 1-1 odds attack and A/C
at range "1" suffer a 1-4 attack (1 critical per 2 hits). If explosion
was due to detonation of carried weapons, that A/C's crew is
KIA, and 10% (round up) of the soft attack strength of all the
weapons is a minus LH modifier to attacks against nearby A/C.
Gear / Flap Systems Loss: A/C's retractable landing gear
trails down unless jammed up by a previous result (see Rule
16.3.1 for drag effects), flaps are jammed in place. A/C with fixed
gear, snow skis, or seaplanes with floats or boat hulls, have these
items damaged and suffer landing gear damaged effects.
Fuel Fed Fires: Treat as a major fire and major fuel leak. If
it reduces to a minor fire, treat as steady fuel leak.
Elevator Damage: The A/C is restricted to TT or less turns
and transitions. A second elevator hit = tail structure hit.
STOP! PLAY TRAINING SCENARIO 3
CHAPTER 12 –– AIRCRAFT LOADS
The A/C Stores Table included with each game details the
types of stores which can be carried and the time frame they
become available. Each ADC provides information about the
number of pylons or bomb bays A/C have to carry stores.
Station Limits: Each station or bomb bay has a listed weight
limit. Stores in excess of that limit may not be loaded on that
station or bay. A/C are limited in the total weight they can carry,
regardless of where the stores are loaded.
Load Limits & Penalties: A/C have two load point numbers
listed (e.g., "3–7"). Each store has a load point rating (see A/C
Stores Table). When the total load carried is ≥ the first number,
the A/C is "loaded". When the load is ≥ the second number the
A/C is "overloaded". Such A/C suffer the flight penalties detailed
in the Flight Tables, page 1. Penalties for being loaded or over-
loaded are cumulative with those for severe damage.
Load Effect on Ceiling: Each A/C has three altitude ceilings
listed. They are for normal, loaded and overloaded conditions,
respectively. A/C starting above their allowed ceilings double all
climb, turn and maneuver decel, and available power is halved.
If > 3,000 feet above an allowed ceiling, engine power = zero.
Internal Bomb Bays: Do not use the load points given on
the Weapons Tables for bombs carried in bays. Those take into
account aerodynamic drag which does not apply. Instead, the
load for weapons in bays is 1 point for each full 500 lbs. of weight
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
carried and 0.5 points for each 250 lbs. or less left over. Weapons
carried in a bay may not be dropped unless the bay doors are
open at the start of a turn. The act of opening or closing the doors
requires a full turn to accomplish and is declared at the start of
an A/C's move and considered complete at the start of the next
turn. On any turn bays are opening, open, or closing, the A/C
incurs 1 decel. Unless F or D class, A/C with bombs in bays may
not deliberately use inverted banks or select NG transitions.
Snap-Open Bay Doors Exception - Spring held snap-open
bay doors do not have to be opened or closed and no decel is
incurred on the turns when bombs are released through the doors.
Examples of A/C with snap open doors include the Blenheim and
Battle bombers, and the IL-2 Shturmovik.
Jettison or Release of Loads: At the tactical or operational
scale, tanks, bombs, etc. may be jettisoned from A/C by declaring
the act at the end of their movement each turn. At the combat
scale, the act of jettisoning, firing or dropping stores is normally
declared and accomplished in the Combat phase. A/C may not
release free fall weapons if they end a game turn in an inverted
attitude or incur negative-Gs. Jettisoned weapons, being unaimed,
are deemed to fall far enough from any targets to do no harm.
Drop Tanks: When drop tanks are jettisoned in operational
or tactical play, make a LH roll on the Attrition Table (Operational
Tables, Page 4) substituting the number of tanks dropped for
the "Total A/C" entry. The Number of Aircraft Affected result is
the number of drop tanks that stick. Randomly determine which
A/C have stuck tanks. An A/C is eligible for the random choosing
until it has stuck tanks equal to the tanks it carries. When drop
tanks are jettisoned in combat scale play, roll a D10 for each. A
result ≥ 10 indicates a stuck tank. Add +1 to jettison roll if A/C is
above its max listed level speed.
Stuck Tanks: A/C having stuck tanks may re-attempt to jet-
tison them on a later turn. Roll a D10 per stuck tank. A result ≥
7 means the tank is permanently stuck, otherwise, it drops. Add
+1 to jettison roll if A/C is above its max listed level speed.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CHAPTER 13 –– CREW QUALITY
Die roll modifiers for different pilot qualities apply to initiative
rolls and other events on various tables. Four levels of pilot and
A/C crew skills are defined:
1. Recruits – minimal flight and combat training.
2. Green – full training, inexperienced in actual combat.
` 3. Regular – well trained, and/or combat experienced.
4. Veteran – Ample combat experience.
Squadron or group leads must be regular or veteran. Flight
or element leads may be green. Some pilots may also be aces,
heroes, crack shots, or have keen eyesight (Rule 13.3).
13.1 — INEXPERIENCED PILOT LIMITS
Recruit Pilots:
• May not snap roll, use ET rates, NG turns, or do vertical
rolls. May not tail enemy A/C at all.
• Always fire long bursts even if it doesn't help.
• May not attack if wounded. Risk GLOC if using BT rates.
Green Pilots:
• May not "Tail" enemy unless, in addition to normal crit-
eria, their 12:00 line superimposes tailed A/C's 6:00 line.
 Fighting Wings
• May not deliberately use half bursts or NG turns.
Note: NG transitions may be used by greens & recruits.
13.2 –– PILOT & CREW GENERATION TABLES
If directed by scenarios to, or if players choose to randomly
generate pilots and crews for A/C, use the tables below.
Generation Table Directions: Roll a D10 for each A/C in
play. Cross index the result with the national training standard
to obtain crew quality. Pilots and their entire crew receive the
same general quality. Copilots on multi-pilot A/C will be of one
quality level less than the Pilot (but not < recruit).
The national training standard for each side is listed in the
general scenarios section of the scenario booklet. For pilots
only, roll a D10 for each characteristic. A result in the listed range
awards the characteristic. Ace and Crack Shot characteristics
do not apply to M or H pilots, only to F, L, and MF pilots.
National Training Standard (Roll a D10)
Quality Excellent Good Average Limited Poor
Recruit NA 1 1 1 - 2 1-3
Green 1 - 2 2 - 3 2 - 4 3 - 6 4-6
Regular 3 - 8 4 - 8 5 - 9 7 - 9 7 - 10
Veteran 9 - 10 9 - 10 10 10 NA
Pilot Characteristics (Roll D10)
Quality Keen Eyes Ace Hero Crack Shot Gifted
Recruit 1 NA NA NA NA
Green 1 NA NA 1 NA
Regular 1 - 2 1 1 1 1
Veteran 1 - 2 1 - 3 1 - 2 1 - 2 1-2
Prior Kills: A pilot rolled as an ace gets to roll for the crack
shot characteristic twice. The number of kills an ace starts play
with is 4 + D5. For each non-ace veteran or regular, roll a D10
– 6. This will give them from zero to four kills max. Double the
number of prior kills rolled for veteran aces, and for Luftwaffe
and Japanese aces whether veteran or not.
13.3 –– PILOT ONLY CHARACTERISTICS
Keen Eyes – Helpful modifiers to intercept & first sight rolls.
Ace – Helpful modifiers to initiative & combat. Any ace with
20+ kills also becomes a hero. If shot down, –1 initiative to side.
Hero – Has reputation for bravery, thus providing the following
initiative benefit: If a formation leader is a hero, any wingmen or
junior leads in proper formation parameters receive +1 to their
own initiative rolls. If shot down, –1 initiative to side.
Crack Shot – Allows beneficial modifiers for gun attacks
and may influence the location of critical hits at ranges ≤ 2. If
range ≤ 1, they may pick a specific engine or defensive gun to
be affected, if called for, rather than using random selection.
Gifted Flyer – Exceptional pilots are capable of wringing
extra performance out of A/C. As such they:
• May use vertical flight attitudes in MF class fighters.
• Receive flight related modifiers per the game tables.
• May use HT, BT or ET rates in unslatted A/C at speeds 0.5
< normal for 1 extra decel penalty per 30° of facing or tran-
sition and a +15 shot modifier for "< minimum speed". If
flaps also deployed they discard the 1 extra decel per 30°
of facing or transition, but still pay the deployed flap decel.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
31
• Use TT or higher rates in slatted winged A/C at speeds 0.5
< normal with decel and shot penalties as above. If flaps are
deployed, ignore the extra decel for turns and transitions
and the +15 shot penalty. Still pay the deployed flap decel.
Crew V.P.s: For each pilot lost in play (KIA, MIA or POW), the
V.P. value below is awarded to the other side. If a pilot or crew-
man's fate is rescued or escapes (Rule 13.5), V.P.s are given to
their own side to reflect the increase in morale provided.
Crew Quality If Lost If Returned
• Each veteran pilot 5 10
• Each regular pilot 3 5
• Each green pilot 1 2
• Each recruit pilot 0 1
• If ace or hero (each) 2 5
• If crack-shot, or gifted (each) 1 0
• Each non-pilot crewman 0 1
13.4 –– CAMPAIGNS & PILOT IMPROVEMENT
If playing a campaign in which the combat careers of pilots
are tracked from game to game, improvements in pilot quality
can occur after participating in a number of combat missions, or
scoring kills, as a pilot of the indicated quality. A/C crews improve
when their pilot does. At the end of a mission in which the indicated
mission count is met, or an air-to-air kill is earned, roll a D10.
A result ≤ to the number in ( ) means the pilot improves. If not,
he may roll again after each following mission until he does. A
“combat” mission means the pilot attacked enemy ground targets
or was in an air battle.
• Recruit–to–Green (8): 3 missions, one or more kills.
• Green–to–Regular (6): 5 missions, one or more kills.
• Regular–to–Veteran (4): 5 missions, one or more kills.
• Ace (Automatic at 5 kills): Roll once for crack shot after
each set of 5 kills until crack shot is gained.
• Hero (4): Roll after any game in which players feel the
pilot performed in such a manner as to be deserving of a
major medal (vague I know, but it was in real life also).
Examples: 3+ kills in 1 mission, solo sinking of warship.
• Gifted (1): Roll once upon becoming a regular or veteran.
13.5 — BAILOUTS
Bail Outs & Exits (rule of thumb): Single seat A/C have
one exit. Two seat A/C have separate exits for each crewman.
Single engine A/C with more than two crew have one exit for
the pilot and a second for the rest of the crew. Multi-engine A/C
with three or more crew have normal exits equal to the number
of engines on the plane, up to a maximum of three, all usable
by anyone. H and SH class A/C may open fuselage bomb bays
to create another exit. A jammed exit critical hit causes a +30
modifier to the bail out roll for anyone using that exit (NA if the
exit is an already open canopy or an "open style" no canopy
cockpit. Each exit can accomodate one crewman per bail out
attempt (random who on multi-crew aircraft).
One bail out attempt is allowed per exit per 3,000 feet or less
of altitude the A/C had at the time of its destruction (roughly two
attempts per band per exit). One attempt is allowed per exit per
game turn to an A/C still in flight (not to exceed the above limit
if A/C has severed cables or is in an unrecoverable spin). An-
nounce the intent at the beginning of the A/C's move. If the last
pilot is one of those bailing out (thus, not at the controls), the
A/C moves by random flight (Rule 5.7) on the turn of bail out.
 32
Procedure: In the Combat Phase (step 12), roll percentile
dice for each crew member bailing out and consult the Bailout
Table (Operational Tables, page 3). If, after adding modifiers,
the result is in the required range, the bailout is successful.
Limits: The first bailout attempt automatically fails if the
A/C used BT+ rates in their final move or had a speed ≥ 10.0.
Bailouts are not allowed from a destroyed A/C if it was at ≤ 300
feet above the ground when destroyed.
Free-Falling: If bailing out above the VL band, aircrew are
assumed to fall clear of a battle before opening chutes and are
removed from play. When a crewman bails out in the VL band, he
may open his chute immediately, falling 100 feet while it opens,
or free-fall one or more turns at the end of which the parachute
may be opened. Each turn of free-fall results in an altitude loss
of 3+ a D5 in increments, but never less than the preceding turn
of free-fall. Impacting the ground before parachute opening is
fatal. If opening a parachute without free-falling roll a D10, on
a "1" they perish (the parachute entangles on A/C, or crewman
strikes airframe). Place a parachute marker in the bailout hex.
It descends 100' per turn.
Shooting Parachutists: Parachuting crew may be attacked
with A/C guns or AAA. A parachute has a defense factor of 20
(it's mostly hollow) and can take 5 hits without being destroyed.
No deflection modifiers apply. If hits are achieved, roll a D10, on
a "1" the parachutist is killed. Non-Japanese attackers must roll
a D10 once for a result ≥ 7 to go through with the first attack on
a hapless parachutist (a fail = no further attempts).
Post Bailout Fate: The fate of surviving crew must be de-
termined in order to see if they can be returned to combat later
in a campaign. If aircrew successfully bail out or crash land, roll
percentile dice at the end of the game to see what their fate is
on the Aircrew Bailout / Crash Fate Table (Operational Tables,
page 3). The four possible results are:
1. MIA (Missing in Action): The crewman is lost forever
(drowned at sea, died on the ground, or died in prison).
2. POW (Prisoner of War): A POW will be repatriated
after the war ends but is out of the campaign game.
3. E & E (Escaping & Evading): Not captured, but not
rescued either, hiding out with friendly underground
agents. An E & E crewman rolls three D10s. The sum
is the no. of weeks he is out of campaign play.
4. Rescued: Rescued aircrew may re-enter campaigns.
Roll two D10s, the sum of the results is the number of
days that the aircrew will miss due to injury or rescue
delays. After missing the required days, the aircrew can
be put back on the roster and resume flying missions.
YOU MAY NOW PLAY ALL
AIR COMBAT SCENARIOS
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
PART FOUR – FLYING MISSIONS
CHAPTER 14 –– TACTICAL SCALE PLAY
Designer's Note: Opposing formations often sighted each
other long before either was in attack range. Sometimes, when
a sighting occurred, one side would have a distinct position ad-
vantage and the opposing side would seek to nullify that, or flee,
before combat was joined. Occasionally, one side would surprise,
or "bounce" the other. The Tac-Scale covers these situations.
"General" and "Mission" scenarios use tactical scale play
and the Tactical Maneuvering Grid (TMG) to set up combat scale
encounters between opposing forces.
Relative Time: One tactical turn (Tac-turn) is one minute of
time. 15 combat turns equal one Tac-turn.
Tactical Maneuvering Grid: The TMG is the play area on
which attacking A/C maneuver against enemy A/C until combat
commences or they break off. The TMG position the attackers
hold when combat commences determines where they set up
relative to the defender for combat play.
The TMG is composed of four rings, termed "range bands,"
labeled "A" to "D" surrounding the center "X" box. Each range
band is an abstract distance from the defender and no specific
scale is set for them. The "A" band represents a distance of a few
hundred yards while the "D" band represents the max distance
for effective maneuvering against the defender which could be
several thousand yards. Range bands are further divided into
12 sectors each corresponding to "deflection arcs and certain
clock lines" around the defender's A/C.
Setting up for Tactical Play: First, determine the relative
altitudes of the opposing sides (Rule 14.1). If needed, determine
which side obtains "first sight" (Rule 14.2) to become the attacker.
Once the roles of attacker and defender are defined, tactical
scale play may begin.
Sequence-of-Play: Each Tac-turn has these phases:
1. Aircraft Placement Phase (Rule 14.3)
2. Attacker's Movement Phase (Rule 14.4)
3. Defender's Intercept Phase (Rule 14.5)
4. Defender's Sighting Phase (Rule 14.6)
5. Defender's Response Phase (Rule 14.6.1)
14.1 –– RELATIVE ALTITUDES
Relative altitudes determine who is higher or lower for first
sight modifiers. The defender starts at the base altitude and the
attacker uses his relative altitude as set per the Rules below.
For General Scenarios: Players pick one side to be at a
mutually agreed to base altitude in levels, or they may roll two
or more D10 and sum them to randomly generate one in levels.
After the base altitude is set, determine relative altitudes.
For Mission Scenarios: Per Chapter 15, A/C may have ran-
dom, unintentional, or deliberate encounters with enemy forces
during mission scale movement (Rules 15.5.2 to 15.7). Relative
altitudes for each type of intercept is handled as follows:
• Random Encounter (15.5.2): The base altitude is that of
the leader of the side having the encounter. The randomly
appearing A/C determine relative altitude as given below.
 Fighting Wings
• Unintentional Encounter (15.6): If encounter is due to OMT
horizontal movement, use altitude each side's leader had
when encounter occurred and relative altitude is not deter-
mined. If encounter is due to OMT vertical altitude shifts, the
leader's altitude of the non-moving side is the base altitude.
The moving side determines relative altitude as given below.
Note: If a side is dragged to a new OMT position as part of
its intercept or unintentional encounter, relative altitudes are
determined as if in a deliberate encounter below.
• Deliberate Encounter (15.7): The intercepted leader's
altitude is the base altitude. The interceptors may, if within
5,000 feet of the other side, use their current altitude as a
start altitude or they may determine relative altitude as
given below. If further than 5,000 apart, the interceptors
may shift to exactly 5,000 feet from the intercepted A/C or
determine relative altitudes as given below.
Relative Altitude Procedure: Each side rolls a D10 and
halves the result retaining fractions. Subtract the low roll from
high roll. In general scenarios or random encounters the result
is the difference in thousands of feet the other side is from the
base altitude. If the other side's roll was higher, it will be above
the base altitude. If lower, it will be below the base altitude.
In all other mission scenario situations, the higher or lower
force is established by the altitude they held relative to the other
when the encounter occurred.
Note 1: If the defending force includes close escorts (Rule
15.5.1), the attacker may set his relative altitude in reference to
either the escort or the escorted A/C altitudes (Rule 14.3).
Note 2: The relative altitude procedure cannot place A/C to a
higher altitude than they started with if intercepting lower targets,
or to a lower altitude than they started with if intercepting higher
targets. In this case, use the original start altitude.
Relative Altitude Example: An Allied formation is at 17,500
feet when they have a random enemy encounter (Rule 15.5.2).
They roll a 7 which becomes a 3.5. The enemy rolls a 2 which
becomes a 1. The difference is 2.5 meaning the enemy will start
TMG play 2,500 feet below the Allies (at 15,000 feet).
14.2 –– FIRST SIGHT DETERMINATION
The side gaining first sight is the "TMG Attacker" and the other
side is the defender. In mission scenarios the side successfully
initiating a deliberate encounter (Rule 15.7) automatically wins
first sight. For random or unintentional encounters in mission
scenarios, or for general scenarios, first sight is resolved normally.
First Sight Roll: Both sides roll percentile dice. Add the modi-
fiers from the Sighting Modifiers Table (Tactical Scale Tables).
The side with the higher result gains first sight.
Tied First Sight: In a tie, both sides sight each other at the
same instant and must roll another D10 with no modifiers. The
high roll is the TMG attacker. Roll as needed to break ties. After
determining relative start positions as indicated below, skip to
the Defender's Response Phase since the attacker is already
sighted and from there continue Tac-scale play.
Unescorted Formations: If a side consists of unescorted M
or H class A/C not on air-to-air missions, first sight is awarded to
the other side unless its A/C are also not on an air-to-air mission.
In this case, the encounter may be ignored if both sides decline
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
33
combat, otherwise they fight with first sight resolved normally.
Escorts and First Sight: If the side having first sight has
close escorts, none, some or all escorts may attack the other
side. If none attack, that side becomes the TMG defender. If any
escorts attack, the escorted A/C can be left out of play.
14.3 –– AIRCRAFT PLACEMENT PHASE
Use this phase when setting up Tac-turn one and when new
aircraft enter the tac-scale engagement per Rule 15.9.
Defender Placement: All defending A/C are in the center-box
of the TMG (no marker required). Escorted A/C declare forma-
tion type (fixed or flexible). Escorts use flexible formation and
declare their altitude relative to the escorted A/C during combat
scale set up. They may be 1,000 below to 3,000 feet above.
Attacker Placement: Attackers always start in a flexible
formation and determine their start position as follows:
Roll a D10. Add applicable TMG Start Position modifiers. Place
a numbered formation marker (representing the attacker's A/C)
on the outskirts of the deflection arc or clock line sector equal to
the modified result. Next, roll another D10. Add applicable Start
Range modifiers. Shift the attacker's marker to the resulting range
band of its previously determined deflection arc or clock line.
Note: Some Start Position modifiers may be + or – at the
attacker's option. If so, decide if + or – before rolling the die,
and how much after rolling the die.
TMG Start Altitude, Attitude and Speed: Start altitudes are
per Rule 14.1. For general scenarios and random, or unintentional
mission encounters, both sides start in level flight at combat
cruise speed, or at the highest value allowed by the speed used
for their Op-scale movement (Rule 15.4.1).
In deliberate mission scale intercepts the defenders start in
level flight at their Op-scale speed. Attackers start in level flight at
up to max attainable speed if using an unchanged start altitude.
If using relative altitude or shifts to within 5,000 feet, they may
start in a SHD (between max level & half way to max dive speed)
or a STD attitude at any dive speed if intercepting from above,
or in a SHC or level flight at combat cruise if from below.
Altitude Exception: If initiating a follow-on TMG combat
from an Op-scale "engaged" status (Rule 14.9) the attackers
are placed, as a group, in the C band space of their choice at
any altitude within 3,000 feet of the defender's base altitude.
14.4 –– ATTACKER'S MOVEMENT PHASE
New attackers just placed on the TMG do not get to move
or act in this phase. Their placement constitutes their drift and
move on their turn of appearance. A/C or formations already on
the TMG move and act per the following steps:
a. If multiple attackers exist, determine initiative order.
b. Commit to combat if allowed and desired.
c. Adjust all attacker positions due to relative flight path drift.
d. Move attackers one by one in initiative order.
(a) Initiative: Roll a D10 for each formation or solo A/C on the
TMG (break ties per Rule 8.1). Add +1 each if formation leader
or pilot is a veteran, ace or hero, -2 if green and -4 if a recruit.
The highest rolls act or move first in the following phases.
 34
(b) Commit to Combat: An attacker in the A or B band and
within 3,000 feet of any defender's altitude may initiate combat
before any drifts or moves are applied.
(c) Relative Flight Path Drift: The defender's flight path
causes attackers to drift one or more spaces per turn toward the
defender's rear arc. Drift is from one band to the next, or along
the same band, to the defender's rear arc and eventually off the
TMG (to imaginary bands beyond the D band equal to the rate
of drift) as indicated by arrows on the TMG. If an attacker drifts
off the TMG and does not or cannot reenter during its move, it is
removed from play (disengages). Re-entry must be to the same
space from which A/C drifted off. If any attacker ENDs this phase
in the defender's box within 1,500 feet of any defender, combat
is automatically initiated before attacker's movement begins.
(d) Attacker's Movement: Attackers may move forward,
backward or sideways into adjacent TMG spaces in any combina-
tion of moves up to their allowed limit, but not diagonally. If the
defender's box is entered during movement while within 1,500
feet of any defender, combat is automatically initiated. If an at-
tacker deliberately exits the TMG, it disengages. After movement,
declare and record the attacker's ending flight attitude, speed
and altitude. Below is a list of allowed moves:
Fly Level: Move up to two spaces while staying level, gaining up
to 200 feet, or descending up to 400 feet. Speed is set between
combat cruise and maximum attainable level speed, inclusive.
Flight attitude may be level, shallow climb or shallow dive.
Dives: Move up to two spaces, or three if in second or subse-
quent turn of continuous diving. The attacker must lose from
500 to 5,000 feet of altitude. Speed may be set at any speed
≥ max attainable up to max dive speed with at least 500 feet
dived for each 0.5 of speed above max attainable chosen. Com-
pressibility is automatic if A/C attain transonic speeds. Flight
attitude may be any dive attitude, or level if alt. dived ≤ 2,500.
Climbs: Move one space and gain ≤ half of A/C's listed rate
of climb (rounded up to next 100 feet) in altitude (Speed may
be set between climb and combat cruise, inclusive and flight
attitude may be level or shallow climb), or remain in place and
gain altitude > half the listed rate up to the full rate of climb
(Speed becomes climb speed with A/C in any climb attitude).
Note: If mixed A/C types are in a formation, all are restricted
to the abilities of the least capable one. A/C logs are not needed
until combat scale play begins.
Combat Initiation: If combat is initiated for any reason, skip
the Defender's Intercept Phase and proceed to the Defender's
Sighting Phase, even if some attackers have not yet moved. All
formations set up for combat per their TMG positions, relative
to the defender, as held the instant combat was initiated.
A/C Speed Definitions:
• Endurance Speeds: In Op-scale play A/C may use
endurance speed to save gas. If entering tactical scale
play at endurance speed, start speed is A/C's adjusted
minimum speed up to 1/2 max attainable speed (if adj.
min speed > 1/2 max attainable, then end. speed NA).
• Fighter Cruise (F & MF): Any speed > endurance
speed up to the lesser of max attainable –0.5 in any
band, or max listed level –1.0 if in HI or higher bands, or
max listed level speed –1.5 if in MH or lower bands.
• Bomber Cruise (L, M, & H): Any speed > endurance
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
speed up to the lesser of listed max level –1.0 in
any band or max attainable speed –0.5.
• Dash Speeds (all classes): Anything > cruise speeds.
• Climb Speeds (all classes): The higher of listed mini-
mum speed +1.5, or adjusted minimum speed.
14.4.1 –– MULTIPLE TMG ATTACKER LIMITS
Multiple attackers can be on the TMG if or when:
a). New attackers join the engagement because their Time-
of-Intercept (TOI, Rule 15.9) has been reached, or...
b). An attacking formation splits into smaller formations or
individual A/C, each moving separately.
Limits: A formation may split up once per Tac-turn at the start
of its move into two parts of any size. When splitting, formation
integrity must be kept, meaning, each part must have its own
leader. Exception: veteran pilots may split off as individuals as
long as their wingmen can be placed with another leader.
14.4.2 –– A/C SPEED DIFFERENCES
Extra spaces of movement on the TMG may be allowed or
required due to speed differences as follows:
• For each 2.0 points of speed the defender is faster, the
attacker suffers one extra space of relative drift.
• For each 2.0 points of speed the attacker is faster, the
attacker may move an extra space.
14.5 –– DEFENDER'S INTERCEPT PHASE
When new formations from the defender's side enter the
Tac-Scale engagement per Rule 15.9, use this procedure:
• Each new formation entering play selects one of the
Attacker's formations anywhere on the TMG to engage.
• The new arrivals and the engaged attackers are removed
from play and put into a separate battle. The engaged at-
tackers may invoke the right-of-combat refusal Rule below
if their formation is large enough.
Attacker's Right-of-Combat Refusal: If the engaged attack-
ers have ≥ twice as many A/C as the new arrivals, A/C in excess
of twice the enemy may be retained on the TMG to continue the
original engagement. If using this Rule, formation integrity must
be maintained (existing flights, elements, etc., may not split up
when moved to another battle or retained).
Surprise Status: New arrivals always surprise attackers on
the TMG and set up for combat per Rule 14.7 with their leader
on the 6:00 line of any one engaged attacker using the A band,
or center "X" box parameters as desired. Relative altitudes are
per Rule 14.1. The former attackers are allowed one sighting
attempt per Rule 14.6 with attendant effects on set up.
14.6 –– DEFENDER'S SIGHTING PHASE
After the Attacker's Movement Phase, even if combat has
been initiated, the defender can try to sight the attackers. For each
attacking formation on the TMG the defender rolls percentile dice
and adds applicable modifiers from the Sighting Modifiers Table
(Tactical Scale Tables). If the final result is ≥ to the percentile no.
listed for the range band the attacker is in, they are sighted and
remain sighted for rest of TMG play. If the original roll is 100, the
enemy is sighted regardless of modifiers.
 Fighting Wings
Effects of Successful Sighting:
• If the attacker has not initiated combat, proceed to the
Defender's Response Phase.
• If the attacker that initiated combat was sighted, the
defender is allowed to set up with any upright angle of
bank, use any power setting, and may maneuver his A/C
freely, beginning with the first turn of combat scale play.
Effects of Unsuccessful Sighting (a "Bounce"):
• If combat has not been initiated, return to the Attacker's
Movement Phase. Repeat this cycle until the attacker is
sighted, or initiates combat, or exits the TMG.
• If the attacker initiates combat, the defender is surprised
("bounced"). Defending A/C start combat play wings level
and may only fly forward (no maneuvering) on the first turn
(first two turns for A/C without radios unless the individual
A/C is attacked on first turn). They cannot change flight
attitude or angle-of-bank. Only MC and the minimum VFPs
allowed for their flight attitude may be used (no OC). Throttle
is limited to cruise power or less. After these turns of surprise
penalty flight, the defenders may fly freely.
14.6.1 –– DEFENDER'S RESPONSE PHASE
If attackers are sighted and combat has not been initiated,
the defenders must immediately declare if they will pass, initiate
combat or try to flee.
• If Def. Passes: Return to Attacker's Movement Phase. De-
fending A/C may change speed from existing up to max att.
level (Fixed formations degrade to flex. at Dash speeds).
• If Def. Initiates Combat: Proceed as follows:
a.) If No Defenders in Fixed Formation: Set up combat
normally if nearest attacker is in A or B band. If nearest attacker
in C or D band, the defender may opt to change the geometry
of the combat before set up as explained below:
Geometry Change: Shift all attackers identically, clockwise
or counter-clockwise, in their present TMG range band, up to two
spaces if nearest is in C band, or up to three spaces if nearest
is in D band. One altitude, attitude, and speed change move is
allowed to each formation on each side per Rule 14.4, except
further movement on the TMG is ignored (formation splits okay).
The defender makes all of his move changes first.
b.) If Any Defenders in Fixed Formation: Combat is set up
normally and if nearest attacker in the C band, escort A/C may
set up their flights facing up to 60° from the direction the portion
of the group in fixed formation is going. If nearest attacker in the
D band, the facing difference may be up to 120°. All A/C in a
flight must use the same facing, but all flights need not.
c.) Defender's Right of Combat Refusal: If a defender initi-
ates combat and all attackers are in C or D band any defending
A/C beyond twice the attacker's number may be withheld from
battle (they continue mission ignoring fight). Formation integrity
must be maintained, meaning, existing flights and elements may
not split up when withheld or committed to battle. If one A/C in
a fixed formation is involved, then all in that formation must be.
Combat Initiation Limits: If all defenders are in fixed
formation, or on an air-to-ground mission they may not initiate
combat unless they degrade to flexible formation and abort the
air-to-ground mission (jettison ordnance). If defenders include
escorts, these may initiate combat even if other defenders stay
in fixed formation or in their AtG mission (no abort required).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
35
• If Defender Elects To Flee: Proceed as directed below.
Mission Aborts: If the defenders are on an AtG mission and
have not reached their target, the mission is aborted and they
may no longer move toward the target on the OMT (Chapter 15).
Instead, they must jettison all air-to-ground weapons (except
rockets) and return to their bases attempting to escape as given
below. If on an air-to-air mission, the mission may continue after
an escape attempt is resolved, whether combat results or not.
Escape Procedure: The defender chooses one of the fol-
lowing escape profiles and all fleeing A/C must use it:
1. Escape by steep or vertical dive.
2. Escape by shallow dive at full throttle.
3. Escape by level run, or shallow climb at full throttle.
4. Escape by full throttle climb.
Next, the attacker declares if he will pursue them. If not, the
engagement ends. If yes, the success or failure of an escape
is determined by D10 rolls. Prerequisites for using a particular
escape profile and the amounts of altitude change, final attitudes
and speeds that result from each escape profile are detailed in
the Escape Profiles Table (Tactical Scale Play Aid).
Escape Rolls: The defender and attacker each declare
whether their side will flee or pursue as a single force, or split up
and flee or pursue by varying A/C capabilities. Each side then
rolls a D10 for a base number and adds applicable modifiers
from the appropriate Escape Profiles Table.
• If fleeing or pursuing as a single force, use the modifiers
that apply to the least capable A/C.
• If fleeing or pursuing by varying capabilities due to type,
damage or load differences, the fleeing and pursuing A/C
may split up into groups with different capabilities with
each group using the modifiers for its least capable A/C.
• Each group whose modified escape roll is greater than all
the pursuer's modified rolls successfully escapes. Each
pursuit group whose modified roll exceeds one or more
fleeing group escape rolls has the option to attack one of
those groups. More than one pursuit group may attack the
same fleeing group. Fleeing groups not attacked, escape.
Escape Combat Set Up & Fuel Use: If a fleeing force is
caught, combat is set up as if the pursuer entered the TMG
center box on the defender's 6:00 line. Use the lesser of the
original starting relative altitude difference or 1,500 feet – a D10
of increments (pursuer starts from above if fleer dove, and below
if fleer climbed, and pursuer's option if fleer tried to escape by
level run). An escape attempt uses up 1 minute of endurance
and one tactical game turn (see Chapter 15 for fuel rules).
14.7 –– SETTING UP COMBAT SCALE PLAY
1. Set Up Defenders First: Place the main formation leader
near the center of the map. Place all others in appropriate for-
mation parameters with the same facing. When setting up fixed
formations, H and M class may not begin stacked and L or F
class A/C may stack two to a position (A/C may stack further once
play begins). Defender speeds and pitch are those last set by Op
or Tac-scale moves. Next, place any escort A/C leads within 12
hexes of the escorted A/C leader, at the escort's declared altitude,
with wingmen in formation parameters. Escort A/C may be split
into smaller flights and spread out as long as each junior leader
is within 12 hexes of the escorted A/C leader, or within normal
 36
parameters of a higher ranking leader. All A/C in each different
escort flight must face in the same direction which may be up
up to 30° different from that used by the escorted A/C formation.
2. Roll Attackers Start Range: Each attacking formation chooses
a defending formation or escort flight as its basis for set up, then
rolls D5 or D10 dice as directed, adding them to the base range
given on the Set Up Range Table. The sum is the exact range
(including altitude differences) at which the attacking leader
must set up from a specific A/C in the selected enemy formation.
3. Set Up Attackers: Place attacking leader in the hex, in the
arc or line parameters indicated by the TMG, of the selected A/C
in the enemy formation that will put it at the exact range rolled for.
The range to the NEXT nearest enemy A/C in the same formation
must be ≥ the range to the selected A/C. If not, move the attacker
away from the selected A/C (maintaining deflection parameters),
one hex at a time until the required range is met. The attacking
leader must choose a facing that puts the target A/C in front of
his own 3:00 - 9:00 clock lines. Place all remaining attackers
in appropriate formation parameters, ensuring none are closer
in range to the reference enemy A/C than the leader. Attacking
A/C speed and pitch is set to that allowed by their formation's
last Tac-scale move.
Restrictions: If setting up in climbs or dives, no A/C may be
higher or lower, respectively, than their leader. If attacking from the
left or right side of a formation of any size, the attacking leader's
set up hex must clearly be to the left or right of an imaginary line
going through the center of the defender's formation, parallel to
the defender's direction of flight. An equal number of A/C must
be on each side of the line. For odd numbers of A/C, the dividing
line should run through the middle of the A/C that leaves equal
numbers of A/C on either side.
4. Scatter Enemy Formations: First the attacker scatters
the defender's A/C, then the defender scatters the attacker's as
allowed (reflecting imperfect formation flying). Do this for each
independent formation (group, squadron, or smaller) setting up.
Scatter procedure:
• For each 4 or less enemy A/C in a formation, roll a D10
and sum the results. If the formation straggled, add an-
other D10 (see Rule 15.5) to the total number of die rolls.
• The enemy player counters by rolling a D10 for each 9
or less A/C in that same formation, and subtracts the sum
of his rolls from the sum of the scattering player's rolls.
• The remainder, if positive, is the number of scatters
allowed to an enemy's formation, excluding its leader.
• The TMG defender may add one D10 to his counter-roll
for each two Tac-turns attackers moved on the TMG
after being spotted, before either side initiated combat.
Scatters: A single scatter consists of:
• Displacing an A/C one hex in any direction.
• Changing an A/C's altitude by up to ± 300 feet.
• Changing an A/C's facing by 30 degrees.
Limits on Scatters: A side's main formation leader may not
be scattered. Up to three scatters can normally be applied to an
A/C. All or some may be hex or altitude changes. Only one may
be a facing change and only if at least one other scatter type was
applied before the facing change. Facing changes may not put
a wingman's facing more than 30° off his leader's facing. Facing
changes are not allowed to A/C in fixed formations. Wingmen
may not scatter to a position forward of their leader but may be
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
scattered out of formation in other ways. A/C may be scattered
closer to an attacker than the original set up allowed.
Junior Lead Scatters: If a lower ranked leader's A/C is scat-
tered in range or altitude, his wingmen are shifted equally at no
cost to the total scatters allowed (facing changes always cost
1 scatter per A/C). These matching shifts do not count against
scatters that may then be applied later against the wingmen.
High Altitude Scatter: Add one or two D10s to scatter rolls
against formations in the HI to VH or EH+ bands, respectively.
A/C in HI+ bands may suffer one extra scatter per two or less
bands above MH band (exception - pressure cabin A/C).
Mission Fatigue Scatter: Add one D10 to the scatter rolls
allowed against a formation after it has been in the air for 2 hours
and after 5 hours (12 and 30 Op-turns). Add one to the scatters
allowed to an A/C after it has been in the air for 2 hours and after
5 hours. Nullify these extra scatter rolls and A/C scatters by one
per two or less turns of Tac-scale play taking place after an at-
tacker has beeen spotted (due to advance warning of attack).
Pressure Cabins: A/C with pressure cabins do not suffer
extra scatters for being above MH bands. For fatigue, add just
one scatter after A/C has been in the air 4 hours (24 Op-turns).
5. Perform Final Set Up: If attackers were sighted before set
up, each defending A/C may choose any upright bank angle and
power. If not, all begin wings level at cruise power. Next, each
attacker chooses any desired bank angle. Determine combat
scale weather (Rule 16.2). Commence Combat Scale play.
14.7.1 –– POST ENGAGEMENT OMT PLACEMENT
When A/C exit combat scale play or tactical scale play back
to Op-scale play (Chapter 15), use this procedure:
• Return them to the OMT dot position of the engagement.
• Pick a base altitude for each A/C that is from 3,000 below,
up to one Tac-scale ROC (adjusted for load & damage)
above that held when engagement exited.
• Friendly A/C that exit combat play on the same game turn,
within range 15 to each other (1 mile), or A/C that exit the
TMG on the same Tac-turn from the same D band space
whose new post combat base altitude is the same, may auto-
matically rejoin into one or more formations as desired with-
out having to roll to regroup after combat per Rule 15.12.
• A/C from the same side that are on the combat map together
when an engagement ends may also rejoin as above.
14.7.2 –– POST COMBAT CONSIDERATIONS
Op-Scale Intercepts: Targets can be subject to multiple
intercepts in an Op-turn (rule 15.9). Should a formation be split
into various parts as a result of a prior engagement, all former
parts of that formation are considered to be in view of any pending
interceptors. When play of a subsequent intercept is commenced,
the new attackers may pick any part of the original formation to
attack, or they may also split up into smaller formations, each
attacking different parts of the former formation. In this case,
each intercept is resolved as a separate engagement.
14.8 –– EFFECTS OF SUN & CLOUDS
The Sun: If any A/C on the TMG are above the highest bro-
ken or overcast clouds (Rule 15.2) roll a D10 during set up to
determine the deflection arc the sun is in. Defenders must apply
 Fighting Wings
sun modifier if attempting to sight attackers in this arc whose
altitude is in the Sun's Dazzling Zone (see below).
Approx. Time of Day Sun Position & Dazzle Zone
Morning or Evening Low ≤ ± 1,000 per Band Away
Mid-Morn. or Afternoon High ≥ 1K higher per Band away
Hi-Noon (1100 to 1300) Vertical ≥ 2K higher in A band, ≥ 4K
if in B band. NA in C and D bands.
Clouds: If clouds exist in defender's altitude bands (Rule
15.2), apply the listed modifiers to TMG set up die rolls. See
Rule 16.2 for generating combat scale weather for the battle.
Silhouetted A/C & Contrails: If a higher or lower target of
a first sight or defender's sighting attempt has broken or over-
cast clouds in altitude bands beyond and behind them, from the
sighter's perspective, double the target A/C quantity modifier
for the sighting attempt roll. If TMG attackers end a move at or
above the base contrailing level (rule 15.2), apply the contrailing
modifier to the sighting roll in the Defender's Sighting Phase.
14.9 –– TAC-SCALE TO OP-SCALE CONTINUITY
Failure to Initiate Combat: If combat not initiated by end
of Tac-turn 10, and Op-scale play is in use, all A/C on the TMG
retain their current positions and relative altitudes while the next
Op-turn's moves and intercepts are conducted. TMG defenders
on missions allowing them to move while engaged, drag any TMG
attackers that opt to stay engaged to their new Op-scale OMT
dot. Tac-scale play then resumes from where it left off. When
dragged, attackers must choose an Op-scale speed ≥ to the
defender's to keep up. If unable, the engagement ends and the
attackers are left behind when the defenders move. Left behind
attackers must move immediately after the defenders move.
Staying In Contact After Combat: After a combat in which
attackers disengage to the OMT they may opt to stay "in contact"
with the former defender's from Op-turn to Op-turn so long as:
1. The defending A/C did not disengage first and consist of
some L, M or H class A/C not on an air-to-air mission.
2. The defender's F class escort, if any, number < half the A/C
in the attacking formation wanting to stay in contact.
3. The attacker's agility class is ≥ to some of the defenders.
4. The attacker's are within 3,000 feet of the defender's alt.
5. A D10 roll of ≤ 7 is achieved (+1 per weather step worse
than clear (e.g., +5 to roll if inclement weather applies).
"In Contact" Moves: In contact attackers move immediately
after the defenders. An op-scale speed that allows the attackers
to match or exceed defender's OMT dot movement is required.
In contact attackers may change altitude normally during move-
ment. Friendly A/C may join in contact formations normally. In
contact attackers auto-succeed when intercepting the contacted
defenders. In contact attackers are automatically sighted in the
first defender's sighting phase. Attackers lose in contact status if
themselves intercepted first or if ending movement out of intercept
range. An attacker's in contact status may be voluntarily ended
at the start of an Op-turn. If so, roll for initiative normally.
14.10 –– COMBAT BREAK-OFF TO THE TMG
Attacking A/C may disengage to the TMG, instead of the OMT,
when leaving a combat. If so, they may resume Tac-scale play
beginning with the next available Tac-turn, once all attackers in
the original fight have disengaged. In this way, multiple combats
between the same A/C are possible in a single Op-turn.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
37
Break Off to TMG Placements: Defenders return to center
box at their leader's last altitude ± 500 feet. Time is set to the
Tac-turn following the one in which combat ended. Attackers
go to the C band TMG space best approximating their position
relative to the defender's leader when each disengaged. Set
them at their last altitude + up to half their ROC (rounded next
lower 100 feet) or up to –1,500 feet lower. Attackers placed in
the same TMG space within 600 feet of each other may auto-
matically join into formation. Speed for both side's A/C is then
set from cruise to max level. TMG placement is the attacker's
move for that Tac-turn. The attacking A/C returning to the TMG
remain sighted by the attacker's for future Defender's Response
Phase considerations.
YOU MAY PLAY ALL GENERAL SCENARIOS
CHAPTER 15 –– OPERATIONAL SCALE PLAY
Designer's Note: Missions often lasted several hours during
which only a few minutes of intense combat would occur. The
rest of the time pilots were concerned with navigation, formation
flying, weather, fuel use and keeping an eye out for the enemy.
"Mission" scenarios use Op-scale play and the Operational
Mission Track (OMT) to track the progress of a mission from
take off to landing. Below are definitions of key Op-scale terms:
• A/C Type - The A/C's agility class along with its number
of engines (e.g., twin-engine M class bomber).
• CAP - Combat Air Patrol. A/C on CAP missions.
• Deliberate Encounter - Intentional intercepts or attacks
by A/C upon enemy formations or surface targets.
• Engaged A/C - A/C involved in an encounter.
• Escorts - A/C assigned to protect other A/C.
• Force - Multiple formations operating together.
• Formation - Two or more A/C joined together.
• Free Hunters - Non CAP A/C on air-to-air missions.
• OMT Dot Position - Any of the five 8 mile wide dots in
each OMT column.
• OMT Column - Each 40 mile wide ground square and
the entire column of altitude band squares above it.
• OMT Zone - A 6 column wide weather zone on the OMT.
• Random Encounter - A surprise encounter with A/C or
other units resulting from an enroute event die roll.
• Unengaged A/C - A/C not involved in encounters.
• Unintentional Encounter - An encounter resulting from
opposing A/C crossing paths during movement.
Note: With regards to rules of conduct or procedure, the
terms "A/C" and "formation" are used interchangeably.
15.1 –– OP-SCALE SET UP
Placing Units:
1. The "mission" player places both border markers, pri-
mary & alternate target markers, ground & naval units,
airfields and aircraft as required or as allowed in OMT
squares designated by the scenario.
2. The "interceptor" player places his airfields, ground
units, naval units and aircraft as allowed.
3. Determine weather in all four OMT zones & begin play.
Border Markers – These are placed in the OMT squares
containing the border dot. Borders & airspace areas are always
defined as friendly or enemy relative to the "mission" player.
 38
Friendly Areas – The home base circle and all OMT columns
and dots to the left of the friendly border dot (inclusive) equal
friendly territory and airspace. Enemy units may not set up there.
Random enemy flak attacks are not allowed in friendly airspace,
but random enemy "intruder" A/C may be encountered there.
Neutral Areas – All OMT columns and dots between the
friendly and enemy border dots are neutral areas. Enemy ground
units or airfields may not set up in neutral areas. Random A/C
encounters are allowed but not random unexpected flak attacks.
If the friendly and enemy border dots are adjacent to each other,
no neutral territory will exist.
Enemy Areas – All OMT columns and dots to the right of the
enemy border dot are enemy areas. Mission side ground units
may not set up in enemy areas. Restrictions on where friendly
A/C can be encountered may exist depending on the scenario.
Target Markers: These are used to mark the OMT square
containing the primary and alternate target dots.
15.1.1 –– OP-SCALE SEQUENCE-OF-PLAY
An Op-turn consists of the following phases:
1. Weather Change Phase (Rule 15.2)
2. Take off and Join-Up Phase (Rule 15.3)
3. Movement & Search Phase (Rule 15.4)
4. En Route Join Up and Events Phase (Rule 15.5)
5. Intercept and Combat Phase (Rule 15.8)
6. Regrouping / Landing / Servicing Phase (Rule 15.12)
The Operational Tables, pages 1 and 2 include a detailed
copy of the SOP with all its steps.
15.2 –– WEATHER CHANGE PHASE
Starting Weather: Before play, roll a D10 for the home base
zone and each OMT zone and refer to the Initial Operational
Weather Table (OMT, page 2) to find the weather in that zone.
Place a marker in the appropriate weather track of the zone.
"Inclement weather" indicates rain, drizzle or fog is present at
all altitudes below the lowest affected OMT band, or the lowest
combat scale cloud deck or layer in that zone.
Affected Bands: For each zone with other than "Clear
Skies" roll a D10. Refer to the Affected Altitude Bands Table
(OMT, page 2) to find which bands contain the existing weather.
Place "cloud" counters in the left most OMT column of the zone
in those bands. All OMT columns in a zone will have the same
affected bands. If A/C end a move in a band affected by broken
or overcast weather, they must declare whether they will be
above or below the nearest clouds in that band.
Weather Change Phase Steps:
• Roll for weather changes on designated Op-turns.
• If weather changes, roll for affected altitude bands.
Weather Rolls: Roll a D10 per the Weather Change Table
(Operational Tables, page 1) at the following times:
• Each third Op-turn in summer scenarios
• Each even Op-turn in spring or fall scenarios
• Each Op-turn in winter scenarios
The final result indicates if, where and what type of change
occurs. If weather improves, move the marker left on the track
one box. If it worsens, move the weather track marker right one
box. Weather cannot improve beyond "Clear" or worsen beyond
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
"Inclement". A/C above affected bands, or below them when
weather is not "inclement" are in clear skies. The weather may
cause die roll modifiers for various events. Cloud layers and
decks may be called for in combat scale play.
Contrails: Condensation trails (contrails) will stream behind
A/C at certain altitudes. Use the table below to determine the
lowest and highest contrail altitude levels in each OMT zone.
A/C at or between those levels will contrail and have modifiers to
sighting and interception attempts against them. If the weather
changes in a zone, reroll for its contrail levels.
• Lowest Contrail Level = 20 + D10 roll.
• Highest Contrail Level = (2 x D10) + Lowest level.
15.3 –– TAKE OFF & JOIN UP PHASE
Designer's Note: In WW-II the typical pilot was young, 18
to 22, often inexperienced and faced with difficult operational
conditions. As a result, accidents and aborts were common. The
take off & landing attrition Rules consider this.
Take Off & Join-Up Phase Steps:
• Mission player then interceptor player declares take offs.
• Both sides resolve take off attrition, launch spare A/C.
• Check for unintentional encounters (Rule 15.6) when
placing A/C in their take off altitude bands.
• Announce any take off formation join up attempts.
Procedure: Announce number and type of A/C taking off from
a base. Place formation counters for them in an allowed altitude
band above the dot of the base. Start a log for the formations.
Declare take off speeds. Take off and take-off join-ups end the
moves for those A/C for the current turn.
Take Off Groups (TOGs): All A/C of the same type taking
off from the same base in a game turn constitute a TOG.
Take Off Attrition: For each TOG make a LH roll and modify
it per the Take Off Attrition Table (Op-Tables, page 1). The final
LH determines how many A/C abort per the Attrition Table (Op-
Tables, page 4). If the TOG is larger than 18, divide it into the
least number of near equal sized sets of A/C and make a separate
attrition roll for each set (the TOG size remains unchanged).
A/C Speeds after Take Off: Select a cruise speed value if
initial climb is less than or equal to one climb multiple. Use a
climb speed value if initial climb greater than one multiple.
Fate of Aborting A/C: Randomly determine which A/C
aborted. Make a percentile roll for each and refer to the Take
off Abort Fate Table (Operational Tables, page 1) and follow the
directions there. Aborted A/C still count against a base's take off
limit. Spare A/C at base may immediately launch as replacements
(not to exceed the airbase's limits). Successfully launched spares
join the original TOG after checking attrition.
Take Off Limits: Unless limited by a scenario, the number
of A/C that may take off in an Op-turn are as follows:
• Mission player's Home Base unlimited
• Other airfields (each) ≤ 24 A/C
• Aircraft carriers using deck runs ≤ 20 A/C
• Aircraft carriers using catapults ≤ 4 per catapult
Take Off Climbs: A/C taking off may be placed at any altitude
up to their listed ROC x their load factor as listed in the OMT
Movement Rules Summary, OMT page 1 (the factors are x4, x3
and x2 for normal, loaded and over-loaded A/C respectively).
 Fighting Wings
Take Off Join Ups: Any number of three to four A/C flights
or A/C pairs may be created out of a TOG by simply declaring
this. Each pair or flight formed expends a D5 of fuel endurance.
F and unloaded L class may also do one en route join up on the
turn of take-off. For others, the take off join up is the only activity
allowed after taking off (exception, all may regroup per 15.12).
15.4 –– MOVEMENT & SEARCH PHASE
Designer's Note: The OMT is an abstract representation of
a mission's preplanned navigation track across the ground.
Movement & Search Phase Steps:
• Determine formation order of moves & initiative.
• Move all formations, except those that just took off, in
initiative order. Formations may split up as they move.
• Check for unintentional encounters (Rule 15.6).
• Free hunters may attempt deliberate intercepts against
A/C moving within intercept range (Rule 15.7).
• Resolve harassing AAA attacks as allowed (15.4.3).
• Resolve target sighting attempts as allowed (15.4.4).
OMT Movement: Movement is tracked on the OMT using
formation counters which move as explained in Rule 15.4.1.
OMT Dots: Each OMT column is divided into five "dot" posi-
tions numbered "N.1" to "N.5" from left to right. "N" is the OMT
column and the second number is the "dot" within that column.
Ground and naval units always set up on specific dots.
Note: If setting up mission scenarios from earlier FW games,
all units placed in an OMT square are at position "N.3".
Order-of-Movement: Formations move in order of agility
class (H, M, L then F). In the Op-scale L moves before F. If both
sides have formations in the same class, roll a D10 for each. If
a formation leader is a veteran, hero, or ace, add one to the roll.
The final result is the initiative no. The formation with the lowest
initiative moves first. Roll as needed to break ties. A formation
has the agility class of the least maneuverable A/C it contains.
Move Preemption: Formations with a higher agility or initia-
tive no. than one about to move may preempt that formation and
move first. A preempting formation may itself be preempted by
another. All preemptions must be declared before any preempters
begin to move. Moves are executed in order, from last preempter
first, to original preempted formation last.
15.4.1 –– OMT MOVEMENT
Horizontal Movement: Formations (or A/C) expend Op-scale
movement points (Op-MPs) to move (see below). One Op-MP
moves a formation from one OMT dot to the next dot. A/C may-
also loiter in place (circle), if desired or required, by expending
Op-MPs repeatedly in the same dot.
Vertical Movement: A/C climb and descend as shown below.
A/C may both climb and descend in the same move. Op-MPs
are not used for vertical moves.
• Descents: A/C may freely descend up to 3,000 feet for
each Op-MP expended to enter a new dot, and up to
6,000 feet for each Op-MP expended to loiter in place.
• Climbs: A/C may either climb at the start of their turn,
before Op-MPs are expended, or at the end of their turn
after all Op-MPs are expended. A/C may gain altitude in
an amount up to their listed ROC for their start band times
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
39
the factor given for their load status in the OMT Movement
Rules Summary (OMT, page 1), for their selected speed.
Op-MP Restrictions: A/C move once per Op-turn. All avail-
able full Op-MPs must be spent in a move (carry half MPs). Half
FPs may be carried and used normally only if speed doesn't
change from one Op-turn to the next, else they are forfeit.
Speeds & Op-MPs: On take off, A/C have zero Op-MPs and
set climb speed. On later turns, Op-MPs equal the available full
FPs from their selected speed. Formations move at the speed
of the slowest A/C in them. When moving select one of these
speeds for each formation:
1. Endurance Speed (a slow fuel conserving speed).
2. Climb Speed (max power climb rate speed).
3. Cruise Speed (a fuel efficient speed).
4. Dash Speed (a fast, but fuel consuming speed)
Endurance: Allows FPs from adjusted minimum speed up
to 1/2 of max attainable speed. If adjusted min. speed is > 1/2
max attainable, endurance speed is not allowed.
Climb (& Take Off): From adjusted min. speed to listed min.
+1.5, but not > max attainable level speed. Climb speed assumes
max power and consumes fuel at the dash speed rate.
Fighter Cruise (F & MF): Any speed > highest available
endurance speed up to:
• Max attainable speed –1.0 if in HI or higher alt. bands
• Max attainable speed –1.5 if in the MH or lower band
Bomber Cruise (L, M, & H): Any speed > highest available
endurance speed up to the lesser of:
• Listed max level speed –1.0 in any altitude band.
• Max attainable level speed –0.5 in any altitude band.
Dash: Any speed > A/C's highest cruise speed up to its max
attainable level speed. Dive speeds are never used at the Op-
scale as these would be sustained for only very short times.
Move Limits: For join up and force assembly, formations may
loiter at will. Once a force with an air-to-ground mission starts
toward a target it may use any speed but may not loiter in dots
unless needed to end an Op-turn in or stay in the target's dot.
When returning from a completed or aborted mission no restric-
tions apply. If altitude changes, reset speeds at end of each move
based on the final altitude before resolving intercepts.
Mixed Speeds: Formations within a larger force may have
different speeds but the entire force moves using the Op-MPs of
the slowest formation. Each formation's fuel use and TMG start
speed for Tac-scale play is based on its own speed and not that
of the larger force it is part of (faster A/C, such as fighters, would
be weaving to pace slower bombers).
A/C Unable to Sustain Level Flight: If damage is such that
adjusted min speed exceeds max attainable, or an A/C has no
engines, its speed is set to endurance, but only one of its MPs
may be used for horizontal travel, and only if its start altitude
is at least 3,500 feet above the ground. Additionally, such A/C
will lose a minimum amount of altitude (in levels per Op-turn or
increments per Tac turn rounded up) = adjusted min speed + a
D5 (two D5s if not a glider type and no engines).
They may lose more using Op-MPs not used for horizontal
travel. If not engaged or attacking ground units on turn ground
level is reached, they will force land (the crew may bail out be-
fore then). If engaged or attacking ground units on turn ground
 40
reached, start altitude for combat = two D5 in increments.
Formation Log Sheet: This log is used to track formation
composition, current dot, altitude, speed and fuel status. Start a
new log as necessary for new formations created each turn.
15.4.2 –– FUEL USE & ENDURANCE
An A/C's flight endurance is listed on its ADC in terms of
minutes of flight. Each A/C taking off begins using endurance
(fuel) as listed below. Fuel use is tracked for each A/C individually.
A/C in formations using the same speed use fuel equally when
doing join ups or dashing (one D5 roll per formation). Landing
attempt fuel use is by individual A/C.
Fuel use is cumulative. Tactical play, combat play and land-
ing attempts within an Op-turn, use fuel beyond the amount
consumed by any Op-turn A/C moves. A/C must land by the time
their endurance reaches zero. If it expires before they land, or
their landing fuel use D5 roll takes endurance below zero, they
must do a "forced landing".
Fuel is used as follows:
1. Start, taxi, take off (all combined) = 5 min. per engine.
2. Take off climb, per multiple of alt. = 1, 2 or 3 min.
3. Take off, en route, or regroup join up = D5 minutes.
4. If terrain hugging entire Op-turn (16.1) = 2 minutes.
5. Each turn at dash or climb speed = 15+D5 min.
6. Each Op-turn at cruise speed = 10 minutes.
7. Each Op-turn at endurance speed = 5 minutes.
8. Per attacker's TMG move after 5 min.
of Op-to-Tac scale fuel credit. = 1 minute.
9. Per 5 or less turns of combat play = 1 minute.
10. Fuel loss due to delays, damage = variable.
11. Each Landing attempt = D5 minutes.
12. Each dot shift during intercepts = 2 minutes.
Op–to–Tac Scale Fuel Credit: Attacking A/C get 5 turns of
tactical play before suffering cumulative endurance costs. This
credit ends if combat is initiated. The TMG defenders do not
suffer cumulative Tac-scale fuel use prior to combat initiation.
Take Off Climb Fuel: On take-off, A/C will use 1, 2, or 3
minutes of fuel per full or partial multiple of their ROC gained in
altitude, for normal, loaded or over-loaded status respectively.
Limits: If an A/C's adjusted min speed is greater than max
speed allowed for endurance or cruise speeds, fuel use is per
the next higher defined speed. If an A/C's only cruise speed is
max attainable –0.5, then max attainable is its only dash speed.
Engine Out Effects: A/C with all engines knocked out or
shut down do not consume fuel. Multi-engine A/C with at least
one engine working have their total fuel consumed per Op-turn
reduced by one minute per engine not in use.
15.4.3 –– AAA (FLAK) ATTACKS
Flak Values: AAA counters can represent a small to a large
number of guns. Mission scenarios will specify AAA point values
for certain OMT dots, cities and airbases (approx. = 0.5 pts. per
light or med. AA gun barrel, 1 pt. per heavy AA barrel ≤ 102mm
and 1.5 points per heavy barrel > 102mm in size). Critical hit
ratings for AA types are listed in the Op-scale Flak Attack Table
(Op. Tables, Page 1). Ship data cards have Op-scale AAA values
on them. AAA values are the firepower modifier to Flak attack.
There are two types of land based flak attacks:
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Harassing Flak: If A/C enter or loiter in a dot with enemy
land based AAA gun values that can reach their altitude level
during the Movement Phase, they immediately suffer a flak attack
(limited to one attack per Op-turn per dot against each moving
formation). For Naval Op-scale AAA attacks see Chapter 30.
Defense Zone Flak: If A/C declare op-scale bombing in the
Combat Phase from a dot containing land or naval AAA that can
reach them, they suffer two flak attacks which are resolved after
air-to-air intercepts and before dropping bombs.
AAA Procedure: Roll for LH on the Aircraft Attrition Table for
each formation fired on. Add in applicable Op-Scale AAA Table
modifiers (Op. Tables, page 1). A/C not in formations are rolled
for separately as a group within each altitude band. The No. of
A/C affected = number of random flak attack rolls distributed
randomly among the formation A/C. Individual A/C may suffer
multiple attacks from a single flak attack. Check for damage us-
ing the odds and critical hit rating listed for the type of flak fired.
15.4.4 –– SEARCHING FOR TARGETS
Locating Targets: Airfields, naval and ground units must be
"located" to be attacked. Area targets such as big cities, ports,
etc., are automatically located. Whether engaged or unengaged,
formations or A/C may try to locate airfields, bridges and naval
units at ranges up to one dot, one dot and two dots away, re-
spectively, per band of height they have (i.e., a formation in dot
7.3 in the MH band could locate ships out to dot 9.1 (8 away)),
or three dots per band, limited to 10 dots max, if using surface
search radars. Ground units, factories in cities, etc., are small
targets and may only be located by A/C in the same dot.
Search Procedure: For each target to be located, make
one LH roll per searching formation at the end of the Movement
Phase. Searches may be conducted in any order desired. A
successful result applies only to that formation. The search is
conducted exactly as an intercept attempt (Rule 15.8) with the
appropriate modifiers. A final LH ≥ +10 locates the target. Once
located, it remains located to the searcher as long as he remains
in sighting range unless broken or overcast clouds are in any
bands between the searcher and target. In this case, target
location must be redone every Op-turn. A/C with search radars
may search at night using normal day ranges and may locate
and maintain target contacts through clouds.
Dedicated Scouts: A/C whose mission is scouting or forward-
air-control that locate a target can "radio-broadcast" its location
allowing friendly A/C that subsequently move into a valid search
position in the same Op-turn to automatically sight the target. If
scout A/C move beyond sighting range, are destroyed, or lose
their radios, the radio broadcasting ends.
15.5 –– EN ROUTE JOIN UP & EVENTS PHASE
En Route Join Up & Events Phase Steps:
• Resolve formation join up attempts, then check for ran-
dom events in each OMT column occupied by A/C.
Formation Markers: A/C in large formations are shown on
the OMT with a numbered formation counter. When a larger
force is created, the extra formation counters are absorbed into
the lead formation's counter and may be reused. When a larger
force is created, one formation of the lowest agility class within
the force becomes the "force leader" for future movement.
 Fighting Wings
Join Up Leaders: Any formation or single A/C (even if part
of a larger force) may be the designated leader for a join up. Join
up leaders may not themselves join others in the same join up
phase. If all joiners consist of F or unloaded L class A/C, then
up to three formations may join the leader, otherwise, only two
formations may join the leader. Count up to three solo A/C as
one formation for formation join up limits. However, each solo
joiner rolls for and resolves its join up separately.
Join Up Limits: All involved formations and A/C must be
unengaged, in the same dot as the join up leader, ≤ 5,000 above
for F and unladen L class, ≤ 3,000 above for other classes, and
within one multiple of their listed rate of climb if below the join
up leader. Joining A/C may not participate in more than one join
up per turn. "H" class may not join up on "L" or "F" leaders.
Join Up Procedure: Shift the joining A/C to the leader's alti-
tude. Roll percentile dice per formation joining another. Refer to
the Formation Join Up Table (Op -Tables, page 1). Add modifiers
as required (Pilot mods are for the leader of the joiners, not the
leader being joined on). The final result will indicate if a normal
join up, no rendezvous, delay or incident occurs.
Delays & Stragglers: A "delay" indicates the A/C joining
up are penalized in endurance as indicated (they use extra fuel
to catch up). A "straggle", causes a similar fuel penalty and if
engaged in combat in the same turn, they suffer extra scattering
(Rule 14.7). In either case the join up still succeeds. An en route
delay inflicts a movement penalty on the entire force. However,
a join up leader can elect to convert this to a "no rendezvous"
result for the joining formation if time-on-target is more critical.
No Rendezvous: The joiners failed to join up (They could
not find the leading formation, were off course, or straggled so
far as to remain separated). They may attempt to join up again
in a later Op-turn. In addition, their movement is penalized. Roll
a D5 (-1 to roll for M, -2 for H+). The result, if greater than 0, is
the Op-MPs they must expend in place before moving onward in
the next Op-turn. This represents the time lost while off course
looking for the others.
Incidents: Incidents include additional delays, malfunctions,
or collisions. Roll percentile dice and consult the Join Up Inci-
dent Table (Operational Tables, page 1). Follow the instructions
indicated by the result of the die roll.
Leaving Formations: A/C may detach from formations by
simply declaring the act at the start of their movement or at the
start of a deliberate encounter. A large formation may split into
its smaller component formations in the same way.
15.5.1 –– FORMATION GUIDELINES
A/C on specific missions: A/C of the same squadron given
the same mission (search, strike, escort, etc.) should join up as
soon as possible and, circumstances permitting, remain together
to the target area and back.
"Close" escorts: Close escorts must join up with the A/C to
be escorted as soon as possible and remain with them until
engaged in combat at least once, or forced to leave due to
operational considerations (fuel, ammo, etc.). Until joined with
the escorted A/C, close escorts may not initiate deliberate
encounters though encounters may be initiated against them.
If engaged in combat, they may convert to free hunters or
continue to escort once combat is concluded.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
41
"General" Escorts: General escorts must move to be within
one dot of, and from 1 band below to 3 bands above the A/C
to be escorted as soon as possible. Until established in es-
cort parameters, they may not initiate deliberate encounters
though encounters may be initiated against them. They must
stay in escort parameters until engaged in combat at least
once or forced to leave due to operational considerations.
Once in escort parameters, they act as free hunters. After a
combat, they may become free hunters or remain as escorts.
Free Hunters: No restrictions.
CAP: CAP must proceed to and patrol within, two dots of
the target they are defending (inclusive). They may use any
altitude. If radio-equipped and under radar control (Rule
15.7), they may patrol out to 10 dots. Once on CAP they
may not leave until operational considerations dictate, or they
engage and follow an enemy that leaves the patrol area, or
are recalled. CAP may not initiate intercepts while en route
to their patrol area or while returning to base when recalled.
Close Escorts / CAPs of Opportunity: Free hunters may
become close escorts by joining up with the A/C to be escorted.
They must stay as close escorts for the entire next Op-turn, after
which they may leave. Free hunters may join up with friendly
CAP but their mission then permanently changes to CAP.
15.5.2 –– RANDOM EN ROUTE EVENTS
Designer Note: Malfunctions, weather changes and random
enemy encounters are typical events a force of A/C might suffer
while proceeding to and from a target.
Random Events: For each OMT column having airborne A/C,
friendly or enemy, the mission player rolls percentile dice. Add +2
per formation >1, or per 3 or less single A/C > 3 in the column.
A result ≥ 90 = an event. If an event occurs, roll percentile dice
and refer to the En Route Event Table (Operational Tables,
page 2). The result can be a weather change, A/C encounter,
navigation error, or malfunction. If needed, randomly determine
which formation & A/C is affected. Treat all unformated A/C on
a side in an OMT column as one formation for randomization.
Weather Changes: Determine results per Rule 15.2.
Unexpected Flak: All formations on the same side as, and
in the dot of, the affected formation that can be reached by the
random AAA are attacked per Rule 15.4.3. Ignore this event if
over water or neutral territory. If this occurs in friendly territory,
roll a D10. On a result ≥ 8, the affected formation (only) is fired
on (accidentally) by friendly flak of the type indicated.
Random A/C Encounters: Roll a D10 and refer to the A/C
Encounter Tables in the scenario to find the type encountered.
If the random A/C are friendly, they may be ignored or kept
in play. If kept, roll a D10 for the number of Op-turns they can
be used: 1-4 = one, 5-8 = two, 9-10 = three turns, after which,
they are removed from play. If enemy fighters, treat it as an
unintentional encounter for first sight roll and engagement op-
tions. If enemy non-fighters, the A/C may be ignored or engaged
as desired. The affected formation always wins first sight over
non-fighters. The start altitude for randomly encountered A/C is
the lowest level of the band of appearance plus a D5 in levels.
The start endurance for random A/C is 30% plus a D5 in 10%
increments of internal fuel (40% to 80%).
 42
Navigation Errors, Headwinds, Tailwinds: The formation
suffers the indicated fuel loss and Op-MP move penalties. For
headwinds and tailwinds, the formation is shifted one dot left or
right, respectively, at no cost in fuel (even if it causes them to
overshoot a target hex).
A/C Malfunctions: These affect only one A/C in the OMT
column. Randomly determine which formation and A/C within it
is affected. The following is a summary of possible results:
Drop Tanks / Aux. Fuel Fails to Transfer: If the A/C has
drop or aux. fuel tanks with endurance remaining in them,
one's endurance (random which) is immediately lost. If drop
tank or aux. fuel is empty, or wasn't carried, a weapons group
or defensive gun is randomly lost instead.
Drop Tanks Stick: A drop tank cannot be jettisoned. If all
tanks were already dropped, or if not using tanks, a weapons
group or defensive gun is randomly lost instead.
O2 Failure: The A/C's oxygen supply fails. Roll a D10. On a
result > 7 the crew is unaware and if the A/C is in the MH or
higher band they lose consciousness. Otherwise the crew is
aware and allowed one Op-turn to descend to ML or lower
bands. The crew may stay in the ML band one turn, but
must descend to the LO or lower band in the next turn or
they lose consciousness. If a crew loses consciousness the
A/C remains in place and dives 10 +D10 in levels in its next
move. If in the LO or VL band after diving, roll a D10. On a
result ≤ 7 the crew regains consciousness and recovers the
A/C. Otherwise it continues diving. If it dives below level 1,
it crashes with the loss of all crew.
Weapon Group Failure: Randomly lose a weapon group.
Equipment Failure: Roll on the Equipment Critical Hit Table.
Crew killed or wounded results become a radar, navigation
system, or radio loss instead (randomly determine which).
Engine Problem: Roll on the Engine Critical Hit Table.
15.6 –– UNINTENTIONAL ENCOUNTERS
Unintentional encounters with enemy A/C, whether they
have already moved or not, can occur during take off, movement,
landing descents or during the Intercept & Combat Phase. Check
for unintentional encounters the instant an A/C or formation:
• expends its first FP to enter or stay in a dot containing en-
emy A/C in the same band or changes altitude to enter or
pass through a band containing enemy in the same dot.
Procedure: Roll dice for LH. Use only the band's weather
modifier and +5 for each enemy formation > 1 or for each 3 inde-
pendent enemy A/C in the dot and band in question. A final LH
≥ +21 means an encounter occurs. Randomly determine which
formation or single A/C is encountered and then check for first
sight (14.2). Only one encounter check occurs per dot & band
entered, even if additional FPs are expended in the same dot.
Encounter Options:
• If the side winning first sight is on an air-to-air mission, it
may stop and engage the other A/C or ignore and pass
through them. If not air-to-air types, they must pass through.
• If an engagement occurs and the other side's A/C are not
on an air-to-air mission, they may still move in their turn,
dragging the attackers with them or stay in place to fight. If
air-to-air types they must remain in place and fight.
• If a pass through was declared and the passed up side's
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
A/C are on air-to-air missions, they may opt to become the
attacker. If so, they are dragged to the pass through A/C's
final destination before the fight begins.
• If the drag, along with any prior movement, exceeds the
dragged A/C's max dash speed in Op-MPs, the dragged
A/C may not move in the following Op-turn and will use 10
minutes of endurance regardless of speed chosen.
Notes: An unintentional encounter during a successful inter-
cept altitude shift replaces the original intercept. An encounter
during a ground attacker's altitude shift drags the encountered
A/C into the combat scale battle. Roll a D10, the result is the
game turn the dragged A/C enter play per Rule 15.9. Unintentional
encounters cannot occur when regrouping or at night scenarios
(Rules 15.12 and 32.1).
15.7 –– DELIBERATE ENCOUNTERS
Movement Phase Intercepts: Intercepts may be attempted
by unengaged free hunters, fighter escorts, CAP formations or
single F or L class A/C, whether they have already moved or not,
anytime enemy formations or A/C do altitude changes or expend
an FP so that their new position is within intercept range.
Movement Phase Intercept Range: The target must be in
the same dot and within the vertical limits listed below:
• L,F close escorts = one band above to 1 below.
• MF close escorts = within same band to 1 below.
• Other L, F class A/C = one band above to 3 below.
• Other MF class A/C = within same band to 2 below.
Intercept Limits: Interceptors may make one attempt each,
per game turn, against each enemy formation or single A/C that
moves within range. Intercept attempts may be declared and
executed in any order by the owning player. A/C which success-
fully intercept or are intercepted in this Phase become engaged.
Procedure: Declare the intercept target and roll for LH adding
any required modifiers (Op-Tables, page 7). A final LH ≥ the no.
listed for the intercept type = success, otherwise the intercept is
missed. Shift successful interceptors to the target's dot & band.
Missed intercepts have no affect on the interceptors.
Intercept effects on Movement: Intercepted A/C on air-
to-air missions, have their movement terminated at the point of
intercept and fight there. If the intercepted A/C include A/C NOT
on air-to-air missions, the interceptors are "dragged along" per
Rule 15.6 to the non-ATA A/C destination dot before shifting
altitude bands to complete the intercept.
Combat Phase Intercepts: A/C on air-to-air, or scouting
missions that are not engaged may attempt intercepts against
enemy A/C within encounter range. Engaged or unengaged
A/C on air-to-ground missions may still declare surface attacks
against ground and naval targets within encounter ranges.
Combat Phase Encounter Ranges: The target must be
within the horizontal and vertical limits listed below:
• All close escorts – Same as for movement phase.
• All other F, L A/C – within one dot, from one band
above to any bands below.
• All other class A/C – within one dot, from in the same
band to any bands below.
Intercept Limits: A/C on air-to-ground missions may not at-
tempt air-to-air intercepts until their primary mission is complete
 Fighting Wings
or unless they abort their mission (jettison loads). A/C escorting
ground attackers may be split off to intercept normally.
EWR & GCI Radars Effects: An early warning radar (EWR)
may add a +30 mod. to one tracked, radio equipped, friendly
formation's intercept attempts of enemy formations tracked by the
same EWR. A Ground Control Intercept (GCI) radar may provide
a +40 intercept mod. against only one tracked enemy formation
per Op-turn, but, for up to four IFF (Identification Friend or Foe)
equipped friendly formations, or for one non-IFF formation.
Tracking ranges, in terms of dots from the radar unit, depend
on the size of the target A/C group. Count the no. of engines in
it and use the following detection ranges.
Target A/C Group EWR GCI
• ≤ 2 engines = 5 dots 3 dots
• ≤ 12 engines = 10 dots 4 dots
• ≥ 13 engines = 15 dots 5 dots
Radar Limits: EWRs and GCI radars cannot track terrain
hugging A/C (Chapter 16), or those at an altitude ≤ 500 feet per
two OMT dots or less away. Radio equipped CAP working with
a radar may operate out to 10 dots from that radar. Friendly A/C
with IFF sets are automatically detected out to the max range
of a radar, regardless of engine count in their formation.
15.8 –– INTERCEPT & COMBAT PHASE
Unengaged air-to-air capable formations attempt intercepts
in this phase. Unengaged and engaged strike mission forma-
tions may declare attacks on located ground or sea targets. If
unengaged at the moment, use TOI = 1 (see 15.9). If already
engaged, a strike mission formation must resolve their air combat
before resolving their air-to-surface strike (determine a normal
follow-on TOI for the strike). Otherwise, all engagements between
formations are resolved in TOI order (see 15.9).
Intercept and Combat Phase Steps:
• Determine intercept & surface attack initiative (Rule 15.8).
• Declare intercepts & surface attacks in initiative order.
• Check for unintentional encounters (Rule 15.6) during
intercept and attack dot & altitude band shifts.
• Unengaged CAP may be "called down" (Rule 15.11).
• Establish a time line for all combats (Rule 15.9).
• Use Tactical and Combat Scale Play as required to
resolve engagements in "TOI" order (Rule 15.9).
• Conduct Defense Zone Flak attacks (15.4.3).
• Declare strategic area bombing attacks.
Intercept & Attack Initiative Procedure:
1. Roll a D10 for each formation or individual A/C in play.
The result = its initiative number. If formation is led
by a veteran, ace, or hero add 1 to the roll. Roll again
without modifiers, as necessary, to break ties.
2. The formation with the HIGHER initiative goes first. It
may pass, declare an attack on a located surface tar-
get, or attempt air-to-air intercepts up to three times.
• On a pass, the next highest initiative formation goes.
• If attacking a ground target, proceed per Rule 15.10.
• If attempting an intercept, proceed per Rule 15.7.
3. After all formations have gone once, the process is
repeated for any remaining unengaged formations
that previously passed starting with the highest initiative.
If a formation passes twice, they are done for the phase.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
43
Note: X, H, and M class A/C must pass unless declaring
ground attacks, or unless L or F class A/C are part of their
force, in which case, these can do intercepts normally.
Intercept Limits: Unengaged formations may attempt up
to three air-to-air intercepts (declared and resolved one at a
time), each against a different enemy. If one succeeds, or all
attempts fail, that formation's turn ends. It may still be the target
of, or have unintentional encounters with formations acting later
in the Intercept & Combat Phase.
Splitting Up: A formation that successfully intercepts need
not attack with all of its A/C. Some may remain behind while the
rest engage the enemy. A/C remaining behind or splitting off must
retain formation integrity (i.e., element leads and wingmen must
stay or split off together, etc.). A/C that remain after a split off are
unengaged and deemed to have passed. They may still attempt
intercepts later in the phase but may not split up again.
Exception – veteran & Hero pilots may split off as individuals
as long as their wingmen can be placed with another leader.
Intercept Start Altitudes: See Rule 14.1.
Right of Combat Refusal: Intercepted A/C in excess of
twice the number of attackers may be withheld from combat
and are not considered engaged. When withheld, they become
a separate unengaged formation with the same initiative num-
ber as the original force. Withheld A/C must maintain formation
integrity, meaning existing flights and elements may not split up
when withheld. If any one A/C in a fixed formation is involved,
then all in the formation must be involved.
Intercept Notes: If attempting an intercept into an existing
engagement, the currently engaged A/C from both sides are
summed into a single "enemy" force for modifier purposes.
15.9 –– INTERCEPT & ATTACK TIME-LINES
After all intercept attempts and attack declarations are done,
A/C involved in more than one encounter must have a time-line
for any extra intercepts established as follows:
Time-of-Intercept (TOI) = 1: The first intercept made in
each Op turn, occurs at time = 1 minute into the Op-turn; this
becoming turn 1 of tactical play (the set up turn).
TOI = 1+N: All other A/C or formations intercepting any
participant of the "TOI = 1" battle secretly roll a D5, +1 for
each formation joining the "TOI = 1" battle before them that
Op-turn. The result (N) is the new arrival's TOI. Note this on
paper and reveal it at the proper time.
TOI Use: Once all formations involved in the same battle
have a TOI determined, the A/C in the "TOI = 1" intercept begin
Tac-scale play. Each Tac-turn advances the TOI time-line one
minute and if combat scale play commences, each 15 combat
turns played advance the time-line one minute.
TOI Pre-Intercept Maneuvering: Formations arriving at a
later TOI may adjust altitudes and speeds per the Tac-Scale at-
tacker movement Rules (Rule 14.4) from TOI = 2, up to, but not
including, that of their actual TOI of entry.
Example: A formation has a TOI = 3. When the TOI = 1
combatants start combat turn 16, TOI = 2 will have begun and
the TOI = 3 formation could change speed and altitude once, if
desired, prior to entering the engagement on TOI=3.
 44
INTERCEPT PHASE & TOI EXAMPLE
Set Up: On the OMT (see diagram below), the Allied and
Axis players have the following formations:
• Allied-1: Twelve bombers in fixed formation with a close
escort of four fighters in Dot 4.3 at altitude 22.0.
• Axis-1: Two fighters in Dot 4.4 at altitude 30.0.
• Axis-2: Eight fighters in Dot 4.3 at altitude18.5.
Intercept Initiative: Allied-1 = 5, Axis-1 = 8, Axis-2 = 2.
Axis-1 (4.4, 30.0) HI
(4.3, 22.0) Allied-1 MH
2 escorts
ML
Axis-2 (4.3, 18.5)
LO
VL
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 6
Intercept Actions: Axis-1 goes first and passes. The Allied
force goes next and detaches two escorts (Allied-2) to try and
intercept Axis-2. The rest of Allied-1 must pass. The intercept
succeeds and the fighters drop to the Axis-2 position (base al-
titude 18.5, with Allied-2 claiming a higher relative altitude). By
using the "Combat Refusal" Rule, the Axis keeps four fighters
out of the fight (becoming Axis-3).
Axis-3 goes next and successfully intercepts Allied-1, climbing
to its position (base altitude 22.0, attackers starting from below).
The Allies may withhold their last two escorts from combat but do
not. Initiative returns to Axis-1 and they try to intercept the main
Allied force but miss. They next attempt to intercept the engaged
Allied-2 escorts and succeed. They shift to position 4.3 and drop
to the ML band (base altitude 18.5, from above). Axis 1 risks an
unintentional encounter with Allied-1 as they pass the MH band,
but this does not occur. Three combats have been initiated:
1. Two fighters of Allied 2 vs. four Fighters of Axis-2.
2. Axis-3 vs. twelve bombers and two escorts.
3. Axis-1 pair vs. detached Allied-2 pair.
TOI Determination: Combats 1 & 3 both involve Allied-2 so a
TOI must be established for both fights. Allied-2's intercept of the
four Axis-2 fighters happened first and occurs at TOI = 1. Axis-1,
arriving later, rolls a "3" on a D5 and their TOI is 1 + 3 (D5 roll)
= 4. Thus they join combat, be it at the tactical or combat scale,
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
on the equivalent of Tac-turn 4. Combat 2 between Axis-3 and
the bombers is resolved as a completely separate battle.
TOI Pre-Intercept Moves Example: The two Allied-2 fighters
begin TMG play against Axis-2, maneuvering for a bounce and
are not spotted on either turns 1 or 2. On turn 2, Axis-1 opts to
descend from 30,000 to 27,500. Axis-2 spots Allied-2 on Tac-turn
/ TOI =3 and combat begins. On turn 3 Axis-1 decides to dive
5,000 feet to 22,500, and risks an unintentional encounter with
the Allied-1 battle upon changing altitude bands. This does not
occur. They will enter the Allied-2 combat between turns 12 and
20 as their TOI = 4 time of entry equates to combat turn 16 in
this situation. No other precombat maneuvering is possible.
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
15.9.1 –– ENTERING TACTICAL SCALE PLAY
A/C enter an existing tactical scale engagement when their
TOI equivalent to the Tac-Turn arrives as follows:
• If the intercept is against the TMG defender, add the
new force to attacker's side per Rule 14.3.
• If the intercept is against a TMG attacker, one set of
attackers is "bounced" per Rule 14.5.
15.9.2 –– ENTERING COMBAT SCALE PLAY
Each 15 turns of combat scale play is one TOI equivalent. If
A/C are entering a combat game already in progress on any TOI
other than TOI=1, The owning player secretly rolls two D5s no
later than five game turns prior to the one that marks the start
of their actual TOI of entry. Subtract the second roll from the
first. This will give a possible range of results of –4 to +4 which
is added to the game turn that marks the start of their TOI of
entry. The modified result is the actual turn of entry which can,
therefore, be anywhere from four turns early to four turns late.
TOI Tracking Example: A formation is intercepted twice in
Op-scale play. The first intercept starts Tac-turn 1, and the next
occurs at TOI = 4. If combat begins on Tac-turn 2, combat turns
1 to 15 mark the passage of Tac-turn 2, turns 16 to 30 = Tac-turn
3, etc.The TOI = 4 arrivals thus have a designated game turn
of entry of turn 31 (the start of TOI = 4), but could actually enter
anytime from turn 27 through turn 35.
Combat Scale Set Up: The leader of the new arrivals sets
up on the 6:00 line of, and at a horizontal range = 3 + D5, or 6 +
D5 (his choice) from any single enemy A/C. Relative altitude is
per Rule 14.1. The rest set up in normal formation parameters
and are then scattered per Rule 14.7. All new arrivals may adopt
any angle of bank, with appropriate flight attitudes and speeds
for where they intercepted from (diving if from above, etc.).
15.10 –– AIR-TO-SURFACE ATTACKS
Mission Scale Bombing: This is declared after the Intercept
& Combat Phase and resolved at its calculated TOI using the
Mission Scale Bombing Results Table in the Scenario Book's
supplemental last pages. Use this for large bombing formations.
Combat Scale Attacks: Attacks against small surface tar-
gets and ships are resolved with combat scale play. Separate
formations attacking the same target in the same Op-turn each
determine a TOI per Rule 15.9, entering play accordingly. En-
gaged formations must fully resolve any combat scale air combats
started before their ground strike's TOI arrives. If not, the strike
 Fighting Wings
TOI slides one minute at a time until all related air combats are
over. If Tac-scale play has not resulted in a combat when a
ground strike's TOI arrives, the strike begins on time, with any
uncommitted interceptors entering on any following TOI number.
When a formation commences its attack it may remain to-
gether, or break itself up into smaller formations, all of which may
then freely descend up to one altitude band if H, or M class, or
up to two bands if L, F, or D class before setting up the combat
scale game. If a formation breaks up into smaller components,
all resulting formations keep the original TOI. Once a new base
altitude is declared for formations shifting altitude, combat scale
play can begin starting with the formations having a TOI = 1
(Note: If attacking naval units see Rule 30.2.).
Combat Scale Strikes: After setting up all ground or naval
units involved, the TOI = 1 formation enters play. If more than
one formation is entering at the same TOI, pick one to enter play
on game turn one and each subsequent formation enters after a
D5–1 delay in turns from the previous formation's turn-of-entry.
Roll a D10 to see what side and edge of the game map's
fold segments a formation will enter from per the diagram below
and in the Op-Tables, page 3. After each formation enters play,
roll a D10 to determine where the next enters from. Repeat this
procedure for each formation entering combat. If a formation
completes its attack before subsequent attackers enter play, the
follow on attacks may be played as a new game.
A/C Entry: A formation's A/C must all enter play on their
predetermined turn through any hex on the predetermined map
edge segment, at any allowed speed, facing, bank angle, at the
base altitude declared. They start in level flight attitude at no
higher than max attainable speed unless they descended prior
to set up, in which case, shallow or steep dive attitudes and dive
speeds may be selected. An attacking formation's A/C are not
required to enter play in formation parameters, just on the same
turn and from the same map fold segment edge.
Attacker Shift Option: A formation may enter play from a
different map edge fold segment than the one rolled for it by
delaying its game turn of entry by two turns for each map edge
fold segment away it decides to enter from.
MAP SEGMENT ENTRY POSITION DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4
NA 5 Significantly Damaged A/C Landings: Each A/C having
N 10 NA
9 8 7 6
15.11 –– POINT DEFENSE CAP
Point Defense CAP: Radio-equipped CAP in the same dot
as the target they are defending may be called down for target
point defense rather than attempting intercepts. Point defense is
declared in normal intercept initiative order and ends the CAP's
turn. Point defense CAP may descend one or two bands upon
being called down and get a –1 modifier to any TOI rolls.
Point Defense CAP Play Entry: There are two cases:
1. If the CAP is called down before any attacks are declared
on the target, they set up & start play on the combat map.
CAP On Map Set Up: Before the attackers determine their
map section of entry, the CAP leader sets up within 10 hexes
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
45
of hex 2925, with any facing, at any altitude in their final band,
in level flight, with an upright bank, between cruise and max
attainable level speed. The rest of the CAP sets up in normal
formation parameters. The CAP may split into smaller formations
and spread out so long as each subordinate leader meets the
above parameters.
2. If enemy A/C declare attacks first, the CAP arrives per
normal TOI procedures but subtracts 1 from its TOI roll.
CAP Combat Scale Entry: The CAP enters play on their TOI
per Rule 15.9.2. If the attackers complete an air-to-surface game
before the CAP arrives, the CAP wins first sight and may either
initiate normal TMG procedures against the former attackers,
or ignore those attackers and remain on map as point defense
against later attacks in the same turn against the target.
15.12 – REGROUP / LANDING / SERVICING PHASE
Regrouping / Landing / Servicing Phase:
• A/C split up by combat may try to regroup.
• Unengaged VL band A/C may land.
• Resolve landing group (LDG) landing attrition.
• Individually resolve significantly damaged A/C landings.
• Previously landed A/C may refuel, load weapons or rearm.
Regrouping: A/C involved in combat that end up in the same
OMT dot after disengaging may try to regroup per the normal en
route join ups procedure and limits (Rule 15.5).
Landing: Landing limits are the same as for take offs. A/C in
a friendly base's OMT dot in the VL band may land by declaring
the act and using up a D5 of endurance. If the endurance used
exceeds the fuel remaining, the A/C runs out of gas and becomes
a gliding A/C (see significantly damaged A/C below).
All A/C landing at the same base in a turn, excluding signifi-
cantly damaged ones, form a landing group (LDG) irrespective
of type or class. Roll for LDG landing attrition just as for take
off attrition. Randomly determine which A/C, if any, have land-
ing incidents. If so, roll percentile dice for each and refer to the
Landing Incidents Table (Operational Tables, Page 2) for their
fate. Landed A/C may be removed from Op-scale play or kept
for rearming and refueling.
Restrictions: A/C may not land in the same Op-turn they
take off, or if they were engaged in any way during the Op-turn.
any of the damage below must roll a D10. If the modified result
is ≤ 5 they land safely, if > 5, they suffer a landing incident and
must roll on the Landing Incidents Table:
• A/C is severely damaged or gliding (+1 each for incident).
• A/C landing gear damaged or trailing down.
• A/C controls jamming, or instruments out.
• Landing pilot WIA (+2 for incident), or all throttles jammed.
• A/C rudder out, ailerons damaged, or elevators damaged.
• Multi-engine A/C with one or more engines out.
• A/C with minor or major fire (+1 or +2 for incident resp.).
Forced Landings: A forced landing occurs if an A/C lands at
other than an airbase or aircraft carrier (seaplanes must land on
water unless amphibian types), or if it lands gear up anywhere,
or if it is gliding and a landing incident calls for a second landing
attempt. Unengaged or engaged A/C unable to sustain level flight
(Rule 15.4.1) resolve forced landings upon reaching ground level
during their Op-moves or while in combat.
 46
Resolving Forced Landings: If over land, roll a D10 and
consult the Forced Landing Locale Table (Operational Tables,
Page 3) to find the terrain the A/C is over. Roll on the Landing
Incident Table, modify and apply the results as indicated.
Refueling, Rearming, Relaunching: Landed A/C may
rearm, refuel and take off again in later Op-turns as allowed
by the scenario. An A/C may either refuel completely, rearm all
guns, or have up to 10 load points of stores loaded on them per
Op-turn. Scenarios may specify servicing limits depending on
type and remoteness of the base in use. If not otherwise stated
in a scenario, M or larger class mission A/C are allowed one
take off and landing per mission. L and F class mission A/C are
allowed two take offs and landings per mission. Interceptor side
A/C have no limits unless specified in the scenario.
Temporary Repairs: An airbase can repair three A/C at a time.
An A/C carrier can repair one A/C per available hangar deck hex.
Each Op-turn, repairs are made as follows: Jammed guns and
stuck drop tanks are fixed when rearmed. A/C under repair for an
entire Op-turn may remove two points of damage or make one
roll to remove a critical hit (D10 ≤ 3 = succeeds). The following
damage: tail structure, wing spar, engine siezed and major fuel
leaks, cannot be repaired during a mission scenario. Severely
damaged A/C may not reduce existing hits below half of max
hit capacity (round down). Other A/C may have hits reduced to
1/10th of max hit capacity (round any fraction up). Unrepairable
damage is permanent for the rest of the mission.
YOU MAY NOW PLAY MISSION SCENARIOS
CHAPTER 16 –– MISC. ADVANCED RULES
16.1 –– LOW LEVEL FLIGHT & OBSTACLES
Tactical & Combat Scale: The ground is at level zero unless
otherwise noted in a scenario. The minimum altitude an A/C can
fly at is 100 feet. On combat scale terrain maps there may be
contour lines each representing rises of 100 feet or more. If an
A/C's MC or FP expenditures causes it to descend onto or meet
ground level terrain during its move, it crashes and is destroyed
killing all aboard. Exception, see Rule 16.3 (landings).
Operational Scale: A/C at or below 300 feet above ground
level are deemed to be hugging the terrain. Place them on the
numbered OMT squares instead of VL band squares. The fol-
lowing effects also apply:
• Radars cannot see terrain hugging A/C.
• –30, +10, +10 to Hvy., Med. and Lt. AA attacks respectively.
• If entire op-move spent terrain hugging, +2 to endurance use.
16.2 –– COMBAT SCALE WEATHER
Clouds are represented as decks or layers of varying thick-
ness that cover the entire game map. If in Op-scale play and
combat occurs in a band affected by weather (Rule 15.2), or, if
a scenario has random weather present, refer to the Combat
Scale Wx Generation Table (Op. Tables, page 3). Roll a D10 to
find how many decks or layers are present in affected bands.
Determine the cloud base heights and thickness as follows:
Cloud Bases: To determine the lowest (base) altitude level
of a deck or layer called for in an altitude band roll a D5 and add
the result to the highest level of the next lower band, or add it to
zero if the clouds are in the VL band.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Cloud Thickness: Layers start at their base level and extend
upward a D10 in 100 foot increments. Decks start at their base
level and extend upward a D5 of 1,000 foot levels. If a layer or
deck touches or overlaps other clouds, they combine to form a
single deck or layer using the lowest base and highest top of the
two. A layer or deck rolled up inside another is ignored. Scenarios
may have notes modifying cloud effects rules.
Combat Scale Set up Considerations: A/C may not be set
up inside, or be scattered into clouds (skimming heights okay). If
weather is rolled such that any combatant's relative start altitudes
would be in clouds, use this procedure:
Shift an affected defending formation's relative start altitude
up or down in a direction that will allow it to be at least 100 feet
clear of clouds with the least change in altitude. Do the same
for any affected attacking formations but use a direction that will
allow them to reach a height that keeps the defenders in sight.
Stop when the attackers reach the first base or top of clouds that
lets them see the defenders after the shift. Use whatever new
relative altitudes result. If this shift cannot keep the defenders in
their original band, or if it would cause operational ceilings to be
exceeded, roll again for weather and retry from original relative
altitudes. Repeat as needed.
Clouds, Sighting & Defensive Fire: A cloud deck or layer is
an obstacle to sighting. A/C on one side of clouds cannot see A/C
on the other. A/C at an altitude increment that defines the upper
or lower limit of clouds are considered to be skimming them and
can be seen by A/C on the same side of those clouds. A/C that
end a turn within a layer or deck can only be seen and attacked
by A/C that are at range one to them (or range of two to A/C on
fire. In the latter case defensive fire is allowed in response to a
range two attacker, but is resolved only after the attacker's shot
is resolved). A/C remaining unsighted or hidden for five turns in
a row are removed from play (they are disengaged). Inability to
see friendly A/C may force a larger formation to break up into
smaller components.
Disorientation: A/C that use inverted banks, steep or vertical
attitudes, slips, skids, or > TT rates while in clouds must roll per-
centile dice at end of their move. A roll of ≥ 80 = Disorientation.
If so, no attacks, no tailing and A/C flies randomly until starting a
game turn not in clouds or the pilot Reorients himself (percent
roll ≤ 20 at end of A/C's random move). Add primary pilot Stall /
Spin mods., –10 if multi-pilot, +20 if no instrument training, and
+50 if instruments lost (unless in formation as wingman to a
friendly A/C), to all orientation rolls.
Hidden Moves: Unsighted A/C inside, or on the other side
of clouds, are hidden. Remove hidden A/C from the map and
secretly plot two turns of moves for them on paper before any
other A/C move. At the end of each turn (reveal only their end
hex and no other data, except altitude if enemy within one hex)
and then plot another move (staying two turns ahead of current
move). When they become visible to an enemy they are returned
to the map for normal play and unused plotted moves discarded.
Exception - A/C starting at range of one or less to an enemy
A/C (range two if enemy on fire) using a hidden move still get to
see the hidden move (to give them the option to follow it).
16.3 –– COMBAT START, TAKE-OFF & LANDING
Engine Starts: Engine starts are automatic but take 10 +
D10 game turns to complete. Only one engine can be started
at a time. After all are started, A/C may taxi along the ground.
 Fighting Wings
Ground Taxi: Taxi speed = 1/3 hex per turn in a particular
facing. A 30° facing change is allowed at the end of each turn,
but A/C may only advance one hex across the ground on each
third turn of taxi while keeping the same facing.
Take Offs: A/C on the ground cannot stall or bank. Pitch at-
titude is level. A/C accelerate and move across the map normally.
Ignore power reductions for load status until airborne. An A/C is
airborne once start speed is ≥ adjusted minimum speed. Upon
becoming airborne, start altitude is set at 0.1 at no decel cost.
Landings: A/C may declare a touch-down in any hex entered
during a normal move in which the following conditions apply:
• Landing gear are in the "down" (landing) position.
• Start speed is within 1.0 of adjusted minimum speed.
• Altitude is 100' above the ground.
• Flight attitude is wings level in level flight.
Upon landing A/C roll to a stop as follows: Add a D5 (–1 each
to result if pilot veteran or gifted) to the A/C's touch down speed
(rounded down). Note – gliders just add 1 to touch down speed.
The sum is the number of hexes the A/C rolls or bounces along
the ground at landing speed before stopping. It may take one or
more turns after touchdown to finish the landing roll. After A/C
stops, normal taxi Rules apply. A/C leaving a designated clear
terrain landing area hex (i.e., enters a rough terrain, building,
or woods hex etc.) during a roll out, or which touchdown at a
speed > adjusted minimum +1.0, or which have significant dam-
age (Rule 15.12) must roll on the Landing Incidents Table (Op.
Tables, page 3) using appropriate modifiers.
Forced Landings: Forced landings occur when A/C not
designed for water landings touch down on water hexes or when
A/C touch down in other than an airfield runway or landing area
hex. A/C that force land must roll on the Landing Incidents Tables
(Operational Tables, page 3) when the touchdown is declared
adding in the forced landing modifiers. A forced landing "roll out"
(slide) takes the A/C to one hex past the touchdown hex.
A/C Carrier (CV) Start, Taxi & Take-Offs: The normal Rules
for start and taxi apply. Since a CV is moving into the wind, A/C
get a 0.5 speed gain above any speed earned through normal
acceleration at the start of a take off deck run. A catapult launch
instantly propels an A/C to the hex in front of the catapult deck
hex at its adjusted min. speed +0.5. Every combat scale CV take
off requires a Percentile roll. On a result ≥ 96, the A/C suffers an
abort and most roll on the Abort Fate Table. If it remains on the
deck it must taxi out of the way of following A/C before take offs
can resume.
A/C Carrier Landings: Use normal landing criteria except
the A/C must be in the carrier's rear deck hex and facing in the
same direction as the carrier when it declares a touch down.
Carrier landings require precision. If the A/C is not at exactly its
adjusted min. speed, add 10 to the landing roll below.
Every combat scale CV landing requires a percentile roll.
On a result < 96, the A/C lands and stops in the rear deck hex
(catches a wire). On a result ≥ 96 the A/C suffers an incident
and must roll on the Landing Incident Table. After an A/C lands
it requires a D5 of turns to be released from the wires before it
can taxi. Only one A/C may be in a landing deck hex at a time.
Float Planes & Sea Planes: All normal land based start, taxi,
take off and landing rules apply to float planes and seaplanes
operating from water except, there may exist scenario-designated
modifiers to the take off and landing attrition rolls due to "sea
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
47
state" (roughness of the water). Ships with pedestal mounted
catapults for seaplanes use the same procedure as for carrier
catapults except the catapult must be aimed in a direction that
doesn't launch the A/C into another hex of the same ship.
16.3.1 –– A/C CONFIGURATION CHANGES
Changing Configuration: Lowering or raising flaps or re-
tractable landing gear are distinct and separate actions, each
takes one turn to accomplish. Either the flaps or the gear may be
activated in a single turn. On the turn activated they are in transit
to the new position. Declare activations at the start of the A/C's
move. When flaps are moved, either the "retracted", "maneuver"
(combat) or "landing" setting must be specified. The benefits of
a new flap setting are not received on the turn of transit if going
from a lesser to a greater setting. The benefits of a previous flap
setting are lost if going from a greater to a lesser extended posi-
tion. Decel penalties apply on the turn of transit and on all turns
the gear or flaps remain extended. ADC notes may indicate that
A/C have fixed gear, no flaps, or have limits to flap settings.
Flaps Down Effects:
• Flaps down in any setting add 1 decel per 30° of turn or
transition (ignore extra decel if gifted pilot).
• Flaps down in any setting reduce min turn speeds by 0.5.
(gifted pilots do not improve this, but eliminate above decel).
• Flaps down in landing setting reduce adjusted minimum
speed by 0.5 and provide a –05 modifier to any landing
incident rolls since the A/C is landing at a slower speed.
• Flaps transiting to landing setting incur 1 decel.
• Flaps staying in or transiting out of the landing setting
incur decel = 1+1/2 A/C speed.
• Flaps in, transiting to, or out of mnvr. setting incur 1 decel.
Gear Down Effects: (A/C with fixed landing gear or floats
ignore this Rule as the effects are built in to their ADCs).
• The A/C's max attainable speed is reduced by 1/3.
• If flying, gear down or in transit decel = 1/2 start speed.
Over-Speeding Flaps & Gear: When the gear or flaps are
extended, fragile parts such as gear doors, hinges, actuators and
such can be damaged by excess speed as given below. Check
for damage at the end of each turn. (A/C with fixed landing
gear or floats cannot overspeed their landing gear).
• Combat flaps in the maneuver setting become damaged if
their ADC limit speed is exceeded (if no limit speed is
listed, then if A/C's max listed level speed is exceeded).
• Normal flaps in the maneuver setting become damaged if
A/C speed is > listed minimum speed +3.0.
• Any Flaps in the landing setting become damaged if A/C's
start speed is > listed minimum level +2.0.
• Retractable landing gear become damaged if extended
and A/C's start speed is > listed minimum level +3.0
Damage Effects: Damaged flaps jam in their current position
and provide no benefits, but continue to incur decel. Damaged
landing gear may still be raised or lowered, but roll a D10 on
each attempt. On a result ≤ 3, they don't move and jam in place.
Landing on damaged gear requires a landing incident check.
16.4 –– BARRAGE BALLOONS
A balloon counter equals one balloon and its mooring cables
in combat scale play, and an area of balloons arranged in a bar-
rier at the Op-scale. Balloons are not used in Tac-scale play.
 48
Op-scale: Balloon counters are placed as allowed in dot
positions in the VL band with a base altitude of 1,500 to 5,000
feet as given in the scenario. A/C or formations entering that dot
position at or below the base altitude must roll on the A/C Attrition
Table. Add +1 per A/C in the group, plus the density value of the
balloon counter (default = 10) to the Attrition LH result.
The affected A/C given by the Attrition Table result is the
number of A/C colliding with balloon cables. Randomly determine
which. A/C that collide roll a D10. On a result of ≤ 7 they are
destroyed. On an 8, 9 or 10 they survive but suffer damage as
given below and lose a D10 x 500 feet in altitude. Collisions do
not eliminate the counter as it represents dozens of balloons.
Combat Scale Use: Barrage balloons may be set at altitudes
of 5,000 feet or less in 500' increments. No balloon may be within
5 hexes of another. A/C entering a balloon hex or hexside of that
hex, at or below the altitude of a balloon or its remains must roll a
D10. On a result ≤ 5, a collision occurs with the cables destroying
the balloon. A/C hitting cables suffer the following effects:
• One D10 of damage and 3 x D10 of decel is incurred. If
the damage amount is odd, roll a wing critical hit, if
even, roll an engine critical hit.
• At the start of the next turn, roll a D10. On a result = 8, 9
or 10, the cables slip off but the A/C still suffers 3 x D10
of decel. On a result ≤ 7, the A/C is permanently en-
tangled and goes out of control and will crash.
Cable Cutting A/C: Some A/C had cable cutting gear mounted
on extensions in front of their wings and fuselage or built into
their wings and nose. If so, collision effects are reduced to a D10
of decel, and a D5 of hits with no critical hits for extended cable
cutters, or a D5 of hits with criticals as above for built in cutters.
Entanglement does not occur (ignore second bullet above) and
the balloon is cut free. The threat of the cables below the cut
altitude is nullified and the balloon rises 100 feet per turn with
its remaining dangling cables still a threat. Cable-cutter A/C may
deliberately try to collide with cables if declared when they move.
If so, a collision occurs on a D10 ≤ 9, else the A/C misses.
Shooting Down Balloons: Balloons may be shot down by
gunfire or rockets. They have a defense of "6" and can take 20 hits
without being destroyed. If destroyed, the remains (with cables)
plummet to the ground at 500 feet per game turn. Balloons are
flammable. When damaged, roll a D10. If result ≤ the no. of hits
inflicted in that attack, it bursts into flames and is destroyed.
16.5 –– SIMPLIFIED A/C FLIGHT RULES
Designer's Note: The following Rules allow A/C to be moved
without filling in individual log sheets. This speeds play with large
groups of bombers or fighters. Any A/C may use these Rules
so long as it stays within the maneuver limits listed below. If
necessary for damage, or a desire for more dynamic flight, A/C
may set up a log at any point and be flown normally.
Simplified Move Flight Logs: A/C using the simplified flight
Rules below only need to have their end hexes and flight data
recorded on the "Simplified Move Flight Log".
Simplified Flight Rules (SFR):
• Individual A/C initiative is ignored. If both sides use SFR,
roll a D10. The low roller moves all SFR A/C first. All SFR
A/C move before A/C in their class using normal flight.
• A/C speed may not be increased to ≥ max attainable level
speed unless in a dive. If above and no longer diving,
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
speed must be reduced by 1.0 / turn to max attainable.
• Only EZ or TT turns allowed, accel & decel are ignored.
• Only slips or skids without facing changes allowed and
only on the last HFP expended.
• Flight Attitudes may only be changed one step per turn
and only after the A/C finishes its move.
• Use the Standard Altitude Change Table FP proportions.
• Use normal MC, OC and VFP altitude change Rules.
• Vertical climb attitudes are not allowed.
• Bank may be changed one step per turn at end of move.
• Inverted bank angles are not allowed.
• If desired reduce speed by 0.5 at start of move. Reduce or
increase speed by 0.5 per 500 feet climbed or dived, resp-
ectively, in move. If no speed reduction taken, and no turns,
slips or skids done, add 0.5 to speed at end of move.
Simplified Flight Procedure: Reduce speed 0.5 if desired.
Move the A/C as allowed by the SFRs. Increase or decrease
speed as required for altitude change. Change attitude or bank
angle one step. Add 0.5 speed if allowed. Fill in simplified move
log or just the needed data on a normal log sheet.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CHAPTER 17 –– A/C RELATED SPECIAL RULES
17.1 –– COCKPITS & FUEL FIRES
If a third edition A/C's ADC has the note "Cockpit Fire Vul-
nerability", its main fuel tank is situated just in front of the pilots,
directly behind the engine. If this tank caught fire, the cockpit
could quickly become an inferno. Therefore, any such A/C doing
a fuel fed fire progress check, must roll a second D10. If result
≤ 3, (–1 per previous fire induced cockpit critical), then roll for a
cockpit critical hit (no protection modifiers).
Note – This applies to all previously published Spitfire or Hur-
ricane model ADCs and Soviet I-15, I-153 and I-16 ADCs.
17.2 –– H and SH CLASS DAMAGE NOTES
4-Engine A/C Engine Loss Play Aid: The increase in min
speeds and the reduction in max attainable speeds for damaged,
or knocked out engines is cumulative with additions and reduc-
tions, respectively, for being loaded, over loaded, or severely
damaged. In four-engine A/C this can get confusing, a helpful
table is provided below which also takes into account asymmetric
thrust minimum speed increases.
4-Engine Bomber Min / Max Attainable Speed Changes
Normal Loaded Over-loaded
All eng. good +0.0 / -0.0 +0.5 / -0.5 +1.0 / -1.0
1 eng. out +0.5 / -0.5 +1.0 / -1.0 +1.5 / -1.5
2 eng. out DS +0.0 / -1.5 +0.5 / -2.0 +1.0 / -2.5
2 eng. out SS +1.0 / -1.5 +1.5 / -2.0 +2.0 / -2.5
3 eng. out +0.5 / -2.0 +1.0 / -2.5 +1.5 / -3.0
4 eng. out +0.0 / idle +0.5 / idle-0.5 +1.0 / idle-1.0
• If bomber severely damaged, add +0.5 / -1.0 to all values.
• SS= on same side, DS= on different sides.
Large A/C Crew Casualties: If A/C with ≥ 8 crew receive
a cockpit critical hit, roll twice for its effect. A result of 7+ on the
second roll = hollow hit. Players may wish to design their own
tables to randomize who is wounded or killed in large A/C. Below
is a sample bomber casualty table:
 Fighting Wings
Sample B-17, B-24 Casualty Table:
D10 Roll Crew member Affected
1, 2 = Bombardier, Navigator
3, 4 = Pilot, Co-pilot
5, 6 = Engineer, radioman
7 = Belly Turret Gunner
8, 9 = Left, Right Waist Gunner
10 = Tail Gunner
Modifiers: –1 if attacked from front arc (clock lines 11 to 01),
+1 if from rear arc (clock lines 05 to 07). Also, some A/C may
have ADC limits on which crew can be hit from which arcs.
17.3 –– JET AND ROCKET A/C RuleS
Swept Wing Compressibility and Climbs: Compressibility
is delayed for A/C noted as being "swept winged" until 1.0 past
the transonic speeds listed in the Turn Chart. Climb speed for
swept wing A/C = cruise speed.
Jet Fuel Consumption: Jet engines are more efficient at
high altitudes than low ones. To reflect this, at the Op-scale,
"turbo-jet" A/C that start and remain in the VL band use 2 extra
minutes of endurance at all power settings and those starting
and remaining in the MH+ bands use 4 less than normal at all
power settings except endurance setting which, if allowed, uses
3. Tac-scale and combat scale fuel use is per normal Rules.
Me 163 Compressibility & Dangerous Dives: The Komet's
compressibility limit is also its safe dive speed. Anytime the
safe dive speed is exceeded, the Komet automatically enters
compressibility. Dangerous dives are rolled for only if its speed
is equal or greater than max safe dive speed plus 1.0.
Me 163 Endurance: The Komet's rocket engine has an
endurance of 8 minutes which is consumed as follows:
• Each Op-turn start, taxi, and take off (TO) = 1 min.
• Each ROC multiple or less gained on TO turn = 1 min.
• Each 100 points or less of accel in combat play = 1 min.
• Each Tac-scale escape try or climbing move = 1 min.
(other move types done at rocket idle for 0 end.)
• Each Op-turn move at max speed or less = 2 min.
• Each Op-turn move at endurance speed = 1 min.
• Any Op-turn move with descent > 6,000 feet = 0 min.
• Any Join-ups attempts or delays (each) = 1 min.
If it runs out of fuel before initiating combat it may only use
Tac-Scale and Op-Scale diving attacker move options.
Me 163 Limits: Komets must stay within two OMT dots of
their airfield. Every landing is a forced landing. The Komet's en-
gine cuts out if negative-G experienced. After a cut out, it cannot
be restarted for two minutes or the A/C will explode. If a Komet
experiences NG in combat play, it must use idle for the next 30
turns. The Me 163 is a "pusher" A/C (see below).
17.4 –– ODD ENGINE CONFIGURATIONS
Do 335 Vulnerability: This A/C has a unique twin fore and
aft engine lay out. Attacks from both front and rear arc get a –1
modifier to the A/C Area Hit roll, instead of +1 for rear arc attacks.
Mid Mounted Fuselage Engines: Because of their mid-
fuselage engines, P-39 Airacobras, P-63 King Cobras and similar
A/C such as most single engine jets (P-80 etc.) do not use the
modifiers to the A/C Area Hit roll for front or rear attacks.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
49
Pusher Configured A/C: A/C with engines on the rear of the
fuselage or on the rear of the wings, reverse the A/C Area Hit
roll modifiers (+1 for front arc attacks, –1 for rear arc attacks.
17.5 –– GERMAN ENGINE BOOST SYSTEMS
The Luftwaffe had MW-50, GM-1 and C-3 engine boosting
systems. MW-50 and GM-1 can be used at the Op-scale, and
all can be used at the Tac and Combat scales. A/C with MW-50
or GM-1 systems have a 40 minute supply of boost unless their
ADC states otherwise. Op-scale use consumes 10 minutes per
turn, Tac-scale 1 minute per turn. At the combat scale one minute
is consumed in each 15 turns or less of play, in which MW-50
or GM-1 was used one or more times. C-3 boosting imposes a
3 minute endurance penalty for each encounter at the Tac or
Combat scale. No benefits are allowed at Op-scale if < a 10
minute supply remains, or at any scale, if the majority of engines
are unable to use emergency power (Normal emergency power
is still allowed from good engines in combat scale play).
MW-50 Boost – A water-methanol mixture injected into the
engine as an anti-detonant allowing greater power at lower
altitudes. Unless stated otherwise on an A/C's ADC, it may only
be used if starting and remaining in the MH band or less for the
entire Op- or Tac-turn, or in combat scale play if in the MH or
less band. Its effects are as stated on each A/C's ADC.
GM-1 Boost – A nitrous-oxide gas mixture injected into an
engine at high altitudes (MH band and higher) as a source of
oxygen for greater combustion for more power (like a super-
charger). Its use and effects are as stated on the A/C's ADC.
C-3 Boost – A system used only on Fw 190s that injected
additional fuel into the engine intakes to super-enrich the mixture
providing an effect similar to MW-50 for extra power.
17.6 –– GLIDER FLIGHT RuleS
Towed Flight: A towed glider follows the tow plane's exact
flight path at all scales. At the start of any game turn they may
detach into free flight. A towed glider increases the tow plane's
load status by one (e.g. unladen becomes loaded). If a glider's
max tow speed is exceeded, roll a D10. If roll ≤ 3, the tow line
breaks. As none have oxygen, gliders are limited to being in the
LO band or less for towing and flight.
Free Flight: Detached gliders use Rule 15.4.1 at the Op-
Scale and may only use descending moves at the Tac-Scale.
At the combat scale, gliders use all normal flight Rules but only
get accel from descending. They are NOT treated as A/C at
idle power due to their glide ratios, instead they suffer 1.5 decel
per turn in addition to any maneuver decel they might incur. Its
listed base speed is the normal loaded glide speed, above that,
excess speed decel is incurred. Due to their light construction, a
+20 modifier exists for dangerous dive rolls. If landing at friendly
airfields, normal landing attrition is rolled for, otherwise the forced
landing Rules apply to all glider landings.
Loads: ADC data assumes a fully loaded glider. If actual load
is less than 1/3 of capacity. Reduce all min. speeds by 0.5 (but
never to < 1.0).
Damage: Gliders don't have engines or fuel. Engine criticals
become cockpit ones. Equipment and fuel criticals become cargo
bay hits. Passengers count as crew for randomizing casualties.
 50
PART FIVE - BLOWING THINGS UP
CHAPTER 18 –– AIR-TO-GROUND COMBAT
18.1 –– GROUND UNIT COUNTERS
The Unit Identification Table (Page 80) provides a key to the
different types of ground or ship units that may be in a FW game.
The following is a list of typical counter types:
Unit Type Size Description
Infantry Platoon 30 to 50 soldiers (10 in a squad).
Armor Vehicle One Tank or Halftrack & crew.
Artillery, AT Gun One or more guns & crews.
AAA AA Gun One AA gun or AA vehicle & crew.
Transport Vehicle One truck, jeep or wagon & crew.
Locomotive Vehicles One engine & 2-3 railcars.
Rail Car Vehicles Multiple flatcars or railcars.
Radar Unit An EW, GCI or AA radar & crew.
Ships Various See Chapter 26 for specifics.
Buildings Structure One building, wooden, or other.
POL Depot One supply storage site or dump.
Ground Unit Movement: The scenarios specify if, when and
how ground units may move.
Ground Unit Factors: A ground unit's defense strength and
hit capacity are printed on the lower left and right corners of its
counter, respectively. AAA units also have a range number on
their upper right corner. Ship defense strength and hit capacity
are listed on the ship data cards. Trenches double and bunkers
quadruple the defense strength of ground units in them.
Terrain Effects: Ground units occupy the map terrain type
that covers the largest portion of their hex. Scenarios may specify
units as being on a railroad, road, or inside buildings, vehicles or
ships. Terrain may modify defense strengths or add modifiers to
attack rolls (Terrain Effects Chart - Combat Tables, Page 7).
18.2 –– GROUND ATTACK BASICS
A/C may attack ground units, structures, or ships, with guns,
rockets, torpedoes or bombs. Attacks are normally executed in
the Combat Phase. Certain types of attacks may occur during
A/C movement. A ground attack is conducted as follows:
1. Declare the target of the attack (i.e., a ground or naval unit,
structure, terrain feature, or A/C on the ground).
2. Declare weapon in use (guns, bombs, rockets, etc.).
3. Accomplish aiming while on a valid line of approach (LOA).
See Rule 27.1 for options if target moves during aiming.
4. Fire or drop wpns. from a valid LOA release point & range.
5. When wpns. reach target, resolve each A/C's attacks, one
at a time, in order specified by rule 8.3.
Lines of Approach (LOA): The projected 12:00 line of an
A/C defines its current LOA. An LOA is valid for aiming if it ex-
tends through the center of the target hex, or down any hexside
of the target hex, and, for targets on a hexside, if it intersects or
touches either end of the hexside. The LOA diagram (Combat
Tables, Page 9), shows possible LOAs into a target hex.
Aiming: Three levels of aiming exist: "none", "minimal" or
"full". The level of aiming achieved depends on the time, in game
turns or in FPs expended, the A/C spent in proper parameters
prior to attacking (see Chapters 19 to 22 for aiming specifics).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Aiming Limits: Once started, aiming must continue until an
attack is launched or aborted. Aiming must be done while in an
upright bank. FPs counted for aiming cannot be used for turns
or skids (unless strafing), but may be used for rolls and slips.
Once an attack is executed or aiming is interrupted, all accrued
aiming is lost. Subsequent attacks, even against the same target,
require new aiming (unless strafing). Declaring tailing aborts any
aiming in progress up to that point.
Aiming Carry: Aiming may be accomplished over several
game turns. A/C may continue to aim after accomplishing "full"
aiming. Each full amount of extra aiming finished prior to attacking
provides a –10 modifier to the attack (limited to a max of –20).
Weapon Release Points (RPs): See Rule 20.1 and refer to
the Bomb Release Point Tables (Combat Tables, page 9).
Attack Limits: A/C may execute one ground attack per
game turn and may not do an air-to-air attack in the same turn.
Defensive guns may fire normally. Targets may be attacked more
than once per turn if each attack comes from a different A/C.
Target Types: Targets are either SOFT (unprotected), or
HARD (reinforced or armored). An underlined defense strength
indicates a hard target. Certain scenario designated targets (pill
boxes, bridge pylons, cave entrances, etc.) can be PIN-POINT
targets with extra conditions for attacking them. Weapons use
their appropriate hard or soft attack strength (see A/C Weapons
Tables in Scenario Book) against each target type.
Typical Attack Resolution: Total the attack strength of all
weapons that were effectively applied against the target by an
A/C. Compare this sum with the target's defense strength to
determine a combat odds as for air-to-air combat. Make a LH
roll for damage, modified as required by the Combat Tables.
Combat Results: Attacks will either miss, or inflict a number
of damaging hits. Targets are destroyed once cumulative hits
taken EXCEED their hit capacity. Hits greater than half a target's
hit capacity make it heavily damaged. Hits ≤ half a target's hit
capacity mean it is only damaged.
Armored Vehicle Targets: Armored vehicles do not take
cumulative hits. They are DISABLED if hits greater than half their
hit capacity are inflicted in a single attack. If disabled more than
once, they are destroyed. They are DESTROYED (wrecked) if
hits greater than the full hit capacity of the vehicle are inflicted
in a single attack. For victory point purposes, disabled vehicles
are worth half their destroyed value (rounded up).
18.3 –– COLLATERAL DAMAGE
Multiple Targets: If more than one target unit, ship or A/C
is in a hex, one will be the PRIMARY target and all others are
SECONDARY targets. Designate primary targets as follows:
• Strafing and rockets: Attacker selects primary target.
• Level and shallow glide bombing: Randomly determine
which unit is the primary target for each attack.
• Dive bombing: Attacker selects primary target.
• Cluster weapons: All targets in the hex are a primary
target and all are attacked by the weapon's full strength.­
Secondary Targets: Each is attacked using half the normal
attack strength (rounded up) of the weapon aimed at the primary
target. Add only terrain modifiers to a secondary target attack.
 Fighting Wings
Multiple Bomb Effects: All bombs impacting a hex in the
same turn which explode in the same combat phase segment
(see Rule 8.3) combine their attack strengths into a single attack
against each target. First determine if a target is the primary or
secondary target of each set of bombs, then sum the appropriate
values, full or half, of the bombs before resolving the attack.
Combined Targets: Ground units inside buildings, transport
vehicles or ships are only attacked if the structure, transport or ship
containing them first suffers ≥ 1 hit, or is disabled or destroyed in
an attack. If so, attack each contained unit with the same attack
strength applied against the container using no modifiers. If the
structure, transport or ship is destroyed, but the contained unit
still exists, the unit vacates the container into the same hex.
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 19 –– STRAFING & ROCKET ATTACKS
19.1 — STRAFING WITH GUNS
A/C may strafe with fixed guns, defensive guns, or both.
Pilots aim the fixed guns. Strafing may be resolved during move-
ment upon the expenditure of any FP prior to the last, including
the one that accomplishes a level of aiming. Resolve strafing in
the combat phase if firing on the last FP. Aiming is NOT voided
by a strafe attack execution as long as subsequent attacks are
against the same target. Fixed & defensive guns may use half,
normal or long bursts when strafing. Tracking shots don't apply.
Full Aiming: FPs ≥ the A/C's current speed (or one full turn
of flight) expended with the target in the strafer's field-of-fire or
while on an LOA to the target, and in level or diving flight.
Minimal Aiming: FPs ≥ 1/2 the A/C's speed expended with
the target in the strafer's field-of-fire or while on an LOA to the
target, and in level or diving flight.
Aiming Limits: Aiming may not commence until the A/C is
within a range of 40 or less to the target (about 2 miles).
No Gunsight Modifier: If an A/C has lost its gunsight, apply
a +20 modifier to the attack (in lieu of the standard +40 attack
penalty for no gunsights, since shell strikes on the ground are
observable and mitigate the situation).
Strafe Restrictions: An A/C must expend at least 1/2 its
speed in FPs (rounded up) between shots at the same target
regardless of when it last fired. Only one shot per turn is allowed.
Fixed Gun Parameters: A target must be in the gun's hori-
zontal and vertical field-of-fire for at least one FP prior to firing.
Altitude Loss Requirement: A strafer staying in level flight
(no transition used) which does not end its move with a lower
altitude target in its vertical field-of-fire, must descend at least
one increment (via OC) per game turn of aiming.
Defensive Gun Strafe Parameters: Defensive guns with
fields-of-fire that include the A/C's altitude or lower may add their
firepower to a fixed gun attack, or they may strafe independently.
Aiming times and parameters are as for fixed gun strafing.
Range Doubling: Strafing is allowed out to twice the listed
range on the gun attack factors chart on the ADCs. Zero range
firepower is only used at actual zero range. Range Doubling Ex-
ample – A strafing attack at range 7 or 8 would use the firepower
listed on the ADC for range 4.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
51
Attack Strength: Total the double range attack strength of
all weapon groups involved. The deflection modifier for ground
targets is always x 1. Big guns (37mm or bigger) are fired sepa-
rately from other guns. Secondary targets are attacked by 1/2
the strength (round up) fired at the primary target but with a +40
modifier added to all other modifiers.
Modifiers: Use all applicable aiming, air-to-air attack and
terrain effects modifiers. Modifiers for gun harmony are based
on normal (not doubled) harmony ranges. A/C firing only nose
guns, or unharmonized wing guns, add +2 LH for each hex of
range greater than six due to bullet dispersion.
Gun Size and Hard Target Effects.
• Guns of < 12.7mm cannot damage hard targets (0 att. str.).
• Attacks including guns of < 30mm and 30mm MK 108s inflict
only half the damage called for (round up).
• All other 30mm to 35mm guns inflict normal damage.
• Big guns (≥ 37mm) double their firepower against hard tar-
gets and their attack is resolved separately and after any
smaller gun attacks by same aircraft.
• Guns of 37mm to 40mm inflict double hits on targets.
• Guns bigger than 40mm inflict triple hits on targets.
M.G. Sighting for Big Gun Strafing: A/C often used smaller
machine gun tracers to aim big guns even if the smaller guns
were ineffective (0 attack strength) against the target. Declare
M.G. sighting prior to resolving the big gun attack. The smaller
guns expend two points of ammo and suffer jams based on the
big gun burst length. If the smaller guns are ineffective against
the target, use half their firepower to determine odds and roll for
hits (but no actual damage occurs). This is an aiming only attack.
If the smaller guns are effective against the target determine odds
and resolve attack normally using the same burst length as the
big guns. If any hits are scored by the smaller guns, resolve the
big gun attack with an additional –20 modifier. If no hits occur,
the big gun attack may be rolled for normally or cancelled.
Strafing & Rocketing Armor: Armored vehicles have a spe-
cific facing in play, same as for A/C, to establish their front, side
and rear arcs. As vehicle armor is thinner on the sides, rear and
top of the vehicles, modifiers apply to strafing and rocket attacks
from those areas. A top attack occurs if A/C is firing from a steep
or vertical dive regardless of the arc the attack is otherwise from.
Front, rear and side attacks are defined as follows:
• Front arc = clock lines 11 to 01 inclusive.
• Rear arc = clock lines 05 to 07 inclusive.
• Anything else is a side arc.
Front attacks are resolved normally. Side attacks shift odds
2 columns right. Rear attacks shift odds 3 columns right. Top
attacks shift the odds 3 columns right and get a –10 modifier.
19.1.1 –– MULTI-TARGET AREA STRAFING
30mm or smaller guns may be used for area strafing. Up
to four targets in a hex, including ships on hexsides of the hex,
may be attacked at once as primary targets. A long burst must be
used, and EXTRA aiming provides NO benefit. Resolve attacks
for each target separately and include an additional modifier of
+10 x no. of targets attacked in the area strafe to each attack.
19.2 –– LARGE CANNON STRAFING
A/C with ≥ 75mm cannons (e.g., B-25G, Hs 129 & Ju 88P)
use the Rules below. Aiming is as for normal strafing.
 52
Eligible Targets: Large cannons may be used against land
targets, barrage balloons, or ships but not A/C. The firer must be
wings level (not turning, slipping, or skidding) when it fires. The
field-of-fire is as for fixed guns except that for each 10 hexes of
horizontal distance it widens by one hex to each side.
Rate of Fire: The 75mm cannon in U.S. aircraft was hand
loaded; in German A/C it was usually magazine fed.
• Magazine fed large cannons may fire up to twice per turn
(an exception to the normal strafe limits).
• Hand loaded cannons may only fire once per turn. They are
reloaded by a designated crewman. When fired, roll a D10.
A result ≤ 7 = cannon reloaded and available next turn. if un-
successful, roll for reloading at end of each following turn
until successful. Reloading is not allowed if cannon A/C fly
so as to prohibit clearing a gun jam or reloading guns.
Procedure: Roll LH to see if a hit is achieved. Normal aiming
modifiers apply. The final LH number or less required for a hit is
listed on the ADC and varies with range. A miss has no effect.
Inflicting Damage: A hit attacks soft targets with an attack
strength of 15 and armored (hard) targets with an attack strength
of 30, and does quintuple (x5) damage. Against ships a hit also
inflicts a deck strafing attack with an strength of 15 (crit. rating =
3). A minus modifier = the ship's direct hit number x 5, is allowed
when attacking from the ship's side arcs (defined as clock lines
(01) to (05) and (07) to (11)).
19.3 — AIR-TO-GROUND ROCKETS
Rocket attacks occur only in the Combat Phase. The Air-to-
Ground (ATG) Rocketry Table (Combat Tables, Page 10) lists
the min and max launch ranges for each type of rocket and the
range based attack modifiers. The table also lists the minimum
number of rockets that must be fired in each attack under the
"Minimum Multiple" column. Aiming is as for normal strafing.
Stacked A/C may do combined rockets attacks as allowed by
the air-to-air combined rocket attack (Rule 10.7).
Launch Parameters: The firer must have spent at least 1
FP since last facing, be in an upright bank with no carried turns
or maneuvers, within the rocket's min and max ranges and with
target in the firer's horizontal & vertical fixed gun field-of-fire.
Altitude Loss Requirement: A firer staying in level flight (no
transition used) must lose one altitude increment on each turn
of aiming if at a lower target until target is in its field-of-fire.
Level Rocket Attack Penalty: Add a +10 modifier to level
attitude attack rolls due to the low grazing angle.
Attack Procedure: Sum attack strengths of all multiples
fired at target. Compare total to target's defense factor to get a
combat odds. Determine hits normally. Modify rolls per the Air-
to-Ground Rocketry Table. Secondary targets use 1/2 the total
strength (round down) fired at the primary one with an extra +30
modifier. Rockets do double damage to their targets.
Pin-Point Targets: For each multiple fired at a pin-point pri-
mary target, roll a D10. A result ≤ 3 = multiple "on target". Sum
only "on target" multiples when resolving attacks on pin-point
targets. Pin-point secondary targets are still attacked using half
the total strength of all rockets fired.
Armor Targets: See Rule 19.1 for odds shifts and LH mods.
for attacking the side, rear or top areas of armored vehicles.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
19.4 –– STRAFING & ROCKETING SHIPS
Designer's Note: Exposed personnel manning AAA guns on
open decks were vulnerable to attacks on a ship's surface areas.
Strafing and Rocket Effects on Ship AAA: Each 10 hits
inflicted on a ship by a normal strafing or rocket attack, and each
5 hits inflicted in a deck strafing attack, randomly eliminates one
non-turreted AAA position. Other AAA battery loss causes are
detailed in Chapters 25 & 28.
Deck Strafing: An A/C may declare "deck-strafing" which
directs gun and rocket attacks against exposed gun crews. If so,
the ship's defense strength is the higher of 10 or half its normal
speed based defense strength. The ship is treated as a soft target
regardless of armor. The number of critical hits that would be
inflicted in an air-to-air attack by the deck strafe becomes the no.
of damaging hits actually inflicted on the ship. Note - This is just
a counting measure. No critical ship damage actually occurs.
Extended Range Deck Strafing: Steep or vertically diving
A/C may deck strafe to four times normal range. Each firepower
range value is valid to four times its range (i.e., use range 1 value
for attacks from range one to four, and so on). If firing only nose
guns, or unharmonized wing guns, add +2 LH for each hex of
range from 7 to max doubled range and +4 per hex thereafter
due to bullet dispersion, else normal harmony effects apply.
Suppressing AAA by Deck Strafing: As above, the number
of critical hits that would be inflicted in an air-to-air attack becomes
the number of one-turn suppressions randomly applied against
vulnerable non-turreted AAA gun batteries. One-turn suppressions
are cumulative and randomization can result in a single battery
suffering multiple turns of suppression from a single attack.
AAA Randomization: Consider all AAA batteries in the at-
tacked ship's hex from the sides exposed to the attack (whether
previously destroyed, suppressed or not) for randomization. For
firers in a vertical dive, or firing down the bow or stern lines, all
positions on all sides of the ship in the target hex are exposed.
The AAA loss or suppression is ignored if the random battery
selected has already been eliminated.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CHAPTER 20 –– BOMBING ATTACKS
Designer's Note: The Rules below pertain only to low-altitude
tactical attacks from 12,000 feet or less. Strategic high altitude
bombing is addressed at the Op-scale (Rule 15.10).
There are four types of allowed bombing attacks:
1. Level Bombing - Rule 20.2.
2. Glide Bombing - Rule 20.3.
3. Steep Dive Bombing - Rule 20.4.
4. Vertical Dive Bombing - Rule 20.5.
20.1 –– BOMBING BASICS
Procedure: Declare the target hex, unit or vessel at the start
of aiming. A/C must be at a valid release point range for its altitude
and speed at bomb release. Bombs are usually dropped in the
Combat Phase, but certain low level attacks may allow drops to
occur during movement (see Rule 21.1).
Full Aiming: Twice A/C speed in FPs, or 2 game turns spent
on an LOA to the target while meeting proper aiming flight pa-
rameters (See Rules 20.2 through 20.5).
 Fighting Wings
Minimal Aiming: 1 x A/C speed in FPs, or 1 full game turn
on an LOA while meeting proper aiming flight parameters.
No Aiming: If less than minimal aiming is done, a +80 "on-
target" modifier is applied to accuracy rolls.
Bomb Release Points (RPs): The Release Point Tables
(Combat Tables, page 9) define a range of horizontal distances,
in hexes, an A/C must be from the target hex to be at a proper
RP for the type of attack used. Cross index the A/C's altitude and
speed on the appropriate table to find the valid RP distances.
Bombs not released from a valid RP become random bombs.
Release Limits: Bombs may not be released if the A/C is
inverted. In a level or glide bomb attack, from one to all bombs
carried may be released at once. In a steep or vertical dive attack,
all external bombs and up to two bombs from each internal bay
may be released. External bombs may be released as a group
or a string. Bombs from bays are always as a string (choose
as a string of singles or pairs). All bombs released in an attack
impact or scatter to the same hex or starting hex of a string.
Bomb Strings: Divide the total of bombs or bomb pairs
released by the HFPs the A/C used on the turn of drop (0 HFPs
= 1). Do so for each bay and all external bombs separately. The
result (rounded up, but never < 1) is how many bombs or bomb
pairs from each set land in each hex starting with the impact hex
and advancing in the direction the bomber had at release. If the
A/C moved along hexsides, the bombing player chooses, before
rolling for scatter, whether the bombs will impact in hexes to the
left or to the right of hexsides crossed by the bomb string.
Formation Bombing: When a stack of A/C aims and re-
leases bombs together, all use the stack leader's modifier's and
all bombs released scatter together to the same hexes. When a
larger flexible or fixed formation of A/C release bombs together
en masse, all use the formation leader's modifiers, but each flight
within the formation rolls separately for bomb scatter. All bombs
dropped by that flight, scatter identically and impact the ground
spaced out exactly as the A/C were spaced out in formation.
Accuracy Rolls: After a bomb's time-of-fall is met, each
makes a LH roll for an "on target" hit. If the final LH is ≤ –35, the
bomb lands in the target hex. If final LH is ≤ –55 or ≤ –75, double
or triple the bomb's attack strength against the primary target.
Accuracy LH Modifiers are listed in the Combat Tables, Page 9.
Attack Resolution: Sum the attack strengths (soft or hard,
as appropriate) of all bombs landing in an impact hex from a
single A/C and compare that with the target's defense strength
to get a combat odds. Roll for damage per normal procedures.
Bombs vs. A/C: Grounded A/C are soft targets. One critical
hit occurs for each 2 hits inflicted by bombs of ≥ 100 lbs. and
per 3 hits from smaller bombs or from frag. / shrapnel bombs.
Large and Very Large Bomb Effects:
Bombs ≥ 1,000 lbs. – attack all targets in adjacent hexes as
secondary targets (Rule 18.3), but use only 1/4 of their attack
strength (rounded up).
Bombs ≥ 4,000 lbs. – attack all targets in the impact hex as
primary targets, and all targets at ranges 1 and 2 as secondary
targets using 1/2 and 1/4 of their strength, respectively.
Bombs ≥ 8,000 lbs. – obliterate all targets in the impact hex
(except ships > 100 tons), attack all targets in adjacent hexes as
primary targets, and all at range 2 as secondary targets.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
53
Bombs ≥ 16,000 lbs. – obliterate all targets (except ships >
100 tons) in the impact and adjacent hexes, attack all targets at
range 2 as primary ones, and at range 3 as secondary targets.
Falling Bomb Markers: When bombs are released place a
"falling bomb" marker under the A/C. The marker has a horizontal
speed = to the HFPs the A/C used on the turn of release (but
never < one). On subsequent turns move the marker down the
LOA toward the target at this speed. Attacks are resolved in the
Combat Phase as follows:
If the marker has not reached the aim point hex by the game
turn a bomb's time-of-fall (TOF) expires, resolve the attack as the
first action of the next turn's Combat Phase, before AAA shoots.
If the marker reaches the aim point hex on or before the game
turn the TOF expires, resolve the attack in the Combat Phase of
the turn the TOF expires in the normal order of events.
Time-of-Fall (TOF): The time, in game turns, for bombs to
reach the ground depends on an A/C's dive angle, speed and
release altitude. TOF is listed in the Bomb Release Point Tables
(Combat Tables, Page 9). Cross index the A/C's speed and al-
titude then refer to the appropriate Bomb Release Points Table
for the type of bombing attack used to find the listed TOF.
Armor Piercing Bomb Exception: AP bombs use their soft
attack strength against PIN-POINT and armored vehicle targets
(AP cluster bombs & SAP bombs ignore this exception).
Designer's Note: AP (armor piercing) bombs are less effec-
tive against armored vehicles than HE bombs. An AP bomb has
a smaller bursting charge and less shrapnel.
Instant Pin Point Target Kills: If the damage percentile roll
against a primary or seconday target is a "00 odd" roll, and any
bomb used in the attack was > 22 lbs. in size, or was any type
of cluster weapon, one pin-point target (random which if more
than one in hex) is destroyed instantly due to a direct hit.
20.1.1 –– SCATTERED & RANDOM BOMBS
Bomb Scatter: If the attack's final LH is ≥ –34, the bombs
scatter in the clock direction and to the distance in hexes indicated
in the Scatter Table & Diagrams, Combat Tables, Page 8. A final
LH ≥ 116 indicates the bombs become random bombs. Scattered
or random bombs attack all targets in a hex as secondary targets
(Exceptions: See Ch.27 and large bomb effects: Rule 20.1).
Scatter Limits: Bombs may not scatter further in distance
than the average, rounded up, of the bomb marker's horizontal
speed plus its time-of-fall. If so, reduce scatter distance as needed
to bring bombs back to furthest scatter limit.
Bombs dropped from level or shallow dives, and skip, parafrag
or CB dispenser bomblets may never scatter to a position behind
the A/C's 3:00-9:00 line, as it existed at the RP. If so, roll again
(unmodified) as needed to obtain a legal scatter position (ignore
on target or illegal scatter position rolls).
If a scatter is to a hexside, randomly determine which of the
two hexes sharing the hexside the bombs actually land in (see
ship target exceptions, Chap. 27).
Random Bombs: Bombs dropped from an improper RP or
with no aiming are random bombs. Roll percentile dice (00 =
100) and add 20 to the result. Convert result (21 to 120) to LH to
find scatter direction on the Scatter Table. If LH > 115 the scatter
direction is 12:00. Add half the bomb's TOF (rounded up) to the
indicated scatter distance to find where random bombs fall.
 54
20.2 –– LEVEL BOMBING
Parameters: Aiming must be accomplished and bombs
released while A/C is in level flight with the wings in an upright
bank. A/C aiming with bombardiers using bombsights may only
drop bombs by level bombing. All other bomb attack types are
conducted by the pilot using a gunsight or special bomb sight.
20.3 –– GLIDE BOMBING
Parameters: Aiming allowed while in level, shallow or steep
diving flight with the wings in any upright bank. Bombs must be
released while in a shallow dive. Any A/C may use this method.
20.4 –– STEEP DIVE BOMBING
Parameters: Aiming allowed while in shallow, steep or ver-
tical dives with the wings in any upright bank. Bombs must be
released while in a steep dive. Only F, L, and D class A/C may
use steep dive bombing.
20.5 –– VERTICAL DIVE BOMBING
Parameters: Aiming allowed while in steep or vertical dives
with the wings in any upright bank. Bombs must be released in a
vertical dive. Only dive bombers ("D" in their class indicator) may
use vertical dive bombing (they are equipped with special gear
to swing bombs clear of their propellers or out of their bays).
20.6 — BOMB FUSING
Designer's Note: Penetration fuses allow bombs to dig into a
target or enter the insides of ships before going off. Delay fuses
have timers to allow A/C to get clear before they explode.
Fuses: Bombs use contact, penetration or delayed action
fuses. If not stated in a scenario, bombs use contact fuses. Play-
ers may select different fuses before play. See Combat Tables,
Page 8 for a table summarizing effects of fusing on targets.
20.7 –– AIR-TO-AIR BOMBING
Designer's Note: Air-to-air bombing was experimented with
by Germany and Japan. It was mostly ineffective as it relied on
time-fuses and which lead to big variations in detonation altitudes.
Procedure: Bombs of ≤ 1,100 lb. must be used. Before play,
choose a 2 or 3 turn time fuse for the bombs. The bomber must
end its move in level flight, wings level, in the same location as,
and with the same facing as, a selected target A/C but with a
higher altitude. Aiming is not necessary. After release, the bomb
travels forward a number of hexes equal to its release speed
(rounded down) for each turn of its fusing. In the Combat Phase
of the final turn of fusing the bomb explodes. The bomb drops
1,000 feet in 2 turns and 2,200 feet in 3 turns. Upon exploding,
both sides roll a D5 for each bomb. Subtract the target's roll
from bomber's roll. The difference, plus or minus, is the amount
of increments above or below, respectively, the bomb's ending
altitude actually is when it explodes. No other scatter occurs.
Attack Resolution: A/C within a range of two to the blast
position are attacked at 1-to-1 odds using the bomb's soft attack
strength as a minus LH modifier. Add +20 modifier for each 100
foot of altitude difference between a target and the bomb count-
ing each hex of range as an additional 300 feet. One critical hit
is inflicted per two hits of damage.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Limits: Air-to-air fused bombs may not be used for air-to-
ground attacks nor AtG fused bombs be used air-to-air.
20.8 — FIRE, SMOKE & BLAST ZONES
Designer's Note: Incendiary weapons start fires which produce
smoke palls. Large bombs produce smoke palls and sometimes
smoke pots were used to hinder attacking A/C. Bombs, torpedoes
and rockets can blast fragments and debris high into the air pos-
ing a danger to low flying A/C. The following Rules consider this.
Blast Zone Effects: See Combat Tables, Page 8.
Fire & Smoke Pall Effects: See Combat Tables, Page 8.
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 21 –– LOW LEVEL BOMBING
21.1 –– SKIP BOMB ATTACKS
Designer's Note: In skip bombing, low flying A/C bounce
bombs across the water into the sides of ships. Skip bombing
was first used in the Pacific by the U.S. in January 1943. It was
never copied by the Axis or Russia as a set tactic. The Japanese
tried it in mid-1944, but opted for "Kamikaze" attacks instead.
Parameters & Limits: Skip bombing may only be used
against ships. Bombs ≥ 250 lb. to 2,200 lbs. must be used. No
more than two bombs can be dropped in each attack.
Aiming is as for strafing. The pilot uses a fighter gun sight
(no penalties for type, +20 mod. if none). However, if minimal
aiming is not met, apply a +80 LH modifier. A/C may release skip
bombs after expending any FP in their move, or in the combat
phase. A/C must release bombs from one increment above the
water (100 feet) while in level flight, wings level. The "proper"
release point from target is 1/2 the A/C's full FPs (rounded up).
The minimum RP is one hex away so the bombs can arm. The
max RP distance is the A/C's available full FPs of movement.
RP Example: If A/C speed = 5.5, RP must not be ≥ six hexes
away and not be < one hex away. Proper RP = 3 hexes.
Combined Attacks: A/C may both strafe and skip bomb in
the same turn. The strafing attack is executed first and then skip
bombs may be released at the same instant or upon expending
a later FP. This is an exception to the normal limit of one type
of ground attack per turn. Aiming for the strafe counts as aiming
for skip bombing. Once the bombs are released, aiming must
begin anew to attack the same target by any means.
Skip Bombing Accuracy: For each bomb, roll for "on target"
LH modified just as for other types of bombing. The base modifier
for a skip-bomb attack is –30. Add +10 to this modifier for each
hex inside the proper release point and +20 for each hex beyond
the proper release point the bomb was released from. A final LH
≤ –35 indicates the bomb is on target, otherwise, it scatters. A
final LH ≥ +115 indicates the bomb is a dud and is ignored.
Fuses: One turn delay action fuses are used for skip bombs.
They explode in the turn after the one in which dropped. If the
ship target moves after suffering a direct hit, before the bomb
explodes, the bomb travels with the ship (it is inside).
Direct Hit Modifiers: An "on target" skip bomb subtracts 3
from its direct hit roll while scattered skip bombs add 1 if they
qualify for a direct hit roll. See also Chapter 27 Rules regard-
ing direct hits and near misses. Near misses can be nullified or
created if the ship moves out of hex containing a near miss skip
 Fighting Wings
bomb before it explodes, or into one that has a scattered skip
bomb already in it, waiting to explode.
Skip Bomb Path: The LOA path the bomb follows from the
RP hex to the target or scatter hex must clearly be all water with
no obstacles (like piers, land terrain, or large sized ships (≥ 4,000
tons displacement)) in between, or the bomb will be a dud.
21.2 –– PARAFRAG BOMB ATTACKS
Designer's Note: Parachute retarded frag-bombs were intro-
duced in the Pacific in Sept. 1942 by the USAAF. They could be
dropped from very low altitudes. A parachute slowed the bombs
to allow attackers to escape their blasts.
Limits: Parafrags must be loaded and dropped in clusters of
three. Any number of clusters may dropped during movement,
in a string, at a rate of one to four clusters per hex passed over
(must be same no. in each hex except last hex may be less).
Parameters: Aiming time is as for strafing. If minimal aim-
ing not met, a +40 modifier is applied (half the normal penalty).
Parafrags must be released from ≤ 1,500 feet above the target
while in level flight, wings level at speeds ≤ 6.0, else the parachute
fails, and the bombs dud. The RP range is that used for level
bombing from the same altitude minus 2 hexes (never < 0). A/C
may release parafrags after the expenditure of any FP in their
movement. Parafrag bombs get a –30 on target roll modifier.
Example: The normal level bombing RP range in hexes for
an A/C at speed 5.0 and altitude 0.3 is 3 to 5 hexes. This is
reduced to 1 to 3 hexes for parafrag bombs.
21.3 –– CLUSTER BOMB (CB) ATTACKS
Designer's Note: Cluster bombs consist of large numbers of
small bomblets packed in break-open cannisters (or bundles), or
carried in dispensers to saturate a wide area with many weapons.
CB bombs and bundles are dropped using the normal level
or dive bombing Rules. Preset time fuses open them at the
right height to ensure proper target coverage. To reflect this,
the bombing type and RP height (but not RP speed) must be
selected before play. Any deviation from the selection results in
random bombs.
A/C mounted dispensers are set before play to cover a one or
two hex long path (if so, use half its attack strength in each hex,
rounded down). CB Dispensers use all parafrag Rules (21.2) but
double the base modifier to –60. All CBs landing or scattering to
the same hex sum their appropriate attack strengths and apply it
against all targets in the hex, treating each as a primary target.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CHAPTER 22 –– TORPEDO BOMBING
Designer's Note: Torpedoes are powerful anti-ship weapons
but fragile and difficult to employ. If dropped from too high or
too fast they were easily damaged and failed. If the A/C had the
wrong speed, or slightest skid or slip, the torpedoes could enter
the water at an incorrect angle and run erratically.
Drop Procedure: The A/C Weapons Table lists the maxi-
mum release altitudes and speeds for each type of torpedo. If
these parameters are not met when the torpedo is dropped, it
fails and is removed from play. A torpedo may be dropped after
the expenditure of any FP in the A/C's move. Determine a time-
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
55
of-fall as if it were a bomb. Forward travel during the TOF = the
smallest distance shown on the "Level Bombing" table for valid
release points. In the combat phase of the turn the TOF is met,
place the torpedo this distance from its release point hex. This
is the water entry position.
Full Aiming: FPs = at least three times the A/C's speed, or
three turns on an LOA to the aim-point, wings level, in level or
shallow diving flight and within the listed release parameters of
the torpedo by the time it is dropped.
Minimal Aiming: FPs = to the A/C's speed, or one game
turn, on an LOA with the parameters specified above. A torpedo
may be dropped with < minimal aiming.
Torpedo Moves & Arming: Torpedoes move after ships and
before A/C, starting the turn after they enter the water. The total
number of hexes a torpedo can move and its speed is listed in
the A/C Weapons Tables. Torpedo speed is as given for ships
(Chap. 26). A torpedo arms during its first hex of movement and
may not attack targets until the game turn after it is armed.
Erratic Torpedoes: If < minimal aiming is done, a torpedo
will be erratic. If ≤ full aiming done, roll a D10. Subtract 1 for each
turn < full aiming completed. A result ≤ 1 (even with full aiming)
= erratic torpedo. For each erratic torpedo roll D10. A result:
1 to 2 = Porpoising torpedo. 3 to 5 = Left drifting torpedo.
6 to 8 = Right drifting torpedo. 9 to 10 = Circling torpedo.
Porpoising Torpedoes: These dive then rise and often
breach the surface where waves can misdirect them. Roll a D10
and a D5 once when they start moving. The sum of the rolls is
the distance down-range in movement where they breach the
surface. The instant they breach, roll a D10. If roll = 1 to 3 they
face left 30 degrees, if 4 to 6 they face right 30 degrees, and if
7 to 10 they continue straight. Each time they breach determine
the next breaching point as before.
Drifting Torpedoes: Each third time the torpedoe moves
displace it as for an A/C slip execution (see Chapter 5). Excep-
tion, If erratic due to < minimum aiming, displace it every second
move. The direction of drift never changes during its run.
Circling Torpedoes: Roll a D10, even = circle left, odd =
circle right. Circling is executed like drifting, except they face 30
deg. in the direction of the circle each time a drift is called for.
Hits and Damage: If an armed torpedo enters a hex, or
crosses a hexside or either end point of a hexside occupied by
part of a ship, or if a ship ends its move in the same position as
an armed yet to move torpedo, a torpedo direct hit is rolled for.
Damage from a hit is resolved in the combat phase (see Rule
28.1 for resolving direct hits and attacks). For an erratic torpedo
roll a D10 when it attacks a ship. A result ≥ 8 = an auto miss due
to it running too deep. Reroll if it attacks a second ship.
Torpedo Attack Planner: In the Naval Tables, page 1, there
is a chart to help players determine proper lead and aim points
for torpedo attacks based on target ship speeds.
All Water Path: The release point hex and all intervening
hexes moved through must be full water hexes. The target hex
need not be a full water hex, but there cannot be printed terrain
interfering with the torpedo's path from its last full water hex to
the center of the target hex. A torpedo entering other than full
water hexes in its travel immediately detonates (assuming it is
armed and does not dud) and is treated as a bomb going off.
 56
CHAPTER 23 –– RAMMING ATTACKS
23.1 –– JAPANESE "KAMIKAZES"
Designer's Notes: Kamikaze attacks are suicide attacks in
which A/C dive into enemy A/C or surface targets. Japan was the
only belligerent in WW-II with the culture to successfully institute
Kamikaze attacks as a tactic willingly flown by volunteer pilots.
Volunteer Kamikazes: In scenarios set on or after October
1944, Japanese volunteer kamikaze pilots will be identified in
the set ups. Volunteer kamikazes may have special victory point
considerations with regards to their destruction.
Deliberate Self-Sacrifice: Pilots of any nationality may
become "self-sacrifice" kamikazes as follows:
Japanese Pilots – on a percentile roll ≤ 40 at the start of
any turn in which any of the following apply:
1. A/C is severely damaged or on fire.
2. A/C is found to have insufficient fuel to return to base.
3. A/C has insufficient power to remain airborne.
4. They are disabled but still flying (see Rule 11.3).
All other nationalities – on a percentile roll ≤ 40 when pilot
is disabled but still flying and items 1 or 3 also apply.
Only one roll is allowed. If the roll fails, the pilot will not be
a Kamikaze. Pilot head-on attack determination roll modifiers
apply, but not the special WD –20 for Japanese pilots.
Kamikaze Procedures: To ram an A/C a kamikaze must
end its move stacked with it, or pass through an already moved
A/C's exact position during its flight. Roll for an A/C Collision
with a +30 modifier (Flight Tables, page 1) the instant. Collision
damage is resolved normally per Rule 3.3.
To ram naval or land targets, a kamikaze simply dives or
descends into them. When a kamikaze reaches ground level in
a hex or on a hexside occupied by a ship, apply a –4 modifier
to the direct hit roll. In a hex containing a ground target, apply a
–30 modifier to the damage roll.
V.P.s: Self-sacrifice kamikazes still give the other side full
victory points as no special V.P. considerations are given.
Attack Values: A Kamikaze has a soft / hard attack strength
= its second / first damage capacity, resp., plus twice its start
speed. Critical hit rating = 3 against A/C. One fire hit is inflicted
on naval units for each full quarter of endurance left to the A/C,
times the no. of engines it has. A designated Kamikaze's attack
strength is added to that of any explosive ordnance carried by
it set to detonate on impact. Ordnance carried by self-sacrifice
pilots will dud since they have normal fuses.
Inadvertent Kamikazes: An A/C accidentally or deliberately
crashing into a ground or naval unit position that is not a kamikaze
attacks with no added hit modifiers. All ground unit targets in the
position are treated as secondary targets.
Shoot-Down Kamikazes: A/C shot down close to naval
or ground targets may crash into them anyway. A shoot-down
Kamikaze must not be destroyed by an explosion and must be:
1. On an LOA to the target hex, within a total range ≤ to its
speed at time of shoot down (one turn of movement).
2. In level or diving flight, with the target in its front arc.
3. If in level flight, its altitude in increments must be ≤ to
its horizontal range in hexes.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
If so, roll a D10. The result is the no. of hexes the A/C travels
along its facing after shoot down (–2 if in a SHD, –4 if in a STD,
and –6 if in a VD, but not to < 0 hexes). The A/C cannot move
further in hexes than its speed. The A/C attacks targets in its
impact hex as if an inadvertent kamikaze. Ordnance carried
by shot down volunteer kamikazes detonates normally. If the
shot down A/C does not meet the above criteria its debris and
weapons scatter sufficiently so as to not pose a threat.
23.2 –– RUSSIAN STYLE "TARAN" ATTACKS
Designer's Notes: Until August 1943 Russian pilots were
authorized to use "Taran" (ramming) attacks to bring down en-
emy bombers. This was not a suicide tactic like the Kamikaze,
but a controlled air-to-air collision designed to disable an enemy
bomber while retaining a chance for survival.
"Taran" attacks of any type are allowed to Russians if their
A/C has no air-to-air capability (all guns are empty or disabled,
no rockets, etc.), and the target is a multi-engine bomber.
Pilots of any nationality, in any time frame, in an A/C that no
longer has offensive air-to-air capability, or which is severely
damaged, may attempt type-1 Tarans against any class A/C.
Taran Procedure: Declare the intent to "Taran" at the start of
A/C's move. Rammer must move after the intended target moves.
If he meets the parameters of the selected attack method, roll
percentile dice for pilot determination. Add applicable head-on
determination modifiers (Rule 10.3). A result ≤ 40, succeeds (≤
60 if Russian in 1942 or earlier). If successful, roll for a "Taran"
collision attempt as indicated below.
If a ramming attempt misses the pilot may try to "Taran" in
later turns but must roll for determination each try. If stacked
with the enemy at the end of turn and a determination roll fails,
check for normal collisions anyway. If determination succeeds
but a "Taran" misses, no additional collision check is required,
even if stacked with the enemy.
There were 3 types of "Tarans" taught:
1. Rear Attack with Propeller against Tail: The rammer
must end the turn stacked with, and with the same
speed and facing as, the target. Add +15 modifier to the
collision roll. If successful, a D10 of hits is inflicted on
rammer with one Engine critical hit for each 3 or less
hits suffered. Two D10 of hits are inflicted on the target
with one Controls critical for each 3 or less hits (ignore
and re-roll critical results 7 & 10).
2. Same Direction Wing-to-Wing: The rammer must
end the turn stacked with, and with a speed 0.5 to 1.0
greater, and the same facing as the target. Roll for colli-
sions with a +30 modifier. If a successful, both A/C will
suffer two D10 of hits with one Wing critical per 2 hits.
3. Head-On Ram: This is identical to the Kamikaze air-
to-air attack in procedure and results. Despite its name,
it may be attempted from any angle against the target.
A determination roll is made upon reaching the target's
position. If the determination roll fails, a collision is
rolled for if the A/C ends stacked with the enemy.
23.3 –– GERMAN STURMSTAFFELN
From January 1944, special "Sturmstaffelns" of armored Fw
190A-7/R8s & A-8/R8s had been created for combating heavy
bombers. These may use any style of "Tarans" against Allied M
or H class bombers per Rule 23.2.
 Fighting Wings
CHAPTER 24 — ANTI AIRCRAFT ARTILLERY
24.1 –– AAA BASICS
Firing Limits: Land and naval AAA batteries may only fire
once per turn. Normally this is done in the combat phase, but
light and medium AAA guns may "reactively" fire in the movement
phase at any A/C declaring a strafing attack, launching weapons,
or trying to "kamikaze" their target during movement.
Maximum & Minimum Range: An AAA unit's max range is
listed in the upper right corner of its counter or in the AAA Fire-
power Chart. Heavy guns have a minimum range as well. A/C
in a barrage zone that are also inside the minimum range of all
attacking guns cannot be damaged and are not viable targets.
Damage to Land AAA Units: Heavily damaged AAA units
may not fire and are out of action. Lightly damaged AAA are sup-
pressed and may not fire for a D5 of turns beginning the turn after
they are damaged. After being suppressed the required number
of turns, they return to action, assuming they are not suppressed
further by more attacks. Suppression results are cumulative and
added to the end of any previous suppression time.
AAA Unit Facing: AAA units, must always face a specific
hexside. The top of the counter indicates the direction the gun
is facing. Facing may be changed at the start of each Combat
Phase by 60° for heavy guns and 120° for light and medium
guns. The field-of-fire of a AAA gun with respect to its facing is
shown below. The field-of-fire includes the hex the AAA gun is
in as most guns can fire straight up (Exception, see Rule 25.2).
AAA FIELD–OF–FIRE DIAGRAM
24.2 –– LIGHT AND MEDIUM AAA GUNS
Guns of less than or equal to 57mm in size are light and
medium calibre weapons rated for firepower in the same man-
ner as A/C weapons. The AAA Firepower Chart in the Scenario
Book lists each gun's firepower rating at various ranges.
Target Acquisition: If a Lt. or Med. AAA unit or battery did
not fire the turn prior, it may engage any A/C in its field-of-fire.
The unit may fire on the turn the target is engaged and on each
turn after so long as the target remains in its field-of-fire. If an
AAA gun wishes to switch targets, it must spend a minimum of
one turn not firing to acquire the new target and the new target
must be in the gun's field-of-fire when engaged.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
57
Reactive AAA Fire: If an air-to-ground attack occurs during
movement, any Lt. and Med. AAA already engaged with, or free
to engage the moving A/C may opt to fire at it on the FP the
attack is declared, or on the FP weapons are to be released.
Reactive AAA results are applied before the A/C fires, shoots,
or releases weapons. For Kamikazes able to impact during their
move, reactive AAA must fire on the FP that is the halfway point
of the A/C's speed rounded up (it is possible for a kamikaze to
impact before the gunners can react). AAA used for reaction fire
may not be used later in the same turn for normal AAA fire.
Incidental Targets: A/C too close to an AAA target can them-
selves become targets of the same shot per the cases below.
Incidental attacks are in addition to any regular AAA attacks that
may be directed at them. This is a legal exception to the general
Rule below (24.2.1) that targets may only be attacked once per
turn by weapons of each critical hit rating.
1. Any A/C stacked with, or at range zero to the actual
target (range 0 = same hex / hexside within 200 feet) are
attacked using the same FP and modifiers applied to the
original target but with an extra +10 modifier.
2. If total firepower used is ≥ 50 or ≥ 100, then any A/C
within a range of 1, or 2, respectively, to the original tar-
get, are also attacked. In this case, the total FP is reduced
by half (drop fractions) for each hex of range away from
the original target the A/C is at.­Use the same modifiers
that applied to the original target +10 for these attacks.­­
24.2.1 –– RESOLVING LT. & MED. AAA ATTACKS
Each turn, all (non-reactive) Lt. & Med. AAA attacks must be
declared before any are resolved. Resolve attacks as follows:
1. Select a target A/C and declare all guns with the same
critical hit rating firing at it. Sets of guns with different
critical hit ratings are resolved as separate attacks.
2. For each eligible target in an AAA attack roll for LH to
find how many "1-1" combat odds damage rolls it will
undergo. Add applicable modifiers (Combat Tables -
page 10). A final LH of ≤ –30, ≤ –50, ≤ –70 = one,
two, or three damage rolls, respectively.
3. For each damage roll, make an unmodified LH roll at
1-1 odds and total the damage from all rolls before
determining any critical hit results. See Combat Tables
- Page 6 for shot modifiers.
4. Apply damage normally. For ease-of-play, AAA shots do
not use angle modifiers on critical hit area rolls.
24.3 –– HEAVY AAA GUNS
Designer's Notes: Heavy guns operate in a more deliberate
& controlled manner than lighter guns. They are usually fired in
a group so that a barrage of explosive shells will saturate an
area with shrapnel. Aiming relies on relayed commands from fire
control directors or local gun bosses. Delays in firing can occur
while guns are swung to align with the director's target indicator
commands or while manually aiming the gun.
Guns larger than 57mm are heavy guns. These are single shot
weapons with explosive shells using timed or proximity fusing to
burst near a target. Damage is from shrapnel rather than from
multiple direct hits. The shell's damage potential is represented
by a single firepower rating at all effective ranges.
 58
Rates of Fire (ROF): Heavy guns have a defined rate of
fire listed as the fraction: "shots / game turns". This takes into
account typical reload times.
ROF Examples: "1/2" = gun fires once every other turn; "2/3"
= gun fires in a shoot-pause-shoot sequence over 3 turns.
Gun Status: Heavy guns are either "free" (uncommitted) or
"engaged" (given firing orders). Only guns with orders may fire.
In a game turn, heavy guns may do ONE of the following:
• Remain Free (await a "firing-order").
• Become engaged (be assigned to a "fire-order").
• Track the fire order without firing (check-fire in effect).
• Shoot into the "fire-order's" barrage-zone.
• Cease fire (become free).
Activity Limits: On the first turn of engagement, a heavy
gun may not fire (reloading allowed) due to the time it takes to
align the barrel with the aiming commands. Once engaged, a
gun remains tied to its given "fire-order" marker, whether firing
or not. This continues until a "cease-fire" is declared for it.
On the turn a "cease-fire" is declared, that gun may not shoot
(reloading allowed). If multiple guns are firing at the same target,
all, or some may cease-fire at once.
Note: It will always take heavy guns a minimum of two non-
firing turns to switch from one fire order to a new one.
Firing Rate Requirement: Once guns commence firing,
they must fire as often as possible until they cease-fire, or their
FO marker moves out of range or arc coverage. Guns grouped
in a turret always fire, cease fire or reload together. Multiple tur-
rets, batteries, or AAA units firing at the same FO marker may
stagger when they commence firing or cease fire as desired.
24.3.1 – HEAVY AAA ATTACK PROCEDURE
Step 1 - Initiate Fire Orders: Create a fire order (FO) number
and assign one or more heavy AAA units, turrets, or batteries to
it. Note this on paper. Assigned guns become engaged and start
tracking the FO generator's aiming commands. At least one free
gun must be assigned to each FO when it is created. The FO is
inactive until the guns commence firing.
Sample FO: "USS Fletcher: FO-1 = 5"-1, -2, -3, FP= 24".
FO Initiation Limits: One FO may be initiated for each six
or less land based heavy guns in a scenario. Naval units may
initiate one FO per turn per available heavy AAA director. If none
is available, the naval unit may still activate one FO per turn.
FO Considerations: Guns may be added or removed from
a fire-order through the normal engagement or cease-fire Rules.
An FO does not disappear if the guns stop firing due to reload
or fire arc considerations. Naval guns may only be assigned to
FOs generated by their ship. They may not be added to FOs
generated for land based units or other ships.
Step 2 - Commence Firing: If at least one engaged gun in
an inactive FO is available to fire, the guns may start firing in
the Combat Phase. This activates the FO. The player firing then
announces the desired target hex and altitude of the FO.
Target altitude: The target altitude of a FO must be either
a full or half level (e.g.: 11.5, or 11,500 feet).
Barrage-Zone (B-zone) Size: When an FO's guns open fire,
a "barrage-zone" is created. The zone's size value is set by the
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
actual number of guns firing (some batteries, turrets, etc. have
more than one gun). If the range is ≤ 30, the player may opt for
a concentrated B-zone, reducing its size by one. If the range is
long (> 60), the zone is automatically increased by one in size.
Actual Guns Concentrated / Normal / Long Range
1 to 2 = 0 hex / = 1 hexes / = 2 hexes
3 to 6 = 1 hexes / = 2 hex / = 3 hexes
7 to 12 = 2 hexes / = 3 hexes / = 4 hexes
> 12 = 3 hexes / = 4 hexes / = 5 hexes
Engagement Area: A B-zone's size defines the horizontal
range in hexes from the target hex that is within the zone. The
vertical height of a B-zone is the target altitude, + or – 500 feet
in all hexes. Any A/C within that altitude spread and in any hex
or hexside of the B-zone are eligible to be damaged.
First Shot Scatter: The accuracy of a barrage will not be
known until the first shell bursts are observed. Thus, when a
new FO is activated (guns commence firing and target hex and
altitude is declared), or when all engaged guns tracking an active
FO have not fired for four or more turns, and resume firing, the
shot may be scattered as follows:
If the FO was generated by a radar equipped director, both
sides roll a D5. If not, the target side rolls a D10 and the shooter
a D5. If the target's roll is higher, that player may shift the FO
marker a number of times = to the difference in the rolls. A shift
= one hex of distance or a 500 foot altitude change. Any number
of hex shifts is allowed, but only two altitude changes are allowed
(one if radar aimed fire) when scattering the shot. FO markers
may not be scattered to a position that would put them inside the
minimum effective range of any of the participating guns. The
markers may be scattered to overlap with other FO markers.
Shifting FO Markers (B-zones): An FO marker may be
moved on each following turn by up to 10 shifts. One shift = one
hex or a 500 foot altitude change (no restrictions). However, for
each shift, a +5 LH modifier applies to the attack roll.
Step 3 - Resolve Attacks: Barrage fire is resolved in a two-
step process. First, LH is rolled for once, to determine how many
1-1 odds damage rolls the attack produces in the B-zone and
second, the damage rolls are randomly distributed among all
targets in the zone. To determine the number of 1-1 attacks, roll
percentile dice for LH and add all applicable AAA shot modifiers
(see Combat Tables, page 10).
Damage Roll Limits: One 1-1 odds damage roll is allowed
for each –20 of final LH. No individual A/C can be attacked more
than 3 times in a turn by each B-zone it resides in. Excess attacks
against the A/C become misses (they are not redistributed).
Damage Distribution & Phantom Targets: The minimum
number of random targets a B-zone must have equals the B-
zone's defined size. If actual A/C in the zone are less than the
minimum random targets required, "phantom" targets are created
as needed to meet the minimum. Damage rolls are distributed
randomly among real and phantom targets. A damage roll dis-
tributed against a phantom target is an automatic miss.
Phantom Targets Example: One A/C is in a size "3" B-zone.
Resulting damage rolls must be distributed randomly between it
and two phantom targets. There is only a 1/3 chance, then, that
a damage roll will be directed against the real target.
Direct Hits: When doing damage rolls against real targets,
a percentile roll of "00-odd" = a direct hit which instantly shoots
 Fighting Wings
one A/C down. Roll another D10; even = A/C destroyed by major
structural loss (hits exceeded); odd = A/C explodes.
Overlapped B-zones: If B-zones are placed such that any
A/C is in more than one zone, those zones are overlapped. If
so, add +20 LH to each of these zone's attack rolls.
Designer's Note: This reflects the reduced ability of gun direc-
tors or aimers to correct their fire due to the confusing number
of shell bursts around the targets.
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 25 –– NAVAL AAA
25.1 –– NAVAL AAA BASICS
AAA Gun Location on Ships: Ship data cards list their AAA
locations using the following game codes:
•  Bow = Bow (hex) • Bridge = Bridge structure
•  Mid = Middle (hex) • Island = Carrier Island
• Stern = Stern (hex) • R, L = Right, Left sides
For multi-hex ships, bow and stern guns are located in those
hexes of the counter. On two hex ships "Bridge" guns are in the
bow hex, and "Mid" guns are in the stern hex. On a three hex
ship, all "Bridge" or "Mid" guns are in the center hex.
AAA Vulnerability: Attacks from a ship's left or right side
cannot affect guns on the other side but can affect "Bridge" and
"Island" guns. Attacks from bow or stern arcs affect only bow or
stern hex guns, respectively. Bomb hits from above and vertical
strafe or rocket attacks can affect any guns in a ship's hex.
AAA Suppression: If a ship takes a direct bomb or torpedo
hit, all AAA positions in that ship hex are suppressed for one
game turn (cumulative with other suppressions). Deck strafe
crit. hits (Rule 19.4) can only suppress non-turreted AAA guns.
AAA Elimination: Each 20 hits inflicted by a bomb or tor-
pedo attack randomly eliminates one AAA position of any type
(whether still in action or not). Each 10 hits inflicting by strafing
or rockets and each 5 hits by "deck strafing" (Rule 19.4) ran-
domly eliminates one non-turreted AAA position. AAA can also
be eliminated through critical hits.
Facing Naval AAA: Naval guns are not faced. All that is
required is that the target be in their listed field-of-fire.
Acquisition Restrictions: Targets that pass over a ship, from
one side to the opposite side (including from the bow to the stern
arc) in a single game turn, due to ship or A/C movement, may not
be fired at as fire control teams cannot relay target information
quick enough for gunners to engage such a target.
Exception: A/C staying within a defined heavy AAA dead
zone for an entire turn do not qualify for this restriction (they are
deemed to be remaining over the ship and not crossing sides).
25.2 –– NAVAL AAA FIELDS-OF-FIRE
Fields-of-Fire: Each AAA battery has a field-of-fire defined
in terms of clock position lines, inclusive, about the ship. All
field-of-fire lines emanate from the actual ship's hex the guns are
located in, as if that hex were an A/C counter. The line extending
forward from the ship's bow is the 12:00 line and that from the
stern is the 6:00 line. The rest of the twelve clock lines emanate
as shown in Diagram 1, Naval Tables, page 4 illustrating guns
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
59
located in the ship's bow hex. When a ship's hex is located on
a hexside, all field-of-fire lines emanate as depicted for A/C on
a hexside. See Diagram 2, in the Naval play aids.
• The 12:00 and 06:00 lines are also called bow and stern
lines, and the 3:00 and 9:00 lines are also called right
and left beam lines, respectively, elsewhere in the Rules.
• The bow or stern arc is the area swept by clock lines
11:00 to 01:00, and 05:00 to 07:00, respectively.
Vertical Limits: Guns of ≤ 40mm in size may fire straight up.
Larger guns have a "dead-zone" directly over-head extending in
all directions by one hex per band above VL the A/C target is in.
Dead Zone Example: An A/C in the ML band is in a ship's
dead-zone if within two hexes of a gun's location on the ship.
AAA Limits: Any number of AAA batteries of ≤ 20mm on a
ship may combine fire at an A/C. Up to six batteries of guns >
20mm may combine their fire at the same target.
Radar & Director modifiers do not apply unless ≥ half the
batteries firing are under such control.
Each ship resolves attacks on the same A/C separately and
more than one ship may fire on the same A/C in the same game
turn. Ships may also fire at an A/C more than once but only if
each shot involves guns of different critical hit ratings. The No-
Fire Rules below may prevent shots.
Small Craft Combined fire: Vessels of ≤ 100 tons in the same
hex or in a string of adjacent hexes (any length) may combine
AAA fire against an A/C into single attacks by critical hit rating.
Gun Directors: Guns linked to fire control directors are
indicated on the ship data card by a director identifier letter in
the gun battery chart. Guns with integral directors are indicated
by a "Yes" for director information. If the gun is radar aimed, an
"-R" will appear next to the director identifier. Guns use manual
aiming if their director is lost or none existed. A +10 LH modifier
applies to all manually aimed attacks. If radar aimed, modifiers
apply to the attack & some night modifiers are ignored.
No-Fire Rules: To avoid friendly fire casualties, Lt. and Med.
naval AAA may not fire at low level A/C targets that are within
five hexes of a friendly vessel, if the AAA's line-of-fire extended
out to maximum range through the target A/C will pass through
or touch any hexes or hexsides of hexes occupied by a friendly
vessel. A low level A/C is one with an altitude ≤ 300 feet while
between the AAA and a friendly vessel, or ≤ 300 +100 feet for
each hex beyond the friendly vessel. The no fire Rule does not
apply to A/C targets further than 5 hexes from a friendly vessel,
regardless of line-of-fire considerations.
Heavy barrage fire is not allowed if a friendly vessel will be in
the B-zone's horizontal coverage, and the B-zone's base altitude
is less than 1,500 feet high. In this case, a "check fire" is called,
meaning the guns hold fire and may not attack (the FO maker
remains active). First shot scatter may not place an FO marker
over a friendly ship in violation of this.
Lt. AAA and Med. AAA Fratricide: If a friendly A/C ends a
move within a range of 10 to a ship in its front arc, and is in an
attitude in such that its fixed gun vertical firing arc would include
the ship, roll a D10. If the result is ≥ the range, the opposing
player gets a D5 worth of either light or med. AA batteries that
can bear on the A/C to attack it with (not to exceed half the total
eligible batteries rounded up, of the ship). The normal targeting
Rules are ignored. These guns are returned to the ship player's
control on the following turn.
 60
PART SIX - NAVAL OPERATIONS
CHAPTER 26 –– SHIP HANDLING
The Rules below explain how naval counters are positioned
and moved. The codes for ship types used in the game are:
Merchant ship = MC Fleet carrier = CV
Oiler or Tanker = AO Light carrier = CVL
Transport = AK Escort carrier = CVE
Seaplane tender = AV Battleship = BB
Destroyer = DD Battle cruiser = BC
Destroyer escort = DE Heavy cruiser = CA
Submarine = SS Light cruiser = CL
Ship Data Cards (SDCs): SDCs vary in size and arrange-
ment depending on the size of ship and amount of information
needed to describe it. Larger ships have SDCs that are divided
into four major sections. The upper section contains a side view
and general data plus the boiler's remaining / speed available/
defense strength chart. The middle left section lists all AAA bat-
teries, their gun type, no. of guns in the battery and their fields-of-
fire. The middle right section may or may not depict an overhead
view of the ship with a guide to gun positions. This section also
lists the ship's combat data and aircraft handling data (if any).
The bottom section contains the AAA firepower chart and may
or may not include notes about the ships.
26.1 — POSITIONING SHIP COUNTERS
Ship counters can be of one, two or three hexes in length. A
ship's position is defined by its bow's map location and facing.
One-Hex Ships: Smaller vessels like DEs, or tugboats must
be located fully within a hex or on one of the lines forming a
hexside. When on a hexside, the vessel, as with A/C, must face
parallel to the hexside.
Two-Hex Ships: These are for DDs, CLs, CAs, early BBs
and auxilaries like oilers. They may be located fully within two
adjacent hexes, or with either the bow or stern half in a hex, and
the other section on, and parallel to, a hexside (see below).
Three-Hex Ships: These are usually for large ships like
CVs and BBs. They may be positioned in three adjacent hexes,
or with the middle in a hex and each end on a hexside, or with
each end in a hex and the middle on a hexside (see below).
Facing: The bow of the ship drawn on the counter is used
to define its facing just as the nose of an A/C's drawing on its
counter is used. Ships change facing and move using the same
twelve compass headings available to A/C.
26.2 — STACKING SHIPS
Unless anchored or docked, or directed by a scenario, ships
may not have a section of their counter stacked with another
ship's counter section without a collision (Rule 26.4).
Exceptions: Small craft of ≤ 25 tons may stack freely with
other ships so long as the small craft total is ≤ 400 tons if in the
same hex with one hex sized ships, or ≤ 200 tons if in the same
hex with larger ships (if stacked with the center hex of a 3 hex
sized ship, they must be designated as either on the right or left
side of it. One hex ships of ≤ 100 tons may stack two to a hex.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
EXAMPLE SHIP POSITIONS ON HEX GRID
N
26.3 — MOVING NAVAL UNITS
Random Movement Tables: Ships move before any A/C
using the Large Ship & Small Ship Random Movement Tables
(FW - Naval Tables, page 1). Roll a D10 and cross index the
result to find a command (e.g., "Move Ahead 1 hex"). Depend-
ing on ship size, commands may require several game turns to
accomplish. The movement table is not used again until a previ-
ous command is accomplished after which a new command is
rolled. "Small Ships" mean those of ≤ 500 tons of displacement.
Scenarios may allow direct control of ships.
Ship Speeds: Speeds are stated as the fraction "1 or 2
hexes in T turns" (H / T). Start speeds are given in scenarios.
Speeds increase only on a Random Movement Table roll of "1".
Speeds decrease due to "boiler unit" critical hits. Speeds increase
or decrease in steps, with any change taking effect when the
previous step is completed. There are six speeds defined, they
are: DIW (dead-in-water), 1/6, 1/4, 1/3, 1/2, and 2/3. A ship at
a speed of "1/3" (one hex in three turns) that increases speed
goes to speed "1/2" (one hex in two turns). A speed of 1/4 is ex-
ecuted in a "pause-pause-pause-move one hex" sequence over
the course of four game turns. A speed of is "2/3" executed in a
"pause-move-move" sequence. Anchored ships never move.
Boiler Units: A ship's speed ability depends on the number
of boiler units in operation. Ships have 1 to 6 boiler units de-
pending on size. The Boiler's vs. Speed Chart on a ship's data
card will show max allowed speed for the number of boiler units
remaining. When all boiler units are knocked out, the ship will
be "dead-in-water" (DIW - unable to move).
Turn Modes: Tonnage determines a ship's turn mode as
indicated on the Naval Unit Turn Chart (Naval Tables, page 1).
Turn mode is the number of hexes a ship must move forward
before changing facing. A ship must always change facing upon
meeting its turn requirement. Changing facing completes a turn
command requiring a new command to be rolled.
Rudder Response Time: A time delay in game turns must
be met before a ship can start counting hexes moved forward
for turning. This "rudder response" time for starting, or reversing
a turn, varies with ship size as indicated in the Naval Unit Turn
Chart. Once a turn is started left or right, it may be continued in
the same direction without considering rudder response time.
 Fighting Wings
However, a new rudder response time delay is required when
reversing a turn direction, or after a move ahead command.
Turn Command Exceptions: If a ship's new command
includes a turn and there are torpedoes within 10 hexes and
closing, or a friendly ship is in danger of being collided with due
to the new command, the ship may obey the command or:
1. Revoke the turn command, changing it to move ahead
command, and centering the rudder in the process, or
2. Command a turn in the opposite direction.
Executing Facing Changes: Ships change facing in 30°
increments. A one hex ship changes facing like an A/C. A two
hex ship pivots around its bow (displacing its stern opposite the
turn). If the bow is in a hex at the moment of facing, leave the
bow in place and change the ship's facing 30°. If the bow is on
a hexside, shift the whole counter so that the bow goes into the
hex on the side of the hexside opposite the direction of turn and
then change facing. A three hex ship whose bow is in a hex,
changes facing leaving the bow in the same hex as for two hex
ships. A three hex ship whose bow is on a hexside, pivots 30°
about its center section (see diagram below).
EXAMPLES OF SHIPS CHANGING FACING
N valid for the part of the ship being used as the aim point.
The diagram above depicts multi-hex ships at the moment
of turning (after advancing one hex). The lighter counter is the
"before" position, and the darker counter is the "after" position.
The two hex ships have turned left (port), while the three hex
ships have turned right (starboard).
26.4 –– SHIP COLLISIONS
A collision results when ships or sections of ships end a turn
over-stacked. Both involved ships suffer damage as follows:
• If collision due to a ship moving its bow into another, the
moving ship inflicts damage equal to its total hit capacity
divided by 10 (round normally). The colliding ship takes
damage equal to half the other ship's hit capacity
divided by 10 (round normally).
Example: A battleship with a hit capacity of 670 runs its bow
into a destroyer with a hit capacity of 180. The BB inflicts 67
points of damage and receives 9 points of damage (1/2 of 18).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
61
• If collision due to the middle or stern hex of a ship being
shifted into another ship by a facing change, each ship
suffers damage equal to half the hit capacity of the other
divided by 10 (round normally).
Post Collision Moves: If a ship cannot move without moving
further into or through another ship, it remains in place causing
no additional damage. This still counts as a turn of movement.
If the current move command will not allow the ships to part, roll
for a new command.
Damage Limits: Small craft of ≤ 50 tons cannot damage
ships ≥ ten times the small craft's tonnage.
Post Collision Effects: Both ships have their speeds reduced
by two steps. One sea-worthiness critical hit is received for each
20 hits sustained in a collision and one internal critical for each
10% of the ships total damage incurred.
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 27 –– AIMING AT SHIPS
27.1 –– AIM POINT CONSIDERATIONS
A/C may aim at a ship's hex or a map hex within ten hexes
of any part of a ship when beginning an attack. When aiming
at a multi-hex ship, the bow, stern or middle hex of the counter
may be the designated aim point.
Lines of Approach: All LOA Rules apply against ships, except
as noted below. Aiming is done normally if the ship hex used as
an aim point is in a hex. If it is on a hexside, the A/C's projected
LOA must pass through the hexside, intersect the hexside or
touch either end of it to be valid.
Aim Point Options: For torpedo attacks, or bombing attacks
with a long time-of-fall, the aim point may be any hex within ten
hexes of the ship. Using a map hex for aiming must be designated
prior to the commencement of aiming.
Moving Aim Points: If a ship's hex is the aim point and the
ship moves while aiming is in progress an A/C has 3 options:
1. Execute a slip during its move to keep its projected LOA
If so, aiming is not interrupted.
2. If any other hex of a ship is still in the hex or on a hexside
of the hex used with the original LOA, shift the aim point
to that hex of the ship. If so, aiming is not interrupted.
3. Ignore the moving ship and fix the aim point on the map
as if bombs were released. If so, aiming is not interrupted.
Bomb Release & Aim Points: Once released, a bomb's aim
point becomes fixed in the map hex the target ship's hex was
in (ships may be able to move before bombs impact). For ship
hexes on a hexside, the aim point becomes the first hex the LOA
reaches after intersecting, or touching an end of, the hexside.
Bombs & Direct Hit Rolls: If bombs land in their aim point hex
(are on target), and any part of any ship is located on a hexside
of that hex, or in the hex itself, those bombs roll for direct hits
(Rule 28.1) against the ship.
If bombs scatter to hex containing part of any ship in that hex,
they roll for direct hits against it. If Bomb scatter onto a hexside
that contain part of a ship on it, they roll for direct hits against it.
 62
Near Misses: Bombs which fail their direct hit roll, or which
scatter to a hex that was NOT their original aim point, which has
part of a ship on a hexside of that hex, are near misses. See
Rule 28.1 for near miss results.
Dodging Ship Masts: A/C which pass over a 2 or 3 hex
sized ship and which are not at an altitude of at least 0.2 (200
feet) must roll a D10 (subtract the A/C's size modifier). On a roll
of 3 to 5 the ship's rigging is struck causing one D10 of damage
to the A/C. On a roll of 2 or less a mast strike occurs inflicting
three D10 of damage. On a roll of 6 to 10 the A/C misses the
ship's structure. One critical hit is incurred for each 3 points of
damage. If the hit amount was even, all critical hits are against
the engines, if odd they are all against the wings.
_________________________________________________
CHAPTER 28 –– DAMAGING SHIPS
28.1 — NAVAL UNIT DAMAGE
Hit Capacity: The hit capacity listed on a ship's data card is
the max number of hits it can take without sinking. If exceeded,
a ship loses all sensors and weapons and starts sinking. If not
already DIW, its speed slows by two steps after each time it
moves until DIW. Roll five D10s and sum the results. This is
the time, in minutes, until the ship slips under the sea and is
removed from play. For each full 10 percent of damage > ship's
total hit capacity, reduce sinking time by 5 minutes (but never <
0 and 0 min. = 3 x D10 in combat turns to sink). A sinking ship
remains in play as an obstacle to A/C and other ships. A sinking
ship cannot defend itself as the crew is abandoning the ship.
Hard or Soft Target Ships: Hard (armored) ships have an
(H) next to the hit capacity on the ship's data card. Soft target
ships have an (S). Use the appropriate weapon attack strength.
Attacks & Direct Hit Checks: Strafing and rocket attacks
against ships are conducted normally. "On target" bombs, some
scattered bombs (see 27.1), and torpedoes intercepting a ship
require a "direct hit" check before attacking.
Bomb Direct Hits: A D10 result (after adding allowed modi-
fiers) ≤ the D10 Roll to Hit no. on the target ship's data card in-
dicates a direct hit, else a near miss occurs. A bomb direct hit
inflicts damage equal to HALF its attack strength (hard or soft as
appropriate, rounded up) plus one D10 of hits per 50 points or
less of attack strength in excess of the half. Note – ship armor
can reduce hits.
Torpedo Direct Hits: A torpedo that enters the center hex
of a three hex ship, or crosses a hexside which is the border
between any two hexes of a multi-hex ship, scores an automatic
direct hit (randomly determine which of the two ship hexes is
actually struck; Note – erratic torpedoes must still roll ≤ 7 to hit).
In all other situations, if a torpedo ends in a hex with, or crosses
a hexside, or either end of a hexside containing a ship's hex,
roll for a direct hit as for bombs. A torpedo direct hit immediately
inflicts damage equal to HALF the torpedo's attack strength plus
a D10 of hits per 10 points or less of attack strength remaining.
Note – ships with torpedo protection points can reduce hits.
Near Miss Results: A bomb near miss attacks a ship target
using the larger of its soft or hard attack strength and the normal
combat odds tables. A torpedo near miss simply means it con-
tinues moving across the map until it encounters another target
or exceeds its max range and harmlessly self destructs.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Depth Charges: Depth charges use underwater concussion
to cause damage, therefore, double the direct hit number of a
submarine under depth charge attack and if a near miss occurs,
use the larger of its soft or hard attack strength.
Ship Armor: Ship flight decks, main decks and sides may
have armor with ratings of 1 (light) to 4 (very heavy). Deck armor
protects against bombs, and diving rocket and strafe attacks. Side
armor protects against near miss bombs, skip bombs, and level
rocket and strafe attacks. Bombs that penetrate armor ignore
its effects. All other attacks and non-penetrating bombs have
a portion of their inflicted damage reduced by armor as given
in the table below. If a penetrated flight deck is both armored
and operational (Rule 28.3), the main deck is checked next for
penetration but treated as having an armor rating one > actual
(even if 0) for penetration and damage nullification. If the flight
deck hex is not operational due to damage this benefit is no
longer applicable.
Ship Armor Effects Table
Armor Armor Damaging Hits Crit. Hits
Type Rating canceled canceled
Light (1) 1 x D10 1
Medium (2) 2 x D10 2
Heavy (3) 3 x D10 3
Very Hvy. (4) 4 x D10 4
Bomb Type Fuse Types Armor Penetration Ability
All Contact None
All Pen. & delay Unarmored ships
SAP, AP Pen. & delay 0, 1 from any altitude.
SAP, AP Pen. & delay 1, 2 resp. if from ≥ alt. 4.0.
SAP, AP Pen. & delay 1, 3 resp. if from ≥ alt. 8.0.
SAP & AP bombs of ≥ 1,000 lb. increase penetration by 1.
Penetration and Drop Speed: Reduce the minimum ≥ alti-
tude for penetration for SAP and AP bombs dropped from steep
or vertical dives by 1 altitude level for each full 2.0 of speed the
A/C had at release. Add 1.0 to drop speed used for calculating
min. ≥ altitude for penetration ability if bomb's TOF ≥ 2.
Torpedo Protection Points (TPPs): Ships with double hulls
have a TPP value listed on their data card. TPPs absorb damage
from torpedoes. No ship damage and no critical hits are inflicted
by absorbed damage. The TPP value protects each side of each
hex of a ship counter separately. Each hit absorbed eliminates
one TPP in that area. If a torpedo hits a ship from its bow or stern
line, or down a hexside that divides different hexes of a multi-hex
ship, randomly determine which side or hex of the ship absorbs
the damage. Only TPPs in that hex on that side are eliminated.
When all TPPs in an area are used up, excess hits are applied
to the ship and it is vulnerable to critical hits from them.
28.2 –– SHIP CRITICAL HITS
Critical Hit Tables: "Sea-worthiness", "Internal", or "Surface"
critical hits can be inflicted on ships depending on the weapon
used. For each critical hit inflicted, roll a D10 and consult the
appropriate table from those listed in the Naval Tables, page 2
for the type of ship damaged.
Surface critical hits are caused by:
• Gun, rocket, and heavy cannon attacks.
• Kamikaze and napalm attacks.
• Non penetrating bombs.
 Fighting Wings
Internal critical hits are caused by:
• Penetrating bombs.
• Each cumulative 20% of a ship's hit capacity reached.
Sea-worthiness critical hits are caused by:
• Torpedoes, depth charges, non-penetrating skip bombs
and near miss bomb attacks.
One critical hit is inflicted per each 20 hits suffered in any
single attack. One internal critical hit is inflicted each time a
ship accumulates hits = 20% of its total hit capacity. Hits added
by critical hits do not cause more criticals but do count toward
the 20% internal crit. hit levels. Critical hits may be ignored or
resolved for damage beyond that which sinks a ship.
Concentrated Critical Hits: If the att. strength of a single
bomb, torpedo, Kamikaze hit is ≥ 50 or ≥ 100, critical hits of the
appropriate type are inflicted in groups of 2 or 3, respectively,
all criticals in a group being determined by one roll as follows:
• If attack value ≥ 50 roll once per two or fewer critical hits.
• If attack value ≥ 100 roll once per three or fewer critical hits.
Critical Hit Explanations: See Naval Tables, page 3.
28.3 –– SPECIAL DAMAGE CONSIDERATIONS
Designer's Notes: Two big threats to a ship's survival are
uncontrolled flooding and fires. Aircraft carriers are also vulner-
able to extra damage from A/C on damaged decks or hangars
as they are a source of flaming fuel and secondary explosions.
Flooding & Fire Hits: Flooding and fire hits not neutralized
by DC teams result in modifiers to a ship's "post attack fate" roll
(Rule 28.4) and, in mission scenarios, can result in additional
hits or increased fires and flooding (Progressive Fire & Flooding
Damage Rule, Naval Tables, page 3). In addition to any caused
by critical hits, flooding and fire hits are also inflicted as follows:
Flooding Hits: A torpedo inflicts one flooding hit for each 10
points of damage caused after TPP considerations.
Fire Hits: Each bomb that penetrates into a ship, each 3
or less fueled A/C on a ship that are destroyed in a single
attack, and any critical hit Explosion causing ≥ 10 new hits
inflict one fire hit.
Flight Deck Damage & Bombs: A non-penetrating bomb
inflicts flight deck damage = 1/10 its soft attack value (rounded
normally) or one D5 of damage if the flight deck is armored
(indicated by underlined FDC values, Chap. 29). A penetrating
bomb inflicts one D5 of flight deck damage. If a flight deck hex
sustains damage ≥ half its max FDC, it is no longer usable.
A/C on Ships: If A/C are on a flight deck, or a hangar deck
critical hit occurs, follow the procedure below:
1. Determine Destroyed A/C: Take the no. of hits inflicted
on the ship by the attack, or the firepower used in straf-
ing and roll an attack using that value against a defense
of 5. Modify the final LH by –1 per A/C in the area hit.
The resulting hits = no. of A/C randomly destroyed.
2. Determine Ship Damage: Roll a D5 and multiply result
by no. of A/C destroyed. The result is the no. of new hits
inflicted on the ship by one or more exploding A/C. Roll
one surface critical hit per 20 such hits from A/C on the
flight deck, or one internal critical hit per 20 such hits from
A/C in a hangar.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
63
3. Determine Damaged A/C: Take total hits inflicted by the
original attack and A/C explosions and roll an attack using
that value against a defense strength of 5. Apply a –1 to
the LH roll per undestroyed A/C in that ship's section. The
result in "hits" is the no. of undestroyed A/C randomly dam-
aged. When randomly distributing damage a second result
destroys an A/C (no damage to ship) and removes it from
consideration for further distributions. Damaged A/C give
severe damage VPs and are not flyable.
Designer's Notes: "Ammo" ships loaded entirely with muni-
tions, or "Tankers" loaded entirely with volatile aviation fuel may
blow up when hit. The Rule below covers this possibility.
Highly Explosive Cargo: If a ship with "highly explosive
cargo" is damaged, total the explosion critical hits caused by all
attacks in a game turn and multiply them by 5. Roll percentile
dice. If the result is ≤ (explosions x 5), the entire ship explodes
being instantly destroyed. Any A/C, ground unit, or ship within a
range of 10 is immediately attacked at 12-1 odds, with the odds
shifted one column left for each hex of range greater than one
from the nearest hex of the ship.
28.4 –– SHIP POST ATTACK FATE
Designer's Notes: Since a combat scale attack represents
only a small fraction of time in the life of a ship, it is necessary to
resolve the long term effects of damage. Some ships may sink
hours after a battle due to out-of-control fires and flooding, or
survive due to heroic damage control efforts of their crews.
Post Attack Fate: A Post Attack Fate check is required at
the end of any air-naval combat scenario in which significant
damage occurred. Significant damage is defined as sustaining
hits which cause any of the following:
1. Cumulative damage past 10% of ship's capacity.
2. One or more sea worthiness criticals sustained.
3. One or more fire or flooding hits sustained.
Procedure: Make a LH roll and refer to the Ship Post Attack
Fate Table (Naval Tables, page 3). Modifiers apply depending
on damage sustained, critical hit effects and the number of fire
and flooding hits not neutralized by damage control teams.
Mission Scenarios: A Post Attack Fate check must be made
at the end of any Op-turn in which ship damage reached a new
10% level of the ship's capacity and at the end of the last Op-
turn. If a ship does separate fate rolls, the most severe result
obtained is the one applied at the end of play.
Victory Points: If ships are damaged but a "post attack
fate" roll is not required, one VP is awarded for each critical hit
inflicted on the ship. If a "fate" roll is required, VPs = VP value
of ship times the "fate" table's result VP percentage. Include the
full VPs of A/C on a ship when it is sunk.
28.5 –– TEMPORARY SHIP REPAIRS
In mission scenarios, temporary fixes can be effected dur-
ing Op-turns in which a ship is not attacked. Repairs require a
certain amount of time to pass. DC teams must be assigned to
damage for the indicated time, after which, the item is fixed. See
Naval Tables, page 3, for a list of repairable hits and the times
required. Only a maximum of 1/3 (rounded up) of all eliminated
light and Medium AAA batteries may be randomly repaired.
 64
CHAPTER 29 –– NAVAL A/C OPERATIONS
The following Rules apply to ships designed to handle and
launch planes from carrier flight decks or with catapults.
Deck Capacity: CVs have a normal and max flight deck
capacity (FDC) and a max hangar deck capacity (HDC) in terms
of A/C allowed in each hex of the ship listed on a ship data card.
Other ship types may have restricted deck capacity (RDC), or
hangar deck capacity or both. Restricted decks are for storing,
refueling and rearming, and are not flight decks with space for
take-offs or landings. If ships have a hangar deck but no flight
deck, A/C taken from the hangar must be placed directly on the
water, on shore or on a swiveling catapult by crane. Deck capacity
must be complied with at the end of each Op-turn Phase.
A/C Elevators: The number and position of elevators (used
to shift A/C between hangars and flight decks in the movement
phase) are noted on a ship's data card. Side-mounted external
elevators may be used any time. The forward deck elevator may
be used during recovery operations, and the aft, or middle eleva-
tor (if any), may be used during launch operations. All elevators
may be used during "through-deck" operations. An elevator's
capacity in terms of A/C it can move at a time is listed on its ship
data card. Elevators always start and end the movement phase
at the flight deck level. Elevators may take A/C down and bring
different A/C up in the same round trip.
Landing Groups & Crashes: A carrier flight deck is a tiny
operating area compared to an airfield and a landing mishap
could block the deck for minutes while crash debris is cleared.
Therefore when a landing group (LDG) is formed for CV landings
(limit of 1 to 14 A/C) the order of landing attempts for the A/C must
also be established before rolling for attrition. If one or more A/C
suffer incidents, randomly determine which before resolving the
types of incidents. All A/C in front of the first incident A/C land
normally. Resolve the first incident and if not a "crash" all A/C
between the first and second incident land normally, etc. If the
incident requires a second landing attempt, that plane goes to
the end of the line for landing. If a crash results, all remaining
landings for the turn are suspended (the A/C circle overhead)
and any remaining incidents to be resolved are ignored. Resolve
the crash and any flight deck damage. All flight deck action limits
(launching, landing, spotting numbers etc.) are reduced by half
(round down) for the next Op-turn while the crew clears debris.
A/C Cranes: Cranes can be used to lift A/C and mount them
on catapults or place them on the water or a flight deck. Each
crane may handle one A/C at a time and may perform one of the
following functions per Op-turn:
1. Hook up to and lift an A/C from the water, hangar deck,
swivel catapult or flight deck to a suspended position.
2. Lower a suspended A/C to the water, hangar deck, flight
deck or swivel catapult and unhook.
Flight Deck Operations: At the start of each Op-turn, or each
tactical or combat scenario, a CV's flight deck must be dedicated
to one of the following operations:
1. Launching A/C (take-offs by deck run or catapult)
2. Recovering A/C (landing and parking)
3. Through-deck Ops. (both take-offs & landings)
4. Support Ops. (spotting, rearming and refueling)
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Deck Limits: Ships with restricted flight decks or just hangar
decks can only do support ops. CVs must be dedicated each
Op-turn to either launching A/C, recovering A/C, doing support
ops, or running a "through-deck" operation. In 'through-deck"
ops, A/C may be landed and launched at the same time, but
only a limited number may be on the flight deck. Below is a list
of allowed A/C actions per Op-turn by flight deck configuration.
A/C launches and recovery require that an Op-turn begin with
all A/C legally spotted for take-offs or landings.
29.1 –– Op-Scale CV Operations
LAUNCH OPS: A CV dedicated to this may:
Launch A/C - In the Take Off Phase, any number of A/C
on a flight deck may start engines and up to 20 may take off by
deck run, or up to 4 may be launched per catapult. A/C located
in mid or stern flight deck hexes may not take off until those
located in more forward hexes are launched. If using deck runs,
the forward most flight deck hex must be clear of A/C before any
take offs are allowed. Reduce the number of allowed take-offs or
catapult launches by half if the originating hex of any launching
A/C started the turn at over normal capacity.
Lift A/C - In the Movement Phase elevators may make one
round trip each between the flight deck and hangar deck. A/C
moved by elevator do not count against the spotting limit of a
level unless also shifted to another hex after being lifted.
Do Limited Spotting of A/C - For each functional Flight or
Hangar deck hex, up to two A/C may be shifted from one deck
hex to an adjacent hex during the Movement Phase if the hex
entered is at or below normal capacity. A/C may change levels
by elevator prior to or after a spotting shift.
RECOVERY OPS: A CV dedicated to this may:
Land A/C - Up to 14 A/C may land and be parked. For each
A/C over 10 landing in a single Op-turn, the LDG attrition roll has
a +5 modifier added. As A/C land, they are automatically moved
to the forward most deck hex until that hex's max capacity is used
up and then they must be parked in the middle hex. A/C need
not be moved forward if grabbed and lowered by an elevator to
another deck. A/C may not land if any flight deck A/C are in the
landing hex
Lift A/C - After all landings are complete elevators may make
one round trip each between the flight and hangar decks. A/C
may land, move to an available parking hex, shut down and be
moved by an elevator all in the same Op-turn.
Do Limited Spotting of A/C - As for Launch Ops.
THROUGH-DECK OPS: Through-deck ops are very flexible
allowing an CV to launch, recover and service a limited number
of A/C on its flight deck during the Op-turn.
Flight Deck Limits - A CV must start the Op-turn with not
more than two A/C anywhere on its flight deck for each functional
flight deck hex it has (i.e., a three hex CV can have up to six A/C
on its flight deck). This limit must be met at the start and end of
the take-off, movement and landing phase of the Op turn.
Launching & Landing A/C - The CV may either launch or
land A/C in the Take Off Phase, and also either launch or land A/C
in the Landing Phase. The bow hex must be clear for launches,
and the stern hex clear of A/C for landings. Landing A/C park in
 Fighting Wings
the middle flight deck hex if available, or the bow if not. Landing
A/C may be spotted or lifted immediately after landing.
Lift A/C - Elevators may make one round trip each during
the Op-turn, either during the Take Off, Movement, or Landing
Phase. Different elevators may lift in different phases.
Do Limited Spotting of A/C - As for Launch Ops.
A/C Actions - A/C on any deck can participate in allowed
actions subject to flight deck capacity and spotting limits. Refuel-
ing and reloading occurs only on the flight deck. In all, individual
A/C may perform up to three of the following actions during the
Op-Turn, limited to one action each per phase:
a. Move once between decks by elevator (any phase).
b. Take off or land in the Take-Off Phase.
c. Reload all guns, clear jams in the Movement Phase.
d. Refuel all tanks in the Movement Phase.
e. Take off or land in the Landing Phase.
f. Switch crews if not landing or taking-off in the turn.
Example: A CAP fighter starting in the VL band and same
OMT dot as a CV could land in the take-off phase, rearm with
ammo and take off again in the landing phase (a "quick turn").
Note: If an A/C both lands and takes-off, it must pay normal
fuel costs for both actions.
SUPPORT OPS: A CV dedicated to this may not launch or
recover A/C. In the Movement Phase it may:
Spot A/C - For each functional hex on a flight deck or hangar
deck level, roll a D5. The sum of the rolls is the total number of
A/C that may be spotted (moved) from one deck hex to any other
at the same level, or to a hex from that level to any other hex on
a different level if also lifted by elevators in the same turn.
Lift A/C - All elevators may make up to two round trips each
between the flight deck and hangar deck.
Refuel and Rearm A/C - For each functional flight or hangar
deck hex on a level dedicated to this task, up to three A/C not
involved in being spotted, repaired or moved by cranes, may be
refueled and have all guns reloaded, or have all guns reloaded
and up to 10 load points of stores loaded or unloaded. These
A/C may be located in any hex of a level (or on catapults). The
number of functional hexes just limits the total number of A/C
that can be serviced.
Repair A/C - For each hangar deck hex on a level dedicated
to this task, up to two A/C hits if Allied CVs, and one A/C hit if Axis
CVs may be repaired (spread over one or more A/C anywhere on
that level) or, one attempt to repair one critical hit can be made
(D10 ≤ 3 = succeeds). A/C under repair may not be spotted,
refueled or rearmed that Op-turn.
Japanese CV Note - Some Japanese carriers have multiple
hangar decks. The decks below hangar level 1 are only for A/C
storage. A/C on those decks may not be serviced or repaired.
Repair Limits - Severely damaged A/C may not reduce
existing hits below half of their max hit capacity (rounded down).
Other A/C may have hits reduced to 1/10th of max hit capacity
(round any fraction up). No A/C may have more than two hits
fixed or one critical hit repair attempt made for it per Op-turn.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
65
29.2 –– TACTICAL & COMBAT SCALE ACTIONS
Designer's Note: At the tactical and combat scale an enemy
attack is considered imminent and deck operations would be
frozen in their current mode. Elevators would be locked at flight
deck level, rearming and refueling suspended and cranes secured.
Through-deck actions would still be possible if a flight deck was
so dedicated, otherwise, the deck hands are considered to be
taking cover preventing other operations.
Air-Naval Tactical Actions: See Rule 30.2 for Air-Naval
Tactical Procedures. For reasons indicated in the designer's
note, no flight deck actions are allowed during this procedure.
Combat Game Turn Actions: One A/C per game turn may
taxi one hex, or land, or start its take-off roll with deck runs, but
only into or through empty deck hexes. Landings are allowed
and landed A/C may shift into but not through occupied flight
deck hexes if sufficient FDC points remain available. One A/C
already on a catapult with engines started may be launched on
any turn. A landing crash, or hit that causes one or more points
of flight deck damage shuts that deck hex down due to debris for
the rest of the combat game (in addition to any effects of Rule
23.1). Float plane and seaplane handling is not allowed during
combat scale play as the ship's crew is at battle stations and all
cranes are locked and stowed for safety.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CHAPTER 30 – NAVAL OP-& TAC-SCALE RuleS
30.1 –– AIR-NAVAL OP-SCALE ADDITIONS
Task Forces (TFs): All ships in a single naval formation (a
task force) are located in the same dot position. Only one TF
and up to eight independent ships can be in a single OMT dot
position at a time. Up to 48 hexes worth (referring to ship sizes)
of ships can be in a single TF. Place a numbered TF counter on
the OMT and set the ships in that TF aside. The scenarios will
specify TFs and ships in them. Players may change the organi-
zation of TFs between missions in a campaign setting. Sighting
attempts are done separately against each TF or individual ship
in a dot position. See Rule 15.4.4 for search procedures.
TF Movement: If a scenario does not specify how TFs move
during a mission, a player may shift warships from their start dot
to an adjacent dot every third turn or after (as plotted in advance
before play) or every 6th turn or later for non-warships.
Naval Op-scale AAA: Ships with more than one point of
Op-scale AAA, may fire at A/C which attack them during the
Air-Naval Tactical Procedure (Rule 30.2) per the Rules below.
Designer's Notes: Land AAA units represent several flak bat-
teries with large stocks of ammo defending large cities or areas of
sky. Naval AAA is point defense oriented with each ship engag-
ing only enemy A/C that directly threaten it or its task force due
to limited supplies of ammo. The Air-Naval Tactical Procedure
represents this doctrine.
Naval AAA Values: Each ship's data card lists its Op-scale
heavy, medium, and light AAA points. The effective altitudes,
attack ratings and critical hit ratings of naval AAA are listed in
the Op-scale Flak Attack Table (Operational Tables, Page 1).
Naval AAA Resolution: Total all AAA points of a given size
(Heavy, Medium or Light) from all ships firing to get each size's
 66
firepower modifier. Apply other normal Flak Attack Modifiers and
resolve the attack normally per Rule 15.4.3.
30.2 –– AIR-NAVAL TACTICAL PROCEDURE
When aircraft attack ships, use the 4-step air-naval tactical
scale interaction procedure given below:
1. Resolve Long Range AAA – When a formation or force
of A/C begins an attack on ships, the defending ships are
allowed one Op-scale AAA attack at the A/C. The heavy
AAA value of the target ship, or the combined heavy AAA
value for all ships in a task force is used. The AAA attack
is conducted BEFORE the A/C are shifted to their new
final altitude bands to begin combat scale play.
2. Target Selection & Approach – The attacking A/C pick
their target. If it is a lone ship, skip this step. If they
are attacking a TF, take all ships in the TF and divide
them into sets of ships each set totaling not more than 8
ship hexes of vessels ≥ 100 tons in size plus any no. of
smaller vessels. Place these on a table with unidentified
sides up, so the attacker is unsure of which is which. The
attacker selects one or more sets to attack and distributes
his A/C against them per Rule 15.10. The start altitudes
of the A/C may also be adjusted per Rule 15.10.
Note: Additional formations attacking the same ships at the
same TOI may select the same or different sets to attack.
3. Resolve Screening AAA - If untargeted sets of ships
remain, they may make Op-scale AAA attacks in sup-
port of each set of the targeted ships as follows:
• For each formation approaching roll a D5 and subtract 2.
Any result > 0 becomes the no. of untargeted ship sets
randomly picked that are overflown by that one formation
in its approach to the combat scale map for play.
• All heavy, medium and light AAA points in the overflown
sets are summed separately and each is used for a one
time Op-Scale AAA attack against the approaching forma-
tion. Light AAA can only attack a formation approaching
at an altitude of 3.0 or less.
4. Set Up For Combat Scale Play - Reveal the ships in the
selected set. The attacker chooses one as his main target
and places it within 5 hexes of the map's center. If not
otherwise directed in a scenario, the remaining ships are
placed by their owner as follows:
• If a Warship ≥ 100 tons - anywhere on the map with same
facing as main target, but no closer than 15 + D5 hexes
(roll per ship setting up) from any multi-hex warship already
on the map, and no closer than 10 hexes to any single
hex warships ≥ 100 tons or any non warship ≥ 100 tons
already on the map. Vessels of < 100 tons can be ignored.
• If a non-warship ≥ 100 tons - anywhere on map with same
facing as main target but no closer than 10 hexes to any
vessel ≥ 100 tons.
• If a ship of < 100 tons, anywhere on map, up to four per
hex in any hex not occupied by or adjacent to a vessel of
≥ 100 tons.
After set up, the attackers enter play per Rule 15.10.
• For a Comprehensive Op-to-Combat Scale Example of
Air – Naval Play: See Rules Supplement One.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
CHAPTER 31 – MAKING NEW SHIP DATA CARDS
Designer's Notes: This chapter is for those who wish to create
additional ships. An excellent source of ship information are the
data annexes included in Clash of Arm's "Command At Sea"
(CAS) game. FW's ship design method is a modified version of
the one used in CAS.
31.1 –– SHIP SIZE & HIT CAPACITY
1 - hex Counter: Ships < 330 feet in length.
2 - hex Counter: Ships < 660 feet in length.
3 - hex Counter: Any vessel ≥ 660 feet in length.
Note: Some ships are rated as 2 hex ships despite be-
ing a little over 660 feet in length (e.g., Myoko at 661 feet).
Hit Capacity: The number of hits (H) a ship can take is based
on its standard displacement in tons (T) divided by the number
shown below + additional hits as follows:
Standard Displ. (T) Hit Capacity Formulae
0 - 50 (T / 05) + 0 = HC
51 - 250 (T / 10) + 10 = HC
251 - 500 (T / 15) + 20 = HC
501 - 5,000 (T / 20) + 30 = HC
5,001 - 12,000 (T / 30) + 120 = HC
12,001 - 64,000 (T / 50) + 280 = HC
64,001+ (T / 70) + 650 = HC
Modify the H of non-military & wooden ships as follows:
Civil Tankers, Merchants: Hm = HC x 0.75
Wooden non-merchant ships: Hm = HC x 0.75
Wooden Civil Merchants: Hm = HC x 0.56
Note: If a ship's final hit capacity exceeds 100, "H" or "Hm"
is rounded normally to the nearest 5.
31.2 –– DEFENSE FACTORS, SPEED & ARMOR
Base Defense Factor & Speeds: The smaller a ship, the
harder it is to hit with area weapons such as rockets, guns and
near miss bomb shrapnel. A ship's basic defense factor is based
on its standard displacement, and a ship's max game speed is
based on its max real speed in knots as given below:
Standard Defense Max Real Max Game
Displ. (T) Factor Speed Knots Speed
≤ 250 20 ≤ 6 DIW
≤ 500 15 ≥ 7 1/6
≤ 5,000 12 ≥ 11 1/4
≤ 12,000 10 ≥ 15 1/3
≤ 64,000 8 ≥ 22 1/2
≥ 64,001 6 ≥ 29, ≥ 33 2 / 3, 3 / 4
A ship's defense factor increases with speed as follows:
Game Speed Scale Speed Defense Add
≤ 1/4 ≤ 14 knots +0
= 1/3 15 to 21 knots +1
= 1/2 22 to 28 knots +2
= 2/3 29 to 32 Knots +4
= 3/4 33 to 43 Knots +6
Hard / Soft Targets: Ships with deck or side armor ratings
≥ 2 or with torpedo protection are hard targets. All other ships
are soft. Hard or soft targets are noted by an (H) or (S) next to
their hit capacity on the ship's data card.
 Fighting Wings
Armor Ratings: Some ships had armor on their decks and
sides. This is rated as either light (1), medium (2), heavy (3) or
very heavy (4) with effects as described in Chapter 28. Some
carriers also had armored flight decks. If so, this is always light
(1) and is separate from ship deck armor. Indicate armored flight
decks by placing "(A)" after the ship's FDC ratings.
Note: The Command at Sea (CAS ) game rates ships for
armor by point values which convert to FW ratings as follows:
CAS Rating ≤ 2 = (0) None
CAS Rating ≤ 8 = (1) Light
CAS Rating ≤ 15 = (2) Medium
CAS Rating ≤ 30 = (3) Heavy
CAS Rating ≥ 31 = (4) Very Heavy
Rules of Thumb: If you do not own CAS or other sources
of information, rate ships as follows:
• DD and smaller are unarmored.
• CL have none to light armor on decks and sides.
• Early CAs have light armor on decks and sides.
• Some late war CA had medium side armor.
• BBs have medium deck and heavy side armor.
• Large BBs (USS Missouri) had very heavy side armor.
• CVs have none to medium armor on decks & sides.
• Light carriers (CVL) & tenders (AV) have no armor.
• Only 1940 Royal Navy CVs and some IJN CVs commis-
sioned in late 1944 or 1945 had armored flight decks.
Torpedo Protection Points (TPPs): Most CAs, BBs and
CVs had torpedo bulges. TPP formula = H / 15. Round TPPs
to nearest 5 points. The TPP applies equally and separately to
each side of, and each hex of, the ship. See Chapter 28.
Note: CAS is a good source for torpedo protection info.
31.3 –– SHIP DIRECT HIT NUMBERS
FW defines an "on target" weapon as one landing within 125
feet of its aim point. The direct hit number of a ship for on target
weapons is based on the rectangular area of a ship in each hex
it occupies divided by the area of a 250' wide circle (the random
area of on-target impacts) rounded to the nearest 100 feet.
Target Circle Area: Circle Area (C) = πr2, which for a 250'
circle is 49,088 square feet rounded to 49,100.
Ship Area / Hex: Ship area (S) = L x W in feet rounded to
the nearest 100 square feet. L = longer of flight deck or waterline
length listed in source. W = widest of beam, flight deck or torpedo
bulges. If a ship occupies two hexes, divide by 2 to find the area
in each target circle. If a ship occupies three hexes, its length in
the center hex is always 300' and the length in each of the bow
and stern hexes is the remaining length ÷ 2.
"Direct Hit" Numbers: The number or less on a modified
D10 roll required for a direct hit = (S ÷ 4910) rounded to nearest
integer (Note: 4910 = C ÷ 10, a design trick to move the decimal
one to the left). A direct hit number cannot be < "1" or > "10".
Direct Hit No. Calculation Example: A Brooklyn Class
light cruiser is 612 feet long by 62 feet wide at the beam. This
is a two-hex ship. Its area in each target circle = (612 x 62)÷2
= 18,972 square feet rounded to 19,000. The direct hit no. for
each hex of the ship = 19,000÷4910 = 3.87 rounded to 4, or, in
game terms, a D10 roll ≤ 4 in each hex the ship occupies.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
67
31.4 –– VITAL CREW & BOILERS
Damage Control (DC), Command Teams & Boilers: Ships
receive DC teams based on type & crew size. Command teams
and boiler units are based on tonnage per the charts below:
Displacement Boiler Comm. Ship D.C.
Tonnage (T) U
nits Teams Type Teams
0 - 50 1 1 Any CV Crew / 75
51 - 250 2 1 BB, CA Crew / 50
251 - 500 2 2 CL, DD, DE Crew / 50
501 - 5,000 3 3 PT, SS Crew / 20
5,001 - 12,000 4 4 AV, AO, AK Crew / 50
12,001 - 64,000 5 6 Small ≤ 500T Crew / 30
64,001+ 6 8 AP, Merchant Crew / 100
Team Modifiers: Round DC teams to nearest digit. Axis ships
multiply DC teams by 0.8. Non-warships multiply both team types
by 0.5 (round up) to reflect lesser training in damage control and
smaller command structures.
Boiler Units (BUs): These reflect a ship's power genera-
tion capability and not actual numbers of engines or boilers.
The percentage of BUs a ship must have remaining to achieve
a certain speed is shown in the chart below. The left most col-
umn is the ship's max allowed speed. Read to the right to find
the percentage of boilers required, rounded normally to nearest
integer, for each step of possible ship speed. Use this chart to
generate a ship data card's speed line.
Max Minimum BUs remaining to produce Ship Speed
Speed 3/4 2/3 1/2 1/3 1/4 1/6 DIW
3/4 100% 80% 60% 50% 30% 15% 0
2/3 ––– 100% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0
1/2 ––– ––– 100% 75% 50% 25% 0
1/3 ––– ––– ––– 75% 50% 25% 0
1/4 ––– ––– ––– ––– 67% 33% 0
1/6 ––– ––– ––– ––– ––– 50% 0
Speed Line Example: A 10,000 ton oiler (AO) has a max speed
of 1/3 and four BUs. At least 3 (75%) must be available to sustain
speed 1/3, 2 (50%) for speed 1/4 and so on. Its speed line on its
data card would appear as follows:
Boilers (4) –– 4 3 2 1 0
Max Speed — 1/3 1/3 1/4 1/6 DIW
31.5 –– SHIP A/C & CARGO CAPACITY
Flight Deck Capacity (FDC): Ships with flight decks will
have two FDC numbers expressed as the fraction: Normal / Max
FDC. The formulae for FDC for each hex of the ship are:
Norm. = (Deck L x W) ÷ 1000. (Round to nearest integer).
Max. = (Deck L x W) ÷ 667. (Round to nearest integer).
Hangar Deck Capacity (HDC): HDC = most reliable of:
(hangar deck L x W) ÷ 667, or number of A/C known to fit in
each hangar bay, or 55% of FDC in each hex of ship. Round all
values to nearest integer.
Restricted Deck Capacity (RDC): RDC = same as twice
the number of catapults carried (if not a CV, CVL, or AV).
Elevator Deck Capacity (EDC): EDC = most reliable of known
or estimated (elevator L x W) ÷ 667 rounded to nearest integer,
or 2 A/C for a small deck hex elevator, 3 for a side mounted or
standard late war deck hex elevator (Essex CV).
 68
Cargo Capacity: For warships, capacity = two percent
(2%) of std. displacement in tons (supplies stacked on exposed
decks). For merchants and transports, cargo capacity = 0.8 x
Std. displacement if ≤ 10,000 tons, and 1.2 x Std. displacement
if > 10,000 tons. Oilers typically carry up to 2.0 x Std. displace-
ment in fuel. Round values to nearest 5 tons.
Note: A lot of sources list only fully loaded weight for trans-
ports. If you can find the ship's GRT (gross registered tonnage),
Full tonnage - GRT = cargo capacity. As a Rule-of-thumb, divide
full weight by 1.8, 2.2, or 3.0 to get approximate ship tonnage
for cargo ships ≤ 10K, > 10K, and oilers, respectively.
31.6 –– SHIP ARMAMENT & RADAR
Gun Batteries: Gun batteries and their fields-of-fire must be
estimated using the best available top and side view drawings
of the ships. In the absence of better data, distribute AAA guns
evenly in a logical manner about the ship. On large ships, with
multiple gun positions, group any light and medium AAA guns
that are in a similar position or co-located in the same gun tub
together into a battery. Always list main battery guns and turreted
AAA guns as individual units.
AAA Gun Data: See the AAA charts in each game's play
aids and on each ship's data card. There are sufficient firepower
listings for the most common gun types and groupings of AAA
guns used. Transcribe these as needed to new ship data cards.
Op-Scale AAA Values: H, M and L Op-scale values are de-
termined as follows:
• hand loaded med. guns = 0.1 point per gun barrel.
• Other Light and med. AAA = 0.25 points per gun barrel.
• Heavy AAA = 0.75 points per gun > 4" (102mm) and
0.5 points per gun ≤ 102mm in size.
Modify values as follows (round fractions up to nearest integer,
unless total < 0.5, then to 0 or 0.5 as required):
• If majority manually aimed = total value x 1.0
• If majority director aimed = total value x 1.2
• If majority radar director aimed = total value x 1.5
• Add 0.3 to Med. or Hvy. multiplier if using proximity fuses.
Size Definitions: Light AAA = guns ≤ 30mm. Medium AAA
= guns ≤ 57mm. Heavy AAA = all guns > 57mm.
Gun Directors: Normally, only heavy AAA batteries (and med.
batteries on US ships) are linked to directors. In the absence of
good sources, assume separate directors for med. and heavy
guns on US ships, with one gun director each for med. and hvy.
guns in each hex of a ship (two for CA & BBs). Assign up to three
batteries to each director as appropriate for their fields-of-fire.
31.7 –– SHIP VICTORY POINTS
Ship Victory Point (VP) Values: Ship VP value = HC ÷ 4,
rounded to the nearest integer if value < 100 and to the near-
est 5 if value ≥ 100. At the end of combat, a ship's VP value is
multiplied by the Ship's fate percent number shown on the Post
Attack Fate Table to arrive at the VPs earned for the scenario.
For CVs and BBs, increase all calculated VP values by 1.5.
Cargo VPs: If ships carrying cargo are sunk or damaged,
earn 1 VP per each 100 tons or less of general cargo or oil de-
stroyed. Troops, tanks, and other equipment carried are worth
the normal V.P. value of the item carried.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
PART SEVEN – NIGHT OPERATIONS
CHAPTER 32 — NIGHT FIGHTING
Designer's Note: The night combat arena is very different from
the daytime one. For daytime the existing Rules in each of the dif-
ferent scales of play assume adequate visual observation of enemy
A/C actions the entire time. At night this is not the case. Visual
observation is only possible at very short (combat scale) ranges.
Therefore, successful Op-scale night intercepts and any subse-
quent Tac-scale maneuvering represent actions taken against
unseen enemy A/C by interceptors made aware of them by some
means. TMG play represents the tracking process used to initi-
ate a viable combat engagement (visual or via other sensors).
32.1 –– NIGHT OP–SCALE ADDITIONS
Night Bombers: A/C not designated as "night fighters" are
considered night bombers (NBs) regardless of true role.
Night Fighters: F, L, and MF A/C flying at night are night
fighters (NFs) whether trained and equipped for it or not.
Night Trained: A/C designed and built for night operations
will have an "N" on their ADC in their agility rating.
Formations / Gaggles: At night, A/C normally fly and bomb
individually. Formations are not allowed except as specified in
certain scenarios. To ease play, friendly A/C starting in the same
dot and altitude band making identical moves may be moved as
a "gaggle" all at once. Gaggles are fired on by AAA, searched
for by lights, or intercepted as if they were a single formation.
Order of Moves & Initiative: NBs move first, then NFs. If
both sides have NBs, each side rolls a D10. Roll again to break
ties. The low roller moves all of his NBs first (including all or some
friendly NFs to disguise their presence), followed by the other
side moving theirs. If both sides have unmoved NFs after that,
the interceptor side chooses to move a NF first or second. Both
sides then alternate moving individual NFs until all have moved.
Clouds: When A/C end a move in a band affected by broken
or overcast weather, they must declare whether they are flying
inside, above or below any nearby clouds in that band. Only
crews with full or limited training for night flying (Rule 32.3.2) may
choose "inside" broken or overcast clouds. Unless equipped with
air-to-surface radar, A/C may not bomb unmarked targets from
above or inside broken or overcast weather.
Encounters & Intercepts During Movement: Random en
route encounters are allowed, except they are always single A/C
in size and friendly A/C may not be kept in play. Unintentional
A/C encounters are not allowed and are not checked for during
moves. Movement Phase intercepts are allowed only against
illuminated or silhouetted A/C, or A/C in GCI radar coverage. If
assisted by GCI movement phase intercept ranges are allowed
as for day intercepts. Otherwise, they are restricted to the same
dot as, and from one band above to one below the interceptor.
Intercept & Combat Phase: If both sides have NFs in play,
the non-mission player chooses to attempt deliberate intercepts
with an NF first or second. Both sides then alternate intercept
attempts by single NFs until all have gone.
Each NF is allowed one intercept attempt using all valid
sensors. If EWR or GCI radar is assisting, intercept ranges are
unchanged from day intercepts. Otherwise, deliberate intercepts
 Fighting Wings
are only possible in the same dot, from one band above to one
below the interceptor. Shift successful NFs to the target's altitude
band and dot. If the intercepted target is a multiple plane gaggle,
randomly determine which A/C is actually intercepted.
Point defense CAP (Rule 15.11) is not allowed at night. Once
all NFs are done, NBs may search for and declare attacks on
located ground targets one at a time, in any order (alternating
as for NFs if both sides have NBs in the same OMT column).
Intercept Attempt Protocol:
• Announce if radar homer in use, identify eligible targets.
• Identify the target A/C of the intercept attempt.
• Determine if target is illuminated or silhouetted.
• Declare which intercept sensors in use.
• Reveal presence of jammer or window effects.
• Calculate and sum modifiers, roll LH for intercept.
Combat Scale Coordinated Attacks: Radio equipped NBs
which have the same target located may do a coordinated at-
tack. Announce this when declaring attacks. All such A/C form
a pool of attackers. Roll a D5+1. The result is how many (2 to 6)
are randomly selected from the pool. These enter combat scale
play on turn 1, though each A/C rolls separately for map sec-
tion of entry (per Rule 15.10). From A/C remaining in the pool,
a second group may be formed as above and so on. Follow on
groups enter play two D5 in game turns after the preceding one.
NF Sensors: In addition to the pilot's eyes, a NF may have
a variety of radars or other sensors. All of them can aid in the
intercept of potential targets. When rolling for intercepts sum
the modifiers of all sensors employed against the target. NF's
with multiple radars use only the one providing the best modi-
fier. Radar Homing devices only provide a modifier if the target
is using a radar of the type they are designed to sense.
Highlighted NFs: Combats between targets and NFs that
involve shots, NF illumination, or spot light / turbine light use in
encounter attempts highlight the location of a NF, making it more
vulnerable to intercepts the next Op-Turn (+5 encounter mod.).
GCI Radars: A ground controlled intercept radar (GCI) site's
coverage includes all altitude bands in its OMT dot out to 5 dots
to either side of the site. GCI radar sites represent several radars
and control teams and each site may assist friendly NFs (the
same or different ones) with intercepts up to four times per Op-
turn. To receive GCI assistance, a NF must be IFF equipped and
both it and its target must be within that GCI site's coverage.
Jamming Effects: If an A/C with a GCI communications jam-
mer is within OMT dots = its jammer power no. of an NF doing
an intercept with GCI assist, reduce the GCI modifier to +5.
Window Effects: Window is the code for strips of aluminum
cut to various radar wavelengths and tossed out of A/C to create
false targets. NBs may have a number of Op-turns of window
use on board. Note on paper which NBs deploy window in their
move and the dots entered. Each leaves 1 point of window in its
altitude band per Op-MP expended in a dot. Window points are
in effect until the end of the Op-turn after the turn of deployment.
Window reduces all EW, GCI or NF radar assist and radar aimed
AAA modifiers used against a target gaggle in the window's alt.
band by 1 per point of window in the dot. No radar modifier can
be taken below +0 by window.
Night AAA: Anti-aircraft guns cannot distinguish between
friendly or enemy A/C at night and will normally target all A/C.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
69
Exception – Radar aimed Harassing Flak will not target friendly
A/C having IFF (Identification Friend or Foe) sets. Harassing
Flak (Rule 15.4.3) can only engage illuminated or silhouetted
A/C, or if radar aimed, all A/C. Defense Zone Flak (Rule 15.4.3)
indiscriminately fires at all A/C over the target, no exceptions.
Resolve radar aimed and non-radar aimed AA gun attacks sepa-
rately. Radar aimed AAA ignores night related modifiers.
AAA Altitude Limits: If desired, AAA units in any OMT dot
may have a max. and min. altitude level burst height imposed
at the start of a scenario (It is recorded secretly and cannot be
changed). Different restrictions can be set for different dots.
Enemy A/C not within the targeted heights are simply told they
will not be shot at, but not what the AAA restrictions are.
AAA Target Groups: For Defense Zone Flak, divide target
A/C into three groups; unseen, silhouetted and illuminated A/C.
Resolve AAA fire against each group separately in each band.
32.1.1 – OP-SCALE NIGHT VISIBILITY FACTORS
Moonlight Level: Moonlight levels provide modifiers to in-
tercept attempts and other actions. If the moonlight level is not
specified for a scenario, roll an unmodified D10 at the start of
a mission. Refer to the Moonlight Table (FW – OMT, page 2).
The result will be one of the following:
No Moon: Total darkness exists in all altitude bands. In
"partial" or "full moon" conditions, total darkness will still
exist in all bands below the highest band affected by
broken or overcast clouds in a weather zone.
Partial Moon: Some visibility exists at or above the
highest band affected by broken or overcast clouds.
Full Moon: Good visibility exists at or above the highest
band affected by broken or overcast clouds. A full moon's
glare will back-light the upper surface of broken or over-
cast clouds in the highest band affected by such weather.
If none, it will back-light snow covered terrain.
Illuminated A/C: A contrailing A/C above all broken or over-
cast clouds in its OMT dot in a full or partial moon light, or one
on fire, or one lit up by searchlights is "illuminated".
Silhouetted A/C: A/C are "silhouetted" if in the same OMT
dot as a searcher and no broken or overcast cloud layers are
between the searcher and the target and:
• The target is between the searcher and back-lit broken
or overcast cloud layers.
• The target is between the searcher & large ground fires
or back-lit snow covered terrain.
• The target's nighttime wing and tail running lights are on.
Back-light Sources: The glare of a full moon, large ground
fires, illumination flares and clusters of searchlights can be
sources for back-lighting clouds or snow covered terrain in an
OMT dot. See details in relevant paragraphs above and below.
Illumination & Silhouetting Effects: Affected A/C may be
attacked by Harassing Flak. NFs intercepting such A/C receive
beneficial LH modifiers.
Large Ground Fires: Large fires begin as designated by
the scenario (usually when sufficient bombers are considered
to have attacked a dot position so as to create the fires). Large
fires back-light the nearest lower surface of broken or overcast
clouds in the LO band or lower.
 70
Illumination Flares: Flares back-light all upper and lower
surfaces of all broken or overcast clouds in the band the flares
are in. If none, they back-light the nearest surfaces of the first
broken or overcast cloud band (or snow covered terrain) exposed
to the flares, within two bands above or below the flares. Flares
can be ground launched or dropped by A/C.
Ground Launched Flares: Naval units and cities defended
by heavy AAA may place illumination flare clusters in their dot
position at the start of an Op-turn in the VL and LO bands. The
flares last until the end of the turn. The scenario will designate
how many turns of clusters are available.
A/C Dropped Flares: A/C having illumination flares may
place a flare cluster marker in any dot position they enter during
a move. The clusters may ignite in the same altitude band as,
or in the band below the launching A/C. A Flare cluster marker
lasts until the end of the same Op-turn. Scenarios designate how
many clusters are carried by each such A/C.
Locating Ground & Naval Targets: Area targets, such as
airfields, cities, troop positions and naval task forces are visible
in full moon conditions or if on fire. In all other cases, they must
be searched for using Rule 15.4.4, adding in night modifiers.
32.1.2 – Op-Scale Searchlights
Searchlights: Op-scale searchlight modifiers reflect the
temporary illumination of A/C by one or more light beams as
they enter OMT dots with lights. City searchlights are always
active. Ships and military ground targets must declare whether
their lights are active or not at the start of an Op-turn.
Searchlight Points: City and searchlight counters have
scenario designated point values, representing the density of
defending lights in their dot positions. Non-military ships, DDs or
DEs have 1 point each. CL or larger ships have 2 points each.
Radar guided searchlights are worth double points.
Back-Lighting Clouds: Searchlight points may be used to
back-light broken and overcast clouds instead of seeking A/C.
This is declared at the start of a scenario or naval attack. At least
5 points of lights must be dedicated to back-lighting in each dot.
Excess light points used have no additional effect.
Lighting Up A/C: Each A/C or gaggle entering a dot with
searchlights must immediately make an attrition roll using the
searchlight strength as + modifier and NF cloud density as a –
modifier. The result is the no. of A/C "lit up" (caught in beams).
Randomly determine which in a gaggle. Double the search light
modifier if radar guided seachlights (designated in scenarios).
Illuminated or silhouetted A/C (as seen by the light crews) can
be automatically lit up without rolling dice. Lit up A/C are are
subject to movement phase intercepts and harassing AAA fire.
Searchlight Limits: Searchlights can reach into but not
through altitude bands affected by overcast weather. They may
not light up A/C or back-light clouds above the MH band. If lit up,
A/C at level 2.0 or higher with Op-MPs remaining may immedi-
ately attempt to evade the lights, before AAA or intercepts are
resolved, by expending one Op-MP in place and losing a D5 in
levels representing evasive maneuvers. If the remaining height
is less than the D5 of altitude loss rolled for, the evasion fails
and the A/C is placed at level 1.0. Otherwise, roll a D10. Even
= lights evaded, odd = not. If an evasion fails and Op-MPs and
altitude remain, further evasions may be attempted. A successful
evasion cancels the "lit up" status of the A/C.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
32.2 –– NIGHT TAC-SCALE ADDITIONS
First Sight Rolls: Rather than sighting, this roll represents
first "detection". NBs in a random encounter with NFs, and in-
tercepted A/C automatically lose first detection and become the
TMG defender. Random encounters between opposing NBs or
opposing NFs use normal first sight roll procedure.
Searchlights (SL): If SLs are in encounter OMT dot, roll a
D10 at start of each Tac-turn for each A/C on TMG. A roll ≤ 3 =
A/C lit up for the turn (–1 if SL strength in dot > 10, –4 if A/C lit
up previous turn and did not evade). A/C entering play lit up from
the Op-scale automatically begin Tac-scale play lit up. If any A/C
in the X box are lit up, all A/C ending in the X box are lit up.
Evading Lights: Lit up A/C may do evasive maneuvers (cork-
screw or similar). If so, roll two D10s. The sum of the rolls x 100
is the altitude lost in the maneuvers. For attackers, evasion is in
lieu of a normal move (drift still applies). End speed and attitude
will be max attainable level and level flight. Evasive maneuvers
nullify the following turn's –4 SL modifier for being previously lit
up and shift attacker positions one space (see TMG).
GCI & Target Illumination Effects: If defender was illu-
minated or if interceptor was assisted by GCI, the TMG set up
arc is rolled for normally, but the set up band always = D band.
Any attacker using a spot light or turbine light to achieve an
intercept or target track is itself illuminated or detected.
NF Interceptor Sensor Effects: If GCI or illumination does
not apply, the set up band is determined by the Night Sensor
Tracking Range Table (TMG Tables). Cross index the longest
ranged sensor used with the moonlight condition. The indicated
band is the sensor's max tracking range and NF's set up band.
In later turns, sensors other than eyes are not usable if a NF
ends in steep or vertical flight, or is > 1,000 feet higher or lower
per range band away.
Flight Path Drift: At night relative motion is more difficult to
control. Attackers still move by the normal Rules, but flight path
drift distance is D5 – 1 (drifts of 0 to 4) each turn. If the target is
illuminated, or once the attacker has established target tracking,
flight path drift returns to the normal day rate.
Visual Sighting: Visual sighting ranges in TMG bands to
A/C vary with the moon light level and number of engines they
have (see Night Sensor Tracking Range Table). Whether attacker
or defender, once in visual range to the other, roll for sighting
in Defender's Sighting Phase. Illuminated A/C may be visually
sighted in any band. Successful rolls indicate visual tracking
accomplished, which lasts until the sighter ends a turn out of
visual range. Multi-crew NBs use the normal eyes line and NFs
use their pilot's eye quality for visual sighting ranges.
Tail Warning Radars (TWRs): Defenders with TWRs can
detect attackers ending a TMG move in their rear arc (sectors 8
to 10) on a D10 roll ≥ 3, 6, or 9, if in bands A, B & C respectively.
Target Tracking: At end of Defender's Sighting Phase deter-
mine if target tracking by NF sensors can be established. Target
tracking occurs if within max tracking range, and:
• Visual Tracking: Upon attaining visual contact with target.
• Spot or Turbine Light Tracking: on defender's 6:00 line.
• IR Scanner Tracking: On defender's 6:00 line & in range.
• A.I. Radar Tracking: On defender's 6:00 line or in rear arc
to either side of 6:00 Line at any range.
 Fighting Wings
Initiating Combat Scale Play: The defender may initiate
combat upon detecting an attacker. Attackers may not initiate
combat on arrival turn. Attackers may initiate combat after target
tracking is established on any turn after arrival turn.
Escape Die Rolls: Add +2 to defender's roll at night.
Combat Scale Set Up: As for day time except use the night
set up ranges (see Tactical Scale Tables).
32.3 –– NIGHT COMBAT SCALE ADDITIONS
Designer's Note: Night visual ranges could vary depending
on moonlight, weather and other conditions. A/C might appear
and disappear in seconds, visible only as passing shadows, dark
silhouettes or simply points of bright blue exhaust flames from
their engines. The Rules below reflect these considerations.
Night Visual Ranges: At start of play and in initiative phase
of every 5th game turn determine the maximum visual range to
A/C on the map by rolling D5s as directed below. Visual sight-
ing is automatic if within range and not in the sighter's blind arc.
Visual sighting is lost if A/C end a game turn outside visual range.
Maximum visual sighting ranges to target A/C are:
Light Condition Max Visual Range in Hexes
• Full Moon = (4 x D5) + Twice A/C engines
• Partial Moon = (2 x D5) + A/C engines
• No Moon = (1 x D5) + 1/2 A/C eng. (round down)
• Illuminated = Unlimited.
Note: Double engine value if engine exhausts not shrouded
(see scenarios). All "N" class A/C have shrouded exhausts.
Air-to-Surface Visual Ranges: Unless specified otherwise
in scenarios, ground units are visible only if illuminated. A ground
unit in flare light, on fire, which fired AAA the turn prior, or which
is an active searchlight is considered illuminated.
Air-Naval Visual Ranges: Due to their large size and lumi-
nescent wakes, ships are visible as follows:
Full Moon: If moving or anchored, ships of any size are vis-
ible at any range if not under broken or overcast clouds.
Partial Moon: Anchored ships are visible to A/C within 5
times the ship's counter size in range. Moving ships are
visible to A/C within 10 x ship's counter size in range.
No Moon: "No moon" is in effect under broken or overcast
clouds regardless of actual moonlight. Anchored ships not
visible. Moving ships visible to A/C within 5 x ship's counter
size in range. All may be "localized" by air-to-surface radar.
Illumination: Ships in flare light, on fire, firing guns, or using
searchlights, are illuminated and visible at any range.
Hidden Ships: In scenarios where ships begin unsighted,
they are not placed on the map until self-illuminated, under flares,
or seen by A/C. If so, place them in their actual map position.
While hidden, their movement is tracked on paper.
Radar "Localized" Ships: Night scenarios may start with
ships "localized" (only approximate position is known) by radar
equipped A/C. The ship player places a marker anywhere within
five hexes of a ship's bow's true position (including its actual po-
sition). This is the A/C's "radar estimated position" which never
moves. The actual ship is hidden until its position is revealed, at
which time the ship is placed in its true position.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
71
Ground-to-Air Sighting: Ground units and ships automati-
cally sight A/C once the A/C ends a move within air-to-air visual
range to the ground unit or ship.
32.3.1 –– CBT. SCALE NIGHT VISIBILITY FACTORS
Illumination Flares: Flares reveal all ground units, ships and
A/C at, or below the flare's altitude within a range of 10 hexes to
the flare's position. Flares back light both the upper and lower
surfaces of the first cloud deck or layer, above and below the
flare, within 30 hexes and 9,000 feet of the flare, whether the
flare is above or below the surfaces. If immersed in a deck or
layer only the upper and lower surface of that one deck or layer
will be back lit. Once ignited, an illumination flare descends at
100 feet per turn by parachute and lasts 15 game turns or until
it reaches the ground, whichever occurs first.
A/C Flares: A/C with illumination flares may drop one per
turn, in any hex or hexside of their move as long as the A/C does
not do any maneuvers that would prevent gun reloading (Rule
10.6). Flares ignite at the start of the next game turn. The fall
distance prior to igniting is a D5 in 100 foot increments.
Ground & Ship Flares: As designated in scenarios, ground
units and warships may launch illumination flares. Announce a
direction of launch (facing) and roll two D10 for random horizontal
range. Next, roll two D10 and add 10 for ignition height in 100
foot increments. The flares ignite at the start of the next turn in
the location and at the height determined by the die rolls.
Air-to-Surface Radar: A/C surface search radars function
for long range detection of ships at sea and for locating large
ground targets like cities, which can then be bombed at night or
through clouds. At the combat scale of play, search radars are
useless against individual ground targets, but can be used to
localize unsighted (hidden) ships on the water.
Searchlights (SL): SL counters represent a single light and
crew. Non-warships ≥ 500 tons and DD or smaller warships
each have one SL. Larger warships have two SLs. All SLs have
a 360° arc coverage. Unlit SLs may be switched "ON" in the
combat phase (see Rule 8.3). Once "on" they stay lit for at least
3 full game turns, and a D10 roll ≤ 5 is required to switch them
off after that (place a "searchlight on" marker near the SL as a
reminder). A lit SL may attempt to capture and track one A/C in
any game turn in which it did not switch on or off as follows:
SL Capture Procedure: Place the SL's beam marker next to
the target A/C In the combat phase and roll a D10. If the modi-
fied roll is ≤ 2 the A/C is captured (flip the beam marker over),
otherwise it is not. The following modifiers apply:
• +1 if range to A/C is > 30, and +1 if A/C speed > 5.0.
• –1 per capture attempt after first of same A/C by SL.
• ± the A/C's size modifier. –2 if SL is radar assisted.
An A/C revealed by flare light, or which is on fire, silhouetted
by backlit clouds, or illuminated by other SLs at the start of the
combat phase, may be automatically capture by new SL beams
(no die roll required).
Capture Duration: Once a beam has captured an A/C it will
track and follow the captured A/C until the light is knocked out,
switched off, the A/C flies out of its coverage (into clouds for
example), the A/C is destroyed, the SL crew voluntarily drops
the A/C to seek another, or the A/C eludes the light beam.
 72
Eluding SL Capture: If a captured A/C uses HT+ rates in its
move, or an end speed of > 5.0, it may roll a D10 in the combat
phase. If modified result is ≤ 1 + sum of HT+ rate pitch and fac-
ing changes made, all searchlight beams currently tracking it are
eluded. The following modifiers apply:
• +1 for each SL more than one currently tracking the A/C.
• –1 if the A/C's speed is > 6.0.
• –1 if the total range from closest SL is >30.
SL Vulnerability: Land based SLs can be eliminated or
knocked out (if heavily damaged) by normal air-to-ground at-
tacks. Land based SLs Defense Factor = 10 and a Hit Capacity
= 6. Ship mounted searchlights are treated as light AAA batter-
ies for elimination. Deck strafing can be concentrated against a
searchlight by declaring it. In this case, the light is the first battery
eliminated if any AAA is eliminated.
32.3.2 –– COMBAT SCALE SPECIAL NIGHT RULES
Surprise Attacks: If a target A/C is bounced (Rule 14.6),
it sets up wings level, in level flight, at last TMG speed. It may
only fly straight ahead and may not fire any guns until one of the
following triggers occurs, after which, it may fly and fight freely:
Surprised A/C Triggers:
1. The defender is fired on by the interceptor.
2. The attacker is illuminated or sighted as given below.
3. A TWR or defensive FCR detects the attacker.
Attacker Sighting: The attacker must be within visual range
and not in defender's blind area. At the end of each game turn,
defender rolls two D10s if attacker silhouetted, or two D5s if
not, and sums the result. If sum > range to attacker, it is visually
sighted. Normal sighting Rules apply for rest of combat. Defensive
guns may return fire against unsighted attackers, but only after
the attacker's shot is resolved.
"Window": Window may not be deployed once combat is
initiated (the NB crew is focused on self defense instead).
Night Training Levels: M class, H class, and (N) type A/C
pilots are fully trained in night flying. Non (N) type F, L, and MF
A/C pilots have limited night training. Recruit pilots of any A/C
class have no night training. Pilots exceeding their night training
maneuver
limits (given below) risk disorientation:
Training Night Maneuver Limits
• Full: Up to steep attitudes, ≤ HT turns & transitions.
• Limited: Up to shallow attitudes, ≤ TT turns & transitions.
• None: Up to shallow attitudes, EZ turns & transitions.
(+20 to disorientation rolls).
Disorientation Risk: A/C which transition to vertical or
inverted attitudes, were inverted at any time, used BT+ rates,
started skids with facing changes, or which violate their training
level maneuver limits must roll percentile dice at the end of the
movement phase. If result is ≥ 51% the pilot is disoriented until
a re-orientation roll is made (% roll ≤ 40, unless in clouds, then
≤ 20). Add primary Pilot's Stall / Spin modifiers, and –10 if multi-
piloted to all orientation rolls.
Instrument Loss: A/C with no flight instruments risk disori-
entation if in clouds or no moonlight conditions and must add
+50 to all orientation rolls (NA if in formation with friendly A/C).
Night Stall / Spin Rolls: A +30 mod. applies to all stall into
spin and spin recovery checks.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
Low Level Flight Hazard: If A/C end a move at an altitude
of ≤ 200 feet above terrain, roll percentile dice. On a modified
result ≥ 98, the A/C crashes due to misjudging height, killing the
crew. Add the following modifiers to the roll:
• +2 for each 30° facing or pitch change > 1 done in its move.
• +2 for each full FP of speed > 4.0
• +5 each if only one pilot or if no moonlight exists.
• –5 each if equipped with a radar altimeter, or pilot is veteran.
• –5 if in the illumination area of a flare, or in full moonlight
"Disengage in Three Option": A/C may automatically dis-
engage if they end three night game turns in a row, out of visual
or NF sensor tracking parameters of all enemy A/C.
  Night Plotted Moves: If both sides have A/C in play, and
one or both sides have A/C not visually sighted or sensor tracked
(hidden), they must pre-plot these A/C moves on paper and reveal
them after all sighted or tracked A/C have moved.
AAA Fire: AAA is divided into three fire types: blind, visual
and radar aimed. Fire types may engage the same targets with
different shots. Visual fire is allowed against silhouetted, sighted
or illuminated targets but with night modifiers. Radar aimed fire
is allowed normally. Blind fire is allowed against hidden A/C but
limited to one fire order, two guns or naval batteries per shot
32.4 –– NIGHT FIGHTING A/C EQUIPMENT
NF Radars: NFs equipped with radars can track an unsighted
target if all the following criteria are met:
1. It is in the radar's horizontal and vertical tracking arc.
2. It is in the radar's tracking range.
3. The NF used TT or less rates, did not do any skids
with a facing change, is not inverted or disoriented.
NF Radars: NF radars have a max and min range listed on
the A/C's ADC. Targets inside min range or beyond max range
may not be tracked. A radar's horizontal tracking arc is defined
in terms of deflection arcs. Its max vertical tracking arc above or
below the NF is defined in terms of level, shallow or steep, and
uses the further limit parameters in both directions as defined
for fixed guns on the Fixed Gun Field-of-Fire Table. Only one
target at a time, the nearest, may be tracked by an NF's radar.
Tail Warning Radars (TWR): A TWR has a detection range
of 02 to 30 hexes. It's coverage is the A/C's 04 to 08 clock lines
and double the vertical parameters listed for fixed guns on the
Fixed Gun Deflection Determination Play Aid (use the reverse
nose pitch angle as the TWR is pointed aft). If an enemy A/C
ends a turn in a TWR's detection area, roll three D10s. If the sum
is ≥ the range to the enemy A/C, it is detected.
Radar Aimed Defensive Guns: Some A/C have defensive
guns with fire control radars (FCR). An FCR's max range is 20
hexes and has the same arcs of coverage as the gun itself. If an
A/C ends a move in the FCR's tracking arc, roll two D10. If the
result is ≥ the range to that A/C, it is detected and may be fired
on normally by the FCR aimed guns, even if unseen.
IR Scanners: These have the same field-of-view (FOV) as
a fixed gun's field-of-fire. A target in an IR scanner's FOV may
be seen and tracked out to a range of six hexes. However, an IR
scanner may not be used if the A/C used greater than TT rates,
is inverted, or the pilot is disoriented.
Radar Homers: These have no effect at the combat scale.
 Fighting Wings
YOU MAY NOW PLAY ANY SCENARIO
FIGHTING WINGS RULES INDEX
SUBJECT TITLE RULE PAGE
A Changing A/C Altitude 6.0 15
A/C Ceilings 6.3 17
A/C Configuration Changes, Gear & Flaps 16.3.1 47
A/C Damage 11.0 28
A/C Data Card Format 2.1 5
A/C Firepower 9.1 23
A/C Flight Attitudes 6.0 15
A/C Flight, Random 5.7.1 14
A/C Formations 8.5 21
A/C Loads 12.0 30
A/C Movement 3.5 7
A/C Placement Phase, Tactical Scale Play 14.3 33
A/C Speed Differences, Tactical Scale Play 14.4.2 34
A/C Turn Chart, Usage 5.2 12
A/C Transitions & Movement 6.1 15
Anti-Aircraft Artillery (AAA) 24.0 57
AAA Attacks, Operational Scale Play 15.4.3 40
AAA Basics & Facing, Combat Scale Play 24.1 57
Aborting A/C Fate 15.3 38
Ace Characteristics 13.4 31
Accel Points 4.1 8
Accel Effect on Speed 4.3 9
Aerobatics 7.0 18
Agility Class 8.1 19
Aiming, Air-to-Ground 18.2 50
Aiming at Ships 27.0 61
Air-Naval Op-Scale Additions 30.1 65
Air-Naval Tactical Procedure 30.2 66
Air-to-Air Gun Combat 9.0 22
Air-to-Ground Combat 18.0 50
Air-to-Ground Rocket Attacks 19.3 52
Air-to-Surface Attacks, Operational Scale Play 15.10 44
Altitude Change Basics 6.1.3 16
Altitude Change, Mandatory (MC), Optional (OC), by VFP 6.1.3 16
Altitude Structure 3.1.1 6
Ammo Usage 10.1 24
Angles-of-Bank 5.1 12
Armored Ships 28.1 62
Attacker's Movement Phase, Tactical Scale Play 14.4 33
Attrition, Take-Off, Operational Scale Play 15.3 38
Attrition, Landing, Operational Scale Play 15.12 45
B Decel, Transition 4.2 9
Back Up Oxygen 11.3 29
Bailing Out, Bailout Limits 13.5 32
Barrage Balloons 16.4 47
Beam Attacks 10.2 25
Benefits, of being in Formation 8.5 22
Big Guns (37mm+) 10.4 26
Black Outs 5.7 14
Blast Zones 20.8 54
Blind Arcs, A/C Sighting 8.1.2 20
Blind Spots, Defensive Gunfire 10.5 27
Bomb Bay Effects on Loads 12.0 30
Bomb Fusing, Fuses 20.6 54
Bombing Basics 20.1 52
Bombing, Level, Glide, Steep Dive, Vertical Dive Methods 20.0 52
Bombing, Air-to-Air 20.7 54
Bombs, Scattering 20.1 53
Breaking Off from Air Combat 8.4 21
Breaking Off to the TMG 14.10 37
Bursts, Half and Long 10.1 24
B-Zones, Heavy AAA 24.3.1 58
C Diving Accel 4.1 8
Campaigns & Pilot Improvement 13.4 31
CAP, Point Defense 15.11 45
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
73
Carry, Accel & Decel 4.3 9
Carry, Aiming 18.2 50
Carry, Half FPs 3.5 7
Carry, Rolling 5.1 12
Carry, Turning 5.2 12
Changing A/C Facing by Turning 5.2 12
Changing A/C Speed 4.0 8
Climbs, Shallow, Steep & Vertical 6.2 17
Clouds, Combat Scale Play 16.2 46
Cockpit View Effects 8.1.2 20
Codes, A/C Agility Class 8.1 19
Codes, Altitude Bands 3.1.1 6
Codes, Angles-of-Bank 5.1 12
Codes, FATT Entries 6.1 16
Codes, Flight Attitudes 6.0 15
Codes, Fixed and Defensive Guns 2.1 5
Codes, Naval Vessels 26.0 60
Collateral Damage 18.3 50
Collisions, A/C 3.3 7
Collisions, Head-On 10.3 25
Collisions, Range "0" 10.2 24
Collision Risk Range (CRR) 10.3 26
Collisions, Ship 26.4 61
Combat Phase, Combat Scale Play 8.3 20
Combat Scale Play 8.0 19
Combat Scale Weather 16.2 46
Compressibility 4.7 11
Concentrated Fire Bonus, Nose Guns 10.2 24
Contrails 15.2 38
Counter Positions 3.1 5
Counter Stacking Limits 3.2 7
Crack Shot Characteristics 13.4 31
Crew Quality 13.0 30
Critical Hits, A/C 11.2 28
Critical Hits, Ships 28.2 62
Critical Hit Ratings, Tables, Use Of 11.2 28
Cruise Power 4.1 8
Cumulative Damage Effects 11.1 28
D
Damage Factors, A/C 11.0 28
Damaging Ships 28.0 62
Danger Zones (DZ) 10.3 26
Dangerous Dives 4.7 11
Decel, Climbing 4.2 9
Decel, Excess Speed 4.2 9
Decel, Transition Credit 6.1.4 17
Decel, Turning 4.2 9
Decel, Turning at High Speeds 5.5.1 14
Decel Points 4.2 9
Decel Effect on Speed 4.3 9
Deck Strafing 19.4 52
Defender's Intercept Phase, Tactical Scale Play 14.5 34
Defender's Response Phase, Tactical Scale Play 14.6.1 35
Defender's Sighting Phase, Tactical Scale Play 14.6 34
Defensive Gun Attacks 10.5 26
Defensive Gun Fields-of-Fire 10.5 26
Deflection Arcs 9.3 23
Deflection Shooting 9.3 23
Deliberate Encounters, Operational Scale Play 15.7 42
Direct Hit Results, Damaging ships 28.1 62
Disorientation, Turn Stall 4.6 11
Disorientation, in Clouds 16.2 46
Disorientation, at Night 32.3.2 72
Dive Brake Decel 4.2 9
Dives, Shallow, Steep & Vertical 6.2 17
Drop Tanks 12.0 30
E
Elevator Damage, A/C 11.3 30
 74
Emergency Power 4.1 8
Endurance, Fuel Use 15.4.2 40
Engine Accel 4.1 8
Engine Loss, Power Loss 11.3 29
Engine Shutdowns 11.3 29
En route Join Ups & Events Phase, Operational Scale Play 15.5 40
Erratic Running Torpedoes 22.0 55
Excess Firepower 9.4 23
Excess Speed Decel 4.2 9
Explosions, of A/C 11.3 30
Explosive Cargo, Ships 28.3 63
F Landings, Normal & Forced, Operational Scale 15.12 45
Facing Changes, A/C, by Turning 5.2 12
Facing Changes, A/C, Transition Induced 6.6 18
Facing Changes, A/C, Vertical Rolling 5.3 13
Facing Changes, Ships 26.3 61
FATT (Flight Attitude Transition Tables) 6.1 15
Feathering Propellers 11.3 29
Fields-of-Fire, AAA Guns 24.1 57
Fields-of-Fire, Fixed Guns 9.2 23
Fields-of-Fire, Defensive Guns 10.5 26
Fields-of-Fire, Naval AAA 25.2 59
Firepower, Excess 9.4 23
Fires, Spitfires & Hurricanes, Special Rule 17.1 48
First Sight Determination, Tactical Scale Play 14.2 33
Flaps & Slats, Combined Effects 5.8.1 15
Flight Attitudes 6.0 15
Flight Attitude Transition Tables, Use of 6.1 15
Forced Idle Power 4.3.1 9
Formations, Leaders 8.5 21
Formations, Fixed & Flexible Parameters 8.5 21
Formations, Scattering 14.7 36
Formations, Staying Engaged With 14.9 37
Four-Engine A/C Damage, Special Rules 17.2 48
Fractional Values Table 3.5.1, 6.1.2 7, 16
Fuel Injected Engines 4.3.1 9
Fuel Use & Endurance, Operational Scale Play 15.4.2 40
G Loops, Aerobatics 7.0 18
Game Components 1.5 4
Game Concept 1.1 4
Game Scales, Combat, Operational, Tactical 1.3 4
Game Turn, Explanation 1.4 4
GCI Intercepts 32.1 69
Gifted Flyer Characteristics 13.3 31
Glide Bombing 20.3 53
Glider Flight & Notes 17.6 49
GLOC, Effects of 5.7 14
Ground Attack Basics, Aiming, etc. 18.2 50
Ground Unit Counters 18.1 50
Gun Jamming 10.1 24
Gunfire Arcs & NG Turns 5.9 15
H Moving Naval Units 26.3 60
Half Flight Points 3.5 7
Hammerhead, Aerobatics 7.0 18
Hard Targets, Hard Point Targets 18.2 50
Head-On Attacks 10.3 25
Heavy AAA 24.3 57
Heavy AAA Fire Order (FO), Barrage Zone (BZ) 24.3.1 58
Hero Characteristics 13.3 31
Horizontal Flight Points (HFPs) 3.5 7
I Negative-G Turning 5.9 15
Idle Power 4.1 8
Immelmann, Aerobatics 7.0 18
Initiative, Phase & Die Rolls 8.1 19
Initiating Combat, Attacker, Tactical Scale Play 14.4 33
Initiating Combat, Defender, Tactical Scale Play 14.6.1 35
Intercept & Combat Phase, Operational Scale Play 15.8 43
Intercept & Attack Time Lines 15.9 43
Intercept Techniques, Night Fighting 32.1 69
Inverted Level Turning, Inverted Turning & Transitions 5.5 14
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
CLASH OF ARMS!
J
Japanese Kamikazes 23.1 56
Jettison of Loads, Drop Tanks 12.0 30
K
Kamikazes 23.1 56
Keen Eyes 13.3 31
Komet, Me 163 Special Rules 17.3 49
L
Landings, Combat Scale Play 16.3 46
Landing Group (LDG) 15.12 45
Large Cannon (75mm+) Strafing 19.2 51
Learning the Game System 1.2 4
Level Flight 3.6 8
Lift-Vector Mismatch (LVMM) 10.2 25
Likelihood (LH) Events 1.6 5
Limits, Aiming, Air-to-Ground 18.2 50
Limits, Available Power 4.3.1 9
Limits, Bailing Out 13.5 32
Limits, Breaking off from Combat 8.4 21
Limits, Facing Reversals 6.4.1 17
Limits, Formations 8.5 21
Limits, Hammerhead, Aerobatics 7.0 18
Limits, Head-On Attacks 10.3 25
Limits, Inexperienced Pilots 13.1 30
Limits, Intercepts, Operational Scale Play 15.7 42
Limits, Jet Engine Throttle 4.3.1 9
Limits, Load Points 12.0 30
Limits, Max Attainable Speed 4.3.1 10
Limits, Movement 8.2 20
Limits, NG Turns & Combat 5.9 15
Limits, Slips & Skids 5.4 13
Limits, Speed & Power 4.3.1 9
Limits, Turning & Transitions 6.1.4 17
Limits, Weapon Stations 12.0 30
Lines of Approach (LOA) 18.2 50
Loss of Control, Compressibility 4.7 11
Low Level Flight & Obstacles 16.1 46
M
M.G. Sighting Bursts for Cannons 10.2.1 25
Making New Ship Data Cards 31.0 66
Mandatory Altitude Changes (MC) 6.1.3 16
Max Listed Speeds 4.3.1 9
Max Speed Effects 4.4 10
Min Speed Effects 4.4 10
Min Adjusted Speeds 4.3.1 10
Moonlight Levels 32.1.1 69
Movement Phase, Combat Scale Play 8.2 20
Movement and Search Phase, Operational Scale Play 15.4 39
Multiple TMG Attacker Limits 14.4.1 34
N
Naval A/C Operations 29.0 64
Naval AAA Basics 25.1 59
Naval AAA Fields-of-Fire 25.2 59
Naval Unit Damage 28.1 62
Near Miss Results, Damaging Ships 28.1 62
Negative-G Transitions & Effects 6.5 18
Night Fighting 32.0 68
Night Combat Scale Additions 32.3 70
Night Op-Scale Additions 32.1 68
Night Tac-Scale Additions 32.2 71
Non-F.I. Engines 4.3.1 9
Nose Gun, Concentrated Fire Bonus 10.2 24
O
Oblique Mounted Guns 10.2 25
Obstacles, Low Level Flight 16.1 46
 Fighting Wings
Odd Engine Configurations (Do 335, P-39, P-63 etc.) 17.4 49
OMT Dots 15.4 39
OMT Movement 15.4.1 39
Operational Scale Play 15.0 37
Op-Scale Carrier Operations 29.1 64
Optional Altitude Changes (OC) 6.1.3 16
Optional Vertical Reversals 6.4 17
Overstressing A/C 5.6 14
Oxygen Loss 11.3 29
P Slatted Wing Effects 5.8 14
Penetrating Ship's Armor 28.1 62
Pilot & Crew Generation Tables 13.2 31
Pilot Characteristics & Effects 13.3 31
Pilot Improvement 13.4 31
Pitch Attitudes 3.4 7
Post Combat Placement, Combat Scale Play to OMT 14.7.1 36
Post Attack Fate, Ships 28.4 63
Power, Idle, Cruise, Military, Emergency 4.1 8
Procedures, Air-Naval Tactical 30.2 66
Procedures, Bailing Out 13.5 31
Procedures, Basic A/C Flight 6.1 16
Procedures, Hammerhead, Aerobatics 7.0 18
Procedures, M.G. Sighting Bursts 10.2.1 25
Procedures, Rolling 5.1 12
Procedures, Stalled Flight, Spinning Flight 4.5 10
Procedures, Turn Stalls 4.6 10
R Tailing Enemy A/C 8.1.1 19
Radio Loss 11.3 30
Random A/C Flight 5.7.1 14
Random Events, Operational Scale Play 15.5.2 41
Randomness Checks 1.6 5
Range Between Counters 3.1.2 6
Range Doubling, Strafing 19.1 51
Range "0" Attacks 10.2 24
Reading A/C Data Cards 2.0 5
Rechargeable Guns (unjamming) 10.1 24
Red Outs 5.7 14
Regrouping / Landing / Servicing Phase, Op-Scale Play 15.12 45
Relative Altitudes, Tactical Scale Play 14.1 32
Release Points, Air-to-Ground 18.2 50
Reloading A/C Guns 10.6 27
Reloading Heavy AAA (Rates of Fire, ROF) 24.3 58
Repairs, Temporary Ship 28.5 63
Rescue, Post Bailout Fate 13.5 32
Resolving AAA Attacks, Lt. & Med. Guns 24.2 57
Resolving Air-to-Air Attacks, Guns 9.4 23
Resolving Events of Chance (Die Rolls) 1.6 4
Restrictions, Air-to-Ground Attacks 18.2 50
Restrictions, Defensive Fire 10.5 27
Restrictions, Tailing 8.1.1 19
Restrictions, Turning and Vertical Flight 5.3 13
Reversal Effects on Roll Carry & Bank Angle 6.4.1 18
Reversal of A/C Facings, Mandatory 6.4 17
Reversal of A/C Facings, Optional 6.4 17
Right of Combat Refusal, Operational Scale 15.8 43
Right of Combat Refusal, Tactical Scale 14.6.1 35
Rockets, Air-to-Ground 19.3, 19.4 52
Rudder Response Rule 26.3 60
Russian "Taran" Attacks 23.2 56
S Window Effects 32.1 69
Same Hex Attacks 10.2 24
Searching for Targets, Operational Scale 15.4.4 40
Searchlights, Op-scale 32.1.2 69
Searchlights, Tac-scale 32.2 70
Searchlights, Combat scale, Evading searchlights 32.3.1 71, 72
Sequence of Play, Combat Scale 8.0 19
Sequence of Play, Operational Scale 15.1.1 38
Sequence of Play, Tactical Scale 14.0 32
Sensor Effects, Night Fighting 32.2 70
Setting Up Combat, from Tactical Scale Play 14.7 35
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
75
Setting Up Operational Scale Play 15.1 37
Setting Up Tactical Scale Play 14.3 33
Severe Damage Effects 11.1 28
Ship Armor Effects Table 28.1 62
Ship Handling, Naval Operations 26.0 60
Side Slips & Skids 5.4 13
Significantly Damaged A/C 15.12 45
Simplified A/C Flight Rules 16.5 48
Skip Bomb Attacks 21.1 54
Snap Rolls, Aerobatics 7.0 18
Snap Shots, Air-to-Air 10.1 24
Soft Targets, Explanation 18.2 50
Special Damage Considerations 11.3 29
Speed Effects, Max & Min 4.4 10
Spit-ess, Aerobatics 7.0 18
Stacking Ships 26.2 60
Stalls & Spins 4.5 10
Staying Engaged with Enemy Formations 14.9 37
Strafing with Guns 19.1 51
Strafing Ships, Deck Strafing 19.4 52
Swept Wings & Compressibility 17.3 49
Systems Loss 11.3 30
T
Tactical Maneuvering Grid (TMG) 14.0 32
Tactical Scale Play 14.0 32
Tailing & Initiative 8.1.1 19
Take Off Attrition, Take Off Groups (TOG) 15.3 38
Take Offs, Combat Scale 16.3 46
Take Off & Join Up Phase, Operational Scale 15.3 38
Taran Attack Parameters, Russian Taran Attacks 23.2 56
Time-of-Intercept (TOI) 15.9 43
Torpedo Bombing 22.0 55
Tracking Shots, Air-to-Air 10.1 24
Transitions & Movement 6.1 15
Transition Induced Facing Changes 6.6 18
Turn Modes, Ships 26.3 60
Turning Decel 4.2 9
Turning Decel at High Speeds 5.5.1 14
Turning, Inverted Level 5.5 14
Turning, Negative G (NG) 5.9 15
Turning Stalls 4.6 10
Turning with Gravity while Inverted 5.5 14
Turns in Steep & Vertical Attitudes 5.5 14
Turns and Loss of Consciousness 5.7 14
U
Unintentional Encounters, Operational Scale Play 15.6 42
Unbalanced Wing Guns 10.2 24
V
Vertical Flight & Blind Arcs 8.1.2 20
Vertical Flight & Facing Changes 5.3 13
Vertical Flight Points (VFPs) 6.1.3 16
Vertical Rolls & Facing Changes 5.3 13
Victory Points, A/C Scenario Book
Victory Points, Ships 31.7 68
Visual Ranges, Night, Combat Scale 32.3 71
W
Weather Change Phase, Operational Scale 15.2 38
Wing Flap Effects 5.8.1 15
Wing Gun Harmony 10.2 24
Wing Guns as Nose Guns (Fw 190, etc.) 10.2 24
Wingover, Aerobatics 7.0 18
X
X Agility Class 8.1 19
Z
Zero Deflection Attacks 10.2 25
Zero Range Attacks 10.2 24
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
 Fighting Wings - Ship Damage Record Grids & Move Log
Ship:
GT Orders & Progress Bow End Hex Facing GT Orders Progress Bow End Hex Facing
1 11
2 12
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20

Critical Hit Record & Damage Notes:

(Mark off hits below)

100 200 300

400 500 600

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
 80 CLASH OF ARMS!

COUNTER UNIT IDENTIFICATION TABLE Terrain Effects Chart

The following are samples of counters that may be in various Map Terrain All Fire Rocket Gun
Fighting Wings games. Not every kind will be in each game. Sample Type Bombs Wpns. shots Strafe
Counter Counter Type
Front Back
Open +00 +00 +00 +00
Fighter Aircraft. Front de-
Clear
picts top view and ID no.
Back side has generic A/C

or severe damage indicator.
Turnip Field +00 +00 +00 +00
Wheat Field
Bomber Aircraft. Front
depicts top view and ID no.
Back side has generic A/C
or severe damage indicator. Plowed Field +00 +00 +00 +00

AAA Gun. Combat & Op.

scale counters. Upper right Woods +20 +10 +20 +20
no. is eff. range for combat (+30 mod. to forced landings)
scale. Other nos. as below.

Orchard +10 +00 +10 +10

Hard Targets. Underlined
left no. is defense strength,
right is damage capacity.
Bunkers are always hard. Rough +10 +00 +10 +10
or Brush (+15 mod. to forced landings)
Mech Inf Soft Targets. Left no. is
defense strength, right no.
is damage capacity. Swamp +30 +30 +20 +10
10 3
(+15 mod. to forced landings)

Armored Vehicle Target.

As hard target. Damage fac- All Water +00 1/2 str. +00 +00
tor is circled or bold to denote
hits are not cumulative.
Partial +00 +10 +00 +00
Naval Unit. One, two or three Water
hexes in size. Back side has
generic ship symbol on it.
Wooden +00 +00 +00 +10
Housing (S) (+30 mod. to forced landings)
Information Marker.
Two sided markers
used to indicate aircraft Stor. Sheds & +00 +00 +00 +00
status such as smoke Wk. Shops (S) (forced ldg. = fatal crash)
or fire.
OMT Formation or Fleet
Large Brick +10 +00 +10 +10
Marker. Used to track air-
Bldgs. (S) (infantry entrenched)
craft and ships on OMT.
Note: forced ldg. = fatal crash in any bldg. hex*

OMT Markers. Large Stone +10 +00 +10 +30

Markers denoting borders, Bldgs. (H)* (infantry entrenched)
airfields and other locations.

Concrete & +10 +00 +10 +30

Weather Markers. Used on Steel Bldgs. (H)* (infantry entrenched)
OMT. Back side indicates
inclement weather in effect.
Maj. Concrete +10 +00 +10 +30
Buildings (H)* (infantry entrenched)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
 FW – OPERATIONAL MISSION TRACK - PAGE 1
HOME BASE EN ROUTE ZONE-1 EN ROUTE

43,000+ UH Clear Scatt. Brkn. Hi-Ovc. Lo-Ovc. VL-incl. Clear Scatt. Brkn.

42,900
37,000
EH

36,900
31,000
VH

30,900 HI
25,000

24,900
19,000
MH

18,900
13,000
ML

12,900
7,000
LO
6,900
400 VL 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

≤ 300
(+2 end.) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
HOME BASE
WEATHER > Clear Scatt. Brkn. Hi-Ovc. Lo-Ovc. VL-incl.

OMT Movement Rules SUMMARY (15.4.1)
OP-MPs: One Op-MP is given per FP of speed available to slowest A/C
in a formation. Choose from the following speeds each turn:
Take-Off: Climb speed if climb multiple > 1, else use cruise speeds.
Endurance Speed: From adjusted minimum speed to 1/2 of max
attainable speed. If adjusted min speed is greater, end. speed NA.
Climb Speed: Adjusted min. to listed min. speed +1.5, but not > max
attainable level speed. Climb speed uses fuel at Dash speed rate.
Fighter Cruise (F & MF) Speed: Any speed greater than highest avail-
able endurance speed up to:
• max. attainable level speed –1.0 if in the HI or higher band.
• max. attainable level speed –1.5 if in the MH or lower band.
Bomber Cruise (L, M, & H+) Speed: Any speed greater than highest
available endurance speed up to lesser of:
• max. listed level speed –1.0 in current alt. band.
• or max. attainable speed –0.5 in current alt. band.
Dash Speed: Any speed greater than highest available cruise speed
up to max. attainable level speed of formation (NA for fixed formations).
Horizontal Moves: One Op-MP per OMT dot moved left or right.
Vertical Move Limits: Apply all altitude gains either at the start or at
the end of a formation's move. A/C may descend up to 3,000 per dot
position entered or they may expend one Op-MP to lose up to 6,000
feet without moving. A/C may climb and descend in same Op-turn.
Climbs: Changes in altitude depend on A/C speed and load status:
Selected Altitude Change*
A/C Speed Normal Loaded Over-Load
Take-off turn = Listed ROC x 4 x 3 x2
Dash or cruise = Listed ROC x 3 x 2 x1
Climb = Listed ROC x 8** x 7** x 6**
Endurance = Listed ROC x 1 NA NA
* Climbs must stop at A/C's ADC ceiling defined for A/C load status.
** Minus 1 per 2 or less bands > VL A/C started at (but not to <1).
Notes: If adjusted minimum speed is > 1/2 listed max or lowest cruise
speed, endurance speed NA. Half MPs are used and carried normally.
Take-off climbs use fuel at 1, 2, or 3 min. per full or partial multiple of
altitude gained for normal, loaded and over-loaded A/C respectively.

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 Fighting Wings - Third Edition
Play Aids Booklet - Table of Contents

Directions - Remove staples, separate by sets of aids

Page Item (Description)
1. Front Cover Cover Page
2. Operational Mission Track - I (Left Half of OMT)
3. Play Aids Table of Contents (List of Play Aid Booklet Sheets)
4. Tactical Maneuver Grid (TMG Grid and Placement Tables)
5. Op-scale Tables - Page 1 (Expanded - Sequence of Play part I)
6. Op-scale Tables - Page 2 (Expanded - Sequence of Play part II)
7. Naval Tables - Page 1 (Ship Movement and Torpedo Attack Tables)
8. Naval Tables - Page 2 (Ship Critical Hit Tables)
9. A/C Flight Tables - Page 1 (A/C Normal Flight Procedures)
10. A/C Flight Tables - Page 2 (Special Flight Procedures Summary, Stalls etc.)
11. Combat Tables - Page 1 (Combat Odds and Likelihood Table)
12. Combat Tables - Page 2 (Aircraft Critical Hit Tables)
13. Combat Tables - Page 3 (Gunfire & Deflection Arc Clock-Line Diagrams)
14. Combat Tables - Page 4 (Fixed Gunfire Deflection Determination Aid)
15. Combat Tables - Page 5 (Defensive Gunfire Deflection Aid, Modifiers)
16. Combat Tables - Page 6 (AAA Combat Tables)
17. Combat Tables - Page 7 (Ground Attack Procedures, Terrain Effects Chart)
18. Combat Tables - Page 8 (Additional Bombing Rules, Bomb Scatter Table)
19. Combat Tables - Page 9 (Bombing Release Point Tables, Accuracy Mods.)
20. Combat Tables - Page 10 (Rocket Firing Tables, AtA and AtG)
21. Flight Rules Summary - Page 1 (Game Flight Rules Summary)
22. Flight Rules Summary - Page 2 (Game Flight Rules Summary)
23. A/C Flight Tables - Page 3 (A/C Turn Tables, Standar Flight Type Table)
24. A/C Flight Tables - Page 4 (A/C FATT Tables, Pull and Push Transitions)
25. Naval Tables - Page 3 (Critical Hit Explanations, Post-Attack-Fate Table)
26. Naval Tables - Page 4 (Naval AAA Fields-of-Fire, Air-Naval Tactical Proc.)
27. Op-scale Tables - Page 3 (Combat scale Wx, CV options, Crew Fate Tables)
28. Op-scale Tables - Page 4 (Search & Intercept LH Tables, A/C Attrition Table)
29. Tac-Scale Tables - Page 1 (Tac Scale Sequence of Play, Set Up Range Table)
30. Tac-Scale Tables - Page 2 (Sighting Table, Night Encounter Tables)
31. Operational Mission Track - II (Right Half of OMT)
32. Back Cover (Sequence of Play, A/C Load Effects, for photocopy)

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – TACTICAL MANEUVERING GRID

Relative Flt. Path Drift ≤ 1 = 12:00L

Direction =
2 = Front arc to D 3 = Front arc to
left of 12:00L right of 12:00L

Start arc C Combat scale

position roll set up arcs
D10 result description

B
4 = Left front 5 = Right front
side arc side arc

Target

9:00L D C B A A B C D 3:00L

"X" Box

A
6 = Left rear 7 = Right rear
side arc side arc

Clock Lines: Clock Lines:

Left Front Side = (09) to (11) 8 = Rear arc to 9 = Rear arc to Front Arc = 11 to 01
Left Rear Side = (07) to (09) left of 6:00L D right of 6:00L Right Front Side = (01) to (03)
Rear Arc = 05 to 07 ≥ 10 = 6:00L Right Rear Side = (03) to (05)

Current
Tac-Turn

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Start Next
Op-Turn

TMG START POSITION D10 MODIFIERS
Declare if mods. + or – before roll, amount after roll.
• Formation leader is Vet., Hero, or Ace = ± up to 2
• EWR Radar guiding attacker (day only) = ± up to 2
• GCI Radar guiding attacker (day & night) = ± up to 4
• Defenders contrailing, or illum. at night = ± up to 4
• If Broken or Overcast clouds in OMT band, then
cancel 1 or 2 favorable modifiers, respectively.
TMG START RANGE D10 MODIFIERS
• Senior formation leader has "keen" eyesight = + 1
• Early Warning Radar in use (day only) = + 2
• Scattered or Broken clouds in OMT band = – 1
• Overcast clouds in OMT band = – 2
• Inclement weather (storms) in OMT band = – 3
SUN ARC & DAZZLE ZONE (see 14.8)
• Roll D10 for Arc. Dazzle depends on height.
ATTACKER'S TMG MOVE OPTIONS (14.4)
1. Remain level and gain up to 200 or lose up to 400 feet while moving
up to 2 spaces. Set speed between cruise and max attainable level
inclusive. Flight attitude may be level, shallow climb or shallow dive.
2. Dive from 500 to 5,000 feet while moving up to 2 spaces (or 3 if
second or subsequent turn of diving). Set end speed from max listed
level to max safe dive inclusive (increase may not be > +0.5 speed
per 500 feet dived. Flight attitude may be any dive type, or level if
altitude lost was ≤ 2,500 feet.
3. Climb ≤ Half available ROC and move 1 space. Set speed between
climb and cruise speed. Flight attitude may be level or shallow climb.
4. Climb > Half available ROC up to all and stay in place. Speed =
climb speed. Flight attitude may be any climb type.
Extra Spaces - One extra space may be moved per 2.0 of start speed >
defender's. Drift one extra space for each 2.0 of start speed < defender's. (A/C
drifting off TMG must match off-grid spaces with moves to re-enter TMG)

(TMG version 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – OPERATIONAL TABLES – PAGE 1
OP–SCALE SEQUENCE OF PLAY
1. WEATHER CHANGE PHASE (15.2)
• Roll D10 for weather changes every 3rd Op-turn in summer,
every even turn in spring or fall, and every turn in winter.
Weather Change TABLE
D10 Modifiers
• Northern Europe, Asia, Pacific in Winter, Summer = +2 / –1
• Central Europe, Asia, Pacific in Fall, Summer = +1 / –1
• Tropics in rainy (Jun-Sep) / dry (Dec-Mar) season = +2 / –2
D10 Weather Change D10 Weather Change
≤ 1 No change any zone. 6 Zone 3 Worsens.
2 Home base Improves. 7 Zone 2 Worsens.
3 Zone 1 Improves. 8 Zone 1 Worsens.
4 Zone 2 Improves. 9 Home Base Worsens.
5 Zone 3 Improves. ≥ 10 No change any zone.
2. take-off & join-up PHASE (15.3)
• Mission then interceptor player declares take-offs.
• Both sides resolve take-off attrition, launch spare A/C.
• Check for unintentional encounters after take-off.
• Execute post take-off join ups as desired.
TAKE–OFF ATTRITION TABLE
Procedure: Roll LH for each TOG. Use Attrition Table to determine
if any A/C abort their take-off (random which). Damaged or severely
damaged A/C must be in their own separate TOGs. Take-off limits:
Home base = none; other base ≤ 24; CV deck ≤ 20; CV catapult
≤ 4 per catapult.
Take-Off Attrition LH Modifiers
• A/C damaged = +05 • A/C severe damage = +10
• A/C loaded = +10 • Inclement weather = +10
• A/C over-loaded = +15 • Prepared runway = –10
• Single engine A/C = –25 • Poor runway = +15
• Twin engine A/C = –15 • Good maintenance = –15
• 3 & 4 engine A/C = –05 • Poor maintenance = +20
• Rough sea take-off = +05 • Catapult take-off = –10
• Night take-off = +05 • CV deck run take-off = +05
• Each clear CV deck hex >1 available for take-off roll = –05
Take–off ABORT Fate TABLE
• Roll percentile dice for each aborted A/C to resolve its fate.
Fate Modifiers
• Recruit pilot = +15 • Green pilot = +05
• Veteran pilot = –05 • Gifted pilot = –10
• A/C loaded or damaged < severe level (each) = +05
• A/C over-loaded or damaged ≥ severe level (each) = +10
% Roll Aborted Aircraft Fate
≤ 50 Mechanical problem. A/C out for D5 of Op-turns.
51 to 80 Mechanical failure. A/C out for 5+D10 Op-turns.
81 to 95 Land: Take-off accident, suffer two D10 of
damage (1 crit. per 4 hits). Sea: A/C ditches and
is lost, roll for crew survival (ditched).
96 to 99 Take-off crash, A/C lost. Roll for crew survival.
≥ 00 Fatal stall & crash after take-off, A/C lost, crew killed.
3. MOVEMENT & SEARCH PHASE (15.4)
• Determine A/C order of moves & initiative (low rolls go first).
• +1 to initiative if formation led by veteran, ace, or hero.
• Move A/C in order determined (H, M & MF, L, then F).
• Formations may split at start of move. All parts move at same time.
• Check for unintentional encounters during moves.
• Check for searchlight captures (night only) during moves.
• Free hunters & CAP may attempt intercepts as allowed.
• Resolve harassing AAA attacks as allowed.
• Search for enemy naval or ground targets as allowed.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
OP–SCALE AAA TABLE (15.4.3)
Procedure: Roll once on Attrition Table (page 4) for harassing AAA
and twice for defense zone AAA. Total no. of random AAA attacks
occurring = No. of A/C affected from Attrition Table roll(s). Randomly
determine which A/C, and resolve attacks using data below. A/C
above overcast bands may only be attacked by radar-aimed AAA.
For random heavy AAA, roll D10, ≥ 6 = radar-aimed (–1 per year
before 1945 scenario is set in).
Attrition LH Modifiers
• Target formation size = (+1 per F/L, +2 per M/H AC) = +Variable*
(*but not greater than 2 x total points of AAA firing)
• Each point of naval or land AAA firing (any size) = +01
• If AAA radar aimed (ignore night & cloud modifiers) = +15
• If light or heavy AAA, If Naval AAA of any size = +10, –10
• Light or medium AAA firing at hedge-hopping A/C = +10
• Each band over LO to reach target altitudes = –10
• Firing into, through broken, overcast bands (each) = ­ –05, –20
• Night unseen = –50, Night silhouetted, illuminated = –30, –10
AAA Land / Naval Attack ≤ / > 102mm
Size Eff. Altitudes Odds Crit. Hit No.
Heavy ≤ HI / ≤ ML 2 - 1 3/2
Medium ≤ LO / ≤ LO 1 - 1 2
Light ≤ 3,000 2 - 1 3
4. EN ROUTE JOIN UP & EVENTS PHASE (15.5)
• Conduct same OMT dot en route join ups as allowed & desired.
• Check for random events (≥ 90 per occupied OMT column).
• Randomly determine which formation or A/C suffers event.
Formation JOIN UP Table
Procedure: Any no. of flights, each of ≤ four A/C, may be formed
automatically from a TOG. For other join ups, roll percentile dice once
per formation joining, refer to table below. Limits = one join up try per
formation per join up phase. Join up leaders may not do joins in the
same phase. Joiners must be within 1 x their listed ROC below, or up
to 5,000 feet above (F or unladen L), or up to 3,000 above (all others)
the join up leader. All join ups (incl. automatic ones) use D5 endurance.
Not more than three F or unladen L class formations, or 2 other class
formations may rendezvous with a join up leader per join up phase.
Percentile Modifiers % Roll Join Up Result
• In Clear weather = –10 ≤ 60 Normal join up
• In Broken weather = +10 61 to 70 Delayed join up
• In Overcast weather = +20 71 to 80 Formation straggles
• In Inclement weather = +30 81 to 85 En route delay (ER)
• Joining leader is Vet. = –05 86 to 95 Join up incident
• Joining leader Green = +10 ≥ 96 No Rendezvous
• Joining leader Recruit = +20
• Joining leader has no radio, or Keen Eyes = +20 / –10.
• Joining up over own airbase, major land mark, rally point = –10.
Delayed = Joiners use D5 of end. in extended tail chase to join.
Straggle = Joiners use D5 of end. & are straggled if intercepted.
ER Delay = Join up leader must circle for 2 MPs in dot next turn
(joiners straggle) – Or choose No Rendezvous.
No Rndvz. = Join up fails, joiners circle in dot for D5 MPs next turn.
Incident = Random A/C in joining formation has incident, roll D10.
Join UP Incident Table
D10 Modifiers
• Recruit = +2 • Green = +1 • No Radio = +1
• Veteran = –1 • Gifted = –1 • Incl. Wx. = +1
10 Roll
D Incident Result
≤ 4 Sloppy flying, over-use of throttle, A/C uses D5 of fuel.
5, 6 A/C straggles and falls out of formation.
7 A/C veers toward others, makes own formation straggle.
. 8, 9 A/C blunders toward neighbors, check for random
collision in own formation as if A/C had overstacked.
≥ 10 A/C randomly collides with one A/C in joint formation.
(same speed, same direction modifiers)
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – OPERATIONAL TABLES – PAGE 2
EN ROUTE EVENT TABLE
Procedure: Roll percentile dice for each OMT column containing
friendly or enemy A/C in any amount. A result ≥ 90 = event occurs.
Add +2 modifier per formation > one, or per 3 or less independent
A/C > three present in column. All AAA attacks are of harassing type.
% Roll Event Type
100 Weather change roll.
99 One A/C suffers two engine critical hits.
95-98 One A/C suffers one engine critical hit.
91-94 One A/C suffers one equipment critical hit.
86-90 One A/C loses one weapon group / def. gun.
78-85 One A/C's drop or aux. fuel tanks fail to transfer
76-77 One A/C's drop tanks all permanently stick
71-75 An A/C's oxygen system fails (≤ 7 to detect)
69-70 Unforecast headwind (back up one dot position)
67-68 Unforecast tailwind (advance one dot position)
62-66 Nav. error (lose D5 end., spend 2 Op-MP in place).
61 Major nav. Error (stay in place one Op-turn).
56-60 Enemy non-fighter if allowed, else no event.
55 One enemy A/C of enemy player's choice.
51-54 Two enemy fighters if allowed, else no event.
41-50 Four enemy fighters if allowed, else roll again.
36-40 Heavy AAA attack (18 pts.) if allowed, else no event.
33-35 Med. AAA attack (12 pts.), if allowed, else roll again.
26-32 Light AAA attack (24 pts.) if in VL band else roll again.
25 One friendly A/C encounter player's choice.
16-24 Four friendly fighters join if allowed, else no event.
11-15 Two friendly fighters join if allowed, else roll again.
06-10 Friendly non-fighter encounter.
01-05 Weather change roll
Event Limits: Friendly & enemy A/C encounters in territories only as
scenarios permit. No random AAA over water or neutral territory. If
random AAA occurs in friendly territory, roll D10. A result ≥ 8 = affected
formation (only) is fired on (accidentally) by AAA type indicated. If
navigation error affects a lead formation of a force, it applies to entire
force. If not, the affected formation separates from larger force. Players
choice = any type listed in scenario tables as allowed.
5. INTERCEPT & COMBAT PHASE (15.8)
• Determine intercept and surface attack order of initiative (15.8).
• +1 to initiative roll if formation led by veteran, ace, or hero.
• Attempt intercepts & declare surface attacks in initiative order.
(High rolls go first. One "pass" allowed per formation)
• Check for unintentional encounters during day A/C shifts (15.6).
Dot shifts use 2 min. of endurance per OMT dot shifted (15.4).
• Establish a Time-of-Intercept (TOI) for all combats (15.9).
• Use tactical and combat scale play as required.
• Use Air-Naval Tactical Procedure for ship attacks (30.2).
• Conduct defense zone AAA attacks as allowed (15.4.3).
• After combat, return A/C to DP of the fight and pick an altitude
from 3,000 feet below up to listed ROC above altitude held
when the combat ended (14.7.1).
• Friendly A/C ending play on the combat map together, or which
disengage to same DP and base altitude on same combat turn
may automatically regroup into formation (14.7.1).
(Note: "DP" = OMT dot position)
INTERCEPT & ATTACK RANGE TABLE
During Movement Phase (air-to-air)
• F, L free hunters & CAP: same DP, 1 band above to 3 below.
• MF free hunters & CAP: same DP, same band to 2 below.
During Combat Phase (air-to-air & air-to-ground)
• F, L close escorts: same DP, 1 band above to 1 below.
• MF close escorts: same DP, same band to 1 below.
• All other F, L: within 1 DP, 1 band above to any below.
• All other A/C: within 1 DP, same band to any below.
• Pin point attacks: same DP, attack from any band on OMT.
• Air-to-ship attacks: within 1 DP, attack from any band on OMT.
• Strategic area attacks: same DP, bomb from any band on OMT.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
6. REGROUPING / LANDING / SERVICING PHASE (15.12)
• A/C or formations split up as a result of combat that are in same
dot position and altitude band may attempt to join up (15.5)
• A/C in VL band and same dot position as an airfield may land
if they were not involved in combat that Op-turn.
• A/C forced to descend to ground level must force land.
• Resolve landing attrition and any forced landings.
• Previously landed A/C may refuel or rearm.
LANDING ATTRITION TABLE
• Landing Limits: As for take-offs except CVs = 14 max landings.
• Use Aircraft Attrition Table to find how many A/C in LDG have a
landing incident. Randomly determine which, resolve incident for
each with percentile roll on the Landing Incident Table.
• Forced landing or ditching = Automatic Ldg. incident roll.
• Significantly damaged A/C = No attrition, Ldg. incident if D10 > 5*.
*+1 if sev. dmg., +1 if minor fire, +2 if ldg. pilot WIA, +2 if major fire.
Landing Attrition LH Modifiers
• Prepared runway = –10 • Poor or grass runway = +05
• CV Landings = +15 • Inclement Wx, Night ldg. = +10 ea.
• Rough Seas = +10 • Each A/C > 10 for CV ldg. = +05 ea.
LANDING INCIDENT Table
% Roll Result
≤ 40 Clumsy but safe landing! (D5 of hits if forced landing).
41 to 60 Poor approach with go around, reroll for incident.
Use D5 of fuel. If gliding, ignore & reroll for incident.
61 to 80 Heavy landing (D5 of hits to landing A/C).
81 to 85 Ground loops off runway (if CV = barrier engagement)
for one D10 of hits to A/C with one critical per 3 hits.
86 to 90 Skidding crash landing (on CV = barrier flip crash),
two D10 of hits to A/C with one critical per 3 hits.
91 to 96 CV = bad bounce and crash over-side, on land
or ditching = A/C stalls and crashes. In both
cases, A/C destroyed with D5 of critical hits.
97 to 99 CV = crash beyond barrier, with D10 of flight deck
hits on hex just forward of landing hex, two D10
of hits on random D5 of A/C in hex just forward
of landing hex wth one critical per 3 hits. On land,
or ditching = severe crash. In both cases, A/C
destroyed with D10 of critical hits.
≥ 100 Fatal crash and explosion, all crew killed.
On CV, treat as kamikaze hit on landing hex.
LANDING INCIDENT MODIFIERS
Landing Incident Percentile Roll Modifiers
• Engines damaged (each), or knocked out (each) = +05, +10
• A/C severely damaged, instruments out (each) = +15, +05
• A/C loaded, or over loaded = +05, +10
• Recruit pilot, or Green pilot = +20, +10
• Gifted pilot, and / or Veteran pilot (each) = –10, –05
• Landing pilot wounded = +20
• Non-pilot flying plane, if with backup controls = +30, +40
• Rudder out, Flaps disabled (each) = +05
• Elevators, ailerons damaged (each such critical) = +05
• Landing gear damaged but down = +10
• Flaps in landing position (and not damaged) = –05
Forced Landing or Ditching Percentile Modifiers
Use applicable Landing Incident % Modifiers except
"gear damaged" if gear is up for forced landing.
• Gear is down or trailing: over land, while ditching = +15, +25
• Forced landing on prepared, or grass/dirt runway = –10, –05
• A/C ditching in calm seas, rough seas = –10, +05
• Forced landing locale = rough, undesirable terrain = +15, +30
Note: Incidents which cause damage that destroys an A/C (inflicts hits
over its destruction level), or inflicts critical hits that causes the A/C to
catch fire, explode, or involves a ditching at sea, require player to roll
D10 on the Crew Crash Survival Table (Op-Tables, page 3) for each
crew member present on the A/C.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – NAVAL TABLES: PAGE 1
SHIP RANDOM MOVEMENT TABLES (26.3)
LARGE SHIP MOVEMENT (>500 tons)
D10 Roll Commanded Action
1*, 2, 3 Move ahead 1 hex
4, 5, 6 Move to face right 30° (starboard)
7, 8, 9 Move to face left 30° (port)
10 Repeat last command
SMALL SHIP MOVEMENT (≤ 500 tons)
D10 Roll Commanded Action
1*, 2 Move ahead 1 hex
3, 4 Move 1 hex and face right 30°
5 Face right 60° (30° if displ. > 50 tons)
6 Face left 60° (30° if displ. > 50 tons)
7, 8 Move 1 hex and face left 30°
9, 10 Repeat last command
"1*" = Increase speed one step if not already at max speed.
NAVAL UNIT TURN CHART
Ship Size Rudder Response Times Turn
in Tons Start Turn / Reverse Turns Mode
≤ 100 tons Instant / Instant Instant
≤ 1,000 tons 1 game turn / 2 game turns 1
≤ 10,000 tons 1 game turn / 2 game turns 2
> 10,000 tons 2 game turns / 3 game turns 3
Rudder Response: Before a ship's movement will count for turn-
ing its rudder response time in game turns must be met. Continued
turning in the same direction does not require a rudder response
time. However, a new rudder response time delay is required when
reversing a turn direction, or after a move ahead command.
Turn Mode: Once a ship's rudder response time is met, it will change
facing in the direction the rudder is set for, after advancing a number
of hexes equal to its turn mode.
SHIP ARMOR EFFECTS TABLE (28.1)
Armor Armor Damaging Hits Crit. Hits Hint: Charts assume 90° attack angle and ship is starting it's full pause
Type Rating canceled canceled cycle when torpedo first moves. If ship is in mid-pause, or moving when
Light (1) 1 x D10 1 torpedo starts moving, you may have to adjust lead by ± 1 hex. Count
Medium (2) 2 x D10 2 aimpoint lead from center hex of a three hex target or from the stern hex
Heavy (3) 3 x D10 3 of a two hex for best chance. The chart does not account for changes in
Very Hvy. (4) 4 x D10 4 target's course or for torpedo time-of-fall before water entry.
Bomb Type Fuze Type Armor Penetration Ability
All Contact None
All Pen. or delay Unarmored ships.
SAP, AP Pen. or delay Level 0, 1 resp. from any altitude
SAP, AP Pen. or delay Level 1, 2 resp. from ≥ alt. 4.0.
SAP, AP Pen. or delay Level 1, 3 resp. from ≥ alt. 8.0.
SAP and AP bombs ≥ 1,000 lbs. increase pen. ability by 1 level.
Effect of Penetration and Armor: Bombs penetrating all layers
of armor cause "internal" instead of "surface" critical hits. If a ship
has flight deck armor, the main deck armor is considered one level
higher than actual until the flight deck is no longer operational due
to damage. Attacks penetrating a functional armored flight deck that
do not penetrate a ship's main deck armor have damaged absorbed
as if the main deck armor were one level higher. Determine total hit
and critical hit amounts before reducing any for armor.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
AIR-NAVAL DIRECT HITS (28.1)
Roll D10 for direct hit or near miss for all "on target" bombs and
torpedoes intercepting a ship. Roll separately for each weapon.
Direct Hit Modifiers:
• Anchored or "dead in water" (DIW) Ship = –2
• Moving ship's speed less than 1/3. = –1
• Skip bomb is "on target". = –3
• Attack resulted from bomb scattering onto ship = +1
• Torpedo attack from ship's side arcs. = –3
• Torpedo attack from ship's bow or stern arcs. = +1
• Each 10 pts. bomb's final accuracy LH is < –35 = –1
• On target bomb's accuracy roll was 00, odd = Auto Dir. Hit
Bomb Direct Hit: Inflicts damage = half bomb's attack strength +
one D10 per 50 or less points of strength remaining.
Torpedo Direct Hit: Inflicts damage = half torpedo's attack strength
+ one D10 per 10 or less points of strength remaining.
TORPEDO ATTACK PLANNER (22.0)
Crossed Index Result = target lead distance in hexes
WATER ENTRY RANGE FROM SHIP IN HEXES
Target Torpedo Speed = 1 / 1
Speed 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
3/4 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 9
2/3 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 8
1/2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6
1/3 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4
1/4 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3
1/6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2
Target Torpedo Speed = 3 / 4
Speed 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
3/4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11
2/3 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 10
1/2 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7
1/3 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5
1/4 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
1/6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
Target Torpedo Speed = 2 / 3
Speed 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
3/4 1 2 3 5 5 7 8 9 10 12
2/3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11
1/2 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8
1/3 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
1/4 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4
1/6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Turn Command Torpedo Exceptions (26.3): These may apply if a
torpedoe is within 10 hexes of, and headed toward the ship (see rules).
Torpedo Aiming (22.0):
• Minimal = FPs equal to A/C launch speed (one game turn).
• Full = FPs equal to 3 times A/C launch speed (3 game turns).
• Each turn of aiming less than full adds –1 to erratic run D10 roll.
Erratic Torpedoes (22.0): Automatic if minimum aiming not done. Else,
when a torpedo is launched, roll a D10. A result ≤ 1 = erratic runner.
Roll D10 again: 1 or 2 = Porpoising Torpedo, 3 to 5 = left drift, 6 to 8 =
right drift, and 9 or 10 = Circling torpedo. See Chapter 22 for specifics.
If an erratic torpedo intercepts a ship, roll a D10, a result ≥ 8 = miss
due to running too deep. Torpedoes that pass under targets in this way
continue moving on subsequent turns and still pose danger to other
ships they may encounter.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – NAVAL TABLES: PAGE 2
CRITICAL HITS (28.2): For each 20 hits inflicted in an attack, roll a D10
for a critical hit of the appropriate kind, for the type of vessel struck on the
tables below. Each 20% of a ship's hit capacity inflicted by any means,
causes 1 internal critical hit. Internal critical hits to small vessels cannot
exceed the hit capacity of the vessel. Example: A US Landing craft cannot
suffer > 2 internal criticals. Weapons whose attack strength is ≥ 50 or ≥ 100
inflict critical hits in groups of two or less, or three or less, respectively (all
criticals in a group being determined by one roll). Hits added by critical hits
SHIP CRITICAL HIT TABLES do not cause more criticals but do count for reaching 20% damage levels.

SURFACE HITS INTERNAL HITS SEA WORTHINESS HITS

A/C Carrier (CV, CVL, CVE)
1, 2 1 x D10 of flight deck damage.
3 Explosion, 3 x D10 of hits.
4 Command team wiped out.
5 to 7 One AAA battery (any size), radar,
searchlight or gun director lost.
8 Roll on Internal Critical Table.
9 One flight deck elevator disabled.
10 Bridge steering lost - Shift to aft steer-
ing, +1 to rudder resp. & turn modes.
Fighting Ship
(BB, BC, CA, CL, DD, DE)
1 If torpedo mounts or depth charge
racks located on section of ship hit,
roll a D10. If result ≥ 9, a D5 of such
weapons explode, D5 x 10 hits each.
2 Command team wiped out
3 to 5 One searchlight, light or medium
AAA battery lost.
6 One gun director, heavy AAA
battery, or radar lost.
7 Roll on Internal Critical Table
8 Explosion, 2 x D10 of hits.
9 One offensive weapon, seaplane,
catapult, crane, sensor, or entire
restricted flight deck disabled.
10 Bridge steering lost - Shift to aft steer-
ing, +1 to rudder resp. & turn modes.
OILER, Transport, TENDer
(AO, AP, AK, AV), Ships > 500 tons
1, 2 Explosion, 2 x D10 of hits.
3 Command team wiped out.
4, 5 One AAA battery (any size), gun
director, weapon or searchlight lost.
6 Cargo explosion, D5 x 10 of hits.
(same result = tons of cargo lost).
7 to 9 D5 x10 tons of cargo destroyed.
10 Bridge steering lost - Shift to aft steer-
ing, +1 to rudder resp. & turn modes.
SHIP ≤ 500 Tons (ANy type)
1, 2 One command team wiped out.
3 to 5 One AAA battery (any size) lost.
6, 7 One weapon or searchlight lost.
8, 9 Explosion, 1 x D10 of hits.
10 Bridge steering lost - Shift to aft steer-
ing, +1 to rudder resp. & turn modes.
Submarine (SS)
1, 2 Deck gun or torpedo tube set lost.
3, 4 Command team wiped out.
5, 6 One AAA battery wiped out.
7, 8 Water tight hull damaged.
9 Diving planes disabled.
10 Bridge steering lost - Shift to aft steer-
ing, +1 to rudder resp. & turn modes.
A/C Carrier (CV, CVL, CVE)
1 One sensor lost (radar, sonar, etc.).
2 DC mains damaged.
3 Minor fire, one fire hit.
4 Major fire, 1+D5 of fire hits.
5, 6 DC team wiped out.
7 Explosion, 3 x D10 of hits.
8, 9 Hangar deck hit - first time this result OILER, Transport, TENDer
occurs from a penetrating weapon,
use final attack value to destroy and
damage A/C in hangar per rule 28.3.
Any fires render hangar deck unusable
for all purposes until fires neutralized.
10 One boiler knocked out.
Fighting Ship
(BB, BC, CA, CL, DD, DE)
1 One sensor lost (radar, sonar, etc.).
2 DC mains damaged.
3 Minor fire, one fire hit.
4 Large fire, two fire hits.
5, 6 DC team wiped out.
7, 8 Explosion, 2 x D10 of hits.
9 Large explosion, (1+ D5) x 10 hits.
+ D5 of fire hits.
10 One boiler knocked out.
OILER, Transport, TENDer
(AO, AP, AK, AV), Ships > 500 tons
1, 2 3 x D10 tons of cargo destroyed.
3 DC mains damaged.
4 Minor fire, one fire hit.
5, 6 Major fire, 1+D5 of fire hits.
7 DC team wiped out.
8 Explosion, 2 x D10 of hits.
9 Cargo explosion, D5 x 10 of hits.
(twice the result = tons of cargo lost).
10 One boiler knocked out.
SHIP ≤ 500 TONS (any type)
1 Lose all sensors.
2 Command team wiped out.
3 Minor fire, one fire hit.
4 Major fire, two fire hits.
5, 6 DC team wiped out.
7, 8 Explosion, 1 x D10 of hits.
9 All boilers / engines knocked out.
10 Vessel explodes and is destroyed.
Submarine (SS)
Each Automatic watertight hull damage plus:
1 One sensor lost
(sonar, radar, periscope, etc.)
2 DC mains damaged.
3, 4 Minor fire, one fire hit.
5 Battery power disabled.
6 DC team wiped out.
7, 8 Explosion, 1 x D10 hits.
9 One set of torpedo tubes out
10 One Engine knocked out.
ALL CV & WARSHIPS
1 to 3 One flooding hit.
4 to 6 Two flooding hits.
7, 8 2 x D10 of extra hits.
9 Rudder jammed.
10 One boiler knocked out
(AO, AP, AK, AV), ships > 500 tons
1 to 3 One flooding hit.
4, 5 Two flooding hits.
6 Three flooding hits.
7, 8 2 x D10 of extra Hits.
9 Rudder jammed.
10 One boiler knocked out.
SHIP ≤ 500 TONS (ANY TYPE)
1 to 3 One flooding hit.
4, 5 Two flooding hits.
6, 7 2 x D5 of extra hits.
8 Rudder jammed.
9 One boiler knocked out.
10 Hull ruptured, ship sinks.
Submarine (SS)
1 to 4 One flooding hit.
5 Two flooding hits.
6, 7 2 x D5 of extra hits.
8 Rudder jammed.
9 One engine knocked out.
10 Hull ruptured, SS sinks.
Special Considerations (28.3)
Flooding Hits: Torpedo hits inflict one flooding
hit for each 10 points of damage not absorbed
by Torpedo Protection Points.
Fire Hits: Each bomb penetrating a ship, and
each 3 or less fueled A/C destroyed on a ship in
a single attack, inflicts one fire hit. Any critical
hit explosion doing ≥ 10 hits inflicts one fire hit.
Destroying A/C on Ships: Take no. of hits at-
tack inflicted on ship divided by 5 to determine
odds. Roll for damage, LH modifier –1 per A/C
in affected flight or hangar deck hex. No. of hits
resulting = no. of A/C destroyed.
Exploding A/C Ship Damage: A/C destroyed
x D5 = hits against ship. One Surface / Internal
crit per 20 hits from A/C on deck / in Hangar.
Damaged A/C on Ships: Take sum of hits
inflicted on ship by attack plus by destroyed
A/C and divide by 5 for odds. Roll for damage,
LH modifier –1 per undestroyed A/C in the
flight or hangar deck hex. Resulting hits = no.
of undestroyed A/C randomly damaged and
unusable further in play.
Note: If a ship lacks an item rolled for, the criti-
cal hit is in an empty area (no effect).

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW –­FLIGHT TABLES: PAGE 1
,
Flight Procedures Summary (6.1)
A. Select throttle: Idle, Cruise, Military, or Emergency (4.1). If idle
used, reduce start speed by 0.5 and use idle overspeed decel.
Speed Limits (4.3.1):
A/C Condition Attainable Speed Adj. Min. Speed
Loaded Max listed –0.5 Min listed +0.5
Overloaded Max listed –1.0 Min listed +1.0
Severely damaged • Compress. recovery % dice ≤ 50 (4.7)
Max listed –1.0 Min listed +0.5
Power step losses = –0.5 to attainable speed per each single engine,
each two twin-engine, and each 2 to N (3+) engined A/C step losses.
Cruise power (F, MF) Max attain. –1.5 / –1.0 if ≤ MH / ≥ HI band
Cruise power (others) Lesser of Max attain. –0.5 or Max listed –1.0
Idle, or End. power 1/2 of Max listed, or 1/2 Max attain. (resp.).
B. Roll % dice for spin if stalled, for recovery if spinning (4.5).
Roll % dice for A/C destruction if over max safe dive speed (4.7).
Roll % dice for compressibility or compr. recovery if needed (4.7).
Roll % dice for hammerhead success or fail (Chapter 7).
C. If transitioning, find A/C's start attitude on FATT (6.1). Choose
transition rate from options. Code gives VFPs & HFPs allowed.
If no transition, use Standard Altitude Change Table FP ratios.
If stalled, in spin, or doing hammerhead, execute procedure. • Balloon cables slip off D10 ≥ 9 (once) (16.4)
D. Move A/C as follows: Apply any mandatory altitude change (MC)
(6.1.3). Expend all full FPs. Carry unused half FP & unfinished
maneuver FPs. Take optional altitude change (OC) if desired.
E. Record accel and decel points incurred. Calculate speed change.
Adjust excess accel to zero if END speed above max attainable
and diving was not part of move. Update logsheet for next turn.
a/C CollisionS Table (3.3)
Collisions possible if A/C over stacking limits (3.2), doing a range "0"
attack (10.2), upon entering head-on DZ (10.3), or if range "0" to an out
of control A/C (3.3). Tailing can eliminate risk of collision.
Safe Stacking Limits (3.2):
• In fixed formation = 3 x F or L, or 2 x M or H class.
• If flexible or no formation = 2 x F or L (unless facing > 60 apart)
• If from opposing sides = automatic collision check.
Procedure: Roll percentile dice. A result ≥ 85% = collision.
Collision Modifiers (ignore** if spinning A/C involved)
• Shooter stacked with or at range "0" to target = +05
• Entered stack, or range "0" shot from aft of 3/9 line = –05**
• As above but speed less than all others in stack = –05**
• Size modifier of largest A/C involved in check = +5 x mod.
• Entered stack or range "0" shot from front of 3/9 line = +comb. spd.
• One / both A/C in head-on DZ is / are turning = –05 / –10
• A/C in head-on DZ did not fire fixed guns at other = –05 each
• Head-on shot CRR range modifiers (see below) = Variable
• Instigating pilot quality modifiers (see below) = Variable
Head-On Attack Table (10.3)
• Head-on = shooter in target's front arc & final deflection ≥ 150°, or
• Head-on = both A/C firing at each other with fixed guns.
• Collision risk range (CRR) = 1/3 combined speed (round up).
• Danger zone (DZ) = one hex, ± 300 feet of either A/C.
• Pilots must make determination roll if firing from within CRR.
• Roll for collision if either enters DZ during follow on movement.
1. Internal Bomb bays: Use 1 load point for every 500 lbs. carried
Pilot Determination % roll & Collision % roll modifiers
• Recruit pilot = +10 Green pilot = +05
• Veteran or gifted = –05 each Hero, ace or both = –05
Hexes inside CRR: ≥ 5 4 3 2 1
Determination % Roll: ≤ 30 ≤ 50 ≤ 70 ≤ 80 ≤ 90
Collision % modifier: +30 +20 +10 +05 +0
"Hexes inside" formula = (CRR range +1) – firing range.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
Common combat scale die rolls
Type of Event Roll Type Range Rule
• A/C collisions % dice ≥ 85 (3.3)
• Spin if stalled % dice ≥ 60 (4.5)
• Spin recovery % dice ≤ 50 (4.5)
• Dang. dive destruction % dice ≥ 95 (4.7)
• Compressibility % dice ≥ 60 (4.7)
• Overstressing A/C % dice ≥ 95 (5.6)
• Black or Red outs % dice ≥ 95 (5.7)
• Hammer-Head success % dice ≤ 60 (7.0)
• Gun jam, (if long burst) Raw % roll ≥ 98, (≥ 85) (10.1)
• Recharging guns D10 ≤ 7 (once) (10.1)
• Gun reload time D5 in turns (10.6)
• Engine shut down D10 ≤ 7 (11.3)
• Propeller feathering D10 ≤ 7 (once) (11.3)
• O2 failure crew loss D5 & D10 D5 – D10 (11.3)
• Non-pilot take over A/C % dice ≤ 40 (once) (11.3)
• Drop external tank D10 ≤ 9 (once) (12)
• 2d try on stuck tank D10 ≤ 7 (once) (12)
• Attack parachute D10 ≥ 7 (once) (13.6)
• Barr. balloon collision D10 ≤ 5 (16.4)
• 75mm gun reload D10 ≤ 7 (19.2)
• Mortal wounding % dice ≤ 40 (once) (23.1)
• Self-sacrifice Kamikaze % dice ≤ 40 (once) (23.1)
• Cloud dis-, re-orientation % dice ≥ 80, ≤ 20 (16.2)
• Night dis-, re-orientation % dice ≥ 51, ≤ 40 (32.3)
Note: Underline = modifiers apply - see rules and summaries.
A/C LOAD EFFECTS TABLE (12.0)
Loaded A/C
• Use loaded ceiling. –0.5 to max level and safe dive speeds.
• +1 to bank & slip / skid FPs if ≥ 1/2 load carried under wings.
• +0.5 to all minimum level and turn rate speeds.
• Engine power = 2/3 of available power accel.
• For Tac-scale reduce ROC by 1/3 (round up to nearest 100 FPM)
• For Op-scale use loaded climb multiples with listed ROC.
OverLoaded A/C
• Use overload ceiling. –1.0 to max level and safe dive speeds.
• +1 to all bank and slip / skid FP requirements.
• +1.0 to all minimum level and turn rate speeds.
• Engine power = 1/2 of available power accel.
• For Tac-scale reduce ROC by 1/2 (round up to nearest 100 FPM)
• For Op-scale use overloaded climb multiples with listed ROC.
Severe Damage EffectS (11.0)
• ET turns destroy A/C, BTs risk overstress (+20 mod.)
• –1.0 to max level and safe dive speeds.
• +20 modifier to dangerous dive rolls.
• +1 to all bank and slip / skid FP requirements.
• +0.5 to all minimum level and turn rate speeds.
• Reduce available engine power accel by 1/4.
• For Tac-scale reduce ROC by 300 FPM (but not to < 0).
• Reduce Op-scale climb multiplier by 1 (but not to < 0).
• –1 to initiative roll, pilots have their hands full.
A/C Load Notes:
and 0.5 load points for each 250 lbs. or less left over. Unless F or
D class, A/C carrying bombs in bays may not use inverted banks.
2. Loads and Movement Order: A/C loads affect order of moves
within the combined F and L class as follows:
a). Overloaded "F" and overloaded "L" A/C move first.
b). Loaded "L" A/C move next.
c). Normal "L" and normal or loaded "F" A/C move last.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW –­FLIGHT TABLES: PAGE 2
Special flight procedures
A/C Stalls & Spins (4.5)
If start speed < adjusted min., A/C stalled, roll % dice for spin check.
Gifted, reg., vet. pilots may force spin (reverse pilot mods., add +20).
Stall turns into spin: ≤ 59 = normal stall ≥ 60 = A/C spins
Spin recovery Check: ≤ 50 = A/C recovers ≥ 51 = A/C spins
Stall into Spin & Spin Recovery Modifiers:
• A/C has turn carry or just faced (ignore if spinning) = +05
• A/C has slatted wings, contra-rotating props. = –15 each
• Single-engine A/C in military, emergency power = +10, +15 A/C's max listed level speed, roll percentile dice. If compressibility occurs,
• Multi-engine A/C in military, emergency power = +05, +10
• Multi-engine A/C with unbalanced power = +20
(more engines above idle on one wing than other)
• Rudder out*, no pilots flying* (* = no spin recovery) = +30, +30
• Recruit pilot, or green pilot = +10, +05
• Veteran or gifted pilot (each), all pilots wounded = –10, +20
• At night or in clouds, A/C severe damage = +30, +10
Stall Procedure: Take MC normally unless speed < 1.0, then MC =
–0.3. Adjust A/C's attitude toward, but not through, VD by 3 steps (use
pull direction if inverted, push if upright). Roll D10, if ≤ 6 wings roll to LV
if upright, IV if inverted, If > 6, wings roll one step left if odd, right if even.
HFP / VFPs are per ending attitude on Standard Altitude Change Table.
Climb VFPs or OC = NA. Dive VFPs = max allowed. Level or dive OC
= max downward. Turns, rolls, maneuvers NA. Forfeit all carries except
accel or decel. Add dive & engine accel, climb decel normally. If new start
speed ≥ adjusted minimum, stall ends, A/C may fly normally next turn.
Spin Procedure: No FPs (speed = 0). Roll D10: Odd = spin left, bank
goes to LB; Even = spin right, bank goes to RB. Roll D10: result = 30°
facings in spin direction. Accel, decel = 0. Forfeit all carries. Altitude loss
in 100' incr. = Turns in spin x listed min speed +D5. Tailing, tracking shots,
near-0 deflection and LVMM mods. NA vs. spinner. Spinner defends at x
3, and may not drop stores or fire weapons. Spin until recovery roll made.
Spin Recovery: Roll % dice and modify per table above. Upon recovery,
speed = adj. min. +0.5 (or adj. min. if idle used). Angle of bank = LV, select
either steep dive or vertical dive flight attitude at no cost (MC based on
selection). Recovery counts as the A/C's transition for the turn.
A/C Turn Stalls (TS) (4.6)
Penalty Procedure: If caught in Movement Phase return A/C to point of
first illegal action. Lose action but keep first decel & other effects caused
by action, perform TS. If caught in following Movement Phase, return to
start position, perform TS. If caught in Combat Phase of current or next
turn, damage caused by A/C since illegal action is annulled, start next
turn with TS. If caught > two turns after fact, A/C must do two turn stalls
in succession, the second starting on the first FP after the first is finished.
Turn Stall Procedure: Roll D5 for duration in FPs, +1 if veteran, +2 if
regular, +3 if green, +6 if recruit, –1 if gifted, (never > 2 x speed). D10 for
roll direction. Odd= left, even= right. D5 for no. of stall roll FPs instantly
credited to A/C in roll direction. Applied at snap roll rate (no decel) & stall
roll FPs not to exceed duration of TS. If vertical attitude, stall rolls are also
vert. rolls with bank changes and 90° facing changes required.
Execute Turn Stall as follows:
• If in TS at start of move - Transition NA, retain half FP & energy carry.
• No turns, maneuvers, or rolls allowed during Turn Stall FPs.
• HFP / VFP ratio, and MC is based on attitude at start of stall.
• If in climb, do VFPs first until minimum VFPs met, then rest HFPs.
(This is zero for shallow climb, 1 for steep climb, etc.). No OC.
• If in dive, do VFPs first until maximum VFPs allowed limit is met.
• If in level or dive attitude and still in TS at end of game turn, take
max OC as altitude loss.
• At end of game turn in which TS procedure started - adjust nose one
step of attitude toward earth (use push direction if upright, pull if inv-
erted and never past vertical dive)
• Incur 5 decel, +1 decel per credited FP of stall rolling done.
Once Turn Stall FPs spent, normal flight allowed with remaining FPs.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
Dangerous DiveS (4.7)
If, after power selection, start speed is greater than adjusted max safe
dive speed, roll percentile dice. A/C destroyed on result ≥ 95.
Dangerous Dive Modifiers:
• Each continuous turn of dangerous dive after first = +05
• Each 0.5 speed > adjusted max safe dive speed = +05
• A/C severely damaged, or is a glider = +20 each
• Each existing wing spar or tail structure critical hit = +10
Compressibility (4.7)
If, after power selection, start speed is both ≥ transonic and in excess of
it continues until recovery made or compressibility conditions no longer
exist. Effects = Rolls, turns, & maneuvers NA. A/C must pitch in shortest
direction to VD at EZ rate. Use max VFPs & OC each turn. 2nd turn of
VD = pure VD (no opt. HFP). Roll for recovery at start of next move.
Compressibility: ≤ 59 = No ≥ 60 = Yes
Recovery Check: ≤ 50 = A/C recovers ≥ 51 = No recovery
Compressibility & Recovery Modifiers:
• Each turn after first at compressibility speed = +05
• Dive flaps or dive brakes deployed, Gifted pilot = –20, –05
• For recovery, each alt. band above VL A/C starts in = +05
OVERSTRESSING A/C (5.6)
If severely damaged, ET or NG-BT rates destroy A/C. If ET or NG-BT
rates used, or if severe damage, tail structure or wing spar hits exist and
BT or NG-HT or higher rates used, roll percentile dice for possible over-
stress at end of move. If final result ≥ 95, A/C is damaged.
Overstress Modifiers:
• Each 30° facing and trans. step (sum) at overstress rate > 1 = +05
• Each existing tail structure or wing spar critical hit = +10
• If A/C severely damaged = +20
If damage occurs, roll D10, ≤ 7 = wing spar hit, ≥ 8 = tail structure hit.
(–2 for each prior wing spar hit, +2 for each prior tail structure hit).
GLOC & Random Flight (5.7)
• If ET or NG-BT turn or transition rates used, roll percentile dice per
crewman. If final result ≥ 95%, black out or red out occurs, resp.
• Black out causes incapacitation for 1+ D5 game turns.
• Red out causes incapacitation for 2 game turns.
• If recruit or wounded, BT or NG-HT turns risk incapacitation.
Incapacitation Modifiers:
•  Crewman WIA, using G-Suit (NA for red-out check) = +20, –10
• Each 30° facing and trans. step (sum) >1 at GLOC rate = +02
• 
Each game turn of continuous GLOC rate after first
= +10
RANDOM FLIGHT TABLE (5.7)
Random flight A/C move before all others in their class. If pilot incapaci-
tated, throttle cannot be changed. Roll D10 once each for flight attitude
pitch change, bank angle change and, if starting banked, for turning.
D10 Roll Flight Attitude Rolling Turn Rate
1 to 3 Lower nose, EZ rate Roll left EZ
4 to 5 Lower nose, free rate No change TT
6 to 7 No change No change No Turns
8 to 10 Raise nose, EZ rate Roll right No Turns
Pitch Changes: Raise or lower nose relative to ground at indicated
transition rate, if not able, then no change. Lowering past VD or raising
past VC = no change. Exiting vertical flight is via pull transitions. In all
other cases lowering pitch is by push if upright, pull if inverted; raising is
by pull if upright or push if inverted. Rolling: Expend FPs to roll 1 step in
indicated direction at normal rate. A roll toward LV or IV stops unfinished
turns. If roll FPs occur in pure vertical flight, do as vertical roll with 60°
facing. Turning: If not rolling toward LV or IV, expend FPs to face 30° once
at rate rolled for (use EZ if unable TT rate). Rolls & turns may combine
normally. Carry unfinished turns & rolls. Altitude Changes: MC is done
normally. Take full OC in appropriate direction (down for level attitudes).
Use max VFPs allowed for by transition, or A/C's current attitude.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 1

Final
BZ or Expl. (1) Expl. (0) COMBAT ODDS (9.4)
Likelihood 1–6 1–4 1–2 1–1 2–1 3–1 4–1 5–1 6–1 7–1 8–1 9–1 10–1
≤ –91 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20
–71 to –90 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18
–51 to –70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16
–31 to –50 – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14
–11 to –30 – – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
–10 to +09 – – – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 to +29
+ – – – – 1 2 3 5 5 6 7 8 9
+30 to +49 – – – – – 1 3 4 5 5 6 7 8
+50 to +69 – – – – – – 2 3 4 5 5 6 7
70 to +89
+ – – – – – – – 2 3 4 4 5 6
+90 to +109 – – – – – – – – – – 2 4 5
≥ +110 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Procedure: Determine odds (Firepower / Def. Strength). Roll for base LH & modify. Cross index final LH with odds to find damaging hits.
Concentrated Guns: A/C firing ≥ 4 nose guns & def. shots including quad turrets increase results, if > 1 hit, by 1 hit per four actual guns used.
Odds Shifts: Two left for half burst (one if crack shot), one left for "beam" attack, one right for long burst or tracking shot.
Excess Odds: If > 10–1 use 10–1 column & –10 LH for each full odds > 10–1. If < 1–6 use 1–6 column & +5 LH for each full odds < 1–6.

UNIVERSAL A/C LH MODIFIERS AIR-TO-AIR GUN COMBAT LH MODIFIERS (Ch.10)

A/C used Neg.-G, is inverted = +30, +20
A/C in or did Slip, in or did Skid = +15, +30
A/C severely damaged = +15
A/C at < min. speed or used slats = +15
A/C used slat + flap assist turning = +00
A/C used snap-rolls = +10 each
No gun or bombsight used = +40
Target size no. (See ADC) = –05 x No.
Firer or aimer wounded = +20
Recruit, Green pilot / crew = +30, +15
Veteran or hero pilot / crew = –05 each
Ace or crack shot pilot* = –10 each
*Note - Scenarios may double or triple these
mods. to model certain exceptional pilots.
If gyro gunsight with tracking shot, then target deflection factor reduction = N-1
If telescope or simple gunsight used and final deflection not 30° or less = +15
If ring and bead gunsight used, or firer has unbalanced wing guns = +20, +15
Gun Harmony-A: If ≥ half actual guns used are wing guns & range is 2, 3 = –15, –10
Gun Harmony-B: If < half actual guns used are wing guns & range is 2, 3 = –05, –05
Each hex past harmony if ≥ half, or < half, actual guns used are wing guns = +10, +05
Lift Vector Mismatch: Target or firer used HT+ rates, each bank angle diff. = +05 per A/C
Excess Firepower if odds ≥ 1-1: If excess ≥ 1/3, 1/2, 2/3 of tgt. defense str. = –05, –10, –15
Fixed Gun Combined Speeds: Per full speed point or less greater than 6.0 = +05
G-Rates: F or L class used or carried TT, HT, or BT rate (highest of, once) = +00, +10, +20
G-Rates: M or H+ class used or carried TT, HT, or BT rate (highest of, once) = +10, +20, +30
Def. Fire Relative Speed: If > 2.0 use (+2 x rel. speed over 2.0), or, If < 2.0 = –10
Def. Fire vs. Jinking Target, per 30° of HT+ rate transition or facing change = +05
Def. Fire Prime shooter versus A/C using tracking shot against it = –10

BASE LH TABLE (1.8)

% Roll Base LH % Roll Base LH % Roll Base LH % Roll Base LH % Roll Base LH
00 even +130 80 +35 60 +10 40 –10 20 –35
99 +115 79 +33 59 +9 39 –11 19 –36
98 +97 78 +32 58 +8 38 –12 18 –38
97 +87 77 +30 57 +7 37 –13 17 –40
96 +79 76 +29 56 +6 36 –14 16 –41
95 +74 75 +27 55 +5 35 –15 15 –43
94 +69 74 +26 54 +4 34 –17 14 –45
93 +65 73 +25 53 +3 33 –18 13 –48
92 +61 72 +24 52 +2 32 –19 12 –50
91 +58 71 +22 51 +1 31 –20 11 –52
90 +55 70 +21 50 0 30 –21 10 –55
89 +52 69 +20 49 –1 29 –22 09 –58
88 +50 68 +19 48 –2 28 –24 08 –61
87 +48 67 +18 47 –3 27 –25 07 –65
86 +45 66 +17 46 –4 26 –26 06 –69
85 +43 65 +15 45 –5 25 –27 05 –74
84 +41 64 +14 44 –6 24 –29 04 –79
83 +40 63 +13 43 –7 23 –30 03 –87
82 +38 62 +12 42 –8 22 –32 02 –97
81 +36 61 +11 41 –9 21 –33 01 –115
Directions: Roll % dice. Read base LH no. to right of % result. On "00" % result, roll D10 for even-odd result. 00 odd –130
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 2
A/C CRITICAL Hit AREA Table (11.2)
D10 Area Hit D10 Area Hit
≤ 2 Engine (random which) 6 Cockpit
3 7, 8 Roll once each on Equipment & Controls tables.
Fuel Tanks 7, 8 Wings
4 Fuel Tanks 9 Equipment
5 Hollow Space (no effect) ≥ 10 Flight Controls
Modifiers: –1 if final deflection ≥ 150° or defensive fire enters from
arcs 11 to 01 (–2 if also hit from 12:00 line). +1 if final deflection ≤ 30° or
defensive fire enters from 05 to 07 arcs. –1 if multi-engine A/C. See note
at bottom right about crack shot pilot effects.
D10 ENGINE Critical Effects (visible damage)
≤ 1 Engine seized, lose synchronized guns (propeller stops)
2, 3 Coolant leak if liq. cooled, else Oil leak (both = white smoke*)
4 Minor fire breaks out (flickering fire with dark smoke**)
5, 6 Lose 1 step power (wh. smoke; dark smoke if cum. > 2 steps)
7 Roll D10, Odd = minor fire**, Even = lose 2 steps power*
8 Oil leak. Roll D10: Odd = oil on canopy if nose mounted eng.,
else ignore. Even = smoldering oil* (also, fire check mod.)
≥ 9 Roll D10, Odd = lose 1 step power (no smoke), Even = No eff.
Modifiers: +2 if Radial engine, +Eng. protection, –1 if in emergency
power, –2 if second or subsequent hit on same engine.
Power Loss: Fractional Values Table steps = 2/3, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, engine
seized. Each single-engine step loss and each two-to-N multi-engine step
losses reduce max attainable speed by 0.5 (N = total no. of engines).
Turbojets: Result 2, 3 = power reduced 1 step instead (white smoke).
Rocket Motors: Any pwr. loss or leak critical disables rocket. Roll D10
upon taking critical; 1 = A/C blows up if any fuel remains.
Oil on Canopy: Prevents tailing, disables gunsights, –2 to initiative, +10
to landing incident rolls, front arc = blind area at night.
Coolant / Oil leaks: 2 x coolant and/or oil leaks for liq. cooled, 3 x oil
leaks for air cooled, or 2 x oil leaks for turbojets = engine seized. With any
leaks, roll D10 at end of move to check for additional leakage (Exception:
No check required at combat scale if ≤ cruise power used).
Combat turn Tac-turn Op-turn
Extra leakage if: D10 ≤ 2 D10 ≤ 5 D10 ≤ 9
Tac / Op turn modifier: +1 if endurance speed used.
Engine Fire: Fire goes out in D10 of combat turns after engine shut
down (D10 ≤ 7). Do fire progress checks until game turn fire goes out.
Fire Progress: Roll D10 at end of each game turn after turn fire started.
–1 if in emerg. power, –1 if minor fire with smoldering oil leak, +1 if idle
power, +1 if speed ≥ 6.0 for minor fire, or ≥ 8.0 for major fires. Two minor
fires on same eng. = automatic major fire. If fuel fed, power mods. NA.
Minor Fires (fire with smoke) Combat turn Tac-turn Op-turn
Increase to major fire ≤ 2 ≤ 3 ≤5
Fire continues as is 3 to 9 4 to 6 6
Fire goes out ≥ 10 ≥ 8 ≥7
Major Fires (large flames) Combat turn Tac-turn Op-turn
A/C explodes ≤ 2 ≤ 4 ≤7
Suffer 1 Flt. controls critical hit 3 5, 6 ––
Suffer 1 hit (F, L), or 2 hits (≥ M) 4, 5 7 ––
Fire continues as is 6 to 9 –– ––
Diminishes to minor fire ≥ 10 ≥8 ≥8
D10 FUEL TANKS Critical Effects (visible damage)
≤ 1 Aircraft explodes and is destroyed (fireball & debris).
2 Fuel Fed Fire (large flames). Treat as major fire from above
(eng. power mods. NA), lose fuel as major leak until fire ends.
3 If current fuel protection ≤ +0 for any reason, then Fuel Fed
Fire. If protected (+1 or better), then major fuel leak as below.
4 Major Fuel Leak. Lose one D10 of end., double all end. costs.
Leak ends in D5 Op-turns (white smoke until leak ends).
5 to 8 Steady fuel leak. Lose D5 endurance per Op-turn per leak.
≥ 9 Minor fuel loss if odd (lose D10 endurance), no loss if even.
Modifiers: +Fuel protection. –2 if prior fuel hit exits. –1 if extra aux. or
drop tanks on board (even if empty, due to vapors). –1 per existing major
fuel leak not due to fuel fire prior to critical roll. –3 if rocket fuel.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
D10 COCKPIT Critical Effects
≤ 3 Random living crew member killed (KIA).
4 to 6 Random living crew member wounded (WIA - see notes).
≥ 9 Roll once on Equipment table.
Modifiers: + Cockpit protection, (Prot. –1 if beam attack, not < +0).
Notes: Cockpit criticals disable pressure cabins. If living crew ≥ 8, roll
twice for effects per critical. 2nd crew WIA result = KIA, 2nd pilot WIA
= disabled. Disabled pilots roll D10. If ≤ 5, pilot can function twice that
many combat turns before disabling takes effect, else KIA. D10 times
3 = Op-turns disabled crew or pilots can survive without medical help.
D10 WING Critical Effects (visible damage)
≤ 1 Wing spar fails (wing rips off, A/C is destroyed).
2, 3 Wing spar damaged. ≥ BT turns risk overstress.
–1.0 to max safe dive speed per wing spar hit.
4 Ailerons hit. +1 to bank and slip/skid FPs, no snap-rolls.
5* Two functional wing weapon groups or stations disabled.*
6 Roll D10, odd = landing gear damaged, even = flaps jam.
7 Roll D10, odd = wing engine critical, even = 1 fuel critical.
8 If bombs, torpedoes, rockets carried, roll D10. If roll ≥ 6
A/C explodes (Fireball, 10% of load's soft attack strength =
– LH modifier to explosion attacks on nearby A/C).
9* One functional wing weapon group or station disabled.*
≥ 10 Torn surface skin, permanent +1 decel per game turn.
Modifiers: +1 for H class A/C, –1 if A/C severely damaged.
Notes: Two spar hits destroy F, L class, three destroy ≥ M class. *Bays
never disabled. Wing mounted defensive guns included If no wing
weapons or stations remain, but A/C has wing mounted engines, roll
for engine critical, else = hollow space.
D10 EQUIPMENT Critical Effects
1 Random living crew member wounded.
2 Landing gear jammed; fixed gear, skis, floats or hull damaged.
3 Gear / flap systems hit, retractable landing gear trails down
unless jammed, and flaps jam in place. If A/C has fixed gear,
skis or floats or sea plane hull, these items are damaged.
4 Fixed gunsight lost, if none, bombsight lost, else hollow.
5 Roll D10, odd = Oxygen out, even = lose radios & radar.
6 Gun synchronization fails. If synch. guns fired, roll D10, if
≤ 3, propeller shot off & engine knocked out. If no synch.
guns, one living non-pilot crew WIA; if none, hollow space.
7 Flight instruments out, roll for disorientation if A/C ends in
clouds / no moonlight (+50 mod. to rolls. NA if in formation).
8 One functional weapon group, defensive gun or wpn. station
disabled, if none = oxygen out. If no oxygen, hollow space.
9 Navigation instruments, radios and radar knocked out.
10 One exit / canopy jammed, +30 to bail out rolls from exit.
(NA if jammed exit is already open canopy or bay doors).
D10 FLIGHT CONTROLS Critical Effects
≤ 2* Tail structure hit, –1.0 to max safe dive speed. Two such
hits destroy F, L class, three destroy M, H+ class A/C.
3** Key control cables severed. A/C permanently out-of-control.
4* Rudder knocked out. No snap rolls, slips, skids, or spin recovery.
5* Elevators hit, only TT or less rates may be used.
6 Ailerons hit. +1 to bank and slip/skid FPs. No snap-rolls.
7 Throttle hit, roll D10, odd = eng. limited to ≤ cruise power,
even = throttle jammed in place. See Chap. 11 if multi-eng.
8 Control cables jamming, roll D10 at start of each move,
odd = only TT or less rates allowed, even = OK.
9 Controls sluggish, allowed maneuver rates reduced by one
(If speed allows BT, then ≤ HT possible. EZ always OK).
≥ 10 One def. gun, wing gun, weapon station or bay disabled.
Modifiers: +1 for M or larger class A/C.
Notes: *Subsequent rudder, elevator hits = tail structure hit.
**First such hit does not affect ≥ M class, but 2nd does.
Crackshots may adjust the critical hit area roll result by ±1 if range ≤
2. If range ≤ 1, they may name a specific engine or defensive gunner
to be affected in lieu of random engine or random crew member pick.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 3

FIXED FORWARD FIRING GUNFIRE ARCS DIAGRAM (9.2)

Illustrated below are the horizontal fields-of-fire for A/C not turning and for A/C turning (i.e., with turn carry in progress or having just faced due to
a turn, skid, transition induced facing or reversal maneuver). Examples are shown for A/C facing a hex side, a hex juncture and for A/C located
on a hex side. Any target located in the shaded area or on a line that is a border of the shaded area may be fired upon.

A/C Turning Left A/C Turning Right

A/C Turning Left A/C Turning Right

A/C Not Turning

A/C Turning Left A/C Turning Right

A/C Not Turning A/C Not Turning

11 Deflection Arcs Diagram (9.3)

11
10 12 The twelve "clock" lines used to define deflection 10 12
arcs are shown for A/C facing a hex or hex side,
09 01 and for A/C located on a hex side. A/C front and
rear arcs are defined as follows: 09 01
• Front Arc = Clock lines 11 to 01 inclusive.
08 02 • Rear Arc = Clock lines 05 to 07 inclusive. 02
Some rules refer to specific lines about an A/C, such 08
07 03 as the 12:00 (o'clock) line or 6:00 line. These are
the same lines as the depicted clock lines. 07 03
06 04
06
05 05 04
12:00 Line
Blind Arcs (8.1.2)
Tailing (8.1.1)
Rear: If cockpit vis. = poor, sighter 11 12 01 Simple Test: Tailing A/C must be in
is blind to targets in rear arc (clock tailed A/C's rear arc (lines 05 to 07,
lines 05 to 07 included). If cockpit 10 02 inclusive), with range ≤ 8, and with
vis. = fair or good, sighter is blind to tailed A/C in own front arc (lines 11
targets between, but not on, clock to 01, inclusive).
lines 05 to 07. 9:00 Line 09 03 3:00 Line
Deflection Test: If diving, tailing A/C
Rear-Low: If in upright bank angles, must be above tailee; if climbing,
sighter is blind to lower targets in rear 08 04 below. If in level flight, horizontal
arc, or if in inverted bank angles, to range must be > vertical range.
higher targets in rear arc. 07 05 Tailing A/C must have tailee in own
Vertical Flight Effect: If sighter in
06 front arc, range ≤ 8 and show final
VD or VC attitude, & vertical range deflection of 30° or less if horizontal
> horizontal range, a lower or higher 6:00 Line range ≥ vertical range, or 60° or less
target (resp.) in rear arc is visible. if vertical range > horizontal range.

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 4

FIXED GUNFIRE DEFLECTION Heading Difference (12:00L) Deflection Factor

DETERMINATION PLAY AID (9.3) 180° x 3
Nose Attitude Steps
3: Vertical Climb 150° x 4 150° x 4
2: Steep Climb Example: Steep
1: Shallow Climb climb is three
0: Level Flight steps away from
1: Shallow Dive shallow dive. 120° x 6 120° x 6
2: Steep Dive
3: Vertical Dive
Directions: Start at target A/C position on the
sight ring at left showing the facing difference
between the shooter & target as it appears
on game map. Adjust position around ring as 90° x 5 90° x 5
directed below under the applicable shooter (3:00L) (9:00L)
& target flight attitude & facing relationship.
Adjustments through the 180° or 0° positions
are allowed. Multiply the target's defense
strength by the deflection factor found at the
final position reached to get a final defense 60° x 3 60° x 3
strength for determining combat odds.
Spinning Targets: Use "60° x 3" for final
deflection factor. Lift vector, tracking shot,
beam shot, near 0° shot and critical hit shot
angle mods. NA against spinning A/C. 30° x 2 30° x 2
0° Final Deflection: Allowed only if target
also in shooter's non-turning gun arc (whether Beam Attack: Occurs if final 0° x 1 Very Low Deflection Shots:
turning or not). If not, deflection = 30°. deflection = 90° and shooter on (6:00L) If shooter's 12:00 line super-
target's 3:00 or 9:00 line. If so imposes target's 6:00 / 12:00
Long Bursts: Allowed if target in shooter's
shift combat odds column one lines, and final deflection is:
horiz. field-of-fire for 2/3 of any of shooter's
to the left. (a) ≤ 30°, then apply a –20 LH
FPs (rounded up).
Head-on Attack: Occurs if modifier to shot roll or...
Tracking Shots: Allowed if shooter had shooter in target's front arc and
target in horiz. field-of-fire for final 2/3 of its (b) ≥ 150°, then reduce final
final deflection is ≥ 150° or both deflection factor by 1, but never
FPs (rounded up) and final deflection ≤ 60°. firing fixed guns at each other. to less than "x 1".
Shooter

Target AND shooter BOTH in Level flight: Lift Vector Match

Any angle: No adjustments for any heading difference.
Final Deflection ≤ 60° =
Shooter and target must
Target AND shooter Both climbing or Both diving:
have same bank angle.
0° difference: Move marker away from 0° for each step difference between shooter and target.
60° or 30° diff.: Move marker away from 0° for each two steps difference between shooter and target. Final Defl. = 90° = Both
90° difference: Sum the steps shooter and target are from level. Move marker toward 0° for each three steps. in same LV or IV bank, or
150° or 120° diff.: Sum the steps shooter and target are from level. Move marker toward 0° for each two steps. in same direction bank.
180° difference: Sum the steps shooter and target are from level. Move marker toward 0° for each step.
Final Defl. ≥ 120° = Both
Target or shooter in level flight AND other Not: upright or both inverted
0° difference: Move marker away from 0° for each step difference between shooter and target. with opposite direction
Any other: Move marker toward 90° for each two steps difference between shooter and target. banks, or both in same
90° difference: No adjustments required. LV or IV bank, or one up-
180° difference: Move marker toward 0° for each step difference between shooter and target. right, other inverted, both
in same direction bank
Target or shooter climbing AND other diving: and any turning would be
0° difference: Move marker away from 0° for each step diff. between shooter and target. toward each other's posi-
30° or 60° diff.: Move marker away from 0° for each step diff. more than one between shooter and target. tion (not away).
120° or 90° diff.: Move marker away from 0° for each two steps difference between shooter and target.
150° difference: Compare steps away from level climber is with diver. For each step difference more than one, move marker toward 0°.
180° difference: Compare steps away from level climber is with diver. For each step difference from level move marker toward 0°.

FLIGHT Attitude Fixed Gun field-of-fire limits

Shot Limits Level flight Shallow flight Steep flight Vertical flight
Same Hex Attack: Same Altitude 0 or 1 increment 1 to 3 increments 1 increment to Any.
Further Limit ± 1 incr. per 2 hex or less 2 incr. per hex 6 incr. per hex Any amount in range
Nearer Limit Same Altitude 1 incr. per 3 hex or less 2 incr. per hex 6 incr. per hex

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 5

DEFENSIVE GUNFIRE PLAY AID (9.3)
Directions - For each A/C firing defensive guns in an attack:
1. Total firepower of all guns with same crit. rating firing at target.
2. Using clock line diagrams below, determine firepower modifier.
3. Multiply A/C's total firepower by modifier to get final firepower.
4. Sum final firepowers of all A/C firing at target into a single attack.
5. Resolve shots normally using applicable LH modifiers.
6. If target climbing or diving away from prime shooter's altitude, or
target in level flight and prime shooter is climbing or diving away
from target, AND difference in flight attitudes between the two is
2 or more steps, use High Aspect Shot LH modifiers.
High Aspect Shot: Prime shooter & target diverging in altitude & flight
attitude is ≥ 2 steps apart, apply following modifiers:
a. If Horizontal range ≥ Vertical range, +10 LH
b. If Vertical > Horizontal by 100' or more, +20 LH
Example: Bomber in level flight is the prime shooter firing at a higher
target in a steep climb. Horizontal range is 3 hexes (900 feet) and the
vertical range is 1,000 feet = apply +20 LH modifier to shot.
Formation Effects: Up to two A/C not in formation, up to three in same
flexible formation, or up to six in same fixed formation may combine fire
at a single target (exception: see Turret-Armed Fighters 10.5).
Prime Shooter = Defensive firing A/C with strongest total firepower (after
deflection mods.). If > one A/C is equally strong, use closest. If > one is
equally close, firing player chooses which is prime shooter.
Defensive Fire Strength Modifier Diagram: Find clock line entry of shot
from shooter to target. Multiply firepower by fractional modifiers given in
diagram below. Note: a ( ) around clock line nos. in table below means:
"excluding that clock-line". Examples - Bomber A below fires at fighter B.
The fire enters B's hex between the 09 and 07 clock lines = multiply total
firepower by 1/3 to get final firepower. Against fighter C, the fire enters
between the 11 and 09 clock lines = multiply by 1/2 to get final firepower.

Defensive gun Vertical

Field-of-Fire shifts

11 12 01 11 12 If A/C in steep or vertical flight,

09
A to (03). Rear = lines 03 to 09.
07 05
06
Defensive Firepower
Strength Modifiers
12:00 line = x Full
(12) to 01 = x 2/3
(01) to 03 = x 1/2
(03) to (05) = x 1/3
09 adjust vertical field-of-fire limits
for front and rear hemisphere
01 coverage by amount given
03 below. Front = clock lines (09)
07 B
Arc Climb shift
03 Code Front / Rear
06 05 A/C± = (A/C±) +3 / –3
N+ = (N+) +5 / –5
U+ = U+ / 6+
U– = 6– / U–
N– = (N–) +5 / –5
12
Arc Dive shifts
11 Full 01 Code Front / Rear
A/C± = (A/C±) –3 / +3
N+ = (N+) –5 / +5
2/3
U+ = 6+ / U+
U– = U– / 6–
1/2
1/2

05 to 07 = x 1/2 N– = (N–) –5 / +5
09 03
(07) to (09) = x 1/3 C Vert. Field-of-Fire Codes
09 to (11) = x 1/2 A/C = A/C altitude, 0 at "0"
11 to (12) = x 2/3 1 = 100 / hex, 100 at "0"
1/3

1/3

1/2 2 = 200 / hex, 100 at "0"

( ) = clock line excluded. 3 = 300 / hex, 200 at "0"
4 = 400 / hex, 200 at "0"
07 06 05 5 = 500 / hex, 300 at "0"
6 = 600 / hex, 300 at "0"
Defensive Gunfire Rules Summary (10.5) 7 = 700 / hex, 400 at "0"
Limits 8 = 800 / hex, 400 at "0"
• A defensive gun may only fire once per turn (snap shots, long bursts, tracking shots not applicable). 9 = 900 / hex, 500 at "0"
• Target may be attacked once by each critical hit value during a defensive fire response. >9 = U = unlimited / hex
• Defensive fire allowed in response to declared head-on shot, and in defensive fire portion of combat phase. and 600 at range "0"
• Defensive gun may not fire if aircraft incurred Neg.-G, snap rolled, was inverted at any time in game turn, or "+" = above shooter
ended in a vertical flight attitude (exception: F, MF, D class may fire from vertical attitudes). "–" = below shooter
• Turrets may not fire if > HT rate used, manual guns may not fire if > TT rate used (or > EZ rate for H+ class).
Relative Speed Calculation
Shot LH Modifiers
Defl. Formula
• All maneuver, crew, A/C related modifiers, and quad. turret guns hit bonus are based on prime shooter's A/C.
• Target jinks = +05 per 30° of facing or transition at HT+ rates. Target hanging (rel. speed < 2.0) = –10.
150+ Add both
• Relative speed LH modifiers are based on prime shooter and target aircraft relationship. 120 Faster +1/2 Other
• Relative speed = +(2 x (relative speed – 2)) (per formula at left, but ignore if negative value). 90 Fastest of both
• Tracking shot used by target against prime shooter = –10 LH to defensive shot. 60 Faster –1/2 Other
• Concentrated fire damage bonus allowed if prime shooter using any quadruple gun turrets in shot. 30– Target – shooter

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – AAA COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 6

Vertical Range Table (3.1)

Range to Target (3.1): "Total Range" = Longer of horizontal or vertical range, in hexes, plus half the shorter range rounded down. 300 feet of
altitude difference = one hex of range. Use Vertical Range table below and find entry closest to, but not > listed altitude difference in levels. Read
range in hexes under entry. For ranges > 1, round any extra 100 feet to target down and any extra 200 feet up to next range.

Alt. Diff: 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.1 5.4 5.7 6.0 6.3 6.6 6.9 7.2
Range: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Alt. Diff: 7.5 7.8 8.1 8.4 8.7 9.0 9.3 9.6 9.9 10.2 10.5 10.8 11.1 11.4 11.7 12.0 12.3 12.6 12.9 13.2 13.5 13.8 14.1 14.4
Range: 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

Alt. Diff: 14.7 15.0 15.3 15.6 15.9 16.2 16.5 16.8 17.1 17.4 17.7 18.0 18.3 18.6 18.9 19.2 19.5 19.8 20.1 20.4 20.7 21.0 21.3 21.6
Range: 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

AAA GUN COMBAT (24)

AAA Limits: All land guns of same critical rating firing at same target must total all firepower values into a single attack. Naval guns do same but
each ship resolves its fire at A/C separately. Any no. of naval AAA batteries of 20mm or smaller may combine fire at an A/C & up to six batteries
of guns > 20mm may combine fire at an A/C. Radar and Director modifiers do not apply unless ≥ 1/2 the batteries firing are under such control.
Light and Medium AAA Gun Aimed Fire Procedure: Select target A/C. Sum FP of all guns with same critical rating into one attack. Roll for LH
to determine number of unmodified 1-1 odds damage rolls allowed against target by that critical rating. Total hits from all 1-1 damage rolls before
rolling for critical hit damage. One turn of non-firing required for a light or medium AAA gun to switch targets.
Heavy Gun Barrage Fire Procedure: If first shot, reveal FO target hex and altitude in the combat phase and place a barrage marker in the target
hex. Conduct first shot scatter (24.3.1). If not first shot, FO barrage marker may be adjusted by up to 10 shifts per turn. A shift = 1 hex or 500 feet
of altitude. Roll for attack LH (applying modifiers) for each set of guns with the same critical hit rating firing into B-zone to find number of unmodi-
fied 1-1 odds damage rolls generated (limited to not more than twice the number of guns firing). Randomly distribute any damage rolls against
A/C targets (real or phantom) in zone. No single A/C target may be allotted more than three damage rolls. Total hits from all damage rolls before
applying critical rolls. Heavy guns may be either on standby, become engaged, shoot or cease fire in a game turn.

LT. & MED. AAA AIMED FIRE AAA CHARACTERISTICS SUMMARY

AIMED FIRE MODIFIERS
Summed Firepower = – Total Firepower
Target Size Modifier = – 05 x A/C size modifier.
Target Speed = + 02 x A/C speed
Target Flight Attitude = + 05 if steep, +10 if vertical.
Target Horizontal Jinks = + 05 x no. of 30° facing changes done
via any means except vert. rolls.
Target Vertical Jinks = + 05 x no. of 30° transition steps.
Target Vert. Roll Jinks = + 05 per VR > 1, separated from
prior VR by ≥ 1 non-VR HFP.
AAA on moving vehicle / ship in rough seas = +20 / +10
Naval AAA director aimed / manually aimed = +00 / +10
Radar Aimed pre-Oct. 44 / Oct. 44+ / Jun. 45+ = +00 / –10 / –20
Incidental Target = +10
At Night, Tgt. sighted or illuminated = +20 (NA if radar aimed)
At Night, Tgt. silhouetted = +30 (NA if radar aimed)
At Night, Tgt. hidden (two gun / batt. limit) = +60 (NA if radar aimed)
Searchlight A/C Capture: D10 ≤ 2, +1 if range > 30, +1 if speed > 5.0,
± A/C size, –2 if radar aimed, cumulative –1 per attempt on same target.
Searchlight Evasion: If HT rates used or speed > 5.0. D10 ≤ 1+sum of HT+
rate facing & att. changes. +1 per SL >1, –1 if speed > 6.0, –1 if range > 30.
1-1 ODDS DAMAGE ROLLS EARNED (unmodified)
One roll if final LH ≤ –30 (Percentile ≤ 23)
Two rolls if final LH ≤ –50 (Percentile ≤ 12)
Three rolls if final LH ≤ –70 (Percentile ≤ 05)
AAA Size Type Crit. Rating Damage Notes
≤ 8mm Light 4 –––
≤ 15mm Light 3 –––
≤ 25mm Light 2 –––
≤ 35mm Med. 1.5 2 x critical hits
≤ 40mm Med. 1 2 x hits, 2 x critical hits
≤ 57mm Med. 1 3 x hits, 3 x critical hits
≤ 102mm Heavy 3 –––
> 102mm Heavy 2 –––
HEAVY GUN BARRAGE FIRE DAMAGE ROLLS
One unmodified 1-1 odds Damage Roll per each –20 LH.
Heavy AAA Shot Modifiers:
Summed Firepower of guns used = – Total FP
Per F or L / M, H or SH aircraft in Zone = –1 / –2
Radar Aimed before Oct. 1944 = –10
Radar Aimed Oct. 1944 or after = –20
Proximity fused shells in use = –15
Concentrated / Normal / Long range Barrage = +30 / +40 / +50
Barrage Firing at Night (NA if radar aimed) = +30
Naval AAA > 1/2 manually aimed = +10
Zone overlapped by other zones = +20
Each fire order aiming shift on turn of shot = +05
Actual Guns Barrage Zone Radius = Target hex out to:
Firing For Concentrated / Normal / Long Ranges

Incidental AAA Targets (24.2): Any A/C stacked with, or at range zero
to the actual target (range 0 = same hex / hexside within 200 feet) are
attacked using the same FP applied to the original target. If total firepower
is ≥ 50 or ≥ 100, then any A/C at a range of 1, or 2, respectively, to the
original target, are also attacked. In this case, reduce FP by half (round
down) for each hex of range the incidental target A/C is from the original
target. For all incidental fire attacks use the same modifiers that applied
to the original target +10 for being an incidental attack.­­
1 to 2 = Tgt. Hex / = 1 hex / = 2 hexes
3 to 6 = 1 hex / = 2 hexes / = 3 hexes
7 to 12 = 2 hexes / = 3 hexes / = 4 hexes
> 12 = 3 hexes / = 4 hexes / = 5 hexes
B-Zone Notes: Minimum targets in zone = zone radius, add "phantom"
targets as needed. Engagement area = any hex or hexside of the
hexes in the zone, + or – 500 feet from target altitude. Concentrated
zones allowed if range ≤ 30. Long range zone mandatory if range > 60.

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 7
GROUND ATTACK PROCEDURES SUMMARY

STRAFING (19.1 & 19.2)

Parameters: Target in gun's field-of-fire or on LOA to target for at least one FP. If staying in level flight and target lower, ≥ one altitude
increment must be lost per turn of aiming. A/C gun ranges are doubled. Deflection modifier always x1. Tracking shots NA.
Large cannon non-turning field-of-fire widens one hex for each 10 hexes of range, roll to hit LH listed on ADC.
Aiming: Minimum: FPs ≥ to 1/2 speed. Full: FPs ≥ to speed. Note: Attacks do not cancel aiming if primary target unchanged.
Modifiers: • Universal A/C mods. = variable • Big Gun MG sighting = –20 • Terrain effects mods. = Variable
• 1 turn extra aiming = –10 • 2 turns extra aiming = –20 • Minimum aiming = +20
• No aiming or Sec. Target = +40 ea. • Each hex of range past 6 for N only or unharmonized guns = +2

ROCKETRY (19.3)
Parameters: Have target in fixed-gun field-of-fire, wings level or in upright bank, within min and max range of rockets fired.
If in level flight and target lower, one altitude increment must be lost during move. Rockets do double damage to targets.
Aiming: Minimum: FPs ≥ to 1/2 speed. Full: FPs ≥ to speed. Attacks do not cancel aiming if target unchanged.
Modifiers: See ATG Rocketry Tables, page 6 for attack mods. Use Terrain Effects mods. when resolving damage.

BOMBING (20.1)
Parameters: All bombs must be released from legal release point hex (Combat Tables, page 7).
Level Bombing (20.2) - Aim while in level flight, with wings level or in upright bank. Drop bombs from level flight.
Glide Bombing (20.3) - Aim while in level, shallow or steep dives, wings level or in upright bank. Drop from shallow dive.
Steep Dive Bombing (20.4) - Aim while in any mix of shallow, steep, or vertical dives, with wings level or in upright bank.
Drop from steep dive. Any "L", "F" or "D" class A/C may use this method unless scenario stipulates otherwise.
Vertical Dive Bombing (20.5) - Aim while in any mix of steep or vertical dives, with wings level or in upright bank.
Drop bombs from vertical dive. Only "D" class A/C may use vertical dive bombing.
Aiming: Minimum: One full game turn on LOA to target. Full: Two full game turns on LOA to target.
Modifiers: Bomb Accuracy LH Mods. Table (Combat Tables, page 7). Use Terrain Effects mods. when resolving damage.

LOW-LEVEL (21.0 & 22.0)

Parameters: Skip Bombing (21.1) - Drop from one increment above water, in level flight with wings level. May strafe in same attack.
Parafrags & CB Dispensers (21.2) - Drop from ≤ 1,500 above target, in level flight with wings level, at speed ≤ 6.0.
CB bombs, cannisters, bundles use normal bombing rules, but must preselect bombing type and release altitude range.
Torpedo Bombing (22.0) - See Naval Play Aids, page 1.
Release Points: Skip Bombing - Proper RP = 1/2 speed rounded up in hexes away. RP may be from one to A/C speed rounded up, away.
Parafrag or CB Disp. Bombing - Use Level bomb RP ranges for A/C altitude at time of drop minus 2 hexes (but not < 0).
Aiming: Skip, Parafrag, CB Dispenser - Time as for Strafing. Note – Strafe aiming and attacks count as aiming for skip bombing.
Modifiers: • Bomb accuracy mods. = variable (Combat Tables, page 7) • Each hex beyond skip bomb proper release point = +20
• Skip & Parafrag / CB dispenser base modifiers = –30 / –60 • Each hex inside skip bomb proper release point = +10

LINES OF APPROACH DIAGRAM (18.2) 19.1 Hard (armored) Target Effects on Strafing: Guns < 12.7mm = no effect (0 att.
str.), but can still be used for sighting. Guns of < 30mm, and 30mm Mk-108 guns, cause
only 1/2 damage (rounded up). Guns of 30 to 35mm attack normally. Big guns of ≥
37mm double firepower. 37mm to 40mm guns do double damage, guns > 40mm do
triple damage, Large Cannons ≥ 75mm do quintuple damage.
19.4 Strafing & Rocketing Armor: Top attack if attacker in steep or vertical dive, else
front if attacking from target's 11 to 01 clock lines (inclusive), rear if from 05 to 07 clock
lines (inclusive), else side attack. Shift odds two columns right for side attack, three
columns right for rear or top attack and –10 LH mod. if top attack.
20.1 Large Bombs, Very Large Bombs and Secondary Targets: Bombs ≥ 1,000,
10 10 ≥ 4,000, ≥ 8,000 and ≥ 16,000 lbs can also attack targets in adjacent or further hexes
from their impact point. See Rule 20.1 for specifics.­­­

Terrain Effects Chart (18.2)

Any LOA that passes through center of target hex
(see solid lines), or a hexside of the target hex (see
dotted lines) is a valid LOA for aiming. If Target on
a hexside, LOA must bisect hexside or touch either
end of hexside to be a valid for aiming.
Target entrenched / Bunkered* = Defense factor x 2 / x 4 (*soft targets = hard)
Type Attack Terrain LH Mod. Notes
Bombs Rough, Buildings, Woods +10, +10, +20 –––
Fire Bombs Towers, Buildings, Woods +00, +00, +10 Starts Fire if...*
Water hexes +00 1/2 Strength
Rockets Buildings, Woods +10, +20 –––
Strafing Rough, Large Buildings** +10, +30** Infantry Entrenched**
Light housing, Woods +10, +20 ––––
* If summed F attack strength ≥ 2 x wood structure defense strength, or 3 x stone or
brick building defense strength, or always if in woods hex regardless of target.

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 8

ADDITIONAL BOMBING RULES (Ch. 20)

FIRE, SMOKE & BLAST ZONES (20.8)
Blast Zones (BZ): A BZ is created in any hex hit by bombs (other than
CB or Fire types), torpedoes or "on-target" rockets having a summed
soft attack strength ≥ 50 pts. If an attack will result from falling bomb or
torpedoe movement, immediately place a BZ marker in the attacked hex,
before A/C move start moving, For rocket attacks, a BZ marker is placed
when the attack is resolved in the combat phase.
BZ Size & Effects: The BZ includes the impact hex, any extra hexes
affected by bomb size and all hexsides forming them, from ground level
to 1,000 feet above, immediately upon placement. This rises to 2,000
feet above the ground during the turn after placement, and falls back to
1,000 on second turn after placement. BZ markers are removed at the
end of second turn after placement. A/C situated in a BZ in the Combat
Phase of the turn BZ was placed are attacked at 1-1 odds. Otherwise,
A/C that enter, exit, or transit an existing blast zone during movement
undergo a "1-4" attack in the Combat Phase, adding a –05 LH to roll for
each FP expended that left them within the BZ during their move. A –10
modifier applies for each 100 soft attack strength points the weapon(s)
exploded with. BZ attacks have a critical hit rating of 3.
Fires & Smoke Palls: Incendiary bombs (code F) can set wooded terrain
or flammable structures on fire (see Terrain Effects Chart). Infantry and
mobile AAA inside or on buildings that are on fire, exit to the outside in a
D10 of turns. Non-mobile AAA guns on burning buildings cease fire (are
abandoned) after a D10 of turns. Fires and bombs of ≥ 2,000 lbs. in size
create permanent smoke palls when started or their attack is resolved.
Smoke palls occupy the target hex and hexsides, and each pall adds
+10 to any future strafe or rocket attacks conducted into the hex, or any
AAA firing out of the hex for the rest of the game.
BOMB SCATTER (20.1.1)
Scatter: A final LH ≥ –34 = bombs scatter in clock direction and distance
in hexes given below in Bomb Scatter Table. Scatter Limits: Bombs may
not scatter further than average (rounded down) of bomb's horizontal
speed and time-of-fall; nor to positions behind the A/C's 3:00 - 9:00 line
as existed at release point (unless dropped from steep or vertical dives).
If so, reduce scatter distance as needed to obtain a legal position. If a
scatter is to a hexside, randomly determine which of two hexes sharing
the hexside the bombs actually land in (unless occupied by ship target,
see rule 27.1). Example Bomb Scatter: If bomb accuracy roll final LH =
+42, bomb scatters two hexes in the 12:00 direction relative to A/C flight
path as indicated by the star symbol in diagrams below.
BOMB FUSE EFFECTS (20.6)
Contact Fuses:
• All bombs use soft attack strength versus soft targets.
• HE and SAP bombs use hard attack strength vs. hard targets.
• AP bombs use soft attack strength vs. hard targets.
• No penetration ability against any ship target.
• Fuse extenders: –30 LH vs. soft, +30 LH vs. hard targets.
Penetration Fuses:
• All bombs = +30 LH to attacks vs. soft land targets.
• All bombs use soft / Hard attack strength vs. soft / Hard targets.
• Unarmored ships penetrated. AP bombs penetrate level 1 armor.
• SAP, AP dropped from ≥ 4,000 penetrate level 1, 2 armor, resp.
• SAP, AP dropped from ≥ 8,000 penetrate level 1, 3 armor, resp.
• SAP, AP bombs of ≥ 1,000 lbs. increase armor pen. by 1.
• Bombs dropped in steep or vertical dives reduce the minimum
altitude for penetration by 1.0 for each 2.0 of speed they have.
Delayed Action Fuses (preselect 1 or more turns of delay)
• All bombs +60 LH vs. soft land targets or for ship near miss attacks.
• All bombs use Soft / Hard attack strength vs. Soft / Hard targets.
• Required for bombs used in skip bombing. Normally 1 turn delay.
• Ship armor penetration same as for penetration fused bombs.
FALLING BOMB PROCEDURE (20.1)
• Place a falling bomb marker under A/C when bombs are released.
• Marker HFPs = HFPs used by A/C on turn of release (never < one).
• Each turn, prior to A/C moves, advance marker down LOA toward
target hex using all marker HFPs. Stop once marker reaches target
hex. The bomb attack occurs in the Combat Phase of the turn the
TOF expires if the marker reaches the target on or before that turn.
• If TOF expires before marker reaches target hex, the attack occurs
at START of Combat Phase of turn after the turn the TOF expired.
• On the turn of attack, resolve scatter before A/C move for purposes
of identifying BZ danger areas.
Bomb Accuracy Rolls: A final LH ≤ –35 = bombs "on target". A final
LH ≥ –34 = Bombs scatter, and ≥ +116 = random bombs.
Enhanced Bomb Attacks: If final LH is ≤ –55, or ≤ –75, double, or
triple attack value of bombs vs. land targets.
Random Bombs: A final LH ≥ +116 = random bombs (see rule 20.1.1
for additional scatter effects). Random bombs have no scatter limits.

BOMB SCATTER TABLE

11 12
LH Dir. – Dist. LH Dir. – Dist. 10 12 11 01
≤ –35 On Target ≤ +76 02 - 2
≤ –29 12 - 1 ≤ +79 08 - 2 09 10 02
01
≤ –23 06 - 1 ≤ +82 10 - 2
≤ –17 01 - 1 ≤ +85 04 - 2
≤ –11 07 - 1 ≤ +88 03 - 2
≤ –05 11 - 1 ≤ +91 09 - 2 08 ≤ –35 02 09 ≤ –35
03
≤ +01 05 - 1 ≤ +94 12 - 3
≤ +07 02 - 1 ≤ +97 06 - 3
07 03 08 04
≤ +13 08 - 1 ≤ +100 01 - 3
≤ +19 10 - 1 ≤ +103 07 - 3
≤ +25 04 - 1 ≤ +106 11 - 3 06 04 07 05
≤ +31 03 - 1 ≤ +109 05 - 3 05 06
≤ +37 09 - 1 = +110 02 - 3
≤ +43 12 - 2 = +111 08 - 3
≤ +49 06 - 2 = +112 10 - 3
≤ +55 01 - 2 = +113 04 - 3
≤ +61 07 - 2 = +114 03 - 3
≤ +67 11 - 2 = +115 09 - 3
≤ +73 05 - 2 ≥ +116 Random

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 9

BOMB RELEASE POINT TABLES (20.1)

Level Bomb Release Points (20.2) Aircraft Speeds Time of Fall
Altitude ≤ 2.5 ≤ 3.5 ≤ 4.5 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 6.5 ≤ 7.5 ≤ 8.5 ≤ 9.5 ≥ 10.0 RP Mod. ≤ 4.5 ≤ 7.5 ≥ 8.0

≤ 8,500 10-13 14-18 19-23 24-28 29-33 33-38 37-42 41-47 45-51 +30 6 6 6
≤ 7,000 9-12 13-17 18-21 22-26 26-30 30-35 34-39 37-43 41-47 +25 5 5 5
≤ 6,000 8-11 12-16 17-20 21-24 24-28 28-32 31-36 35-40 38-44 +20 5 5 5
≤ 5,000 8-10 11-14 15-18 19-22 22-26 25-30 29-33 32-37 34-40 +15 4 4 4
≤ 4,000 7-9 10-13 14-16 17-20 20-23 23-27 25-30 28-33 31-36 +15 4 4 4
≤ 3,200 6-8 9-12 12-15 15-18 18-21 20-24 23-27 25-30 27-33 +10 3 3 3
≤ 2,500 5-7 8-10 11-13 13-16 15-19 18-21 20-24 22-27 24-29 +10 3 3 3
≤ 2,000 5-7 7-9 9-12 12-14 14-17 16-19 17-22 19-24 21-26 +05 2 2 2
≤ 1,500 4-6 6-8 8-10 10-12 12-15 13-17 15-19 16-21 18-23 +05 2 2 2
≤ 1,000 3-5 5-7 6-8 8-10 9-12 10-14 12-16 13-17 14-19 +05 2 2 2
≤ 600 2-4 4-5 5-7 6-8 7-9 8-11 9-12 9-14 10-15 –00 1 1 1
≤ 300 1-3 2-4 3-5 4-6 4-7 5-8 5-9 6-10 6-11 –00 1 1 1

Shallow Dive (Glide bomb) Bomb Release Points (20.3) Time of Fall

Altitude ≤ 2.5 ≤ 3.5 ≤ 4.5 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 6.5 ≤ 7.5 ≤ 8.5 ≤ 9.5 ≥ 10.0 RP Mod. ≤ 4.5 ≤ 7.5 ≥ 8.0
≤ 6,500 8-11 11-16 14-20 17-23 20-27 22-31 24-34 26-38 28-41 +15 4 4 4
≤ 5,500 7-10 10-14 13-18 15-22 18-25 20-28 22-31 23-34 25-37 +15 4 3 3
≤ 4,500 6-9 9-13 11-16 14-20 16-23 17-26 19-28 21-31 22-34 +10 3 3 3
≤ 3,500 5-8 8-11 10-14 12-17 13-20 15-22 16-25 17-27 18-29 +05 3 2 2
≤ 2,700 5-7 7-10 8-13 10-15 11-17 12-20 13-22 14-24 15-26 +05 2 2 2
≤ 2,000 4-6 5-9 7-11 8-13 9-15 10-17 11-18 11-20 12-22 –00 2 2 1
≤ 1,400 3-5 4-7 5-9 6-11 7-12 8-14 8-15 8-16 9-18 –00 2 1 1
≤ 900 2-4 3-6 4-7 5-9 5-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 –00 1 1 1
≤ 600 2-4 3-5 3-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 5-11 5-11 –05 1 1 0
≤ 400 1-3 2-4 2-5 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-9 –05 1 0 0
≤ 300 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-6 –05 0 0 0
≤ 200 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 –05 0 0 0

Steep Dive Bomb Release Points (20.4) Time of Fall

Altitude ≤ 2.5 ≤ 3.5 ≤ 4.5 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 6.5 ≤ 7.5 ≤ 8.5 ≤ 9.5 ≥ 10.0 RP Mod. ≤ 4.5 ≤ 7.5 ≥ 8.0
≤ 6,500 3-10 5-13 6-16 7-19 8-21 8-23 9-25 9-27 10-29 +10 3 3 2
≤ 5,500 3-9 4-12 5-14 6-17 7-19 7-21 8-23 8-24 8-26 +10 3 2 2
≤ 4,500 3-8 4-11 5-13 5-15 6-17 6-18 7-20 7-21 7-22 +05 3 2 2
≤ 3,700 2-7 3-9 4-11 4-13 5-15 5-16 5-17 6-18 6-19 –00 2 2 1
≤ 3,000 2-6 3-8 3-10 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 5-16 5-17 –00 2 1 1
≤ 2,500 2-6 2-7 3-9 3-10 3-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-14 –00 2 1 1
≤ 2,000 1-5 2-7 2-8 3-9 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-12 –05 1 1 1
≤ 1,600 1-4 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-10 2-10 –10 1 1 1
≤ 1,200 1-4 1-5 1-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-8 –15 1 1 0
≤ 900 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 –20 1 0 0
≤ 600 0-2 0-3 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 –25 0 0 0
≤ 300 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 –30 0 0 0

Vertical Dive Bomb Release Points (20.5) Time of Fall

Altitude ≤ 2.5 ≤ 3.5 ≤ 4.5 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 6.5 ≤ 7.5 ≤ 9.5 ≥ 10.0 Pure Vt. RP Mod. ≤ 4.5 ≤ 7.5 ≥ 8.0
≤ 8,000 1-5 1-7 1-8 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-12 0-2 +10 3 3 2
≤ 6,500 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-10 0-1 +05 3 2 2
≤ 5,000 0-4 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-8 0-1 –00 3 2 2
≤ 4,000 0-3 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-7 0-1 –00 2 2 1
≤ 3,000 0-3 0-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 0 –05 2 1 1
≤ 2,000 0-2 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0 –10 1 1 1
≤ 1,500 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-3 0-3 0-3 0 –20 1 1 0
≤ 1,000 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 –30 0 0 0

BOMB ACCURACY LH MODIFIERS (Final LH ≤ –35 = on target bomb) Note: Bomb Scatter Diagram on Page 9.
• Sight angle and range = + Horizontal range • Wings not level, wings rolling = +20 • No aiming = +80
• Sight angle and altitude = + RP modifier • Universal A/C modifiers = Variable • Minimum aiming = +20
• Time of fall drift errors = + TOF x 5 (Combat Tables, page 1) • Full aiming = –00
• Per 100 feet above 300 if using tumbling napalm or fire bomb / Skip or Parafrag bomb = +10 / –30 • Per turn of extra aiming = –10
• Trained bombardier doing level bombing with full aiming, early / normal bomb sights = –10 / –20 (max of –20, or two turns)
• Trained bombardier doing level bombing with full aiming, advanced / Norden bomb sights = –30 / –40

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – COMBAT TABLES: PAGE 10
AIR-TO-AIR ROCKETRY (10.7)
Firing Parameters: Firer in level or shallow flight with upright bank angle. No turns or transition rates > TT and no maneuvers other than slips
allowed (skids NA) on turn of firing. Select one target A/C in firer's Non–Turning fixed gun field-of-fire and vertical field-of-fire within rocket's max
range. For ranges 7 to 12 = widen the field-of-fire by a half hex equivalent on each side. Determine distance to altitude ratio between firer and
target in 100 foot increments and reduce to a ratio. Example: Target is 5 (300 foot) hexes away and 300 feet higher. = 1500 feet / 300 feet = 5 to 1.
Rocket Danger Zone (RDZ): All A/C in firer's field-of-fire, within 30° of target's heading, 2.0 FP of target's speed, and having the same distance
to altitude ratio as the target are eligible recipients of secondary hits.
WGr.21 Air Burst Attack: When WGr.21s reach their last hex they explode together creating a heavy AAA blast zone (each rocket = one AA
gun, firepower = 15). Resolve attacks per normal heavy AAA procedure (ignore overlapped B-zone modifier. One critical hit is incurred per 2 hits.

Type Min. Max Min. Slant Range Modifiers Hit Crit. Hit
of Rockets Range Range Mult. 0-1 2 3 4 5-6 7-9 10-12 Damage Rating
German Rockets
55mm R4M 1 12 2 –10 –05 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 5 + D10 3
210mm WGr.21 2 7+D5 1 –10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50 10 + (2 x D10) 2
Russian Rockets
RS-82 / BRS-82 1 10 2 –10 0 +05 +20 +30 +50 +70 5 + D10 3
RS-132 / BRS-132 1 10 2 –10 0 +10 +20 +40 +60 +80 5 + (2 x D10) 2
Japanese Rockets
55mm 1 10 2 –10 0 +05 +15 +25 +45 +55 5 + D10 3
120mm 2 12 1 –10 0 +10 +20 +30 +50 +60 5 + (2 x D10) 3
Allied AtG Rockets used Air-to-Air
RAF 3" / 25 lb. 2 8 2 –10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 NA 2 + D10 3
RAF 3" / 60 lb. 3 6 2 –05 0 +15 +30 +50 NA NA 2 + (2 x D10 2
US 4.5" M10 2 12 1 0 0 +05 +15 +25 +35 +50 5 + (2 x D10) 2
US 5" HVAR 3 8 1 0 +05 +10 +25 +40 +60 NA 5 + (2 x D10) 2

ATA Rocket Hits: One hit if final LH ≤ –20 (percentile ≤ 27), one extra hit per –20 LH under that if any multiples remain in flight.
ATA Rocket Hit LH Modifiers
• Universal A/C modifiers = Variable (Combat Tables page 1) • Per F / L class in rocket danger zone = – 01
• Per actual rocket fired. = – 01 • Per M / H class in rocket danger Zone = – 02
• Firer's12:00L on Tgt.'s 6:00L = – 20 (same as near-zero deflection) • 5 x size mod. of largest target in RDZ = – variable.
• Firer in bank, or turning = +15, +30 • Range to selected target = slant range modifiers above.
• If multi-A/C shot and stacked A/C are of same formation use only lead pilot's universal and pilot quality modifiers.
• If multi-A/C shot and stacked A/C are not in formation or not of same formation use worst pilot's universal and pilot quality modifiers.

AIR-TO-GROUND ROCKETRY (19.3)

Rocket Attack Parameters: Target in firer's fixed gun field-of-fire, at least one FP spent since last facing change, wings upright level or in upright
bank, with no turns or maneuvers in progress. Listed attack strengths are for each multiple fired (*Allied 3"/25 lb. rockets are triple value vs. subs).
ATG Attack Procedure: Sum the attack strength of all multiples fired at the target. If firing at a pin-point target roll a D10, a result ≤ 3 = multiple
"on target" and attack strength can be applied against it. Compare summed attack strengths to target defense strength to get combat odds. Roll
attack per normal Air-to-Ground damage procedures. Modify attack LH roll per the tables below. Rockets inflict double damage to their targets.

Type of Ranges Minimum Slant Range LH Modifiers Att. Str. Service

Rockets Min. Max Multiple 1 2 3 4 5 6-7 8-9 10-12 13-20 Soft - Hard Date
Allied ATG Rockets
"Tiny Tim" 3 15 1 NA NA +0 +10 +20 +40 +60 +80 +100 30 - 30 Apr. 1944
4.5" M10 2 20 3 NA +0 +10 +15 +20 +30 +40 +50 +70 12 - 30 Aug. 1944
5" HVAR 2 10 2 NA +0 +5 +10 +15 +30 +45 +60 NA 10 - 20 Jun. 1944
3" / 25 lb.* 2 15 2 NA –10 +0 +5 +10 +15 +25 +35 +50 2 - 6 (18)* Nov. 1942
3" / 60 lb. 2 12 2 NA +0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50 +60 NA 10 - 15 Nov. 1943
Russian ATG Rockets
RS-82 1 8 2 –05 +0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +45 NA NA 6 - 3 Aug. 1939
BRS-82 1 8 2 –05 +0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +45 NA NA 2 - 10
RS-132 1 12 2 –05 +0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50 +60 NA 10 - 20 Jan. 1940
BRS-132 1 12 2 –05 +0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50 +60 NA 3 - 40
Japanese Rockets used Air-to-Ground
55mm 1 10 2 +0 +5 +10 +15 +25 +35 +45 +55 NA 3 - 1 Late 1944
120mm 1 12 2 +0 +5 +15 +20 +30 +40 +50 +60 NA 10 - 3 early 1945
German Rockets used Air-to-Ground
21cm WGr. 21 2 10 1 NA +15 +25 +30 +40 +50 +60 +70 NA 15 - 5 Sep.1943
55mm R4M 1 10 4 +0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +30 +40 +50 NA 8 - 4 Mar. 1945
88mm Pz.Shr. 1 3 2 +10 +30 +60 NA NA NA NA NA NA 2 - 15 Dec. 1944
80mm Pz.Blitz 1 6 3 +0 +10 +20 +35 +55 +75 NA NA NA 3 - 20 Jan. 1945

Attack LH • Minimal aiming = +20 • One turn of extra aiming = –10 • Wings not level, or rolling = +10
Modifiers • No aiming done = +40 • Two turns of extra aiming = –20 • Universal A/C modifiers = Variable
• Slant range mods. = Variable • Firer in level flight = +10 • Secondary Target = +30
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – FLIGHT RULES SUMMARY: PAGE 1
MOVING A/C (3.5) Expend all full FPs. Carry unused half FPs. A/C speed
determines allowed rates, maneuver requirements, A/C limits. Total FPs
determine flight proportions (HFP / VFP splits & climb / dive distances).
Sustained Inverted FLIGHT (3.6 & 4.3.1)
• If inverted entire game turn and pull trans. or positive G turn not used,
incur NG effects, and if also stayed in level flight, incur 3 decel points.
Engine Oil Starvation: A/C suffering NG effects > 3 turns in-a-row for
any reason, incur a 1 step power loss engine critical hit, per eng., per
turn, after the third of continuous NG effects, due to oil starvation.
Changing Speed (4.1 to 4.4)
• 5 accel or decel = +0.5 or –0.5 speed, respectively.
• No–F.I. engines forced to idle if NG effects incurred.
• Jet engines limited to only 1 step of power change per game turn Pure Vertical Flight - turning not allowed, only VRs allowed.
(Endurance & Cruise are same power setting).
COMMON ACCEL & DECEL LIST
Idle power = 0 accel, 0.5 speed loss before move • If LV, slips allowed in either direction. In LB or RB, slips allowed
Endurance power = 0 accel (less fuel use) only in direction of bank, and skids only in direction opposite bank.
Cruise power = 0 to 1/3 of available military accel
Military power = > 1/3 to all available military accel • HFPs and VFPs may be used to meet slip / skid FP requirements.
Emergency power = > mil. to all accel to right of any slash
Start attitude is dive = ADC dive accel number
Power No. Mods.: Sum all engine powers (each modified for step loss)
first, then adjust total for severe damage and load status in that order.
Excess speed decel = (Start speed – max attain. speed) x 2
Slat assisted turn / trans. = +1 to turn rate decel per step change
Each 30° of turn / trans. = Decel for turn rate / trans. rate used
Transition Decel Credit = 1/2 of pull or push decel may count for
pos.-G or NG turn decel, respectively
Slip / Skid - no facing = HT decel, or highest avail. turn decel+1
Skid with facing change = BT decel, or highest avail. turn decel+1
Each snap roll = 3 decel
Start attitude is climb = ADC climb decel number
Dive brakes = 5 to 10 decel (player's option)
Maneuver or landing flaps = 1 or 1+1/2 speed, both +1 to rate decel
Retr. gear down, in transit = 1/2 start speed in decel
Bay doors open, in transit = 1 decel (NA if snap open bay doors) of move (at no cost), OR, lose 100 feet per 30° of facing change started (not
Windmilling propeller = 2 decel until propeller feathered
Per 100' lost or gained = See Dive Accel - Climb Decel Chart
(see Flight Tables - Page 3)
LIMIT SPEEDS (4.3.1)
• Adjustments to max and minimum listed speeds are cumulative.
• See Flight Tables, Page 1, for max and min speed adjustments list.
• A/C with start speeds > max attainable incur excess speed decel.
Speed Effects ON Power ACCEL & ACCEL CARRY (4.4)
• 0 power accel if START speed > max attainable (throttle only defines
excess speed decel in this situation).
• A/C may not accelerate past max attainable speed, or carry accel if
END speed at or > max attainable unless started in or ended in a dive.
Angles-of-bank (5.1)
• Must be banked to turn. New bank angle in effect after spending last
FP of roll requirement. Roll carry lost if not married to continued rolling
next turn. Whether roll carry abandoned or lost, FPs = to carry must
be spent in other activity before rolling in opposite direction allowed.
Turning FACING CHANGES (5.2)
• Turn FP requirements by speed are depicted on A/C Turn Rate Chart.
• EZ turns incur half TT rate decel. ET turns prohibit combat, have risks.
• One incomplete or carried turn per game turn may be abandoned.
• Turn carry not married to continued turning in a game turn is lost.
• A/C may count FPs spent in normal rolling toward turning if rolling
between banks in same direction (e.g., RB to IR, or IR to RB).
• Rolling toward LV or IV bank attitudes while turning is not allowed. Such
rolls end any turning in progress and associated turn carry is lost.
• If speed changes from one game turn to next, turn requirement becomes
that for new speed. If, after speed change, turn requirement is already
met, at least one FP must still be expended before facing.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
Vertical RollS, Vertical Flight & Facing changes (5.3)
• If A/C transitioned at free or EZ rate, or used > 1 step to reach vertical,
FPs in first half of move (rounded up) may NOT be used for VRs.
• After each VR, A/C may keep new bank or reset to previous bank.
• Facing changes from climbing VRs are in direction opposite of roll,
and facing changes from diving VRs are in same direction as roll.
• If VR completed with only HFPs, 30° of facing allowed.
• If VR completed with mix of VFPs and HFPs, up to 60° allowed.
• If VR completed with only VFPs, up to 90° of facing allowed.
• If continuous FPs expended to VR twice on a single hexside,
A/C may do 180° change and remain on hexside.
• On turn of transition into vertical flight, both normal turning and VRs
allowed but FPs for one may not be mixed with other. If A/C chooses
Slips and Skids (5.4)
• Slips allowed if in upright bank (LB, LV, or RB); Skids if in upright turn-
ing bank (LB or RB). Slips and skids prohibited if NG transition used.
• One altitude increment may be lost upon executing a banked slip.
• HFP must be used to displace A/C. 30° facing allowed in direction of
bank if displacing with skid. Slips, or skids without facing incur HT rate
decel. Skids with facing incur BT decel (or highest avail. rate +1).
• If firing from slip or skid, gunfire arc is as for non-turning A/C,
unless skid included facing change, then as for turning A/C.
• FPs used for slips / skids may not be used for turns or rolling.
Turns in steep & Vertical attitudes (5.5): If starting in and staying
in steep and vertical attitudes entire game turn, A/C may turn as if speed
1.0 less than actual. If in pure vertical flight, only Vertical Rolls allowed.
Turns With Gravity (5.5): If doing a PULL transition of ≥ 2 steps from
one inverted attitude to another inverted attitude, and all turn FPs are spent
wings inverted (any roll to upright bank must be unfinished when inverted
turn finished), A/C may turn as if speed 1.0 less than actual.
INVERTED LEVEL Turn Limits (5.5): A/C in level flight (no transition
used), which do inverted pos. G turns must either adjust nose to SHD at end
to exceed 1/3 (rounded up) of full FPs in increments) + climbing OC is NA.
Turns & Gifted pilots (13.3): Gifted pilots may use HT+ rates (or TT+
rates with slats) at adjusted min. turn speed -0.5. +1 decel per 30° of fac-
ing and pitch change. If slats and flaps combined, cancel extra turn decel.
Apply < min. speed or slats used +15 shot mod. unless flaps also in use.
HIGH SPEED TURN & Transition DECEL REDUCTION (5.5.1)
If start speed ≥ 5.0, reduce rate decel to equal next lower rate.*
If start speed ≥ 8.0, reduce rate decel to equal two rates lower.*
If start speed ≥ 10.0, reduce rate decel to equal 3 rates lower.*
Example - at speed 8.0, each facing change at the BT rate turn would incur
only TT rate decel. *Never reduce rate decel to less than EZ rate.
SLATTED WING EFFECTS ON MINIMUM SPEEDS (5.8)
Veteran and Gifted pilots may fly at adjusted min. level speed -0.5. Add +1
to EZ rate decel incurred, & D5 decel for wallowing unless veteran & gifted.
Landing flaps override this benefit. Regular and Veteran pilots may use
HT+ positive "G" rates at adjusted min. turn speeds -0.5. If so, +1 decel
per 30° of facing and pitch change. Gifted pilots may do TT+ positive "G"
rates at reduced speeds as above,.Use slat-assist shot modifier in all cases
unless wing flaps also in use.
WING FLAP EFFECTS ON MINIMUM SPEEDS (5.8.1, 16.3.1)
• Flaps down in any setting reduce turn rate speeds by 0.5 for all pilots.
+1 decel per 30° of facing and pitch change except ignore for gifted.
• Landing flaps reduce adjusted min level speed by 0.5 for all.
• Combined use of flaps and slats negates the slats used shot mods.
• Combined use of flaps, slats and pilot quality will never lower min. adj.
turn rate speeds by more than 0.5.
NG TURNING (5.9) AND NG TRANSITIONS (6.5)
• Only regular or veteran pilots in F, L, or MF class A/C may do NG turns
at up to BT rates. Any pilot may do NG transitions at up to BT rates.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – FLIGHT RULES SUMMARY: PAGE 2
NG TURNING (5.9) AND NG TRANSITIONS (6.5) – Continued
• Upright A/C completing NG turns must either adjust their flight att. by
one step toward earth at end of move (no cost), OR lose 100 feet per
30° of NG facing completed, not to exceed 1/3 of A/C's full FPs in
increments. This negates VFP exception Rule 6.1.4 for next turn.
• Inverted A/C do NG turns without any flight attitude adjustments.
• Flaps & slats do not benefit NG turns or transitions in any way.
• NG turns NA if "pull" transition used. Allowed with any push trans.
• Positive G normal turns not allowed when NG transitions used.
• Min speed required for NG turns or transitions is that for one turn
rate higher than desired NG rate. Decel is for actual NG rate used.
• "Non-F.I." engines must use idle next turn.
• Upon starting NG turns Lose pos.-G turn carry & any maneuver carry.
• Stores may not be dropped, jettisoned or fired if NG rates used.
• Tracking shots, long bursts, defensive fire NA if NG rates used.
• Air-to-ground aiming lost and new AtG aiming NA if NG rates used.
transitions (6.1): See FATTs. Available turn rate = transition rate.
TRANSITION RESTRICTIONS (6.1.4)
• M and H class may not voluntarily enter inverted flight or transition
to vertical attitudes. Exception: MD class may use vertical dives.
• MF may use inverted att., and if pilot vet. or gifted, vertical attitudes.
trans. VFP Exception (6.1.4): If transitioning to a shallower attitude,
required VFPs need not be more than those used the turn prior.
Note - Exception not allowed if transition has mandatory reverse, or start
attitude is from spin or stall recovery, or a nose adjustment on turn prior.
transITION Decel Credit (6.1.4): Half of pull or push transition decel
may be applied toward pos.-G or NG turn decel, respectively.
SHALLOW, STEEP, AND VErtical Climbs & DIVES (6.2)
• If transitioning, see FATTs, if not see Standard Altitude Change Table.
Flight Above Ceiling (6.3)
• Power halved. If none, as idle. 2 x decel for climbs, turns, maneuvers.
FACING REVERSALS AND EFFECTS (6.4 & 6.4.1)
• From a right or left bank (upright or inverted): From 120° to 150° of
facing change is required (4-5 facings).
• Rotate A/C in direction of bank angle for a "pulling" reversal and in
direction opposite of bank for a "pushing" reversal.
• From LV or IV bank angle: 180° facing change required. A/C may ro-
tate in either direction to fall into adjacent hex or remain on a hexside.
• When a reversal is executed, roll carry retains its original direction.
Example: A/C in a RB with roll-right carry toward IR reverses, its new
bank is IR and it still has right-roll carry, but now it is toward IV bank.
• Optional Reverses: If ending in vertical flight and a mandatory re-
verse was not required, A/C may reverse facing and bank at end of
move so long as VFPs used in the move exceed HFPs used.
TRANSITION INDUCED FREE FACING (6.6): If starting a move banked
left or right and transitioning ≥ 2 steps into, out of, or through steep or verti-
cal attitudes while staying banked in the same direction entire game turn
(rolling between upright and inverted okay), a 30° facing is allowed after
any FP NOT in the first half of its move (rounded up). Facing is in direc-
tion of bank if a pull transition used, or opposite the bank if a push used.
SNAP ROLLS (7.0): NA if rudder knocked out. Banking FP requirement
reduced by 1. Snap roll may not be stopped prior to new bank angle. 3
decel for each. Turn FPs may not be combined with snap roll FPs. M, H
class may not snap roll. MF class or M class with gifted pilot may snap roll.
HAMMERHEAD PROCEDURE (7.0) (Declare intent on turn of set up)
• End turn in VC at adjusted min speed ± 0.5. No combat allowed.
• Start of next move, Roll % dice, add pilot & power Stall / Spin mods.
≤ 60 = success, change facing 180°, Req'd. Flight attitude = VD.
Bank angle = player's choice. Speed = adjusted min. MC = 0.
> 60 = failure, A/C does not reverse facing or pitch. Speed = NIGHT LOW LEVEL FLIGHT (32.3)
adjusted min. –0.5, do Stall / Spin procedure this turn (MC = 0)
• A/C may not fire or drop stores on turn of set up. All accel, decel, turn
or maneuver carries are forfeit. No HH if rudder out, or if in clouds.
• No transitions allowed but may fire guns on turn HH completed.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
TAILING (8.1.1) – M, H may not tail a more agile A/C (MF may).
• Simple & Defl. Test requirements: See Combat Tables, page 3.
• IF in VC or VD, may tail lower, higher A/C, resp., if vert. ≤ Hor. range.
• Same hex tail with range 1 or less requires speed ≤ tailee's speed.
• Same hex tail at range > 1 requires tailer in vert. att. pointed at tailee.
FORMATION PARAMETERS (8.5)
• Fixed (2-1-3): Wingmen on or behind lead's 3:00 or 9:00 line
within 2 hexes, 100 feet and 30° of facing of leader.
• Fixed Sub. Flight Leads (3-3-3): On or behind adjacent flight lead's
3:00 or 9:00 line, within 3 hexes, 300 feet & 30° facing of higher lead.
• Fixed Vertical Limits: Wingmen and sub. Flt. leads must be at same
altitude as leader if in same hex. Subordinate leaders must be within
100 feet of leader per hex away from leader they are following.
• Flexible (6-6-6): Wingmen on or behind lead's 3:00 or 9:00 line, with-
in 6 hexes, 600 feet (300 feet if in same hex) and 60° facing of leader.
• Flexible Sub. Flight Leads (9-9-9): On or behind higher lead's 3:00
or 9:00 line, within 9 hexes, 900 feet & 90° facing to receive radio init.
Only one sub. leader per turn per side may receive radio initiative.
CHANGING CONFIGURATION (16.3.1)
• Moving flaps or gear requires 1 turn of transit each (1 per turn).
• Specify landing, maneuver (combat) or up setting when moving flaps.
• Maneuver flaps set or in transit = 1 decel per game turn. Landing
flaps set or in transit out of landing pos. = 1+1/2 start speed in decel.
Landing flaps in transit toward landing pos. = 1 decel per game turn.
• Non-combat flaps in landing / maneuver setting are damaged if A/C
speed exceeds listed min. +2.0 / listed min. +3.0, respectively.
• Combat-flaps in combat setting = No damage if speed ≤ max level,
or per ADC notes. In landing setting they can be damaged normally.
• Damaged flaps jam in place, offer no benefits, but incur normal decel.
• Gear down or in transit = max attainable speed reduced by 1/3 and
decel = 1/2 start speed (ignore if fixed gear A/C). Gear damaged
if speed exceeds listed min. +3.0. Damaged gear = landing incident.
PILOT QUALITY LIMITS (13.1)
• Recruits may not snap roll, use ET rate, vertical roll, or tail enemy A/C.
They risk GLOC at BT or NG-HT rates. Always use long bursts.
• Green may not tail enemy A/C unless 12:00 line super-imposes 6:00
line of A/C to be tailed. May not use half bursts.
• Recruits & Greens may not do NG turns, but may do NG transitions.
LOW LEVEL FLIGHT (16.1): Minimum safe altitude is 100 feet above ter-
rain. Unless landing, A/C descending below 100 feet, or crossing a map
contour line at its altitude crash.
FLYING IN CLOUDS (16.2): Only A/C at ≤ range 1 (range 2 to burning
A/C) can see each other and stay in formation. A/C using inverted banks,
steep or vertical attitudes, slips, skids, or > TT rates while in clouds must
roll % dice at end of move. A roll ≥ 80 = Disorientation. If so, no attacks, no
tailing and A/C flies randomly until starting a turn not in clouds or the pilot
Reorients (roll ≤ 20 at end of random move). Add primary pilot Stall / Spin
mods., –10 if multi-pilot, +20 if no instrument training, and +50 if instruments
lost (unless in formation as wingman to a friendly A/C), to orientation rolls.
NIGHT MANEUVER LIMITS (32.3)
M, H, (N) crews are fully trained. F, L, MF crews have limited training.
Recruit crews in any A/C have no night training.
Full Training = Up to steep attitudes, ≤ HT rates allowed.
Limited Tr. = Up to shallow attitudes, ≤ TT rates allowed.
No Training = Up to shallow attitudes, ≤ EZ rates allowed.
Night Disorientation: Vertical or inverted attitudes, BT or ET rates, skids
with facing changes, or A/C violating above night maneuver limits must
roll % dice. A roll ≥ 51% = Disorientation. If so, no attacks (defensive fire
okay), no tailing and A/C moves randomly until pilot Reorients himself
(% roll ≤ 40 (or ≤ 20 if also in clouds) at end of A/C's random move). Add
modifiers as if flying in clouds to all disorientation and reorientation rolls.
• If end alt. ≤ 200 feet above terrain, roll % dice. ≥ 98 = fatal crash.
• Each 30° facing or pitch change > 1, or full FP > 4.0 in move = +02.
• +05 each if only one pilot, or if no moonlight exists.
• –05 each if has radar altimeter, in flare illumination area, in full
moonlight, or primary pilot is a veteran.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – FLIGHT TABLES, PAGE 3
A/C TURN RATE CHART (5.2)
A/C EASY TIGHT HARD BREAK EMERG. SCALE SONIC
SPEED "EZ" "TT" "HT" "BT" "ET" MPH SPEEDS

1.0 - 1.5 1 60 90 NA NA 50 - 75 ––––

2.0 - 2.5 2 1 60 90 NA 100 - 125 ––––
3.0 - 3.5 3 2 1 60 90 150 - 175 ––––
4.0 - 4.5 4 3 2 1 60 200 - 225 ––––
5.0 - 5.5 6 4 3–2 2–1 1 250 - 275 ––––
6.0 - 6.5 8 6 3 2 2–1 300 - 325 ––––
7.0 - 7.5 10 7 4 3–2 2 350 - 375 ––––
8.0 - 8.5 12 8 5 3 3–2 400 - 425 ––––
9.0 - 9.5 15 9 6 4 3 450 - 475 ––––
10.0 - 10.5 18 10 8 5 3 500 - 525 Transonic if ≥ ML
11.0 - 11.5 22 12 9 6 4 550 - 575 Transonic if ≥ LO
12.0 - 12.5 26 14 11 7 5 600 - 625 Transonic if ≥ VL
13.0 - 13.5 30 16 13 8 6 650 - 675 Mach 1 if ≥ EH
14.0 - 14.5 34 18 14 10 7 700 - 725 Mach 1 if ≥ ML
15.0 + 38 20 15 11 8 750 + Mach 1 if ≥ VL

• Procedure - Cross index speed with turn rate to find turning FPs required per 30° of facing change. Turn decel is per 30° of facing change.
• "90" or "60" entry - Indicates allowed facing change in degrees per FP. Turn decel is still per 30° of facing change.
• Turns with gravity & Turns in steep / vertical flight - Use turn FP requirement for speed 1.0 less than actual start speed if: a) using inverted
"pull" transition of ≥ 2 steps and all turn FPs spent inverted, or b) if staying within steep and vertical attitudes for entire game turn.
• ET Rates - A/C using ET turns or transitions may not fire, launch, or jettison weapons of any sort and must check for GLOC and Overstress.
• Inverted Level turns or upright NG turns - Require either 100 foot loss per facing change started (not > 1/3 FPs) or nose drop toward earth.
• Free Transition Induced Facing - Allowed in 2d half of move if transitioning ≥ 2 steps into, out of, or through, steep or vertical attitudes.
• Compressibility - Occurs if in transonic speed and above max listed level speed. Non-Transonic Jet A/C ending at ≥ Mach 1 are destroyed.

Fractional Values Table
No. 1/4 1/3 1/2 2/3
0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.5
1.0 0.0 0.5 0.5 0.5
1.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0
2.0 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5
2.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5
3.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
3.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5
4.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
4.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
5.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 3.5
5.5 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.5
6.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0
6.5 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.5
7.0 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5
7.5 2.0 2.5 3.5 5.0
8.0 2.0 2.5 4.0 5.5
8.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.5
9.0 2.0 3.0 4.5 6.0
9.5 2.5 3.0 4.5 6.5
10.0 2.5 3.5 5.0 6.5
FRACTIONAL VALUES TABLE RULES (6.1.3) Dive Accel (4.1)
HFP / VFP Split – This is based on playable full FPs each game turn. & CLIMB DECEL (4.2)
MC / OC Altitude Distances – Also based on playable full FPs.
Table Fraction FP Rounding – If start attitude is:
Current Acc. / Dec.
Speed per incr.
• Level or shallow, round VFP portion down, HFP portion up.
• Steep or vertical, round VFP portion up, HFP portion down. ≥ 9.0 0.5
≥ 5.0 1.0
FATT ENTRY CODE GUIDE (6.1.1) ≥ 3.5 1.5
Bold Faced Entry: Exact portion of FPs that must be expended as = 3.0 2.0
VFPs or HFPs. Remaining FPs must be of the other type.
= 2.5 2.5
Single Entry: FP type and amounts indicated must be expended with = 2.0 3.0
rest as other type. Both types of FPs may be mixed freely.
= 1.5 4.0
Two Part Entry: First half is how many FPs of indicated type must be ≤ 1.0 6.0
expended before any of other kind can be used.
Others: "NG" = Neg.–G effects imposed. "RV" = mandatory reversal
• Add listed amount per incr.
during move. Flight attitude label in "( )" is an inverted attitude.
gained / lost during move.
• + ADC climb decel if start
Low Speed VFP Effects: If total FPs < 2.0, treat a "1V" FP entry as
attitude is climb, + ADC dive
"0V" if start att. level or shallow, even if entry boldfaced.
accel if start attitude is dive.
STANDARD ALTITUDE CHANGE TABLE (6.1.3)
Flight Attitude Mand. Change (MC) VFPs Allowed (Rest HFPs) Optional Change (OC)

10.5 2.5 3.5 5.0 7.0
11.0 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5
11.5 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5
12.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
12.5 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.5
13.0 3.0 4.5 6.5 8.5
13.5 3.5 4.5 6.5 9.0
14.0 3.5 4.5 7.0 9.5
14.5 3.5 5.0 7.0 9.5
15.0 3.5 5.0 7.5 10.0
Level None None ± to 1/4 total FPs +
Shallow 1/3 total FPs + 0, 1, or >1 to 1/4 of FPs to 1/3 total FPs –
Steep 1/2 total FPs + 1 to 1/2 of FPs to 1/2 total FPs –
Vertical* 1/3 total FPs + > 1/2 of FPs required to 1/3 total FPs –
(If pure vert. flight)* None All FPs, +poss. free HFP** ± to 1/4 total FPs +
• MC is based on starting flight attitude. OC is based on ending flight attitude.
• Fractions = change in 100 foot incr. = to that part of A/C's total FPs (+ = round up, – = round down).
• In pure vert. flight a free HFP allowed at end of move (before any opt. reverse) if speed ≥ 3.0.**
• VFP column of this table only used if no transition used. If transitioning, VFPs are per FATT codes.
• In Shallow flight, at least one FP must always be played as an HFP.

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – FLIGHT TABLES, PAGE 4
Free 1: All H
FATT # 1 EZ 1: 2/3H, 1V Free 1: 1V
Free 1: 1V
NOSE UP EZ 1: All H
TT 2: 1/2H, 1V to 1/2V EZ 1: 1V to 1/2V
HT 3: 1/2H, 1/3V to 1/2V
PULLS TT 2: All –1H, 0V to 1V–
BT 3: 1/4H, 1/2V to 2/3V
TT 2: 1/3V to 2/3V
HT 3: 2/3H, 1V– to 1/3V– HT 2: 1/2V to All –1V
ET 4: 1H, 2/3V RV at end BT 3: 2/3V to All –1V RV after 2/3+
BT 3: 1/2H, 1/3V– to 1/2V–
ET 4: 1/3H, 1/2V– to 2/3V– ET 4: 2/3V to 1/2V RV after 1/2+

(INV)
Free 1: 1/2V to 1/3V Free 1: 1/3V to 1/2V
EZ 1: 1/3V to 1V (SHC) (SHD) EZ 1: 1/2V to 2/3V
TT 2: 1V
HT 3: All H PULL TT 2: 2/3V to All –1V RV from 2/3+
HT 2: 2/3V to All V RV from 1/2+
BT 3: All –1H, 1V– at end BT 2: 2/3V RV after 1/3+
ET 4: 1/2H, 1V– to 1/3V–
(STC) Free 1: 2/3V (STD) BT 3: 2/3V to 1/2V RV by 1/3+
EZ 1: 1/2V to 2/3V ET 3: 1/2V RV at start
TT 2: 1/3V to 1/2V
EZ 1: 2/3V RV at end HT 2: 1V to 1/3V EZ 1: All V to All –1V
TT 1: 2/3V to 1/2V RV after 2/3– BT 3: 1V to 1/3V TT 1: All –1V to 2/3V
HT 2: 2/3V to 1/2V RV after 1/2+ ET 4: 1V
BT 2: 1/2V RV by 1/2+
(VC) (VD) HT 1: 2/3V to 1/2V
HT 2: 1/2V­
BT 3: 1/2V to 1/3V RV by 1/3+
ET 4: 1/3V RV at start
VC VD BT 2: 1/2V to 1/3V
ET 2: 1/3V to 1V
EZ 1: All V RV at end ET 3: 1V
EZ 1: 1/2V TT 1: 2/3V to All –1V RV after 1/2+
TT 1: 1/2V to 2/3V HT 2: 2/3 V to 1/2V RV from 1/2+ EZ 1: 1/2V
HT 2: 2/3V to All –1V RV after 2/3– BT 2: 1/2V to 1/3V RV by 1/3+ TT 1: 1/2V to 1/3V
BT 2: 2/3V RV from 1/2+ STC ET 3: 1/3V to 1V RV at start STD HT 1: 1/3V to 1V
BT 3: 1/2V to 2/3V RV by 1/3+
HT 2: 1/3V to 1V, no OC+
ET 3: 1/2V RV by 1/3+
BT 2: 1/4V to 1V

EZ 1: 1V
SHC SHD ET 3: All H

TT 1: 1V to 1/3V LVL
HT 1: 1/3V to 1/2V
HT 2: 1/2V
BT 2: 1/2V to 2/3V EZ 1: All H
ET 3: 1/2V to 2/3V RV after 1/2+ TT 1: 2/3H, 1V
HT 1: 1/2H, 1V to 1/4V
HT 2: 1/2H, 1V to 1/3V
BT 2: 1/3H, 1V to 1/2V
Key: Trans. rate, Trans. steps: FP proportions, Reversal
ET 3: 1H, 1/3V to 1/2V
EZ 1: 1V, no OC+
TT 1: 1V to 0V
HT 2: All H
BT 2: 2/3H, 0V to 1V+
ET 3: 1/2H, 1V+ to 1/3V+
If total FPs < 2.0: Treat any "1V" FP entry
as "0V" if start attitude = level or shallow.

Free 1: All H FATT # 2

EZ 1: All –1H, 1V
NG TT 2: 1/2H, 1V to 1/3V
NOSE DOWN
Free 1: 1V+, All –1H
Free 1: 1V NG HT 2: 1/3H, 1/3V to 1/2V EZ 1: All H PUSHES
EZ 1: 1V to 1/2V NG BT 3: 1/3H, 1/2V to 2/3V NG TT 2: All H
NG TT 2: 1/3V to 2/3V NG HT 2: All –1H, 0V to 1V–
NG HT 2: 1/2V to All –1V NG BT 3: 1/2H, 1V– to 1/3V–
NG BT 3: 2/3V RV after 1/2+
LVL
Free 1: 1/2V SHD SHC Free 1: 1/2V to 1/3V
EZ 1: 1/2V to 2/3V EZ 1: 1/3V to 1V
TT 1: 2/3V to All –1V PUSH NG TT 2: 1/3V to 1V
NG HT 2: 2/3V to All –1V RV from 1/2– NG HT 2: 1V
NG BT 2: 2/3V to 1/2V RV by 1/2–
NG BT 3: 1/2V RV by 1/3–
STD NG TT 1: 2/3V to All V RV after 2/3– STC NG BT 3: All H
NG HT 1: 2/3V RV after 1/2–
NG BT 1: 1/2V to 2/3V RV from 1/3–
NG BT 2: 1/2V RV by 1/3+ EZ 1: 2/3V to All V
NG EZ 1: All –1V to All V RV by 2/3+ TT 1: 2/3V to 1/2V
NG TT 1: 2/3V to All V RV by 1/2+
VD VC NG TT 2: 2/3V to 1/2V
NG HT 1: 2/3V to 1/2V RV by 1/3+ (VD) NG HT 2: 1/2V to 1/3V
NG EZ 1: All V to 2/3V (VC)
NG BT 2: 1/2V RV after 1 NG BT 3: 1/3V
NG TT 1: 2/3V
NG HT 1: 2/3V to 1/2V
NG BT 2: 1/2V to 1/3V
NG EZ 1: 1/2V, +Max OC–
NG TT 1: 1/2V
NG TT 1: 1/2V
NG HT 1: 1/2V to 1/3V
(STD) (STC) NG HT 1: 1/2V to 2/3V
NG BT 1: 2/3V to All V
NG BT 1: 1/3V
NG BT 2: 2/3V to All V RV after 1/2+
NG BT 2: 1/3V to 1V, No OC+
(SHD) (SHC)
NG EZ 1: 1V or >1 to 1/4V, Max OC– (INV) NG TT 1: 0V to 1V
NG TT 1: 1V, No OC+ NG HT 1: 1V to 1/3V
NG HT 1: 0V to 1V, No OC+ NG BT 1: 1/3V to 1/2V
NG BT 1: All H NG BT 2: 1/2V
NG TT 1: All H, No OC+
NG BT 2: All –1H, 1V+ NG HT 1: 2/3H, 0V to 1V
NG BT 1: 2/3H, 1V or >1V to 1/4V If total FPs < 2.0: Treat any "1V" FP entry
NG BT 2: 1/2H, 1V to 1/3V as "0V" if start attitude = level or shallow.
Key: Neg. G, Trans. rate, Trans. steps: FP proportions

(Play Aids ver. 3.85)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – NAVAL TABLES: PAGE 3
Naval Critical Hit Explanations (28.2)
Flight Deck Damage: A flight deck hex can absorb 50% of its FDC in "flight
deck" hits before being put out of action. These hits are tracked separately
from ship's total hits. DC Teams can repair these hits (28.5). A/C cannot
be spotted into, or out of, knocked out areas. Penetrating bombs inflict one
D5 of hits, non-penetrating bombs inflict hits = 1/10 their soft attack value
(Round fractions normally).
Elevator Disabled: A randomly selected elevator in the impacted ship's
section is disabled and no longer functions.
Shift to Aft Steering: Main steering (bridge) is out and the after steering
team is used. Add one to rudder response time and turn modes. 2nd or
subsequent hit = rudder jammed (keep last order).
DC Team Wiped Out: One trained damage control team is eliminated.
Note - A ship's DC teams can never be reduced below 1.
DC Mains Damaged: DC teams need pumps, generators, and water mains
to effect repairs. This result indicates some of these are disabled. Each DC
mains damaged result = –10 LH to the post-attack fate roll.
Boiler / Engine Hit: Reduce total ship's boilers remaining by one. Lose
speed in accordance with ship's speed chart.
Fires: Fire hits rage until permanently "neutralized" by damage control
teams. A fire hit on a flight deck hex stops all take-off or landing operations
for the ship until permanently neutralized.
Flooding: Water will enter ships from flooding hits until permanently
"neutralized" by damage control teams.
Rudder Jammed: Ship's steering lost and the last move command in
effect remains in effect for the rest of the combat scale battle. Steering can
be repaired by DC teams (28.5).
Weapons, sensors or Gun Directors Lost: Randomly lose one position,
functional or not, of the indicated item in that ship's hex.
Radars or other Equipment Lost: Randomly lose one item, of those
available, as indicated on the ship's data card.
Command Team Wiped Out: The bridge watch, engineering watch, and
combat information center watch are vital units on ships. Having none
of these command teams left affects the ship's ability to survive a battle.
Bigger ships will have more command teams.
Battery Power Disabled: If on surface, sub may not submerge. If under-
water, reduce speed by one step each turn until DIW. Battery power may
be restored after battle (28.5).
Diving Planes Disabled: Submarine may not initiate crash dives or sub-
merge. If underwater, it must surface. Submarine diving and surfacing
rules are presented as needed in the scenarios.
Sub Watertight Hull Damaged: This is automatically inflicted by any
weapon that penetrates the hull of a sub in addition to any other critical hits
the weapon may do. If surfaced, the sub may not submerge. If underwater,
it must surface. These hits do not cause flooding but are treated as an
un-neutralized flooding hit for Post-Attack Fate rolls.
=============
Progressive Fire & Flood Damage: For mission scenarios only, check for
progressive fires or flooding at the end of each Op-turn (including the turn
in which the hits occurred). Roll a D10 for each such hit remaining that is
not in the process of being neutralized or not already neutralized. A roll of
1 = hit clones itself into another of the same type and a roll of 10 means
the hit is permanently neutralized on its own (i.e., fire burns itself out or
the flooding is stopped by water-tight compartments). After progressive
damage checks - each remaining fire hit or flooding hit not neutralized or
not in the process of being neutralized causes 1 point of new damage to
the ship (which could lead to new fate rolls).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
HIGHLY EXPLOSIVE CARGO (28.3)
If a ship carrying "highly explosive cargo" is damaged, total the
number of "explosion" critical hits caused by all attacks that game turn.
Roll percentile dice at the end of the turn. If the result is ≤ (explosions
x 5), the ship explodes being instantly destroyed. Any A/C, ground
unit, or ship within a range of 10 is immediately attacked at 12-1 odds,
with the odds shifted one column left for each hex of range greater
than one from the nearest hex of the ship.
SHIP POST-ATTACK FATE TABLE (28.4)
Post Attack Fate checks are required at end of each air-naval
scenario in which significant damage occurred. For mission scenarios
check at end of any Op-turn in which ship damage reaches a 10%
level of the affected ship's capacity and at the end of the Mission
scenario. Significant damage = sustaining hits which result in:
1. Cumulative damage past 10% of ship's capacity.
2. One or more sea worthiness critical hits sustained.
3. One or more fire or flooding hits sustained.
Procedure: Roll for LH and apply modifiers.
LH Modifiers
• Each 10% of ship's hits with no hits recorded = +10
• Each DC mains damaged critical recorded = –10
• Each 10% of damage not permanently neutralized = –10
• Each flooding hit not permanently neutralized = –05
• Each fire hit not permanently neutralized = –02
• If no command teams remain on ship = –20
Neutralizing Ship Damage (mission scenarios only): Available
DC teams can be assigned to neutralize damage as follows: One
team per fire hit, two per flooding hit and three per full 10% damage
suffered. Permanently neutralizing hits or damage takes time in Op-
turns = no. of teams required. Once permanently neutralized, the DC
teams may be shifted to other damage control tasks. During or after
neutralization, fires and flooding cannot progress.
FINAL LH SHIP'S POST ATTACK FATE V.P.s.
NA Ship sunk - total hits exceeded. 120%
≤ –35 DC fails, ship sinks in D5 hours. 100%
–34 to –10 DC fails, ship scuttled within24 hours. 85%
–09 to +10 Crippled, shipyard level repairs needed. 70%
+11 to +25 Not battle worthy, major repairs needed. 50%
+24 to +50 Battle worthy repairs made by next day. 30%
+51 to +95 Battle worthy repairs made within hours. 20%
≥ +96 Damaged but still battle worthy. 10%
Notes: Loaded cargo ships and transports add 1 VP to their value
per 100 tons of cargo or oil carried, normal value for vehicles and
guns, and 2 points per infantry platoon equivalent. If a ship suffers
more than one fate roll during mission play, only the most severe
result rolled for is used. V.P.s for fate awarded only at end of scenario.
TEMPORARY SHIP REPAIRS (28.5)
Repairs require a certain amount of time to pass as depicted below.
DC teams must be assigned to damage for the indicated time, after
which, the item is fixed. Below is a list of repairable hits:
Hit Type Time to Repair DC Teams Req'd.
Flt. Deck Damage One D10 of Op-turns 1 per hit
Aft Steering One D10 of hours 1 per hit
DC Mains One D10 of hours 2 per hit
Boiler Unit Out One D10 of Op-turns 2 per hit
Rudder Jammed One D10 of hours 1 per hit
Lt. or Med. AAA Batt.* One D10 of Op-turns 1 per battery
Restore Sub Batt. One D10 of hours NA (time only)
Damaged A/C See rule 29.1 - Support Operations
*A maximum of 1/3 of eliminated light and Medium AAA batteries
(rounded up) may be repaired.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – NAVAL TABLES: PAGE 4
NAVAL AAA FIELDS-OF-FIRE (25.2)
• All field-of-fire clock lines for AAA emanate from the ship's hex
the guns are actually located in.
• The clock line extending from the ship's bow is always its 12:00
line and that from the stern is its 6:00 line regardless of ship's
facing. The rest of the clock lines emanate from the ship's hex as
for LOAs and are labeled as in a clock face as shown in diagram 1
below depicting guns located in a ship's bow hex.
Note: When a ship's hex is located on a hexside, the 12:00, 03:00,
06:00 and 09:00 lines are determined normally. The 01:00, 05:00, 07:00
and 11:00 lines follow the zig-zag hexsides adjacent to the ends of the
hexside the ship is on. The 02:00, 04:00, 08:00 and 10:00 lines are
assumed to emanate from the adjacent hex, furthest from the target,
which could be located on either side of the hexside. Diagram 2 below
illustrates field-of-fire lines for bow hex mounted guns.
• The 12:00 and 6:00 lines are also called bow and stern lines,
respectively, and the 3:00 and 9:00 lines are also called right
and left beam lines, respectively, in some other rules.
• The bow or stern arcs of a ship are defined as the area sweeping
clock lines 11:00 to 01:00 and 05:00 to 07:00, respectively.
Vertical Limits: AAA guns of 40mm or smaller may fire straight up.
Guns larger than 40mm in size have a "dead-zone" directly over-head
and extending in all directions by one hex per band above the VL band
the target is located in.
Combined Fire Limits: Any number of AAA batteries of 20mm or
smaller guns on a ship may combine their fire at a single target. Up to
six batteries of guns larger than 20mm may combine their fire at the
same target A/C or hex. The radar or director modifier to attacks does
not apply unless ≥ half the batteries firing are under such control. Dif-
ferent ships firing at the same A/C resolve attacks separately. Each
ship may fire at an A/C more than once but only if each shot involves
guns of different critical hit ratings. Individual A/C may be attacked by
any number of ships in a single game turn.
1 NAVAL AAA FIELDS-OF-FIRE CLOCK LINE DIAGRAMS (25.2)
09:00
08:00 10:00
07:00 11:00
06:00 12:00
05:00 01:00
04:00 02:00
03:00
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
AIR-NAVAL TACTICAL PROCEDURE (30.2)
(1). Resolve Long Range AAA: The instant A/C commence an at-
tack, the ships or task force under attack are allowed one Op-scale
AAA attack against the A/C using their summed heavy AAA value.
This attack is conducted BEFORE any attacking A/C are shifted to
their new altitude bands to begin combat scale play.
(2). Target Selection and Approach: Attacking A/C may split up, if
desired, shift to their desired attack altitude as allowed by rule 15.10,
and pick their target ship sets (same or different). If the target is a
task force, take all the vessels in it of ≥ 100 tons and divide them
into sets of ships with each being not more than 8 hexes worth of
ship sizes. Add smaller vessels to each set as desired. Place the
sets on a table with unidentified vessel sides up so the attacker is
unsure of which is which. The attacker then selects one or more
sets to attack and distributes his A/C against them per Rule 15.10.
(3). Resolve Screening AAA: Untargeted sets of ships may make
one Op-scale AAA attack with AAA of all sizes that are in range,
against formations approaching targeted sets as follows:
For each approaching formation roll a D5 – 2. A result > 0 = the
no. of untargeted ship sets randomly picked that are deemed to
be overflown by the passing A/C prior to starting combat play.
Sum the Op-scale heavy, medium and light AAA values from all
ships in the overflown sets and make an Op-scale AAA attack with
each size AAA against the formation. Note, light AAA may only be
used against formations or A/C at altitude 3.0 or less.
(4). Set up Combat Play: The attacker places main target ship within
5 hexes of the map's center. If not otherwise directed in a scenario,
remaining ships are placed by their owner as follows:
• If a Warship ≥ 100 tons - anywhere on map with same facing as
main target, but no closer than 15 + D5 hexes (roll per ship setting
up) from any multi-hex warship already on map, and no closer than
10 hexes to any single hex warships ≥ 100 tons or any non warship
≥ 100 tons already on map. Vessels of < 100 tons can be ignored.
• If a non-warship ≥ 100 tons - anywhere on map with same facing
as main target but no closer than 10 hexes to any vessel ≥ 100 tons.
• If a ship of < 100 tons, anywhere on map, up to four per hex in any
hex not occupied by or adjacent to a vessel of ≥ 100 tons.
After set up, the attackers enter play per Rule 15.10.
2
11:00 12:00 01:00
10:00 02:00
09:00 03:00
08:00 04:00
07:00 05:00
06:00
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – OPERATIONAL TABLES (COMBAT SCALE ADDS) – PAGE 3
COMBAT SCALE MAP ENTRY FOR ATTACKS (15.10)
• For Air-to-Ground attack set ups, A/C enter play from map
fold edge determined by D10 roll and diagram below.
1 2 3 4
NA 5 = 3+D5 increments per turn and not < prior turn's loss. First attempt
N 10 NA
9 8 7 6
COMBAT SCALE WX GENERATION TABLE (16.2)
Roll D10 on table below. Add D5 to top level of next lower band (0 if
VL) to find each layer or deck's start altitude. Roll D10 to determine a
layer's thickness in increments or D5 for a deck's thickness in levels.
Weather Generation Modifiers
Scattered Clouds = –3 Broken Layers = +2
High Overcast Skies = –1 Low Overcast Skies = +3
Roll Weather Result
≤ 1 None, a break exists in clouds.
2 1 layer in highest band.
3 1 layer in highest band + 1 deck in lowest band.
4 1 layer in highest band + layer & deck in lowest band.
5 1 layer in lowest band.
6 1 deck in lowest band + 1 layer in all affected bands.
7 1 deck in lowest band + 1 layer in highest band.
8 1 deck in each band + 1 layer in highest band.
≥ 9 2 decks in lowest band, + 1 layer & deck in highest.
OP-SCALE A/C CARRIER OPERATIONS
• Flight Deck Configuration is declared at start of each Op-turn.
Launch Operations
• Up to 20 A/C may be launched using deck runs.
• Up to 4 A/C may be launched per deck catapult.
• For deck runs, forward most flight deck hex must be clear.
• Elevators may make two round trips each.
• 2 A/C per functional flight deck hex may be spotted during
movement phase to hexes at or below normal capacity.
Recovery Operations
• Up to 14 A/C may land, be parked and shut down.
• For each A/C over 10 landed +05 to landing attrition.
• If flight deck hex next to stern hex over normal capacity +05
to landing attrition per 5 A/C or less landed.
• Stern flight deck hex must be clear.
• Elevators and limited spotting as for launch operations.
Through-Deck operations
• All flight deck hexes must be operational. For each hex, up to
2 A/C may be on deck at any part of Op-turn.
• Both landings and take-offs allowed in same Op-turn & phase.
• If carrier attacked, A/C are in mid-hex, or stern if only a two-hex
carrier. Otherwise, A/C positions are not tracked.
• A/C may do three of the following acts (limited to one per phase):
a. Move once between decks by elevator (any phase).
b. Take off or land in the Take-Off Phase.
c. Reload all guns, clear jams in the Movement Phase.
d. Refuel all tanks in the Movement Phase.
e. Take off or land in the Landing Phase.
f. Switch crews if not landing or taking-off in the turn.
Support operations
• Per functional flight deck or hangar deck hex, roll D5 and sum.
• Result = A/C on that level which may be spotted from one hex
to another on the same or different level if elevator also used.
• Elevators may make two round trips each.
• Up to 3 A/C per functional flight or hangar deck hex not being
spotted may be refueled & have guns loaded, or have guns
and up to 10 load points of stores uploaded or downloaded.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
Aircrew Bailout TABLE (13.6)
Procedure: Allowed bail outs per attempt = lesser of crew remaining
or available exits. Attempts allowed = one per 3,000 feet or less of
altitude A/C had upon destruction. If bailing out of A/C under controlled
flight, one attempt per game turn allowed. If NOT free-falling, roll D10,
a roll of 10 = death (parachute entangles on A/C). Free fall altitude loss
automatically fails if speed > 10.0 or used BT+ rates during move.
No speed mods. if spinning A/C. *If in play and still flying use both
sets of modifiers each attempt. **NA if exit already open before jam.
A/C Condition at Bailout % Roll Required
• A/C exploded (immediate try only, failure = death) ≤ 30
• Wing or tail lost (tumbling A/C), or A/C spinning ≤ 40
• A/C shot down intact (max hits exceeded) ≤ 60
• A/C still flying, random or normal flight used* ≤ 80
Modifiers (first attempt) Modifiers (all attempts)
• Per full speed < 5.0 = –05 •  Exit jammed = +30**
• Per full speed > 6.0 = +10 • Crewman wounded = +15
• Altitude ≤ 1000 feet = +10 • A/C has minor fire = +10
• Altitude ≤ 300 feet = +40 • A/C has major fire = +20
•  F, L A/C inverted = –10 • Night time bailout = +05
• Using ejection seat = –20 • Per prior failed try = +05
Notes: If ejection seat used, a free fall ≥ two turns before opening
chute required. Parachute descent = 100' / turn, defense strength=
20, hits = 5, roll D10 if hit; a 1 = parachutist wounded.
Aircrew BaiLOut / crash Fate table (13.6)
Final Territory
percent Friendly Neutral Enemy At Sea
≤ 20 Rescued Rescued E & E Rescued
≤ 40 Rescued Rescued POW Rescued
≤ 60 Rescued E & E POW E&E
≤ 80 Rescued POW POW POW
≤ 90 Rescued MIA MIA MIA
≥ 91 MIA MIA MIA MIA
Fate Percentile Roll Modifiers
• Crewman is wounded = +15
• Exited A/C at same time as 1 or more other crew = –10
• In territory with under-ground E & E network = –15
• At sea & Air-Sea-Rescue A/C searching OMT dot = –10 each
• At sea & friendly ships in same OMT dot position = –20
• At sea but closer to enemy than friendly territory = +10
• At sea in winter (if not in tropics) = +30
• At sea in shark-infested tropics = +05
Notes: Rescued = return to duty in 2 x D10 days. E&E = return to duty
in 3 x D10 weeks. MIA = missing in action (lost forever).
FORCED LANDING LOCALE TABLE (15.12)
• If over land, roll D10 or use terrain in combat scale map landing hex.
D10 Roll Landing Locale
≤ 5 Clear flat terrain (field or meadow = +00 modifier)
6 to 8 Rough terrain (rocky fields, scrubland = +15 mod.).
≥ 9 Undesirable terrain (rolling hills, forest etc. = +30 mod.).
D10 Modifiers
• Each band above VL A/C started Op-turn at = –1
• If inclement weather exists in VL band = +4
• Recruit, Green, Veteran, Gifted pilot = +2, +1, –1, –1
crew CRASH survival Table (15.12)
10 Roll
D Result
≤ 6 Crewman okay (roughed up only - Pheew!)
7 to 9 Crewman wounded (2nd wound = killed).
≥ 10 Crewman killed.
D10 Modifiers
• A/C has minor fire, major fire, or exploded = +1, +2, +5
• A/C not seaplane or float plane & ditched in water = +1
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)
 FW – OPERATIONAL TABLES – PAGE 4

BASE LIKELIHOOD TABLE (1.8)

% Die Base
Roll Likelihood
00 even +130
99 +115
98 +97
97 +87
96 +79
95 +74
94 +69
93 +65
92 +61
91 +58
90 +55
89 +52
88 +50
87 +48
86 +45
85 +43
84 +41
83 +40
82 +38
81 +36
Roll % dice. Read base LH no. to right of % result. On "00" % result, roll D10 for an even-odd result.
% Die Base
Roll Likelihood
80 +35
79 +33
78 +32
77 +30
76 +29
75 +27 55 +5
74 +26
73 +25
72 +24
71 +22
70 +21
69 +20
68 +19
67 +18
66 +17
65 +15
64 +14
63 +13
62 +12
61 +11
% Die Base
Roll Likelihood
60 +10
59 +9
58 +8
57 +7
56 +6
54 +4
53 +3
52 +2
51 +1
50 0
49 –1
48 –2
47 –3
46 –4
45 –5
44 –6
43 –7
42 –8
41 –9
% Die Base
Roll Likelihood
40 –10
39 –11
38 –12
37 –13
36 –14
35 –15
34 –17
33 –18
32 –19
31 –20
30 –21
29 –22
28 –24
27 –25
26 –26
25 –27
24 –29
23 –30
22 –32
21 –33
% Die Base
Roll Likelihood
20 –35
19 –36
18 –38
17 –40
16 –41
15 –43
14 –45
13 –48
12 –50
11 –52
10 –55
09 –58
08 –61
07 –65
06 –69
05 –74
04 –79
03 –87
02 –97
01 –115
00 odd –130

ENEMY ENCOUNTERS TABLES (15.0) Attrition Table (15.3)

Encounter Type Final LH % Roll
Ground or Naval target search success ≥ +10 ≥ 60
Unintentional encounter during move ≥ +21 ≥ 70*
(*+05 LH per enemy formation > 1 and for each 3 solo A/C in dot)
Free Hunter / CAP intercept during move ≥ +10 ≥ 60
Deliberate combat phase intercept ≥ +00 ≥ 50
Day Only Encounter & Search LH Modifiers
• Each 4 or less A/C in target / search formation > 4 = +10 each
• Majority of target A/C camouflaged and lower = –10
• Majority of target A/C silver and lower, or contrailing = +20, +30
• A/C Intercept aided by ground radar (EWR or GCI)** = +30, +40
Both Day & Night Encounter & Search LH Modifiers
• Cloud density (CD) between interceptor & target = –10 x CD
• Each band > one interceptor away from A/C target = –10**
• Each band > VL searcher is above surface target = –05**
**(Ignore mod. if A/C radar aiding intercept / search)
• Per ship = one hex, or > one hex in size in Task Force = +02, +05
• Surface search radar vs. naval vessels or cities = +30
• Per dot > one target is from search A/C or formation = –10
CD = sum of cloud density nos. for weather in target's alt. band, NF's
band (if different) and each band in between. CD nos. = 1 for scattered,
2 for Broken, 3 for Overcast, and 4 for inclement weather.
Night Only, Encounter & Search LH Modifiers
• No moon, Any moon under broken & overcast clouds = –60, –45
• Partial moon light, or full moon light = –30, –15
• Interceptor under EWR, GCI radar control to target** = +05, +20*
• Each A/C in target gaggle (class NA), NF highlighted = +02, +05
• NF using IR sensor or spot light, turbine light = +02, +05
• NF pilot with keen eyes, Target is highlighted NF = +05, +10
• NF with A.I. radar (see ADC modifier) = +variable
• NF using radar homing vs. A/C with detectable radar = +10
• Target illuminated (on fire), or lit up by searchlights = +40, +30
• Target silhouetted, or in flare cluster band = +20, +10
GCI Jamming* = reduce mod. to +5 if jammers in OMT dot range.
EWR Range** = 5, 10, 15 dots for ≤ 2, ≤ 12, ≥ 13 A/C engines in target
group or gaggle. GCI range** = 5 dots. GCI assisted NF needs IFF.
Window (W) = –1 to radar mods. per point of W in tgt.'s dot & band.
• Use this table for Take-Off Attrition, Landing Attrition, AAA attacks,
drop tank jettisoning or other events requiring attrition checks.
• Roll for LH & modify as required for the event being checked. Enter
table from left at number of A/C involved. Find column furthest to the
right whose LH entry is equaled or exceeded by the final LH deter-
mined for the event. Find the number of A/C affected by the event at
the top of the column. Columns with dashes in them are ignored.
• A final LH result < the minimum required to affect one A/C means
none are affected. If >18 A/C are involved in an event, divide them
into the least possible number of near equal sized groups of ≤ 18
A/C and roll separately for each group.
Total Number of A/C or Objects Affected
AC 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 +55 ––– ––– ––– ––– –––
2 +36 +115 ––– ––– ––– –––
3 +25 +87 ––– ––– ––– –––
4 +17 +74 +130 ––– ––– –––
5 +9 +61 +115 +130 ––– –––
6 +4 +52 +115 +130 ––– –––
7 –1 +45 +97 +130 ––– –––
8 –6 +38 +87 +130 ––– –––
9 –11 +32 +74 +115 +130 –––
10 –15 +26 +65 +115 +130 –––
11 –19 +21 +58 +97 +130 –––
12 –24 +17 +52 +97 +130 –––
13 –26 +12 +45 +79 +115 –––
14 –30 +9 +43 +79 +115 –––
15 –33 +5 +38 +74 +115 –––
16 –35 +3 +35 +69 +115 +130
17 –41 –2 +29 +61 +97 +130
18 –43 –5 +25 +55 +87 +115

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – TACTICAL SCALE TABLES - PAGE 1
TAC–SCALE SEQUENCE OF PLAY
1. First Sight Determination Phase (14.2)
• Determine relative altitudes per Rule 14.1.
• Determine first sight, see Tac-Scale Sighting Table next page.
2. A/C PLACEMENT, Searchlight Phase (14.3, 32.2)
• Turn 1 only – Place defenders in target "X" box. Friendly escort
formations may select a base altitude from 3,000 feet above, to
1,000 feet below the defender's main base altitude.
• Turn 1 only – Roll unmodified D10 for Sun arc (day time only).
• All Turns – Roll D10s to determine start arc and range band of
newly arriving attacker's. Add modifiers as needed or allowed.
Placement constitutes the new attacker's move and flight path
drift for Tac-turn of arrival.
• NIGHT ONLY - Intercept sensor used determines set up band.
Roll for searchlight (SL) captures. See Tac Scale Tables page 2.
If caught by SL, defender (first), then attacker (in lieu of normal move
in step 3), may immediately declare Evasive Maneuvers. Adjust
altitude, attitude and speed for evasions. If defender evaded, also
adjust attacker's arc (D10 odd = one arc CW, even = one CCW).
3. Attacker's Movement Phase (14.4)
• Commit to combat* if allowed and desired. DAY - If A or B band,
± 3,000' of any defenders). (*NA for just arrived attackers).
NIGHT - If sensor track established or Target sighted last turn.
• Perform Flight Path Drift (follow arrows on TMG). Entering target
"X" box within 1,500' of any defenders initiates combat.
• Night drift = D5–1 spaces unless target illuminated or target
tracking with sensors has been established, then normal drift.
• Move attacker's per TMG movement options (see TMG).
4. DEFENDER's INTERCEPt Phase (14.5)
• New arrivals on defender's side may select one attacking formation
on TMG to bounce. Remove both to a separate combat scale battle.
5. Defender's Sighting Phase (14.6)
• DAY – Defender rolls % dice with modifiers to sight attackers. If
seen, go to Defender's Response Phase. If not, return to phase 2.
• NIGHT – Both sides roll for visual sighting. Check for NF sensor
target tracking (unless NF is evading a searchlight beam). Target
tracking with other than eyes NA if NF in steep or vertical attitude
after move or > 1,000 away in altitude per range band.
6. Defender's Response PhasE (14.6.1)
• Commit to combat if desired (no range limits). NA for unescorted
X class (fixed formation) or unescorted A/C on AtG missions.
• If combat initiated, fight geometry change possible. If all attackers
in C or D bands and no X class defenders exist, shift attackers up
to 2 or 3 arcs (resp.) on TMG (retain range) and each escort A/C's
combat set up facing may be changed up to 60° before resolving
scatter. If some X class defenders exist, then no TMG shifts allowed,
but escort A/C facings may each be changed up to 120° before
resolving scatter.
• Attempt to FLEE (AtG missions areaborted). Use escape profiles.
• If defenders do not, or cannot commit to combat, and do not opt
to flee, start next Tac-turn. Begin with Step 2, arriving attacker's
A/C Placement. Defenders may change speed up to max attain.
TMG SUN DAZZLE ZONES (14.8)
Approx. Time of Day Sun Position & Dazzle Zone
Morning or Evening Low ≤ ± 1,000 per Band
Mid-Morn. or Afternoon High ≥ 1K higher per Band
Hi-Noon (1100 to 1300) Vertical ≥ 2K, ≥ 4K higher in A, B band,
respectively, NA if in C, D bands.
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
, DAY TMG START BAND ROLL
DEF.'S SIGHTING ROLL
CBT. SET UP RANGE (14.7)
Start Band Set Up Roll for DAY Combat
D10 Result Band Sighting Set Up Range
= NA X Box ≥ 30 3 + D5 hexes
= ≤ 2 A ≥ 50 6 + D5 hexes
= 5 to 3 B ≥ 70 10 + D5 hexes
= 8 to 6 C ≥ 80 15 + D10 hexes
= ≥ 9 D ≥ 90 20 + D10 + D10
See Tac-Tables, Page 2 for Combat Scale set ups.
ESCAPE PROFILES (14.6.1)
Success Roll Tables
Escape Procedure: Roll D10 per side. Add modifiers
below for profile selected. If fleeing side has higher roll,
they escape. If not (set up combat on escapee's 6:00 line
at "X" box ranges).
Both - Any Profile D10 Modifiers
• If using emergency power (1 min. of endurance = +1
• If diving, each 2 levels below attacker at start = +1
• If climbing or level run, each level above attacker = +1
Escapee only D10 Modifiers
• Attacker in C band or in D band at start = +1, +2
• Escape attempt is at Night = +2
• Broken or overcast clouds in start band = +1, +2
• VL inclement Weather in start band = +3
Escape by Steep or Vertical Dive
Requirement: Be ≥ 10,000 feet above ground. Lose 3,000'
+ D5 of altitude levels. End speed = max safe dive –2.0 to
+2.0 (player's choice). If applicable, roll once per A/C for
dangerous dive destruction, and for compressibility (+10
modifier to all rolls). If compressibility results, roll D10. If
≤ 4, A/C dives into ground (one bail out try only), else no
effect unless caught, then it starts play in compressibility.
• Own side's A/C have F.I. engines = +1
• Each 0.5 of dive speed > other side's = +1
Escape by Shallow Dive
Requirement: Be ≥ 3 levels above ground. Lose 1,500'
+ two D10 of increments, but not to < 500' above ground.
Speed ≥ max attainable to max safe dive speed – 2.0.
• Each 0.5 of dive speed > other side's = +1
Escape by Level Run, Shallow Climb
Requirement: Stay level or climb ≤ half of available ROC
(round down to nearest 100). Speed = max attainable.
• Each 1.0 of attainable speed > other side's = +1
• Each 300 fpm ROC > other side's ROC = +1
Escape by Full Climb
Requirement: Climb > 1/2 ROC. Speed = climb speed.
• Each 0.5 of own climb speed > other side's = +1
• Each 300 fpm greater ROC over other side's = +1
• Double any "All profiles" altitude advantage modifier.
(TMG version 3.8)
 FW – TACTICAL SCALE TABLES - PAGE 2

TAC-SCALE DAY SIGHTING / NIGHT DETECTION TABLE

Procedure: Each side rolls Percentile dice. Add applicable Modifiers to roll. The side with highest
roll wins "first sight" and becomes TMG attacker (roll unmodified D10s as needed to break ties).

SIGHTING MODIFIERS (14.2 & 14.6)

• Each own flight leader (3 or 4 ship) in force with keen eyes = +05
• ≥ Half of own A/C have good, or poor cockpit visibility = +10, –10
• ≥ Half of own flight leader A/C without radios (NA if single A/C) = –15
• Friendly EW or GCI Radar in use (if unjammed, if jammed) = +20, +05
• Each full hour (6 Op-turns) after first hour, side has been in air = –05
• Enemy in A/C type Blind Arc or Sun Dazzle Zone (ignore for first sight) = –20 each
• Enemy A/C contrailing (or contrailing in moonlight if at night) = +50
• Each F or L class, each M or H+ class A/C in enemy formation** = +01, +02
** Double modifier if silhouetted against BKN or OVC clouds on OMT, or if not camouflaged and lower
against contrasting terraing (e.g., silver over water or land, non-white over snow). Halve modifier (round
down) if camouflaged for lower background (e.g., brown over sand, blue over water, green over land

EXTRA NIGHT DETECTION MODIFIERS (32.2)

• Enemy A/C lower against dark ground (not snow), or higher in night sky = –20, +05
• Enemy A/C silhouetted against backlight, or no eng. exhaust shrouds = +20, +10
• Enemy A/C illuminated by other than searchlight (SL), or lit up by SL = +50, +70
• Enemy A/C tracked by searching A/C sensor other than eyes = +15
Notes: Day or Night - If A/C or main formation leader does not have a radio, any EW or GCI radar modifiers
are NA. At Night, table used for detection and sighting attempts. First detection only for random encounters.

NIGHT SENSOR RANGE TABLE (32.2) (Data for 1-2 eng. / 3-4 eng. A/C) TAIL WARNING
RADARS (32.2)
SENSOR Sensor Range & TMG Set Up Band TMG Sensor Track Success,
TYPE No Moon Partial Moon Full Moon Allowed Tracking Arcs Roll D10 if attacker
ends TMG move in any of
Regular eyes X / X X / X A / A upon visual sighting, any target arc defender's rear arcs, from
Keen eyes X / X X / A A / B upon visual sighting, any target arc A to C band.
Spot Light A / A A / B B / B upon visual sighting, Tgt.'s 6:00L (arc 10)
Attacker detected
Turbine Light B / B B / B B / B upon visual sighting, Tgt.'s 6:00L (arc 10) if D10 Roll:
IR Scanner A / B A / B A / B automatic once on target's 6:00L (arc 10)
≥ 3 A band
A/C or GCI radar D / D D / D D / D automatic once in any target rear arcs
≥ 6 B band
Illuminated Target D / D D / D D / D automatic from any target TMG arc
≥ 9 C band
Radar Homers Use visual "eyeball" ranges for start band if no other sensor in use.

NIGHT SIGHTING ROLL (32.2) Searchlight (SL) Captures & Evasion Shifts (32.2)
NIGHT CBT. SET UP RANGE (14.7) • If searchlights in OMT dot of TMG encounter, Roll D10 for defender and
attacker. Mods: –4 if lit up last Tac-turn, –1 if SL strength > 10 in OMT dot.
TMG % Roll for Combat Scale
A D10 result ≤ 3 = Capture. If so Defender, then Attacker (in lieu of attacker's
RANGE Sighting Set Up Range move) may immediately do SL evasion. Evading A/C lose 2 x D10 x 100'
TGT X Box ≥ 50 0 + D5 hexes in alt. but cancel previously lit up –4 mod. for next Tac-turn's SL check. If if
1 space ≥ 70 3 + D5 hexes Defender evades, roll D10. odd = shift attackers clockwise on TMG by one
2 spaces ≥ 90 6 + D5 hexes space in same band, Even = shift one space counter-clockwise.
3 spaces ≥ 120 if illum. 10 + D10 hexes
4 spaces ≥ 150 if illum. 15 + D10 hexes
COMBAT SCALE SET UP PROCEDURE (14.7)
Place defenders and escorts in formation near center of map. Roll for attacker's
NIGHT COMBAT SCALE VISUAL RANGES (32.3) horizontal set up range. Place attacking leader at rolled range and in arc
Light Condition Max Visual Range in Hexes determined by TMG play from one selected defender. Place rest of attackers
in formation on leader (none higher if climbing, none lower if diving). Scatter
• Full Moon = (4 x D5) + Twice A/C engines
defenders, then attackers. If attackers sighted, defenders choose bank angle,
• Partial Moon = (2 x D5) + A/C engines
else level. Attackers choose bank angles. Begin play.
• No Moon = (1 x D5) + 1/2 A/C eng. (round down)
• Illuminated = Unlimited. Formation D10 Scatter Rolls: One per 4 or less A/C in form. Add one per 2
and 5 hours in air, if straggled, if base alt. > MH or two if alt. > VH. Counter
Notes: Reroll every 5th turn. Double engine value if exhausts
Rolls = one per 9 or less A/C. Limits = 3 scatters per A/C, +1 after 2 and 5
not shrouded (see scenarios). "N" class have exh. shrouds.
hours (after 4 if pressurized). +1 per 2 or less bands> MH, unless pressurized.

(TMG version 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 FW – OPERATIONAL MISSION TRACK - PAGE 2
ZONE-2 EN ROUTE ZONE-3
OMT WEATHER
Hi-Ovc. Lo-Ovc. VL-incl. Clear Scatt. Brkn. Hi-Ovc. Lo-Ovc. VL-incl. The en route zone weather
markers go into the labeled
UH band squares. Place the
two-hex sized cloud counters
in the first two squares of any
affected alt. bands in each en
route zone and in the squares
over the home base circle.
All OMT squares in the same
affected bands in each zone
have the same weather.
Affected ALTITUDE
Bands (16.2)
Roll D10 for each OMT zone
with weather that is other than
"Clear Skies" and when OMT
zones change to other than
"Clear Skies".
D10 Modifiers
• Scattered Clouds = – 2
• Broken Clouds = + 1
• High Overcast = – 1
• Low Overcast = + 2

D10 Affected
Roll Bands
≤ 1 HI only
2 HI to VH
3 LO & MH to HI
4 ML to MH
5 LO & HI
6 VL to LO & MH
7 LO to ML
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
8 VL & ML
9 VL to LO
≥ 10 VL only

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 COMBAT SCALE WX (16.2)

(see Op-Tables, Page 3)

FUEL USE TABLE (15.4.2) Initial Operational Weather (15.2)

Fuel use is cumulative in that any tactical or combat play within an
Op-turn uses fuel beyond that consumed by the Op-turn itself. Exception:
see operational-to-tactical scale fuel credit below.
1. Start, taxi, take-off (all combined) = 5 min. per eng.
2. Each take off climb multiple (by load) = 1, 2 or 3 min.*
3. Each take off, en route or regrouping join up = D5 minutes *
4. If entire Op-turn spent terrain hugging (16.1) = 2 minutes *
5. Each Op-turn at dash or climb speed = 15+D5 min. *
6. Each Op-turn at cruise speed = 10 minutes *
7. Each Op-turn at endurance speed = 5 minutes *
8. Per Tac-turn after Op-to-Tac scale credit = 1 minute **
9. Per 5 turns or less of Combat scale play = 1 minute **
10. Fuel loss due to delays or damage. = variable
11. Each Op-turn landing, GM-1 or MW-50 use = D5 minutes
12. Per Op-turn dot shift during intercepts = 2 minutes
* Fuel use applies equally to all A/C in formation.
** Double if GM-1 or MW-50 boost used. +3 min. if C-3 boost used.
Operational–to–Tactical Scale Fuel Credit: Five free turns of tactical
moves allowed before cumulative fuel use begins. This credit ends when
combat scale play begins.
Engine Shutdown, Loss Effects (15.5.1): Multi-engine A/C reduce total
fuel used by one minute per engine not in use per Op-turn. Endurance
power not allowed if any engines shut down or knocked out.
Procedure: Roll D10 for each OMT weather zone at start of mission.
For night missions, roll unmodified D10 for moon light condition. Roll
D10 for affected bands in each zone with other than clear skies.
D10 Modifiers: Spring or Fall = + 1, Winter = + 2
D10 Roll Weather In OMT Zone
≤ 3 Clear Skies (no clouds).
4, 5 Scattered Cloud Cover.
6, 7 Broken Cloud Cover.
8 High Overcast Skies.
9 Low Overcast Skies.
≥ 10 Low Overcast with VL band inclement weather.
D10 Roll Moonlight Table (Night Missions Only)
1 to 3 No Moonlight
4 to 7 Partial Moonlight
8 to 10 Full "Hunters" Moonlight
Contrail Levels: (includes levels in between, roll per zone)
• Lowest Contrail Level = 20 + D10 roll.
• Highest Contrail Level = Lowest level + (2x D10) roll.
EWR / GCI RADAR RANGES (15.7): EWR Range = 5, 10, 15 dots
for ≤ 2, ≤ 12, ≥ 13 engines in target A/C group. GCI range = 5 dots.
SEARCHLIGHTS (32.1.2): use attrition table for captures with SL
strength as + Mod. (doubled if radar aimed) & cloud density as – mod.

(Play Aids ver. 3.8)

Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)

 COMBAT SCALE SEQUENCE OF PLAY
1. Initiative Phase (8.1)
• Declare tailing if in parameters and desired (8.1.1).
• Roll D10 for each A/C, or formation set requiring initiative.
• Agility order = X, H+, M, F and L by load, unsighted A/C.
(U class and gliders move first within their class).
A/C Initiative Roll Modifiers
• Recruit Pilot, or Green Pilot = –4, –2
• Own A/C severely damaged, or Oil on Canopy = –1, –2
• Per own side's Hero or Ace shot down = –1
• Veteran, Hero or Ace Pilot (each characteristic) = +1
• If in formation and immediate leader is a Hero = +1
• Enemy A/C shot down (air-to-air) in last 2 turns = +2
• No radio A/C with > half of enemy in blind arc: FLEXIBLE Formation (6-6-6)
if veteran, ace or hero, any other pilot type = –1, –2
Initiative Exceptions
• A/C "tailing" another use tailed A/C's initiative (8.1.1).
• Wingmen and one sqn. subordinate lead in flex. formation
and in radio contact with their leader, or in fixed formation
parameters if no radios, may use leader's initiative (8.5).
2. Movement Phase (8.2)
• Move ground and naval units (18.1 & 26.3).
• Do dangerous dive, compressibility, stall & Spin checks.
• Move A/C in order of agility & initiative no. or rank (8.1).
Resolve ties at initiative number's time to move.
• Head-on attacks allowed during movement (10.3).
Defenisve fire, return head on shots allowed.
• Strafing, skip bombs, parafrags, CB dispenser drops and
torpedo bombing allowed during movement (19 & 21).
Reactive AAA fire allowed.
• Roll for overstress, GLOC and red out checks.
• Check for pilot disorientation for cloud or night flying.
Movement Order Exceptions
• Tailing A/C move immediately after tailed A/C (8.1.1).
• Tailing A/C have tailed A/C's initiative number.
• Wingmen & subordinate leads using leader's initiative no.
move in order of formation rank. If enemy A/C in same
rank, roll D10s for all in that rank and move in that order.
• Unsighted A/C always move last.
3. Combat Phase (8.3)
Accomplish (apply damage) in Order Listed:
• Resolve Bombs whose TOF expired previous turn.
• Resolve Searchlight Actions (evasions, then new captures)
• Resolve air-to-ground blast zone, then AAA attacks.
• Resolve defensive gunfire from X, H+, M class A/C.
• Resolve defensive gunfire from L, F class A/C.
• Resolve air-to-air gun and rocket attacks.
• Launch weapons, jettison stores from A/C.
• Resolve air-to-ground attacks in following order:
Strafes, Rockets, TOF expiring bombs, torpedoes.
• Resolve fires, explosions or other progressive damage.
• Check for air-to-air collisions.
• Resolve combat scale forced landings or ditchings.
• Resolve aircrew bail out attempts (13.6).
Buel Chandler (Order #27244075)
Formation Parameters (8.5)
Section or Flight Fixed Formation (2-1-3)
Wingmen stacked with leader in same hex, or if not in same hex, on or
behind leader's 3:00 / 9:00 lines, within two hexes of, 100 feet of and 30
degrees facing of leader. Formation limited to EZ rates if class H+, or
TT rates or less for others. Limited to upright shallow attitudes or less.
May use slips; not skids or other maneuvers.
Squadron & Group Fixed Formation (3-3-3)
Subordinate leaders behind squadron leader's 3:00 / 9:00 line, within
three hexes of, 300 feet of (but not > 100 per hex away) and 30 degrees
facing of squadron leader. For Group formation: Subordinate squadron
leaders within 3-3-3 parameters of group leader or any of group's other
squadron flight leads.
Wingmen stacked with own leader, or in same hex within 300 feet of and
30 degrees facing of leader (0-3-3), or if not in same hex, on or behind
leader's 3:00 / 9:00 line, within six hexes, 600 feet and 60 degrees fac-
ing of leader. If no radios, then as for fixed formations or as directed in
scenario special rules.
Squadron Flexible Formation (9-9-9)
One subordinate flight leader not in same hex as squadron leader, and
on or behind his 3:00 / 9:00 line, within nine hexes, 900 feet and 90
degrees of facing of own squadron leader is eligible to receive leader's
radio initiative benefit.
Note: Scenarios may specify other types of formation parameters.
A/C LOAD EFFECTS TABLE (12.0)
Loaded A/C
• Use loaded ceiling. –0.5 to max level and safe dive speeds.
• +1 to bank & slip / skid FPs if ≥ 1/2 load carried under wings.
• +0.5 to all minimum level and turn rate speeds.
• Engine power = 2/3 of available power accel.
• For Tac-scale reduce ROC by 1/3 (round up to nearest 100 FPM)
• For Op-scale use loaded climb multiples with listed ROC.
OverLoaded A/C
• Use overload ceiling. –1.0 to max level and safe dive speeds.
• +1 to all bank and slip / skid FP requirements.
• +1.0 to all minimum level and turn rate speeds.
• Engine power = 1/2 of available power accel.
• For Tac-scale reduce ROC by 1/2 (round up to nearest 100 FPM)
• For Op-scale use overloaded climb multiples with listed ROC.
Severe Damage EffectS (11.0)
• ET turns destroy A/C, BTs risk overstress (+20 mod.)
• –1.0 to max level and safe dive speeds.
• +20 modifier to dangerous dive rolls.
• +1 to all bank and slip / skid FP requirements.
• +0.5 to all minimum level and turn rate speeds.
• Reduce available engine power accel by 1/4.
• For Tac-scale reduce ROC by 300 FPM (but not to < 0).
• Reduce Op-scale climb multiplier by 1 (but not to < 0).
• –1 to initiative roll, pilots have their hands full.
A/C Load Notes:
1. Internal Bomb bays: Use 1 load point for every 500 lbs. carried
and 0.5 load points for each 250 lbs. or less left over. Unless F or
D class, A/C carrying bombs in bays may not use inverted banks.
2. Loads and Movement Order: A/C loads affect order of moves
within the combined F and L class as follows:
a). Overloaded "F" and overloaded "L" A/C move first.
b). Loaded "L" A/C move next.
c). Normal "L" and normal or loaded "F" A/C move last.
(Play Aids ver. 3.8)